Racal

PUBLICATION NUMBER: 80-0013 Issue: 1.
0

_______________________________________________________________________________________________

DIGITAL RADIO TEST SET
User Guide

www.aeroflex.com/riws/wwsupprt/support.htm
Hong Kong Telephone: +852 2405 5500
UK Telephone: +44 (0) 8706 080134
US Telephone: +1 800 722-3262
e-mail: wsHelpdesk@racalinstruments.com
Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions an Aeroflex Company
480 Bath Road, Slough, SL1 6BE, United Kingdom

For any technical enquires or information on Software/Hardware support, repair and calibration, upgrades or spares please contact our Help Desk
via the following communication centres:
DATE OF FIRST PUBLICATION: November 2003
Copyright 2003 by Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions Limited. Printed in England. All Rights Reserved.
This book or parts thereof may not be reproduced in any form without written permission of the publishers.
6113 EDGE P-1
80-0013

LIST OF CONTENTS

Page / Hyperlink

TITLE PAGE........................................................................................................ Title Page
LIST OF CONTENTS.......................................................................................................... 1
AMENDMENT RECORD.................................................................................................... 2
SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY........................................................................................... 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS................................................................................................... 4
SYMBOLS AND HEADINGS .................................................................................... 4
GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS....................................................................... 4
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC) ...................................................... 6
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) ................................................................... 6
GLOSSARY OF TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS............................................................. 8
CHANNEL NUMBER/FREQUENCY CHARTS ................................................................ 12
P-/E-/R-GSM CHART 1 -- DOWNLINK (Base Station To Mobile).......................... 12
P-/E-/R-GSM CHART 2 -- UPLINK (Mobile To Base Station) ................................ 13
E-GSM CHART 1 -- DOWNLINK (Base Station To Mobile) ................................... 14
E-GSM CHART 2 -- UPLINK (Mobile To Base Station).......................................... 15
GSM 850 CHART 1 -- DOWNLINK (Base Station to Mobile) ................................. 16
GSM 850 CHART 2 -- UPLINK (Mobile to Base Station)........................................ 17
DCS 1800 CHART 1 -- DOWNLINK (Base Station To Mobile) .............................. 18
DCS 1800 CHART 3 -- UPLINK (Mobile to Base Station) ...................................... 20
PCS 1900 CHART 1 -- DOWNLINK (Base Station To Mobile)............................... 22
PCS 1900 CHART 3 -- UPLINK (Mobile to Base Station) ...................................... 24
MS/BTS POWER CHARTS.............................................................................................. 26
MOBILE POWER CLASSES PHASE 1............................................................... 26
MOBILE POWER CONTROL LEVELS PHASE 1 ............................................... 26
MOBILE POWER CLASSES PHASE 2............................................................... 27
MOBILE POWER CONTROL LEVELS PHASE 2 ............................................... 27
BTS POWER CLASSES......................................................................................... 28
REFERENCE SENSITIVITY LEVELS .................................................................... 29
CONVERSION FACTORS...................................................................................... 29
Rx_LEV VALUES.................................................................................................... 30
Rx_QUAL VALUES................................................................................................. 31

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION.......................................................................... SECTION 1

GENERAL DESCRIPTION................................................................................ SECTION 2

PREPARATION FOR USE ................................................................................ SECTION 3

TEST INFORMATION........................................................................................ SECTION 4
Cell Integrity Testing and Analysis .................................................... Section 4 Annex A

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS USER INTERFACE ...................................... SECTION 5
Programming Test Sequences ........................................................... Section 5 Annex A
AutoCiTA Test Sequence .................................................................... Section 5 Annex B

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS GPIB............................................................. SECTION 6

BTS MANUFACTURER-SPECIFIC INFORMATION........................................ SECTION 7

INDEX ........................................................................................................................ INDEX

Problem Report Sheet....................................................................Problem Report Sheet

P-2 6113 EDGE
80-0013

AMENDMENT RECORD

Incorporation of amendments to this manual should be recorded on this page

Amendment Incorporated Date
No. by
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

6113 EDGE P-3
80-0013

SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY

This manual contains information compatible with Software Release version 06 and above.

Copyright Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions 2003

Incorporating copyright licensed program materials of
Metagraphics Software Corporation
Copyright 1986-1989 Metagraphics Software Corporation,
Scotts Valley, CA 95066, USA

This equipment incorporates:
SILICON SOFTWARE
1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 Microtec Research Inc.
All rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States
MICROTEC RESEARCH INC., 2350 MISSION COLLEGE BLVD., SANATA CLARA, CA 95054

P-4 6113 EDGE
80-0013

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SYMBOLS AND HEADINGS

The following symbols and headings are used in this handbook to indicate Safety hazards.
Personnel using this equipment must read this handbook and familiarize themselves with each
safety requirement before operating the equipment.

WARNING: A WARNING indicates a hazard that affects personnel. The instructions in a
WARNING must be observed; if the WARNING is ignored, injury or loss of life
may result.

CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a hazard that affects the equipment. The instructions in a
CAUTION must be observed; if the CAUTION is ignored, damage may be caused
to the equipment.

This symbol is used on the equipment to indicate that it is necessary to refer to,
and comply with, all instructions in this handbook regarding the use of such
marked facilities.

GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Always operate the product in accordance with the instructions in this manual.

WARNING: (1) THIS IS A SAFETY CLASS 1 PRODUCT PROVIDED WITH A
PROTECTIVE EARTHING CONDUCTOR INCORPORATED IN THE
POWER CABLE. THE MAINS PLUG MUST ONLY BE INSERTED IN A
MAINS SOCKET OUTLET PROVIDED WITH A MATCHING EARTH
CONTACT. ANY INTERRUPTION OF THE EARTH CONDUCTOR,
INSIDE OR OUTSIDE THE TEST SET, IS LIKELY TO CAUSE THE TEST
SET TO BECOME DANGEROUS TO PERSONNEL. DELIBERATE
INTERRUPTION OF THE EARTH CONDUCTOR IS FORBIDDEN.

(2) THE ENVIRONMENTAL OPERATING CONDITIONS SPECIFIED FOR
THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE OBSERVED. DO NOT ALLOW THE
EQUIPMENT TO BECOME WET, AND DO NOT ALLOW WATER TO
ENTER THE EQUIPMENT. DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT
WHEN WET BECAUSE IN THIS CONDITION THE SAFETY OF THE
EQUIPMENT MAY BE DEGRADED.

(3) THIS EQUIPMENT CONTAINS LETHAL VOLTAGES. DO NOT REMOVE
THE COVERS. RETURN THE EQUIPMENT TO RACAL INSTRUMENTS
WIRELESS SOLUTIONS OR APPROVED SERVICE AGENT FOR
SERVICING.
6113 EDGE P-5
80-0013

(4) THIS EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAN AND FREE FROM
CONTAMINATION. IF NECESSARY, CLEAN THE EQUIPMENT AS
DESCRIBED IN THIS HANDBOOK. IF THE EQUIPMENT IS SEVERELY
CONTAMINATED, IT SHOULD BE RETURNED TO RACAL
INSTRUMENTS WIRELESS SOLUTIONS OR APPROVED SERVICE
AGENT.

(5) ANY DEVIATION FROM THE INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDED IN THIS
HANDBOOK MAY CAUSE THE PROTECTION PROVIDED BY THE
EQUIPMENT TO BE IMPAIRED.

(6) THE MAINS FUSE MUST BE REPLACED ONLY WITH THE SAME
TYPE AND RATING (SEE SECTION 3). THE USE OF OTHER FUSE
OR MATERIAL MAY CAUSE A FIRE HAZARD AND IS FORBIDDEN.

(7) SOME TYPES OF BTS CAN GENERATE RF POWER LEVELS THAT
ARE SUFFICIENT TO CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONNEL. ALWAYS
ENSURE THAT THE RF OUTPUT IS DISABLED BEFORE
CONNECTING OR DISCONNECTING RF CABLES. NEVER USE
DAMAGED RF CABLES ON THE RF PORTS.

(8) IN CERTAIN TESTS, THE BTS CAN BE LEFT IN A STATE IN WHICH IT
WILL CONTINUE TO TRANSMIT UNTIL THE THE TEST IS ABORTED
BY THE OPERATOR. ALL DUE ATTENTION MUST BE PAID TO
ENSURING THAT THE TEST IS STOPPED AT AN APPROPRIATE TIME
AND THAT THE BTS HAS STOPPED TRANSMITTING.

(9) WHEN CARRYING OUT LIVE TESTING ON A BTS USING A 6113 WITH
OPTION 54, IT IS IMPORTANT THAT A SAFE CONNECTION POINT
FOR THE 6113 IS PROVIDED. THIS IS PARTICULARLY IMPORTANT
WHERE THERE IS A THREAT OF LIGHTNING STRIKING THE SYSTEM
UNDER TEST. IT IS THE USERS RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE THE
NECESSARY SAFE CONNECTION POINT.

(10) BE AWARE OF THE UNIT MASS OF THE EQUIPMENT AND USE
APPROPRIATE LIFTING EQUIPMENT TO AVOID INJURY.

(11) AT THE EQUIPMENT'S END OF LIFE, DISPOSE OF IT IN A
RESPONSIBLE WAY IN LINE WITH LOCAL REGULATIONS.

CAUTION: DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE AIR INLET TO THE FAN, OR THE AIR OUTLETS IN
THE SIDE PANELS, IN ANY WAY. RESTRICTING THE FLOW OF AIR COULD
CAUSE THE TEST SET TO OVERHEAT AND MAY CAUSE DAMAGE.

P-6 6113 EDGE
80-0013

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC)

To ensure that EMC integrity is retained always follow good EMC practice. In particular:

(1) Use good quality coaxial connections for signal input and output leads.

(2) Use good quality screened data or control cables and connectors.

(3) Ensure that cable screens are properly terminated within the connectors. Do not use
cables if the terminations are loose or frayed.

(4) Ensure that the screening is continuous through to the chassis of the equipment.

(5) Ensure that any associated equipment is CE marked or is of good EMC design and
performance.

ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD)

Electrostatic discharge may damage or degrade the performance of the Test Set if proper
precautions are not taken:

(1) Where they are provided, protective covers must always be fitted on any rear panel
connectors that are not in use (i.e. have no cable connected). Replacement protective
covers are available from Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions or approved Service
Agents.

(2) Before connecting free cables (i.e. not connected at either end) to any item of equipment,
it is recommended that the cable connector pins are momentarily grounded to discharge
any static build up within the cable.

6113 EDGE P-7
80-0013

P-8 6113 EDGE
80-0013

GLOSSARY OF TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A-bis Control and data link between the BTS and the network.
ARFCN Absolute RF Channel Number. A number in the range 1
to 124, or 512 to 885, or 975 to 1023, which defines the
absolute radio frequency channel number.
AGCH Access Grant CHannel
BA BCCH Allocation. The radio frequency channels
allocated in a cell for BCCH transmission.
BBP Base Band Processor
BCC Base Station Colour Code
BCCH Broadcast Control CHannel
BCCH_FREQ_NCELL Frequency of the RF carrier on which the BCCH of a
neighbouring cell is transmitted.
BER Bit Error Ratio
BLER BLock Error Ratio
BNC Base Station Network Code
B.O.S.S. Base Station On-Air Service System
BS_AG_BLKS_RES The number of blocks on each common control channel
reserved for access grant messages.
BSC Base Station Controller
BSIC Base Transceiver Station Identity Code
BS_PA_MFRMS The number of multiframes between two transmissions of
the same paging message to MSs of the same paging
group.
BTS Base Transceiver Station
Burst A period of modulated carrier less than one timeslot. The
physical content of a timeslot.
CA Cell Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated
to a particular cell
CAT Cell Allocation Table
CBCH Cell Broadcast CHannel
CCH Cell Control Channel
CCCH Common Control CHannel
CCCH_GROUP Group of MSs in idle mode.
CELL Geographical area within which a defined set of channels
is provided.
CELL_BAR_ACCESS Cell access barred parameter.
6113 EDGE P-9
80-0013

CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS The RXLEV hysteresis required for cell reselection.
CI Cell Identity
CiTA Cell Integrity Testing and Analysis
Class lA, lB, ll Classification of speech encoder bits depending on the
degree of protection needed. Class lA and Class lB bits
have protection; Class ll bits have no protection. Error
detection is performed on Class lA bits.
DAI Digital Audio Interface
DTX Discontinuous Transmission. Means of saving battery
power (e.g. in HPUs) and reducing interference by
automatically switching the transmitter off when no
speech or data are to be sent.
EDGE Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution
EFR Enhanced Full Rate (speech coding format)
EEPROM Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory
EVM Error Vector Magnitude
FACCH Fast Associated Control CHannel
FCCH Frequency Correction CHannel
FER Frame Erasure Ratio
FTP File Transfer Protocol
GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Key
GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus
GPRS General Packet Radio Service
GSM Global System for Mobile communications
HPU Hand Portable Unit
HSN Hopping Sequence Number
IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identity
IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity
LAC Location Area Code
LAI Location Area Identity
LAPB Link Access Protocol B Channel
LAPD Link Access Protocol D Channel
MAIO Mobile Allocation Index Offset
MAT Mobile Allocation Table
MCC Mobile Country Code
P-10 6113 EDGE
80-0013

MMI Man Machine Interface
MNC Mobile Network Code
MO Mobile Originated
MS Mobile Station
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH Maximum allowed transmitted RF power for MSs to
access the system until commanded otherwise.
MT Mobile Terminated
NCC Network Colour Code
PCH Paging CHannel
PDCH Packet Data CHannel
PID Protocol IDentifier
PIN Personal Identification Number
PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
PLMN_PERMITTED PLMN permitted for handover purposes.
PPP Point to Point Protocol
PUK Pin Unblock Key
RACH Random Access CHannel
RAND RANDom number used during Authentication
RBER Residual Bit Error Ratio
RXLEV Received Signal LEVel parameter. A measure of the
mean received signal level.
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN The MINimum RXLEV at an MS for ACCESS to a cell.
SACCH Slow Associated Control Channel
SACCH_TF Slow Associated Control Channel - Traffic Full Rate
SAPI Service Access Point Indicator
SDCCH Stand Alone Dedicated Control CHannel
SCH Synchronisation CHannel
SIM Subscriber Identity Module
SMS Short Message Service
TCH Traffic CHannels. Channels that carry user speech or
data.
TDMA Time Division Multiple Access
TEI Teminal Endpoint Identifier
6113 EDGE P-11
80-0013

TMSI Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity
TRF TRaFfic
TRX Transceiver

P-12 6113 EDGE
80-0013

CHANNEL NUMBER/FREQUENCY CHARTS

P-/E-/R-GSM CHART 1 -- DOWNLINK (Base Station To Mobile)

CHANNEL
NUMBERS
DOWNLINK FREQUENCIES
(MHz)
0 935.000
1 - 5 935.200 935.400 935.600 935.800 936.000
6 - 10 936.200 936.400 936.600 936.800 937.000
11 - 15 937.200 937.400 937.600 937.800 938.000
16 - 20 938.200 938.400 938.600 938.800 939.000
21 - 25 939.200 939.400 939.600 939.800 940.000
26 - 30 940.200 940.400 940.600 940.800 941.000
31 - 35 941.200 941.400 941.600 941.800 942.000
36 - 40 942.200 942.400 942.600 942.800 943.000
41 - 45 943.200 943.400 943.600 943.800 944.000
46 - 50 944.200 944.400 944.600 944.800 945.000
51 - 55 945.200 945.400 945.600 945.800 946.000
56 - 60 946 200 946 400 946.600 946.800 947.000
61 - 65 947.200 947.400 947.600 947.800 948.000
66 - 70 948.200 948.400 948.600 948.800 949.000
71 - 75 949.200 949.400 949.600 949.800 950.000
76 - 80 950.200 950.400 950.600 950.800 951.000
81 - 85 951.200 951.400 951.600 951.800 952.000
86 - 90 952.200 952.400 952.600 952.800 953.000
91 - 95 953.200 953.400 953.600 953.800 954.000
96 - 100 954.200 954.400 954.600 954.800 955.000
101 - 105 955.200 955.400 955.600 955.800 956.000
106 - 110 956.200 956.400 956.600 956.800 957.000
111 - 115 957.200 957.400 957.600 957.800 958.000
116 - 120 958.200 958.400 958.600 958.800 959.000
121 - 124 959.200 959.400 959.600 959.800
955 - 959 921.200 921.400 921.600 921.800 922.000
960 - 964 922.200 922.400 922.600 922.800 923.000
965 - 969 923.200 923.400 923.600 923.800 924.000
970 - 974 924.200 924.400 924.600 924.800 925.000
975 - 979 925.200 925.400 925.600 925.800 926.000
980 - 984 926.200 926.400 926.600 926.800 927.000
985 - 989 927.200 927.400 927.600 927.800 928.000
990 - 994 928.200 928.400 928.600 928.800 929.000
995 - 999 929.200 929.400 929.600 929.800 930.000
1000 - 1004 930.200 930.400 930.600 930.800 931.000
1005 - 1009 931.200 931.400 931.600 931.800 932.000
1010 - 1014 932.200 932.400 932.600 932.800 933.000
1015 - 1019 933.200 933.400 933.600 933.800 934.000
1020 - 1023 934.200 934.400 934.600 934.800

6113 EDGE P-13
80-0013

P-/E-/R-GSM CHART 2 -- UPLINK (Mobile To Base Station)

CHANNEL
NUMBERS
UPLINK FREQUENCIES
(MHz)
0 890.000
1 - 5 890.200 890.400 890.600 890.800 891.000
6 - 10 891.200 891.400 891.600 891.800 892.000
11 - 15 892.200 892.400 892.600 892.800 893.000
16 -20 893.200 893.400 893.600 893.800 894.000
21 - 25 894.200 894.400 894.600 894.800 895.000
26 - 30 895.200 895.400 895.600 895.800 896.000
31 - 35 896.200 896.400 896.600 896.800 897.000
36 - 40 897.200 897.400 897.600 897.800 898.000
41 - 45 898.200 898.400 898.600 898.800 899.000
46 - 50 899.200 899.400 899.600 899.800 900.000
51 - 55 900.200 900.400 900.600 900.800 901.000
56 - 60 901.200 901.400 901.600 901.800 902.000
61 - 65 902.200 902.400 902.600 902.800 903.000
66 - 70 903.200 903.400 903.600 903.800 904.000
71 - 75 904.200 904.400 904.600 904.800 905.000
76 - 80 905.200 905.400 905.600 905.800 906.000
81 - 85 906.200 906.400 906.600 906.800 907.000
86 - 90 907.200 907.400 907.600 907.800 908.000
91 - 95 908.200 908.400 908.600 908.800 909.000
96 - 100 909.200 909.400 909.600 909.800 910.000
101 - 105 910.200 910.400 910.600 910.800 911.000
106 - 110 911.200 911.400 911.600 911.800 912.000
111 - 115 912.200 912.400 912.600 912.800 913.000
116 - 120 913.200 913.400 913.600 913.800 914.000
121- 124 914.200 914.400 914.600 914.800
955 - 959 876.200 876.400 876.600 876.800 877.000
960 - 964 877.200 877.400 877.600 877.800 878.000
965 - 969 878.200 878.400 878.600 878.800 879.000
970 - 974 879.200 879.400 879.600 879.800 880.000
975 - 979 880.200 880.400 880.600 880.800 881.000
980 - 984 881.200 881.400 881.600 881.800 882.000
985 - 989 882.200 882.400 882.600 882.800 883.000
990 - 994 883.200 883.400 883.600 883.800 884.000
995 - 999 884.200 884.400 884.600 884.800 885.000
1000 - 1004 885.200 885.400 885.600 885.800 886.000
1005 - 1009 886.200 886.400 886.600 886.800 887.000
1010 - 1014 887.200 887.400 887.600 887.800 888.000
1015 - 1019 888.200 888.400 888.600 888.800 889.000
1020 - 1023 889.200 889.400 889.600 889.800

P-14 6113 EDGE
80-0013

E-GSM CHART 1 -- DOWNLINK (Base Station To Mobile)

CHANNEL
NUMBERS
(MHz)
0 935.000
1 - 5 935.200 935.400 935.600 935.800 936.000
6 - 10 936.200 936.400 936.600 936.800 937.000
11 - 15 937.200 937.400 937.600 937.800 938.000
16 - 20 938.200 938.400 938.600 938.800 939.000
21 - 25 939.200 939.400 939.600 939.800 940.000
26 - 30 940.200 940.400 940.600 940.800 941.000
31 - 35 941.200 941.400 941.600 941.800 942.000
36 - 40 942.200 942.400 942.600 942.800 943.000
41 - 45 943.200 943.400 943.600 943.800 944.000
46 - 50 944.200 944.400 944.600 944.800 945.000
51 - 55 945.200 945.400 945.600 945.800 946.000
56 - 60 946 200 946 400 946.600 946.800 947.000
61 - 65 947.200 947.400 947.600 947.800 948.000
66 - 70 948.200 948.400 948.600 948.800 949.000
71 - 75 949.200 949.400 949.600 949.800 950.000
76 - 80 950.200 950.400 950.600 950.800 951.000
81 - 85 951.200 951.400 951.600 951.800 952.000
86 - 90 952.200 952.400 952.600 952.800 953.000
91 - 95 953.200 953.400 953.600 953.800 954.000
96 - 100 954.200 954.400 954.600 954.800 955.000
101 - 105 955.200 955.400 955.600 955.800 956.000
106 - 110 956.200 956.400 956.600 956.800 957.000
111 - 115 957.200 957.400 957.600 957.800 958.000
116 - 120 958.200 958.400 958.600 958.800 959.000
121 - 124 959.200 959.400 959.600 959.800
975 - 979 925.200 925.400 925.600 925.800 926.000
980 - 984 926.200 926.400 926.600 926.800 927.000
985 - 989 927.200 927.400 927.600 927.800 928.000
990 - 994 928.200 928.400 928.600 928.800 929.000
995 - 999 929.200 929.400 929.600 929.800 930.000
1000 - 1004 930.200 930.400 930.600 930.800 931.000
1005 - 1009 931.200 931.400 931.600 931.800 932.000
1010 - 1014 932.200 932.400 932.600 932.800 933.000
1015 - 1019 933.200 933.400 933.600 933.800 934.000
1020 - 1023 934.200 934.400 934.600 934.800

6113 EDGE P-15
80-0013

E-GSM CHART 2 -- UPLINK (Mobile To Base Station)

CHANNEL
NUMBERS
UPLINK FREQUENCIES
(MHz)
0 890.000
1 - 5 890.200 890.400 890.600 890.800 891.000
6 - 10 891.200 891.400 891.600 891.800 892.000
11 - 15 892.200 892.400 892.600 892.800 893.000
16 -20 893.200 893.400 893.600 893.800 894.000
21 - 25 894.200 894.400 894.600 894.800 895.000
26 - 30 895.200 895.400 895.600 895.800 896.000
31 - 35 896.200 896.400 896.600 896.800 897.000
36 - 40 897.200 897.400 897.600 897.800 898.000
41 - 45 898.200 898.400 898.600 898.800 899.000
46 - 50 899.200 899.400 899.600 899.800 900.000
51 - 55 900.200 900.400 900.600 900.800 901.000
56 - 60 901.200 901.400 901.600 901.800 902.000
61 - 65 902.200 902.400 902.600 902.800 903.000
66 - 70 903.200 903.400 903.600 903.800 904.000
71 - 75 904.200 904.400 904.600 904.800 905.000
76 - 80 905.200 905.400 905.600 905.800 906.000
81 - 85 906.200 906.400 906.600 906.800 907.000
86 - 90 907.200 907.400 907.600 907.800 908.000
91 - 95 908.200 908.400 908.600 908.800 909.000
96 - 100 909.200 909.400 909.600 909.800 910.000
101 - 105 910.200 910.400 910.600 910.800 911.000
106 - 110 911.200 911.400 911.600 911.800 912.000
111 - 115 912.200 912.400 912.600 912.800 913.000
116 - 120 913.200 913.400 913.600 913.800 914.000
121- 124 914.200 914.400 914.600 914.800
975 - 979 880.200 880.400 880.600 880.800 881.000
980 - 984 881.200 881.400 881.600 881.800 882.000
985 - 989 882.200 882.400 882.600 882.800 883.000
990 -994 883.200 883.400 883.600 883.800 884.000
995 - 999 884.200 884.400 884.600 884.800 885.000
1000 - 1004 885.200 885.400 885.600 885.800 886.000
1005 - 1009 886.200 886.400 886.600 886.800 887.000
1010 - 1014 887.200 887.400 887.600 887.800 888.000
1015 - 1019 888.200 888.400 888.600 888.800 889.000
1020 - 1023 889.200 889.400 889.600 889.800

P-16 6113 EDGE
80-0013

GSM 850 CHART 1 -- DOWNLINK (Base Station to Mobile)

CHANNEL
NUMBERS
(MHz)

128 - 130 869.200 869.400 869.600
131 - 135 869.800 870.000 870.200 870.400 870.600
136 - 140 870.800 871.000 871.200 871.400 871.600
141 - 145 871.800 872.000 872.200 872.400 872.600
146 - 150 872.800 873.000 873.200 873.400 873.600
151 - 155 873.800 874.000 874.200 874.400 874.600
156 - 160 874.800 875.000 875.200 875.400 875.600
161 - 165 875.800 876.000 876.200 876.400 876.600
166 - 170 876.800 877.000 877.200 877.400 877.600
171 - 175 877.800 878.000 878.200 878.400 878.600
176 - 180 878.800 879.000 879.200 879.400 879.600
181 - 185 879.800 880.000 880.200 880.400 880.600
186 - 190 880.800 881.000 881.200 881.400 881.600
191 - 195 881.800 882.000 882.200 882.400 882.600
196 - 200 882.800 883.000 883.200 883.400 883.600
201 - 205 883.800 884.000 884.200 884.400 884.600
206 - 210 884.800 885.000 885.200 885.400 885.600
211 - 215 885.800 886.000 886.200 886.400 886.600
216 - 220 886.800 887.000 887.200 887.400 887.600
221 - 225 887.800 888.000 888.200 888.400 888.600
226 - 230 888.800 889.000 889.200 889.400 889.600
231 - 235 889.800 890.000 890.200 890.400 890.600
236 - 240 890.800 891.000 891.200 891.400 891.600
241 - 245 891.800 892.000 892.200 892.400 892.600
246 - 250 892.800 893.000 893.200 893.400 893.600
251 893.800

6113 EDGE P-17
80-0013

GSM 850 CHART 2 -- UPLINK (Mobile to Base Station)

CHANNEL
NUMBERS
UPLINK FREQUENCIES
(MHz)

128 - 130 824.200 824.400 824.600
131 - 135 824.800 825.000 825.200 825.400 825.600
136 - 140 825.800 826.000 826.200 826.400 826.600
141 - 145 826.800 827.000 827.200 827.400 827.600
146 - 150 827.800 828.000 828.200 828.400 828.600
151 - 155 828.800 829.000 829.200 829.400 829.600
156 - 160 829.800 830.000 830.200 830.400 830.600
161 - 165 830.800 831.000 831.200 831.400 831.600
166 - 170 831.800 832.000 832.200 832.400 832.600
171 - 175 832.800 833.000 833.200 833.400 833.600
176 - 180 833.800 834.000 834.200 834.400 834.600
181 - 185 834.800 835.000 835.200 835.400 835.600
186 - 190 835.800 836.000 836.200 836.400 836.600
191 - 195 836.800 837.000 837.200 837.400 837.600
196 - 200 837.800 838.000 838.200 838.400 838.600
201 - 205 838.800 839.000 839.200 839.400 839.600
206 - 210 839.800 840.000 840.200 840.400 840.600
211 - 215 840.800 841.000 841.200 841.400 841.600
216 - 220 841.800 842.000 842.200 842.400 842.600
221 - 225 842.800 843.000 843.200 843.400 843.600
226 - 230 843.800 844.000 844.200 844.400 844.600
231 - 235 844.800 845.000 845.200 845.400 845.600
236 - 240 845.800 846.000 846.200 846.400 846.600
241 - 245 846.800 847.000 847.200 847.400 847.600
246 - 250 847.800 848.000 848.200 848.400 848.600
251 848.800

P-18 6113 EDGE
80-0013

DCS 1800 CHART 1 -- DOWNLINK (Base Station To Mobile)

CHANNEL
NUMBERS
(MHz)
512 - 515 1805.2 1805.4 1805.6 1805.8
516 - 520 1806.0 1806.2 1806.4 1806.6 1806.8
521 - 525 1807.0 1807.2 1807.4 1807.6 1807.8
526 - 530 1808.0 1808.2 1808.4 1808.6 1808.8
531 - 535 1809.0 1809.2 1809.4 1809.6 1809.8
536 - 540 1810.0 1810.2 1810.4 1810.6 1810.8
541 - 545 1811.0 1811.2 1811.4 1811.6 1811.8
546 - 550 1812.0 1812.2 1812.4 1812.6 1812.8
551 - 555 1813.0 1813.2 1813.4 1813.6 1813.8
556 - 560 1814.0 1814.2 1814.4 1814.6 1814.8
561 - 565 1815.0 1815.2 1815.4 1815.6 1815.8
566 - 570 1816.0 1816.2 1816.4 1816.6 1816.8
571 - 575 1817.0 1817.2 1817.4 1817.6 1817.8
576 - 580 1818.0 1818.2 1818.4 1818.6 1818.8
581 - 585 1819.0 1819.2 1819.4 1819.6 1819.8
586 - 590 1820.0 1820.2 1820.4 1820.6 1820.8
591 - 595 1821.0 1821.2 1821.4 1821.6 1821.8
596 - 600 1822.0 1822.2 1822.4 1822.6 1822.8
601 - 605 1823.0 1823.2 1823.4 1823.6 1823.8
606 - 610 1824.0 1824.2 1824.4 1824.6 1824.8
611 - 615 1825.0 1825.2 1825.4 1825.6 1825.8
616 - 620 1826.0 1826.2 1826.4 1826.6 1826.8
621 - 625 1827.0 1827.2 1827.4 1827.6 1827.8
626 - 630 1828.0 1828.2 1828.4 1828.6 1828.8
631 - 635 1829.0 1829.2 1829.4 1829.6 1829.8
636 - 640 1830.0 1830.2 1830.4 1830.6 1830.8
641 - 645 1831.0 1831.2 1831.4 1831.6 1831.8
646 - 650 1832.0 1832.2 1832.4 1832.6 1832.8
651 - 655 1833.0 1833.2 1833.4 1833.6 1833.8
656 - 660 1834.0 1834.2 1834.4 1834.6 1834.8
661 - 665 1835.0 1835.2 1835.4 1835.6 1835.8
666 - 670 1836.0 1836.2 1836.4 1836.6 1836.8
671 - 675 1837.0 1837.2 1837.4 1837.6 1837.8
676 - 680 1838.0 1838.2 1838.4 1838.6 1838.8
681 - 685 1839.0 1839.2 1839.4 1839.6 1839.8
686 - 690 1840.0 1840.2 1840.4 1840.6 1840.8
691 - 695 1841.0 1841.2 1841.4 1841.6 1841.8
696 - 700 1842.0 1842.2 1842.4 1842.6 1842.8
701 - 705 1843.0 1843.2 1843.4 1843.6 1843.8
706 - 710 1844.0 1844.2 1844.4 1844.6 1844.8

6113 EDGE P-19
80-0013

DCS 1800 CHART 2 -- DOWNLINK (Base Station To Mobile)(Continued)

CHANNEL
NUMBERS
(MHz)
711 - 715 1845.0 1845.2 1845.4 1845.6 1845.8
716 - 720 1846.0 1846.2 1846.4 1846.6 1846.8
721 - 725 1847.0 1847.2 1847.4 1847.6 1847.8
726 - 730 1848.0 1848.2 1848.4 1848.6 1848.8
731 - 735 1849.0 1849.2 1849.4 1849.6 1849.8
736 - 740 1850.0 1850.2 1850.4 1850.6 1850.8
741 - 745 1851.0 1851.2 1851.4 1851.6 1851.8
746 - 750 1852.0 1852.2 1852.4 1852.6 1852.8
751 - 755 1853.0 1853.2 1853.4 1853.6 1853.8
756 - 760 1854.0 1854.2 1854.4 1854.6 1854.8
761 - 765 1855.0 1855.2 1855.4 1855.6 1855.8
766 - 770 1856.0 1856.2 1856.4 1856.6 1856.8
771 - 775 1857.0 1857.2 1857.4 1857.6 1857.8
776 - 780 1858.0 1858.2 1858.4 1858.6 1858.8
781 - 785 1859.0 1859.2 1859.4 1859.6 1859.8
786 - 790 1860.0 1860.2 1860.4 1860.6 1860.8
791 - 795 1861.0 1861.2 1861.4 1861.6 1861.8
796 - 800 1862.0 1862.2 1862.4 1862.6 1862.8
801 - 805 1863.0 1863.2 1863.4 1863.6 1863.8
806 - 810 1864.0 1864.2 1864.4 1864.6 1864.8
811 - 815 1865.0 1865.2 1865.4 1865.6 1865.8
816 - 820 1866.0 1866.2 1866.4 1866.6 1866.8
821 - 825 1867.0 1867.2 1867.4 1867.6 1867.8
826 - 830 1868.0 1868.2 1868.4 1868.6 1868.8
831 - 835 1869.0 1869.2 1869.4 1869.6 1869.8
836 - 840 1870.0 1870.2 1870.4 1870.6 1870.8
841 - 845 1871.0 1871.2 1871.4 1871.6 1871.8
846 - 850 1872.0 1872.2 1872.4 1872.6 1872.8
851 - 855 1873.0 1873.2 1873.4 1873.6 1873.8
856 - 860 1874.0 1874.2 1874.4 1874.6 1874.8
861 - 865 1875.0 1875.2 1875.4 1875.6 1875.8
866 - 870 1876.0 1876.2 1876.4 1876.6 1876.8
871 - 875 1877.0 1877.2 1877.4 1877.6 1877.8
876 - 880 1878.0 1878.2 1878.4 1878.6 1878.8
881 - 885 1879.0 1879.2 1879.4 1879.6 1879.8

P-20 6113 EDGE
80-0013

DCS 1800 CHART 3 -- UPLINK (Mobile to Base Station)

CHANNEL
NUMBERS
UPLINK FREQUENCIES
(MHz)
512 - 515 1710.2 1710.4 1710.6 1710.8
516 - 520 1711.0 1711.2 1711.4 1711.6 1711.8
521 - 525 1712.0 1712.2 1712.4 1712.6 1712.8
526 - 530 1713.0 1713.2 1713.4 1713.6 1713.8
531 - 535 1714.0 1714.2 1714.4 1714.6 1714.8
536 - 540 1715.0 1715.2 1715.4 1715.6 1715.8
541 - 545 1716.0 1716.2 1716.4 1716.6 1716.8
546 - 550 1717.0 1717.2 1717.4 1717.6 1717.8
551 - 555 1718.0 1718.2 1718.4 1718.6 1718.8
556 - 560 1719.0 1719.2 1719.4 1719.6 1719.8
561 - 565 1720.0 1720.2 1720.4 1720.6 1720.8
566 - 570 1721.0 1721.2 1721.4 1721.6 1721.8
571 - 575 1722.0 1722.2 1722.4 1722.6 1722.8
576 - 580 1723.0 1723.2 1723.4 1723.6 1723.8
581 - 585 1724.0 1724.2 1724.4 1724.6 1724.8
586 - 590 1725.0 1725.2 1725.4 1725.6 1725.8
591 - 595 1726.0 1726.2 1726.4 1726.6 1726.8
596 - 600 1727.0 1727.2 1727.4 1727.6 1727.8
601 - 605 1728.0 1728.2 1728.4 1728.6 1728.8
606 - 610 1729.0 1729.2 1729.4 1729.6 1729.8
611 - 615 1730.0 1730.2 1730.4 1730.6 1730.8
616 - 620 1731.0 1731.2 1731.4 1731.6 1731.8
621 - 625 1732.0 1732.2 1732.4 1732.6 1732.8
626 - 630 1733.0 1733.2 1733.4 1733.6 1733.8
631 - 635 1734.0 1734.2 1734.4 1734.6 1734.8
636 - 640 1735.0 1735.2 1735.4 1735.6 1735.8
641 - 645 1736.0 1736.2 1736.4 1736.6 1736.8
646 - 650 1737.0 1737.2 1737.4 1737.6 1737.8
651 - 655 1738.0 1738.2 1738.4 1738.6 1738.8
656 - 660 1739.0 1739.2 1739.4 1739.6 1739.8
661 - 665 1740.0 1740.2 1740.4 1740.6 1740.8
666 - 670 1741.0 1741.2 1741.4 1741.6 1741.8
671 - 675 1742.0 1742.2 1742.4 1742.6 1742.8
676 - 680 1743.0 1743.2 1743.4 1743.6 1743.8
681 - 685 1744.0 1744.2 1744.4 1744.6 1744.8
686 - 690 1745.0 1745.2 1745.4 1745.6 1745.8
691 - 695 1746.0 1746.2 1746.4 1746.6 1746.8
696 - 700 1747.0 1747.2 1747.4 1747.6 1747.8
701 - 705 1748.0 1748.2 1748.4 1748.6 1748.8
706 - 710 1749.0 1749.2 1749.4 1749.6 1749.8

6113 EDGE P-21
80-0013

DCS 1800 CHART 4 -- UPLINK (Mobile to Base Station)(Continued)

CHANNEL
NUMBERS
UPLINK FREQUENCIES
(MHz)
711 - 715 1750.0 1750.2 1750.4 1750.6 1750.8
716 - 720 1751.0 1751.2 1751.4 1751.6 1751.8
721 - 725 1752.0 1752.2 1752.4 1752.6 1752.8
726 - 730 1753.0 1753.2 1753.4 1753.6 1753.8
731 - 735 1754.0 1754.2 1754.4 1754.6 1754.8
736 - 740 1755.0 1755.2 1755.4 1755.6 1755.8
741 - 745 1756.0 1756.2 1756.4 1756.6 1756.8
746 - 750 1757.0 1757.2 1757.4 1757.6 1757.8
751 - 755 1758.0 1758.2 1758.4 1758.6 1758.8
756 - 760 1759.0 1759.2 1759.4 1759.6 1759.8
761 - 765 1760.0 1760.2 1760.4 1760.6 1760.8
766 - 770 1761.0 1761.2 1761.4 1761.6 1761.8
771 - 775 1762.0 1762.2 1762.4 1762.6 1762.8
776 - 780 1763.0 1763.2 1763.4 1763.6 1763.8
781 - 785 1764.0 1764.2 1764.4 1764.6 1764.8
786 - 790 1765.0 1765.2 1765.4 1765.6 1765.8
791 - 795 1766.0 1766.2 1766.4 1766.6 1766.8
796 - 800 1767.0 1767.2 1767.4 1767.6 1767.8
801 - 805 1768.0 1768.2 1768.4 1768.6 1768.8
806 - 810 1769.0 1769.2 1769.4 1769.6 1769.8
811 - 815 1770.0 1770.2 1770.4 1770.6 1770.8
816 - 820 1771.0 1771.2 1771.4 1771.6 1771.8
821 - 825 1772.0 1772.2 1772.4 1772.6 1772.8
826 - 830 1773.0 1773.2 1773.4 1773.6 1773.8
831 - 835 1774.0 1774.2 1774.4 1774.6 1774.8
836 - 840 1775.0 1775.2 1775.4 1775.6 1775.8
841 - 845 1776.0 1776.2 1776.4 1776.6 1776.8
846 - 850 1777.0 1777.2 1777.4 1777.6 1777.8
851 - 855 1778.0 1778.2 1778.4 1778.6 1778.8
856 - 860 1779.0 1779.2 1779.4 1779.6 1779.8
861 - 865 1780.0 1780.2 1780.4 1780.6 1780.8
866 - 870 1781.0 1781.2 1781.4 1781.6 1781.8
871 - 875 1782.0 1782.2 1782.4 1782.6 1782.8
876 - 880 1783.0 1783.2 1783.4 1783.6 1783.8
881 - 885 1784.0 1784.2 1784.4 1784.6 1784.8

P-22 6113 EDGE
80-0013

PCS 1900 CHART 1 -- DOWNLINK (Base Station To Mobile)

CHANNEL
NUMBERS
(MHz)

512 - 515 1930.2 1930.4 1930.6 1930.8
516 - 520 1931.0 1931.2 1931.4 1931.6 1931.8
521 - 525 1932.0 1932.2 1932.4 1932.6 1932.8
526 - 530 1933.0 1933.2 1933.4 1933.6 1933.8
531 - 535 1934.0 1934.2 1934.4 1934.6 1934.8
536 - 540 1935.0 1935.2 1935.4 1935.6 1935.8
541 - 545 1936.0 1936.2 1936.4 1936.6 1936.8
546 - 550 1937.0 1937.2 1937.4 1937.6 1937.8
551 - 555 1938.0 1938.2 1938.4 1938.6 1938.8
556 - 560 1939.0 1939.2 1939.4 1939.6 1939.8
561 - 565 1940.0 1940.2 1940.4 1940.6 1940.8
566 - 570 1941.0 1941.2 1941.4 1941.6 1941.8
571 - 575 1942.0 1942.2 1942.4 1942.6 1942.8
576 - 580 1943.0 1943.2 1943.4 1943.6 1943.8
581 - 585 1944.0 1944.2 1944.4 1944.6 1944.8
586 - 590 1945.0 1945.2 1945.4 1945.6 1945.8
591 - 595 1946.0 1946.2 1946.4 1946.6 1946.8
596 - 600 1947.0 1947.2 1947.4 1947.6 1947.8
601 - 605 1948.0 1948.2 1948.4 1948.6 1948.8
606 - 610 1949.0 1949.2 1949.4 1949.6 1949.8
611 - 615 1950.0 1950.2 1950.4 1950.6 1950.8
616 - 620 1951.0 1951.2 1951.4 1951.6 1951.8
621 - 625 1952.0 1952.2 1952.4 1952.6 1952.8
626 - 630 1953.0 1953.2 1953.4 1953.6 1953.8
631 - 635 1954.0 1954.2 1954.4 1954.6 1954.8
636 - 640 1955.0 1955.2 1955.4 1955.6 1955.8
641 - 645 1956.0 1956.2 1956.4 1956.6 1956.8
646 - 650 1957.0 1957.2 1957.4 1957.6 1957.8
651 - 655 1958.0 1958.2 1958.4 1958.6 1958.8
656 - 660 1959.0 1959.2 1959.4 1959.6 1959.8
661 - 665 1960.0 1960.2 1960.4 1960.6 1960.8
666 - 670 1961.0 1961.2 1961.4 1961.6 1961.8
671 - 675 1962.0 1962.2 1962.4 1962.6 1962.8
676 - 680 1963.0 1963.2 1963.4 1963.6 1963.8
681 - 685 1964.0 1964.2 1964.4 1964.6 1964.8
686 - 690 1965.0 1965.2 1965.4 1965.6 1965.8
691 - 695 1966.0 1966.2 1966.4 1966.6 1966.8
696 - 700 1967.0 1967.2 1967.4 1967.6 1967.8
701 - 705 1968.0 1968.2 1968.4 1968.6 1968.8
706 - 710 1969.0 1969.2 1969.4 1969.6 1969.8

6113 EDGE P-23
80-0013

PCS 1900 CHART 2 -- DOWNLINK (Base Station To Mobile) (Continued)

CHANNEL
NUMBERS
(MHz)
711 - 715 1970.0 1970.2 1970.4 1970.6 1970.8
716 - 720 1971.0 1971.2 1971.4 1971.6 1971.8
721 - 725 1972.0 1972.2 1972.4 1972.6 1972.8
726 - 730 1973.0 1973.2 1973.4 1973.6 1973.8
731 - 735 1974.0 1974.2 1974.4 1974.6 1974.8
736 - 740 1975.0 1975.2 1975.4 1975.6 1975.8
741 - 745 1976.0 1976.2 1976.4 1976.6 1976.8
746 - 750 1977.0 1977.2 1977.4 1977.6 1977.8
751 - 755 1978.0 1978.2 1978.4 1978.6 1978.8
756 - 760 1979.0 1979.2 1979.4 1979.6 1979.8
761 - 765 1980.0 1980.2 1980.4 1980.6 1980.8
766 - 770 1981.0 1981.2 1981.4 1981.6 1981.8
771 - 775 1982.0 1982.2 1982.4 1982.6 1982.8
776 - 780 1983.0 1983.2 1983.4 1983.6 1983.8
781 - 785 1984.0 1984.2 1984.4 1984.6 1984.8
786 - 790 1985.0 1985.2 1985.4 1985.6 1985.8
791 - 795 1986.0 1986.2 1986.4 1986.6 1986.8
796 - 800 1987.0 1987.2 1987.4 1987.6 1987.8
801 - 805 1988.0 1988.2 1988.4 1988.6 1988.8
806 - 810 1989.0 1989.2 1989.4 1989.6 1989.8

P-24 6113 EDGE
80-0013

PCS 1900 CHART 3 -- UPLINK (Mobile to Base Station)

CHANNEL
NUMBERS
UPLINK FREQUENCIES
(MHz)

512 - 515 1850.2 1850.4 1850.6 1850.8
516 - 520 1851.0 1851.2 1851.4 1851.6 1851.8
521 - 525 1852.0 1852.2 1852.4 1852.6 1852.8
526 - 530 1853.0 1853.2 1853.4 1853.6 1853.8
531 - 535 1854.0 1854.2 1854.4 1854.6 1854.8
536 - 540 1855.0 1855.2 1855.4 1855.6 1855.8
541 - 545 1856.0 1856.2 1856.4 1856.6 1856.8
546 - 550 1857.0 1857.2 1857.4 1857.6 1857.8
551 - 555 1858.0 1858.2 1858.4 1858.6 1858.8
556 - 560 1859.0 1859.2 1859.4 1859.6 1859.8
561 - 565 1860.0 1860.2 1860.4 1860.6 1860.8
566 - 570 1861.0 1861.2 1861.4 1861.6 1861.8
571 - 575 1862.0 1862.2 1862.4 1862.6 1862.8
576 - 580 1863.0 1863.2 1863.4 1863.6 1863.8
581 - 585 1864.0 1864.2 1864.4 1864.6 1864.8
586 - 590 1865.0 1865.2 1865.4 1865.6 1865.8
591 - 595 1866.0 1866.2 1866.4 1866.6 1866.8
596 - 600 1867.0 1867.2 1867.4 1867.6 1867.8
601 - 605 1868.0 1868.2 1868.4 1868.6 1868.8
606 - 610 1869.0 1869.2 1869.4 1869.6 1869.8
611 - 615 1870.0 1870.2 1870.4 1870.6 1870.8
616 - 620 1871.0 1871.2 1871.4 1871.6 1871.8
621 - 625 1872.0 1872.2 1872.4 1872.6 1872.8
626 - 630 1873.0 1873.2 1873.4 1873.6 1873.8
631 - 635 1874.0 1874.2 1874.4 1874.6 1874.8
636 - 640 1875.0 1875.2 1875.4 1875.6 1875.8
641 - 645 1876.0 1876.2 1876.4 1876.6 1876.8
646 - 650 1877.0 1877.2 1877.4 1877.6 1877.8
651 - 655 1878.0 1878.2 1878.4 1878.6 1878.8
656 - 660 1879.0 1879.2 1879.4 1879.6 1879.8
661 - 665 1880.0 1880.2 1880.4 1880.6 1880.8
666 - 670 1881.0 1881.2 1881.4 1881.6 1881.8
671 - 675 1882.0 1882.2 1882.4 1882.6 1882.8
676 - 680 1883.0 1883.2 1883.4 1883.6 1883.8
681 - 685 1884.0 1884.2 1884.4 1884.6 1884.8
686 - 690 1885.0 1885.2 1885.4 1885.6 1885.8
691 - 695 1886.0 1886.2 1886.4 1886.6 1886.8
696 - 700 1887.0 1887.2 1887.4 1887.6 1887.8
701 - 705 1888.0 1888.2 1888.4 1888.6 1888.8
706 - 710 1889.0 1889.2 1889.4 1889.6 1889.8

6113 EDGE P-25
80-0013

PCS 1900 CHART 4 -- UPLINK (Mobile to Base Station) (Continued)

CHANNEL
NUMBERS
UPLINK FREQUENCIES
(MHz)
711 - 715 1890.0 1890.2 1890.4 1890.6 1890.8
716 - 720 1891.0 1891.2 1891.4 1891.6 1891.8
721 - 725 1892.0 1892.2 1892.4 1892.6 1892.8
726 - 730 1893.0 1893.2 1893.4 1893.6 1893.8
731 - 735 1894.0 1894.2 1894.4 1894.6 1894.8
736 - 740 1895.0 1895.2 1895.4 1895.6 1895.8
741 - 745 1896.0 1896.2 1896.4 1896.6 1896.8
746 - 750 1897.0 1897.2 1897.4 1897.6 1897.8
751 - 755 1898.0 1898.2 1898.4 1898.6 1898.8
756 - 760 1899.0 1899.2 1899.4 1899.6 1899.8
761 - 765 1900.0 1900.2 1900.4 1900.6 1900.8
766 - 770 1901.0 1901.2 1901.4 1901.6 1901.8
771 - 775 1902.0 1902.2 1902.4 1902.6 1902.8
776 - 780 1903.0 1903.2 1903.4 1903.6 1903.8
781 - 785 1904.0 1904.2 1904.4 1904.6 1904.8
786 - 790 1905.0 1905.2 1905.4 1905.6 1905.8
791 - 795 1906.0 1906.2 1906.4 1906.6 1906.8
796 - 800 1907.0 1907.2 1907.4 1907.6 1907.8
801 - 805 1908.0 1908.2 1908.4 1908.6 1908.8
806 - 810 1909.0 1909.2 1909.4 1909.6 1909.8

P-26 6113 EDGE
80-0013

MS/BTS POWER CHARTS

MOBILE POWER CLASSES PHASE 1

GSM 900

DCS 1800 PCS 1900
POWER
CLASS
Maximum Peak
Power
dBm Maximum Peak
Power
dBm Maximum Peak
Power
dBm
1 20 W +43 1 W +30 1 W +30
2 8 W +39 0.25 W +24 0.25 W +24
3 5 W +37 --- --- --- ---
4 2 W +33 --- --- --- ---
5 0.8W +29 --- --- --- ---

MOBILE POWER CONTROL LEVELS PHASE 1

POWER
CONTROL
PEAK POWER
(dBm)

LEVEL
GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900
0 +43 +30 +30
1 +41 +28 +28
2 +39 +26 +26
3 +37 +24 +24
4 +35 +22 +22
5 +33 +20 +20
6 +31 +18 +18
7 +29 +16 +16
8 +27 +14 +14
9 +25 +12 +12
10 +23 +10 +10
11 +21 +8 +8
12 +19 +6 +6
13 +17 +4 +4
14 +15 * +4 * +4
15 +13 * +4 * +4
16 * +13 * +4 * +4
17 * +13 * +4 * +4
18 * +13 * +4 * +4
19 * +13 * +4 * +4
20 * +13 * +4 * +4
21 * +13 * +4 * +4
22 to 28 * +13 * +4 * +30
29 * +13 * +4 * +30
30 * +13 * +4 * +30
31 * +13 * +4 * +30

Note: * = reserved values. Value shown is used as expected receive level.

6113 EDGE P-27
80-0013

MOBILE POWER CLASSES PHASE 2

GSM 850 / 900

DCS 1800 PCS 1900
POWER
CLASS
Maximum Peak
Power
dBm Maximum Peak
Power
dBm Maximum Peak
Power
dBm
1 --- --- 1 W +30 1 W +30
2 8 W +39 0.25 W +24 0.25 W +24
3 5 W +37 4 W +36 2 W +33
4 2 W +33 --- --- --- ---
5 0.8 W +29 --- --- --- ---

MOBILE POWER CONTROL LEVELS PHASE 2

POWER
CONTROL
PEAK POWER
(dBm)

LEVEL
GSM 850 / 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900
0 +39 +30 +30
1 +39 +28 +28
2 +39 +26 +26
3 +37 +24 +24
4 +35 +22 +22
5 +33 +20 +20
6 +31 +18 +18
7 +29 +16 +16
8 +27 +14 +14
9 +25 +12 +12
10 +23 +10 +10
11 +21 +8 +8
12 +19 +6 +6
13 +17 +4 +4
14 +15 +2 +2
15 +13 0 0
16 +11 0 0
17 +9 0 0
18 +7 0 0
19 +5 0 0
20 +5 0 0
21 +5 0 0
22 to 28 +5 0 +33
29 +5 +36 +33
30 +5 +34 +33
31 +5 +32 +32

P-28 6113 EDGE
80-0013

BTS POWER CLASSES

BTS POWER CLASS
GSM
MAXIMUM PEAK
POWER
dBm
1 320 - 640 W +55 to +58
2 160 - 320 W +52 to +55
3 80 - 160 W +49 to +52
4 40 - 80 W +46 to +49
5 20 - 40 W +43 to +46
6 10 - 20 W +40 to +43
7 5 - 10 W +37 to +40
8 2.5 - 5 W +34 to +37
Micro BTS
GSM

M1 0.08 - 0.25 W +19 to +24
M2 0.03 - 0.08 W +14 to +19
M3 0.01 - 0.03 W +9 to +14

BTS POWER CLASS
DCS 1800
MAXIMUM PEAK
POWER
dBm
1 20 -40 W +43 to +46
2 10 - 20 W +40 to +43
3 5 - 10 W +37 to +40
4 2.5 - 5 W +34 to +37
Micro BTS
DCS 1800

M1 0.5 - 1.6 W +27 to +32
M2 0.16 - 0.5 W +22 to +27
M3 0.05 - 0.16 W +17 to +22

BTSPOWER CLASS
PCS 1900
MAXIMUM PEAK
POWER
dBm
1 20 -40 W +43 to +46
2 10 - 20 W +40 to +43
3 5 - 10 W +37 to +40
4 2.5 - 5 W +34 to +37
Micro BTS
PCS 1900

M1 0.5 - 1.6 W +27 to +32
M2 0.16 - 0.5 W +22 to +27
M3 0.05 - 0.16 W +17 to +22

6113 EDGE P-29
80-0013

REFERENCE SENSITIVITY LEVELS

MS REFERENCE SENSITITVITY dBm
GSM mobile class 1, 2, 3 -104
GSM hand portable class 4 & 5 -102
DCS 1800 class 1 & 2 -100
DCS 1800 class 3 -102
PCS 1900 all classes -102

BTS REFERENCE SENSITITVITY dBm
GSM standard BTS -104
GSM Mini 1 -97
GSM Mini 2 -92
GSM Mini 3 -87
DCS 1800 standard BTS -104
DCS 1800 Mini 1 -102
DCS 1800 Mini 2 -97
DCS 1800 Mini 3 -92
PCS 1900 standard BTS -104
PCS 1900 Mini 1 -102
PCS 1900 Mini 2 -97
PCS 1900 Mini 3 -92

CONVERSION FACTORS

To convert between dBV (emf), dBV/m and dBm, use the following formulae:

dBV(emf) = dBm + 113.0

dBV/m = dBm + 136.5

Note: This assumes 0 dBi antenna gain and a frequency of 925 MHz
Ref. GSM Rec. 05.05 Section 5.

Some useful values are given below:

dBm dBV
(emf)
dBV/m
-110 3.0 26.5
-104.0 9.0 32.5
-102.0 11.0 34.5
-101.0 12.0 35.5
-99.0 14.0 37.5
-93.0 20.0 43.5
-85.0 28.0 51.5
-64.5 48.5 72.0
-48.0 65.0 88.5
-43.0 70.0 93.5

P-30 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Rx_LEV VALUES

The reported Rx_LEV values for received signal level are as follows:

Rx_LEV Received Signal Level Rx_LEV Received Signal Level
0 Less than -110 dBm 40 -71 dBm to -70 dBm
1 -110 dBm to -109 dBm 41 -70 dBm to -69 dBm


23 -88 dBm to -87 dBm 63 Greater than -48 dBm
24 -87 dBm to -86 dBm
25 -86 dBm to -85 dBm
26 -85 dBm to -84 dBm
27 -84 dBm to -83 dBm
28 -83 dBm to -82 dBm
29 -82 dBm to -81 dBm

30 -81 dBm to -80 dBm
31 -80 dBm to -79 dBm
32 -79 dBm to -78 dBm
33 -78 dBm to -77 dBm
34 -77 dBm to -76 dBm
35 -76 dBm to -75 dBm
36 -75 dBm to -74 dBm
37 -74 dBm to -73 dBm
38 -73 dBm to -72 dBm
39 -72 dBm to -71 dBm

6113 EDGE P-31
80-0013

Rx_QUAL VALUES

The reported Rx_QUAL values for received signal level are as follows:

RXQUAL BER range Required events of
correct RXQUAL value
0 < 0.10% 90%
0/1 0.10% - 0.26% 75%
1 0.26% - 0.30% 75%
1/2 0.30% - 0.51% 75%
2 0.51% - 0.64% 85%
2/3 0.64% - 1.0% 85%
3 1.0% - 1.3% 90%
3/4 1.3% - 1.9% 90%
4 1.9% - 2.7% 90%
4/5 2.7% - 3.8% 95%
5 3.8% - 5.4% 95%
5/6 5.4% - 7.6% 95%
6 7.6% - 11.0% 95%
6/7 11.0% - 15.0% 95%
7 > 15.0% 95%

SECTION 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page / Hyperlink

SIGNAL SOURCE .............................................................................................................. 1
MEASURING RECEIVER................................................................................................... 1
A-bis INTERFACE.............................................................................................................. 2
MEASUREMENTS.............................................................................................................. 2
FREQUENCY STANDARD................................................................................................. 3
INTERFACES ..................................................................................................................... 4
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS........................................................................................ 4
OPTION 54 B.O.S.S. RF MODULE................................................................................. 5
Signal Source - Option 54......................................................................................... 5
Measuring Receiver - Option 54 ............................................................................... 5
Measurements - Option 54 ....................................................................................... 6

6113 EDGE 1-(i)
80-0013
SECTION 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Note: Racal 6113 Test Sets may be fitted with GSM 850 plus PCS 1900, OR E-GSM 900 plus DCS
1800 or PCS 1900 facilities.

Performance stated below applies when using the front panel RF connections. Performance
when using RF Tests (B.O.S.S.) Mode is also stated where it differs from normal operation.

SIGNAL SOURCE

Frequency
Range
GSM 850 : 824 - 849 MHz
E-GSM 900 : 880 - 915 MHz
DCS 1800 : 1710 - 1785 MHz
PCS 1900 : 1850 - 1910 MHz

Resolution : 1 Hz

Level
Range : -40 dBm to -120 dBm into 50 ohm (Simplex mode)
-47 dBm to -120 dBm into 50 ohm (Duplex mode)

Resolution : 0.1 dB

Accuracy
Simplex
GSM 850 : 1.5 dB (> -110 dBm)
E-GSM 900 : 1.5 dB (> -110 dBm)
DCS 1800 : 1.8 dB (> -110 dBm)
PCS 1900 : 1.8 dB (> -110 dBm)
Duplex
GSM 850 : 1.5 dB (> -110 dBm) (Note)
E-GSM 900 : 1.5 dB (> -110 dBm) (Note)
DCS 1800 : 1.8 dB (> -110 dBm) (Note)
PCS 1900 : 1.8 dB (> -110 dBm) (Note)
Note: Input power 5 W (+37 dBm)

RF OUT Connector
Impedance : 50 ohm Nominal
VSWR : 1.2:1
Connector : TNC female
RF IN/DUPLEX Connector
Impedance : 50 ohm Nominal
VSWR : 1.2:1
Connector : N Type female

MEASURING RECEIVER

Frequency Range
GSM 850 : 869 - 894 MHz
E-GSM 900 : 925 - 960 MHz
DCS 1800 : 1805 - 1880 MHz
PCS 1900 : 1930 - 1990 MHz

Level Range : +46 dBm to -1 dBm (GSM BTS power classes 5 to 8).
: +40 dBm to -1 dBm in RF Tests (B.O.S.S.) Mode.
(Range may be extended with an external attenuator).

Max Power : 50 W (+47 dBm) continuous
6113 EDGE 1-1
80-0013
Section 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

A-bis INTERFACE

Format Option 51 (T1) : 1.544 Mbit/s supporting 24 x 64 kbit/s
timeslots

: Option 52 (E1) : 2.048 Mbit/s supporting 32 x 64 kbit/s
timeslots

Connectors : Switchable BNC unbalanced and 4 mm Banana balanced

Traffic : Single 16 kbit/s bi-directional channel

Signalling : Two 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s or 64 kbit/s bi-directional links

Impedance Option 51 (T1): 100 ohm BNC, or 100 ohm 4 mm Banana

: Option 52 (E1): 75 ohm BNC, or 120 ohm 4 mm Banana

MEASUREMENTS

Phase Error
Range : 10 rms, 30 peak

Accuracy
rms : < 0.3 at 5 phase error

peak : 7.2
7.4 in RF Tests (B.O.S.S.) Mode

Frequency Error
Range : 2.5 kHz
750 Hz when locking to Cell Control Channel

Accuracy : < (4.5 Hz Internal Frequency Standard) (Note)

Note: 10 bursts averaged, 99 % confidence.

Power Level
Range : +46 dBm to -1dBm
+40 dBm to -1 dBm in RF Tests (B.O.S.S.) Mode

Absolute Accuracy
GSM 850 : 1.0 dB
E-GSM 900 : 1.0 dB
DCS 1800 20 W : 1.0 dB
PCS 1900 20 W : 1.2 dB

Relative Accuracy : < 0.4 dB

Power Profile
Dynamic Range : > 48 dB (Note)
> 42 dB in RF Tests (B.O.S.S.) Mode (Note)
Note: For 1 dB overshoot.

Modulation Spectrum
Dynamic Range : > 52 dB (Note)
> 46 dB in RF Tests (B.O.S.S.) Mode (Note)

Frequency Span : 1 MHz

Note: 10 bursts averaged, non hopping; 99 % confidence.
1-2 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 1

FREQUENCY STANDARD

Internal
(1 year, all sources of error)
04E (standard) : 1.2 x 10
-7
/ year (Note)
04F (option) : 3.5 x 10
-8
/ year (Note)
Note: After 30 days continuous operation.

Internal Standard Output Port
Signal : 10 MHz

Output Level : 0 dBm 2 dB into 50 ohm

Connector Type : BNC (female)

Reference Output Port

Frequency : Same as frequency standard in use (10 MHz or 13 MHz)

Level : +9 dBm nominal into 50 ohm (04E and 04F)

Reference Input Port

An external Reference Input signal that meets the following specification may be applied
to the REF. IN connector:

Frequency : 10 MHz or 13 MHz, 2.5 ppm

Input Level : 0.18 to 2.0 V rms into 50 ohm (-2 to +19 dBm)

Impedance/Coupling : 50 ohm nominal / a.c.

Harmonics : <-25 dBc

Spurious Signals : <-90 dBc for offsets <100 kHz (excluding line spurs)

SSB Phase Noise : @ 10 MHz @ 13 MHz
(Max permitted ) Offset (Hz) dBc/Hz dBc/Hz
1 -85 -83
10 -115 -113
100 -135 -133
1000 -138 -136
10000 -138 -136

Line Spurs : @ 10 MHz @ 13 MHz
(Max permitted) Offset (Hz) dBc dBc
50 -69 -67
100 -75 -73
150 -79 -77
200 to 500 -81 to -89 -79 to -87

6113 EDGE 1-3
80-0013
Section 1

INTERFACES

Memory Cards
Type : 2 off PC card (PCMCIA v 2.0) Type 2 sockets

Card types : SRAM, Flash EEPROM and Hard disk drives complying with PC
Card ATA Standard. PC Cards should have a CIS in common
or attribute memory.

Number of cards : One or two of Type l or Type ll, or one Type lll

Synchronisation Output : TTL signal for synchronising external equipment such as a
spectrum analyser.

GPIB : ANSI / IEEE 488.2 - 1987

Compatibility Subset : SH1, AH1, T5, L4, SR1, RL1, PP0, DC1, DT0, C0, E1

RS232 : 2 configurable ports for printing and control

Connectors : 9-way D-Type male

Parallel Printer : 25-way D-Type female

GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

Power Supplies
Voltage Ranges : 85 - 130 V AC and 180 - 264 V AC
Frequency Range : 45 - 66 Hz
Power Consumption : 225 VA maximum

Dimensions and Environmental Characteristics
Height : 210 mm
Width : 355 mm (excluding the bail arm)
Depth : 420 mm
Weight : 14 kg approx. (15 kg approx. when Option 54 is fitted)
Operating Temperature : 0 to 50 C (0 to 45 C when Option 54 is fitted)
Altitude : 2000 m maximum
Humidity : BS 2011 - Test Ca IEC68-2-3 (Endurance)
Calibration Period : 1 year
EMC and RFI : As stated on the Declaration of Conformity
Safety : Complies with BS EN61010-1:1993+A2:1995 as follows:
Class I Equipment
Overvoltage Category II
Pollution Degree 2

1-4 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 1

OPTION 54 B.O.S.S. RF MODULE

Performance stated below applies when using B.O.S.S. RF (Option 54) connections on the rear panel.

Signal Source - Option 54

Frequency
Range: 824-849 MHz (GSM 850)
880-915 MHz (E-GSM)
1710-1785 MHz (DCS1800)
1850-1910 MHz (PCS1900)
Level
Range: -20 dBm to -100 dBm into 50
Accuracy:
(Simplex)
1.5 dB GSM 850 (>-90 dBm)
1.5 dB E-GSM (>-90 dBm)
1.8 dB DCS1800 (>-90 dBm)
1.8 dB PCS1900 (>-90 dBm)
Accuracy:
(Duplex)
1.5 dB GSM 850 (>-90 dBm) (Note)
1.5 dB E-GSM (>-90 dBm) (Note)
1.8 dB DCS1800 (>-90 dBm) (Note)
1.8 dB PCS1900 (>-90 dBm) (Note)
Note: Input power 1 mW (0 dBm)
Valid at 23 C 5 C, Simplex or Duplex
B.O.S.S. RF OUT
Connector
Impedance: 50 nominal
Connector: TNC Female (on rear panel)
B.O.S.S. RF IN/DUPLEX
Connector
Impedance: 50 nominal
Connector: SMA Female (on rear panel)

Measuring Receiver - Option 54

Frequency Range: 869-894 MHz (GSM 850)
925-960 MHz (E-GSM)
1805-1880 MHz (DCS1800)
1930-1990 MHz (PCS1900)
Input Level
Specified Measurement Range:
Usable Range:
-50 dBm to 0 dBm
-70 dBm to 0 dBm
Maximum Input Power: 100 mW RMS (+20 dBm) continuous
Unwanted Signal Tolerance: Up to 30 dBc and 0 dBm, @ 1.2 MHz offset, but
measurement accuracy is not specified under these
conditions.

6113 EDGE 1-5
80-0013
Section 1
1-6 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Measurements - Option 54

Performance with unwanted signal +30 dBc and 0 dBm @ 6 MHz offset, wideband mode

Power Measurements
Absolute Accuracy:
GSM 850
E-GSM:
DCS1800:
PCS1900:

<1.6 dB
<1.6 dB
<1.6 dB
<1.6 dB
Valid at 23 C 5 C
Phase Error
Accuracy RMS: <0.4 at 5 phase error
Accuracy Peak: <9
Frequency Error
Accuracy: < (10 Hz Internal Frequency Standard)
Mod Spectrum
Dynamic Range: >40 dB spurious free
Power Profile

Performance with unwanted signal 0 dBc @ 1.2 MHz offset, narrowband mode

Power Measurements
GSM 850
E-GSM:
DCS1800:
PCS1900:

<1.6 dB
<1.6 dB
<1.6 dB
<1.6 dB
Valid at 23 C 5
Phase Error
Accuracy: RMS <0.6 at 5 phase error
Peak <10
Frequency Error
Accuracy: < (10 Hz Internal Frequency Standard)
Mod Spectrum Not specified
Power Profile

Note: Other parameters are as stated earlier in this Section for the main Specification.

SECTION 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page / Hyperlink

INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................. 1
DESIGN FEATURES.......................................................................................................... 2
USING THIS MANUAL....................................................................................................... 2
TEST INFORMATION......................................................................................................... 3
Test Modes ............................................................................................................... 3
Single Tests Mode.......................................................................................... 3
Test Sequences Mode.................................................................................... 3
MultiMode ....................................................................................................... 4
Live Tests Mode ............................................................................................. 4
Cell Integrity Tests Mode................................................................................ 4
Special Functions Mode ................................................................................. 5
Remote Operation..................................................................................................... 5
LIST OF TESTS.................................................................................................................. 6
Functional Tests........................................................................................................ 6
Transmitter Tests...................................................................................................... 6
Receiver Tests.......................................................................................................... 7
Manufacturer and BTS-Specific Tests...................................................................... 7
Interactive Test Mode ............................................................................................... 7
Live Tests.................................................................................................................. 7
Special Functions Mode............................................................................................ 8
Self-Check Tests....................................................................................................... 8

6113 EDGE 2-(i)/(ii)
80-0013
SECTION 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

INTRODUCTION

The Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions Digital Radio Test Set Model 6113 is designed to test
Base Transceiver Stations (BTS) operating on the GSM 850 plus PCS 1900, OR E-GSM 900
plus DCS 1800 or PCS 1900 Digital Cellular Radio systems. In addition, a complete cell site
can be tested, including all antennas, couplers, low noise amplifiers and other ancillary RF
equipment.

Note: In this handbook, "GSM" is also used on its own as a generic term to refer to all these
types of radio system.

The Test Set is fully self contained in one portable unit and requires no other external
equipment. All functions are available through use of the front panel hard/soft keys and
spinwheel.

For production test systems, remote control of all tests and readings can be achieved via the
IEEE488 interface.

The 6113 provides a range of test and measurement functions to enable quick and easy testing
of E-GSM 900 / GSM 850 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 BTSs for field commissioning and
maintenance purposes, and for final unit testing in a production environment.

The 6113 can be controlled via a GPIB interface from any IEEE-STD-488 Controller. Simple
programming commands enable the Test Set to be integrated into a test system for use in a
production environment.

The 6113 contains an RF transmitter and receiver, and an A-bis interface. It contains software
to provide signalling capability on both the air (RF) interface and the A-bis interface, including
manufacturer-specific Operations and Maintenance (O+M) signalling, to control the BTS and to
partially emulate a Base Station Controller (BSC) and a mobile station (MS).

A comprehensive range of tests can be performed on the BTS transmitters and receivers: these
include Bit Error Ratio (BER) tests on the receiver, and GSM-specific transmitter tests including
phase trajectory, power and modulation measurements. In addition, a limited number of
signalling tests can be performed to check the functionality of the BTS A-bis interface. For most
testing, however, the signalling between the 6113 and the BTS is completely transparent to the
user.

An RF Tests mode of operation provides facilities for non-intrusive testing of BTSs in live
operational networks, and monitoring of messages on the A-bis link between a BTS and BSC.
In addition, three special functions are available: the ability to function as a signal generator for
transmitting a variety of GSM structured signals and other signals, or the ability to function as a
power meter for monitoring channel transmissions, or both simultaneously.

The 6113E Test Set includes the encryption option and operates in the same manner as the
6113. Information about encryption in this handbook is not applicable if the encrytion option is
not incorporated, and encryption options in any menu on the MMI display will have no effect.

A range of options are available with the 6113 to enable it to work with manufacturer-specific
O+M messages. Further information on these can be obtained from Racal Instruments
Wireless Solutions Help Desk or their local agent.

6113 EDGE 2-1
80-0013
Section 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DESIGN FEATURES

The front panel controls and user interface are particularly easy to use, and are designed to
allow operators from a wide skill range to test and fault-find E-GSM 900, GSM 850, DCS 1800
and PCS 1900 BTSs. All the important measurements can be viewed simultaneously, and any
reading that is out of limits is highlighted to facilitate rapid repair.

To reduce the complexity of the test procedure, and to keep the processing time to a minimum,
special integrated transmitter and receiver tests perform several measurements simultaneously.

An automatic test sequence mode is provided where user-defined sequences are executed.
User-written program sequences can be created in RIBASIC, and an explanation of this facility,
together with example programs, is given in Section 5 Annex A.

A choice of two precision frequency standards are available, and an external 10 MHz or 13 MHz
frequency standard may be used if required.

Two serial RS232 interfaces are provided for driving a printer, controlling external instruments,
and facilitating remote interaction such as code download.

The 6113 contains non-volatile storage for the retention of its operating software. If software
upgrades are necessary, or when additional facilities become available, this software can be
updated via one of the RS-232 interfaces from a PC running the supplied utility, or via the front
panel memory card.

G703 (A-bis) and V11 interfaces are fitted as standard. However, these interfaces are used for
manufacturer-specific purposes only. See Section 7 Option descriptions for further details.

Enhanced RF performance is available as an Option for use when performing live tests on a
BTS.

USING THIS MANUAL

When first using the 6113, the user should read Section 3 Preparation For Use.

For full details of each test that the 6113 can perform, refer to Section 4 together with either
Section 5 if the Test Set MMI software is to be used, or Section 6 if the user intends to use the
GPIB interface to control the Test Set. Section 7 contains additional information on the use of
the 6113 that is applicable only to a particular BTS type; this information is supplied as a series
of Option descriptions that are specific to a particular manufacturer, and each Option description
is suppled only to users of that BTS type.

Throughout this manual, reference is made to various aspects of the GSM system and to the
GSM Recommendations. For a full explanation of the GSM system, the user is referred to the
GSM Recommendations.

2-2 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

TEST INFORMATION

The 6113 BTS Test Set performs various RF and functional tests. To test the signalling
procedures in a BTS, the 6113 is used to simulate an E-GSM 900, GSM 850, DCS 1800 or
PCS 1900 mobile. Many RF tests entail verifying that an acceptably low Bit Error Ratio (BER) is
maintained across the RF (air) interface under various signal conditions. Using the 6113 to
perform Bit Error Ratio measurements allows each BTS receiver sensitivity to be measured.

BER statistics are gathered from speech frames received from either the RF (air) interface or
the A-bis interface. Both the Frame Erasure Ratio (FER) and the Residual Bit Error Ratio
(RBER) are evaluated.

When testing a complete cell site, the 6113 emulates a network to control the entire cell site
while calls are made to or from a standard mobile terminal fitted with a Racal Instruments
Wireless Solutions CITA Test SIM.

Test Modes

There are six basic test modes available:

Single Tests mode
Test Sequences mode
MultiMode
Live Tests mode
Cell Integrity Tests mode
Special Functions mode

Single Tests Mode

The single tests mode enables the user to select and perform a single test, either once, or
repeatedly. The result of the test can be either a Pass/Fail, the Pass/Fail result of a measured
parameter, or a measured parameter only. Before running the test, the user can vary the
conditions under which the test is being performed.

During execution of a test the BTS is placed automatically into the correct state by the 6113,
using signalling over the A-bis interface.

Test Sequences Mode

In this mode, test sequences can be defined and run from the 6113 front panel. (They can also
be user-programmed in RIBASIC -- see Section 5 Annex A). Any test from the Single Tests
menu may be used. Each test in a sequence can be programmed to terminate in Hold,
Continue, Exit or Repeat, and test results may be printed on a Pass, or Fail, or both conditions.
Instrument set-up files are loaded as part of the test sequence. Individual test parameter
changes may be made while programming a test sequence. An overall summary of tests
Passed or Failed can be displayed at the end of the sequence and printed, if required.

6113 EDGE 2-3
80-0013
Section 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

MultiMode

This mode of operation is particularly useful for fault finding and diagnosis. In this mode the
Test Set performs all the major GSM measurements, and the cycle of measurements runs
continuously. The operator can vary most of the test parameters without terminating the
measurements. Measured parameter results are displayed and updated constantly during the
course of testing, and can be compared to marked limits. Bargraphs are used to give the user a
visual indication of results. If the results exceed the limits, the bars change colour. Pass/Fail
indications are given where possible.

The operator can switch the 6113 between four 'zoom' sub-modes, each of which provides a
more detailed presentation of results.

The four 'zoom' sub-modes are:

BER
Phase Error
Power Profile
Modulation Spectrum

Live Tests Mode

Live Tests mode provides facilities for testing a BTS and monitoring channel messages and
traffic without taking the BTS off the air. This helps to give advance warning of deterioration in
performance, and enables the user to take a BTS off the air for maintenance in a planned and
controlled manner, rather than waiting for failures to occur.

Two Live Tests modes are available:

RF Tests Mode (B.O.S.S.)
A-bis Protocol Analysis Mode

Cell Integrity Tests Mode

This mode allows the user to fully test a complete cell site. Successful completion of the tests
gives the user the confidence that:

All antennas are fully functional.
All antennas are correctly connected.
All antenna cables are functional.
All connections at the masthead are functional.
Any remote masthead Low Noise Amplifiers (LNAs) are fully operational.
Power supplies to the LNAs are fully operational.

All tests are made in real time and the fully processed results are available immediately, giving
indications of any cell imbalance or inefficiency.

2-4 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Special Functions Mode

Three Special Functions are available:

Signal Generator Mode
Power Meter Mode
Signal Generator and Power Meter Mode

These functions allow the 6113 to perform as a signal generator and/or power meter instrument
for use in failure diagnosis procedures.

Remote Operation

Remote control of the 6113 via a GPIB interface can be used when required. The interface
protocol allows the full range of parameters and tests to be utilised and monitored. The
commands and responses for each test are listed in Section 6.

The GPIB interface messages and responses comply with IEEE 488.2 - 1987 standard Digital
Interface for Programmable Instrumentation, "Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols, and
Common Commands".

6113 EDGE 2-5
80-0013
Section 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

LIST OF TESTS

Note: Additional manufacturer-specific tests are described in Section 7.

The following is a summary of the tests that can be performed by the 6113 Test Set:

Functional Tests

(Refer to Section 4 / FUNCTIONAL TESTS)

Configure BTS Test Brings the BTS to a fully 'configured' state, ready for
testing.

Reset BTS Test Resets the BTS to a 'non-configured' state.

Cell Integrity Test Checks that all the RF equipment and
interconnections on a cell site are operational.

Transmitter Tests

(Refer to Section 4 / TRANSMITTER TESTS)

Cell Control Channel Generation
Test
Checks generation of the Cell Control Channel by the
BTS.

Transmitter Test Checks that the transmitted signal has the GSM-
defined GMSK modulation accuracy (phase) or 8PSK
modulation accuracy (EVM) and does not exceed the
defined frequency error.

Checks that the average power level of the transmitted
pulse is within the GSM-defined tolerance.

Checks that the power profile of the transmitted pulse
conforms to the GSM-defined mask.

Allows the user to view the modulation spectrum of the
transmitted pulse.

Transmitter BER/BLER Test Checks the basic baseband signal processing (Static
Layer 1) functions on the downlink (BTS to MS) side of
the BTS.

Static Power Control Test Checks that the transmitted BCCH signal conforms to
the GSM-defined average output power level of the
power steps.

Downlink Power Control Test Checks that the transmitted TCH signal conforms to
the GSM-defined average output power level of the
downlink power decrements.

2-6 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Receiver Tests

(Refer to Section 4 / RECEIVER TESTS)

Receiver BER/BLER Test Checks the basic baseband signal processing (Static
Layer 1) functions on the uplink (MS to BTS) side of the
BTS, and checks that the BER or BLER is acceptable at
Reference Input Sensitivity level.

Absolute Sensitivity Test Measures the actual sensitivity of the transceiver by
finding the threshold at which the measured BER
deteriorates beyond the limit specified by the operator.

Access Burst Test Checks the performance of the BTS in detecting and
reporting the presence of Random Access Channel
(RACH) Requests.

RX Level Test This test checks the performance of the BTS in
measuring and reporting the level of the received signal
(RX LEV) on the uplink side of the BTS.

RX Quality Test This test checks the performance of the BTS in
measuring and reporting the quality of the received
signal (RX QUAL) on the uplink side of the BTS.

Receiver Signalling BER Test This test performs BER tests on signalling channels.

Manufacturer and BTS-Specific Tests

(Refer to Section 7 / Option Descriptions)

These features provide additional tests and controls for specific BTS types. See Section 7 for
details.

Interactive Test Mode

(Refer to Section 4 / INTERACTIVE TESTS)

Multimode This mode is useful for fault finding and diagnosis. All
the major GSM measurements are performed, and the
test runs continuously. The operator can vary the
majority of the test parameters without terminating the
test. Test results are displayed simultaneously, and are
continuously updated.

Live Tests

(Refer to Section 4 / LIVE TESTS)

RF Tests Mode Test Provides facilities for monitoring the performance of a
BTS without taking it off the air.

BTS Rx Sensitivity Test Measures the absolute sensitivity of a BTS.

A-bis Protocol Analysis Mode Provides facilities for monitoring (non-intrusive) and
recording the signal and data traffic on the A-bis.
6113 EDGE 2-7
80-0013
Section 2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2-8 6113 EDGE
80-0013


(Refer to Section 4 / SPECIAL FUNCTIONS)

Signal Generator Mode This mode allows the 6113 to operate as a signal
generator that can transmit a variety of GSM structured
signals and other signals. No signal monitoring is
performed in this mode.

Power Meter Mode This mode allows the 6113 to operate as a Power Meter
to monitor the power on a nominated channel, or to
indicate the channel that contains maximum power. No
signal monitoring is performed in this mode.

Signal Generator and Power
Meter Mode
This mode combines the functionality of both Signal
Generator Mode and Power Meter Mode, using a
common ARFCN and a common screen.

Self-Check Tests

(Refer to Section 4 / SELF-CHECK TESTS)

Self Check Burst Analysis This test analyses the burst parameters and BER of the
6113 Test Set using an internal loopback.
The test relates to the RF facilities available at the front
panel of the Test Set.

RF Tests Self Check Burst
Analysis
This test analyses the burst parameters and BER of the
6113 Test Set using an internal loopback.
The test relates to the B.O.S.S. RF facilities available at
the rear panel of the Test Set.

EDGE Self Check Burst
Analysis
This test analyses the burst parameters and BLER of the
6113 Test Set with 8PSK modulation using an internal
loopback. The test relates to the RF facilities available at
the front panel of the Test Set.

SECTION 3 PREPARATION FOR USE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page / Hyperlink

PACKAGING....................................................................................................................... 1
ACCESSORIES .................................................................................................................. 1
INSTALLATION.................................................................................................................. 1
FRONT PANEL CONNECTIONS....................................................................................... 2
RF IN / DUPLEX and RF OUT Connectors .............................................................. 3
A-bis (G703) Connectors OUT / MONITOR and IN.................................................. 3
Memory Card Interface ............................................................................................. 4
REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS.......................................................................................... 5
SYNC OUT Connector.............................................................................................. 6
RS232 Connectors COM 1 and COM 2.................................................................... 6
DEBUG Connector.................................................................................................... 7
Parallel I/O Connector............................................................................................... 7
V11 Connector .......................................................................................................... 8
IEEE 488 Connector ................................................................................................. 8
REF IN Connector..................................................................................................... 8
REF OUT Connector................................................................................................. 9
INT. STD. OUT Connector........................................................................................ 9
B.O.S.S. RF IN / DUPLEX and B.O.S.S. RF OUT Connectors ................................ 9
FREQUENCY STANDARD SELECTION......................................................................... 10
POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................................. 11
Voltage Setting........................................................................................................ 11
Equipment Power Fuse........................................................................................... 11
Power Lead............................................................................................................. 11
POWER-ON SELF CHECKS............................................................................................ 12
SOFTWARE UPDATES.................................................................................................... 13
Software Update Using a PC.................................................................................. 13
Software Update Using a PC Card ......................................................................... 13
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 14
Routine Maintenance.............................................................................................. 14
Calibration Requirements ....................................................................................... 14
Repair Procedures .................................................................................................. 15
Fitting a New Power Fuse............................................................................. 15
Cleaning The Test Set .................................................................................. 16
Cleaning the Fan Filter ................................................................................. 17
INITIAL FAILURE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE................................................................ 18
Hardware Faults...................................................................................................... 18
Does The Test Set Power Up OK?............................................................... 18
Software Faults ....................................................................................................... 18
Does The Software Work OK?..................................................................... 18
FAULT REPORTING........................................................................................................ 19

6113 EDGE 3-(i)
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

ILLUSTRATIONS

Figure Page / Hyperlink

3.1 6113 Front Panel (early models) ............................................................................... 2
3.2 6113 Front Panel ....................................................................................................... 2
3.3 Three-Pin Banana Jack Connections (balanced)...................................................... 4
3.4 6113 Rear Panel (Early Models) ............................................................................... 5
3.5 6113 Rear Panel ....................................................................................................... 5
3.6 6113 Rear Panel Showing Option 54 / 54R / 56R Fitted........................................... 6
3.7 Power Socket Assembly - Fuse Tray Closed.......................................................... 15
3.8 Power Socket Assembly - Fuse Tray Open (Side View) ......................................... 16
3.9 Fan/Filter/Filter Cover Assembly............................................................................. 17

3-(ii) 6113 EDGE
80-0013
SECTION 3 PREPARATION FOR USE

PACKAGING

The components of a Test Set are supplied as separately packaged items. .

If a Controller PC was ordered from Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions it is supplied in the
Manufacturer's packaging. .

Unpack each item carefully to avoid damage to the factory packaging. Keep the packaging for
use in case items need to be returned to Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions for calibration or
repair. Damaged packaging should not be reused. Dispose of unwanted packaging in a
responsible way in line with local regulations. .

Examine each item carefully and check that there it is no damage. .

If any component of the Test Set needs to be returned for calibration or repair, consult the local
Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions agent or the Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions Help
Desk for instructions before shipment. .

To return an item to Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions, the original packaging should be
used whenever possible. If this is not available, a strong shipping container fitted with internal
packing capable of protecting the item and preventing movement within the container must be
used. .

ACCESSORIES

The following accessories are included with the Test Set at shipment:

Description Quantity

Power lead (2 m) with plug for Country of use 1
Fuse, 3.15 amp (plus 1 spare in Power input connector) 2
6113 Digital Radio Test Set Operator Manual 1
Software Release Note (Note ) 1

Note: The software release note contains up-to-date information on new features,
possible restrictions etc.

INSTALLATION

The 6113 is a free standing Test Set that is self contained and needs no other test equipment to
perform the tests defined in this Handbook.

The Test Set power supply unit is an auto-ranging unit that will automatically adjust itself to the
power supply input. See Section 1 for the specified range of power input supply that must be
used.

A warm-up time of at least five minutes should be allowed before the unit is operational. After
this time, the Test Set reference oscillator will have stabilised. To make frequency or power
measurements to the specified accuracy, a warm-up time of 30 minutes is recommended;
alternatively, an external frequency standard that meets the required accuracies as listed in
Section 1 Technical Specification can be used.

WARNING: IF THE EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN STORED AT LOW TEMPERATURES, TIME
SHOULD BE ALLOWED FOR RECOVERY TO THE LOCAL AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE BEFORE USE. WHERE CONDENSATION OF WATER
VAPOUR IS EITHER PRESENT OR LIKELY TO BE PRESENT, ALLOW THE
EQUIPMENT TO DRY OUT BEFORE USE. CONDENSATION IS LIKELY TO
OCCUR WHEN A COLD OBJECT ENCOUNTERS A WARMER, HUMID,
ENVIRONMENT.
6113 EDGE 3-1
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

FRONT PANEL CONNECTIONS

The 6113 front panel layout is shown in Figure 3.1 (early models) and Figure 3.2.

Figure 3.1 6113 Front Panel (early models)

UNBAL BAL
UNBAL BAL

Figure 3.2 6113 Front Panel

3-2 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

RF IN / DUPLEX and RF OUT Connectors

CAUTION: (1) To prevent damage to the Test Set, the maximum power of the BTS
applied to the RF IN / DUPLEX connector should be limited by the user
to +47 dBm, using an external attenuator. (For example, a Class 4 BTS
can have a maximum power of +49 dBm and the user should insert a
3 dB external attenuator).

(2) Damage to the Test Set will result if the BTS transmitter output is
connected to the RF OUT connector on the Test Set.

RF IN / DUPLEX connector is N-type female. RF OUT connector is TNC female.

If the BTS has separate transmitter and receiver connections, the BTS transmitter output should
be connected to the RF IN / DUPLEX connector on the front panel of the Test Set. The BTS
receiver input should be connected to the Test Set RF OUT connector. This is the default
(SIMPLEX) mode (see Section 5 / BTS INFORMATION MENU for details of selecting SIMPLEX
mode at the MMI). The RF OUT LED will be lit.

If the BTS has only one (DUPLEX) Rx / Tx connector, this must be connected to the Test Set
RF IN / DUPLEX connector. 'DUPLEX' must be selected at the MMI BTS Information screen
(see Section 5 / BTS INFORMATION MENU) and the RF OUT LED wil be extinguished.

Ensure that connections are correctly made before applying RF power to the 6113.

A-bis (G703) Connectors OUT / MONITOR and IN

Note: (1) If the E1 (European standard) A-bis board is fitted, the BNC connectors of the
OUT / MONITOR and IN ports are 75 ohm impedance and the associated banana
sockets are 120 ohm impedance.

(2) If the T1 (US standard) A-bis board is fitted, the BNC connectors of the OUT /
MONITOR and IN ports are 100 ohm impedance and the associated banana
sockets are 100 ohm impedance.

(3) Only one of the A-bis standards can be fitted to the Test Set. Recognition is
automatic.

Connections to the OUT / MONITOR and IN ports of the G703 (A-bis) interface can be made via
either the BNC connectors or the banana sockets. Selection between the BNC connections or
the banana connections is made at the MMI display by selecting the BTS Information screen and
pressing the Impedance softkey to select 'Balanced' (banana) or 'Unbalanced' (BNC) options.

The BNC connectors or the banana sockets are used to connect Transmit and Receive signal
paths between the 6113 and BTS under test.

6113 EDGE 3-3
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

1 2 3
1 2 3
BAL
BAL
OUT / MONITOR
IN
1
2

PIN OUT / MONITOR IN
1 Chassis earth No connection (Early models)
Chassis earth (1996 models onwards)
2 Tip Tip
3 Ring Ring

Figure 3.3 Three-Pin Banana Jack Connections (balanced)

The OUT/MONITOR LED (UNBAL or BAL) is continuously illuminated when a 2 Mbit/s (1.544
Mbit/s T1) clock is being generated, and the IN LED (UNBAL or BAL) flashes when a valid
2 Mbit/s (1.544 Mbit/s T1) clock signal is applied (it remains on steady when no input signal is
present).

Memory Card Interface

CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge can damage electronic equipment. Touch a
grounded metal object before handling the memory card.

This is a PC Card (PCMCIA) interface version 2.00. The dual socket supports SRAM cards,
Flash EEPROM cards or Hard Disk Drive cards (to PC ATA standard), as follows:

One or two Type I cards
One or two Type II cards, or
One Type III card

Insert a Memory Card in one or both of the two Memory Card sockets (A or B) as required.

Note: Due to the general nature of the PCMCIA standard, there is some variation between
cards made by different manufacturers. Users are advised to test a particular card for
compatibility before bulk purchase. The following PCMCIA Cards are approved for use
with the 6113 Test Set and are available from Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions:

Option Description Manufacturer Remarks
77 Memory Card
(2 Mbyte)
Centennial SRAM type (rechargeable
battery - recharges in
socket).
78 Flash Memory Card
(10 Mbyte)
Sandisk
79
Removeable Hard Disk(260 Mbyte)
Calluna
3-4 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS

The 6113 rear panel layout is shown in Figures 3.4 and Figure 3.5.

Note: The output link from INT.STD.OUT connector is shown connected to the REF IN
connector. Refer to the heading INT. STD. OUT Connector for information about this
connection.

Figure 3.4 6113 Rear Panel (Early Models)

AC IN
45-66 Hz
225 VA MAX

Figure 3.5 6113 Rear Panel
6113 EDGE 3-5
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

B.O.S.S. - OPTION 54
B.O.S.S. RF OUT
B.O.S.S.
RF IN / DUPLEX
0.3 W RMS MAX
REVERSE POWER
0.1 W RMS MAX
AC IN
45-66 Hz
225 VA MAX

Figure 3.6 6113 Rear Panel Showing Option 54 / 54R / 56R Fitted

SYNC OUT Connector

This output provides a programmable TTL level signal for synchronising an external spectrum
analyser or logic analyser. Connection is via a BNC socket.

On and Off times are selectable on any position within a frame (specified by bit positions) with
1/16 bit resolution.

All outputs are active high, i.e. output goes high at start of defined period.

Default state for all outputs: Low

Output voltage swing Low: < 0.5 V (max sink current 5 mA)
(each output): High: > 4.0 V (max source current 5 mA)

The 13 MHz output from the internal frequency standard can also be routed to this output.

RS232 Connectors COM 1 and COM 2

These two connectors provide access to the RS232 interface. They can also be allocated to the
following functions:

Printer
Code Download

Both connectors are 9 pin D-type (male). Standard PC RS232 connection cables should be
used; these can be ordered from Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions:

Option 90 RS232 to PC cable
Option 91 RS232 to Printer

3-6 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

The pinout connections for the connectors are:

COM 1 COM 2

Pin Function Pin Function
1 CD 1 CD
2 RX 2 RX
3 TX 3 TX
4 DTR 4 DTR
5 Ground 5 Ground
6 DSR 6 DSR
7 RTS 7 RTS
8 CTS 8 CTS
9 Spare 9 Spare

Both interfaces are configurable, and the default configuration is the 'three wire' type interface
using Xon/Xoff flow control. The following parameters may be selected:

Baud Rate : 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and
115200
Number of data bits : 7, 8
Parity : None, even, odd, MARK, SPACE
Number of stop bits : 0, 1, 2

DEBUG Connector

(Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions Use Only)

Parallel I/O Connector

This is a standard parallel interface port that is used for attaching a printer to the Test Set.

Connector Type: 25-way D-type (female)

Pinout Connections:

Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 STROBE 10 ACK
2 D0 11 BUSY
3 D1 12 PE
4 D2 13 SLCT
5 D3 14 AUTOFD
6 D4 15 ERROR
7 D5 16 INIT
8 D6 17 SLIN
9 D7 18 to 25 GROUND

A standard parallel printer cable can be used. This is available from Racal Instruments Wireless
Solutions as Option 92.

6113 EDGE 3-7
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

V11 Connector

Two standard V11 ports are provided at the V11 connector; they may be used for customer-
specific applications. See Section 7 for details relevant to a particular manufacturer-specific
Option.

Connector Type: 25-way D-type (male)

Pinout Connections:

CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2

2 RXN1 8 RXN2
14 RXP1 20 RXP2
16 TXN1 22 TXN2
3 TXP1 9 TXP2
5 FSN1 11 FSN2
17 FSP1 23 FSP2
19 CKN1 25 CKN2
6 CKP1 12 CKP2

Ground: Pins 1, 4, 7, 10, 13, 15, 18, 21, 24

IEEE 488 Connector

This is a standard GPIB interface port which may be used for external control of the Test Set
from a GPIB controller.

Connector Type: 24-way IEEE 488 (female)

Pinout Connections:

1 D1 10 SRQ
2 D2 11 ATN
3 D3 12 GROUND
4 D4 13 D5
5 EOI 14 D6
6 DAV 15 D7
7 NRFD 16 D8
8 NDAC 17 REN
9 IFC 18 to 24 GROUND

Good quality double-screened GPIB cables should be used.

REF IN Connector

The input to this port is either 10 MHz or 13 MHz.

Connector Type: BNC (female)

(See heading FREQUENCY STANDARD SELECTION for further details).

3-8 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

REF OUT Connector

The output from this port is a buffered version of the signal received at the REF IN connector
(see heading FREQUENCY STANDARD SELECTION for further details).


INT. STD. OUT Connector

The output from this connector is a 10 MHz signal from the internal frequency standard. If this
signal is required for internal use it is linked to the RF IN connector using the link supplied. (See
heading FREQUENCY STANDARD SELECTION for further details).


B.O.S.S. RF IN / DUPLEX and B.O.S.S. RF OUT Connectors

Note: If Option 54 / 54R or Option 56R is fitted, these connectors should be used instead of
the front panel connectors RF IN / DUPLEX and RF OUT when RF Tests Mode
(B.O.S.S.) is being used.

CAUTION: (1) For normal specified operation, the BTS signal power applied to the
B.O.S.S. RF IN / DUPLEX connector should be no greater than 0 dBm.

(2) To prevent damage to the Test Set, the maximum power of the BTS
signal applied to the B.O.S.S. RF IN / DUPLEX connector should be
limited by the user to +20 dBm.

(2) Damage to the Test Set will result if the BTS transmitter output is
connected to the B.O.S.S. RF OUT connector on the Test Set.

B.O.S.S. RF IN / DUPLEX connector is SMA female. B.O.S.S. RF OUT connector is TNC
female.

If the BTS has separate transmitter and receiver connections, the BTS transmitter monitor port
should be connected to the B.O.S.S. RF IN / DUPLEX connector on the rear panel of the Test
Set. The BTS receiver monitor port input should be connected to the Test Set B.O.S.S. RF OUT
connector. This is the default (SIMPLEX) mode (see Section 5 / BTS INFORMATION MENU for
details of selecting B.O.S.S. SIMPLEX mode at the MMI).

If the BTS has only one (DUPLEX) Rx / Tx monitor connector, this must be connected to the
Test Set B.O.S.S. RF IN / DUPLEX connector. 'B.O.S.S. DUPLEX' must be selected at the MMI
BTS Information screen (see Section 5 / BTS INFORMATION MENU).

Ensure that connections are correctly made before applying RF power to the 6113.

6113 EDGE 3-9
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

FREQUENCY STANDARD SELECTION

There are two frequency standard Options available for the 6113 Test Set:

04E
04F

Unless otherwise specified, Option 04E is supplied as standard. Both options have an on-board
precision reference 10 MHz oscillator and a 13 MHz oscillator from which internal 13 MHz
signals are derived.

An output from the precision reference 10 MHz oscillator is available at the REF OUT connector
on the rear panel.

Note: Reference frequency sources are pre-calibrated and should not be adjusted because
this will invalidate the instrument Calibration.

If adjustment of the frequency reference is required, the Test Set should be returned to
Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions or approved Service Centre for calibration.

The 13 MHz oscillator can be phase-locked to either a 10 MHz reference signal, or a 13 MHz
reference signal, which must be connected to the REF IN connector.

(1) To phase lock the 13 MHz oscillator to a 10 MHz signal, use the Test Set Settings option
from the Self Tests / System Menu (see Section 5) to select '10 MHz' mode of operation.
The 10 MHz signal can be derived from an external customer-supplied source, or from the
internal 10 MHz oscillator (by linking REF OUT to REF IN using the link supplied).

(2) To phase lock the 13 MHz oscillator to a 13 MHz signal, use the Test Set Settings option
from the Self Tests / System Menu (see Section 5) to select '13 MHz' mode of operation.
The 13 MHz signal must be derived from an external customer-supplied source.

Note: If an external frequency reference is used, it must conform to the specification defined in
Section 1 Technical Specification otherwise the performance of the Test Set may be
impaired.

3-10 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

POWER SUPPLY

Voltage Setting

The Test Set power supply unit is an auto-ranging unit that senses the voltage and frequency of
the supply input and automatically adjusts the output to the correct voltage. No selection or
adjustment by the user is necessary.

A.C. power applied to the Test Set can be in the following ranges:

Voltage: 85 - 130 V a.c. or 180 - 264 V a.c.

Frequency: 45 - 66 Hz

The Power ON/OFF switch is on the front panel.

Equipment Power Fuse

The power fuse holder is incorporated in the power input plug unit. Before attempting to remove
or fit a fuse, ensure that the Test Set is switched OFF and the power lead is disconnected from
the power input plug.

The fuse is a 5 mm x 20 mm glass cartridge, surge-resist type. The fuse ratings are as follows:

Voltage Range Fuse Type Rating Racal Part Number
85 - 130 V IEC 60127, Sheet 3 3.15AT 250 V 23-0025
180 - 264 V IEC 60127, Sheet 3 3.15AT 250 V 23-0025

The Test Set is normally supplied fitted with a 3.15 A fuse for use on both ranges. A spare fuse
is also stored in the fuse holder. (Instructions for changing a fuse are given under the heading
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE at the end of this Section).

WARNING: DO NOT USE FUSES OF A DIFFERENT SPECIFICATION.

Power Lead

A power lead, together with a plug for the Country of use, is supplied for use with the Test Set.
If this lead is used in the UK, a 5 A fuse should be fitted in the power plug. The socket
connector that mates to the Test Set is a right-angle connector to allow the Test Set to stand on
its rear feet.

6113 EDGE 3-11
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

POWER-ON SELF CHECKS

The POWER ON/OFF switch on the front panel is a two-position button switch. When the
switch is set to ON, the Test Set goes through an automatic start-up procedure and
automatically runs the start-up self tests. After approximately 2 seconds the display is initialised
and the screen displays test information as each test runs. At the end of the test sequence, the
GSM logo is displayed and then, after a short pause, the MMI main menu is displayed.

If a failure is detected during start-up, the BITE (built in test equipment) failure indication given to
the operator will depend upon the phase of start-up in which it is detected. There are three
distinct phases of start-up, before the application software is activated:

Hard Boot
Soft Boot
Self Checks

During the Hard Boot phase, a detected failure is indicated by a series of 'beeps' on the buzzer,
as shown below.

Test Failure Indication
Boot PROM check sum Buzzer (10 beeps)
SCSI Controller Buzzer (9 beeps)
Internal Processor Functions Buzzer (2 beeps)
DRAM checks Buzzer (3 beeps)
Flash Boot Code check sum Buzzer (4 beeps)

Note: If one of these failure indications occurs, the unit is unserviceable and should be
switched off and returned to Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions or an approved
Service Centre.

When the Hard Boot phase is completed, the Soft Boot phase commences and carries out an
extensive series of self checks before application software is downloaded and initiated.

During the Soft Boot phase, progress of the self checks is shown in two successive tables which
appear on the Test Set display, as illustrated below.

Power Up Tests
Internal QUICC Peripherals
PLD Configuration
Key Pad
Main DRAM Check

Power Up Tests Continued....
Serial EEPROM Checksums
Application Code Checksums
Base Band Processor Boot Code Self Checks
Download of Base Band Processor code
A-bis Processor Boot Code Self Checks
Download of A-bis Processor Code
Initialising Main Processor Code

3-12 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

Note: (1) When each test is successfully completed a appears in the right hand column.

(2) If a test fails, an X is shown instead in the right hand column. Instructions telling
the user what to do are presented as lines of text at the bottom of the table.

When the Self Checks are completed (with no failures), the Main Menu screen is displayed and
the operator can begin to use the MMI facilities; however, the warm-up period must be complete
(as described above under the heading INSTALLATION) before testing a BTS.

SOFTWARE UPDATES

As additional features become available on the Test Set, new versions of the Software will be
distributed to holders of software support contracts. (Users who do not currently have a Racal
Instruments Wireless Solutions Support Contract can purchase one at any time from Racal
Instruments Wireless Solutions or approved Agent). Each new release will be supplied on floppy
discs together with a Software Release Note that gives details of changes since the previous
release and instructions on performing the download. A PC and RS232 cable (see heading -
RS232 Connectors COM 1 and COM 2 for cable description), or GPIB cable, to connect the PC
to the Test Set are necessary to accomplish the update; a PC Card memory card can be used
to to reduce the time taken to transfer the code to the Test Set.

Software Update Using a PC

Use an RS232 cable to connect the PC to the COM1 port on the Test Set, or a GPIB cable to
connect the PC to the IEE 488 connector on the Test Set.

A software utility is supplied with the new software to download the software from floppy disc via
drive C: to the Test Set. Follow the instructions provided in the Software Release Note.

Note: This procedure can take nearly an hour to perform.

Software Update Using a PC Card

The new software is supplied as BIN files, which may be copied to a DOS or Windows 95
formatted PC Card memory card.

To load the software from the PC Card to the Test Set, insert the PC Card in one of the slots in
the front panel and follow the instructions provided in the Software Release Note.

6113 EDGE 3-13
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

The 6113 is modular in design to enable ease of servicing to either module or component level.
However, users are invited to take advantage of the repair and calibration services offered by
Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions and their worldwide network of support centres.

Routine Maintenance

(1) Every month the fan filter should be checked, and cleaned if necessary (see Repair
Procedures).

(2) Every twelve months the fan filter should be replaced (Racal Instruments Wireless
Solutions Part No. 24-0262) (see Repair Procedures).

(3) After 5 to 7 years approximately, depending on usage, it may be necessary to replace the
LCD backlight in the front panel display. The Test Set must be returned to Racal
Instruments Wireless Solutions or to an approved Service Agent for this work to be done.

(4) After 8 years service it may be necessary to replace the frequency standard if the tuning
range becomes too restricted for calibration. The Test Set must be returned to Racal
Instruments Wireless Solutions or to an approved Service Agent for this work to be done.

(5) Every ten years the lithium battery for non-volatile memory should be replaced. The Test
Set must be returned to Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions or to an approved Service
Agent for this work to be done.

Calibration Requirements

The 6113 Test Set should be returned to Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions, or approved
Service Agent, for calibration once a year.

3-14 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

Repair Procedures

Fitting a New Power Fuse

WARNING: LETHAL VOLTAGES MAY BE PRESENT. BEFORE REPLACING A FUSE,
ENSURE THAT THE TEST SET AND POWER SUPPLY ARE SWITCHED OFF
AND THE POWER CABLE IS DISCONNECTED FROM THE TEST SET.

(1) Using a screwdriver or suitable small instrument, prise forward the fuse tray from the
power socket assembly, as shown in Figure 3.7 and Figure 3.8.

Note that the first slot in the tray holds a spare fuse (as supplied) and the second slot
(nearest the power socket assembly) holds the fuse in use.

(2) Check that the spare fuse is of the correct rating, as shown in the following table.

Voltage Range Fuse Type Rating Racal Part Number
85 - 130 V IEC 60127, Sheet 3 3.15AT 250 V 23-0025
180 - 264 V IEC 60127, Sheet 3 3.15AT 250 V 23-0025

Remove the fuse in use and replace it with the spare fuse, then push the fuse tray back
into place.

(3) Ascertain the cause of the failure and repair as necessary before next power-up.

SOCKET FOR MAINS PLUG
FUSE TRAY
INSERT SCREWDRIVER HERE
TO OPEN FUSE TRAY

Figure 3.7 Power Socket Assembly - Fuse Tray Closed

6113 EDGE 3-15
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

FUSE IN USE
SPARE FUSE

Figure 3.8 Power Socket Assembly - Fuse Tray Open (Side View)

Cleaning The Test Set

The 6113 Test Set should be cleaned as follows:

(1) Ensure that the Test Set is switched OFF and disconnected from the power supply and
other equipment.

(2) If the Test Set has recently been used and the case is warm, wait until it cools to
approximately ambient temperature.

(3) Using a clean damp cloth, wipe the Test Set carefully and thoroughly to remove dust and
grime. Take care to avoid ingress of moisture into connectors, keys, buttons, slots, etc.

(4) Wipe the Test Set dry with a clean dry cloth and/or wait until it is completely dry before
reconnecting it to the power supply and other equipment.

3-16 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

Cleaning the Fan Filter

Fan
Filter
Filter Cover

Figure 3.9 Fan/Filter/Filter Cover Assembly

The diagram above illustrates the fan, filter and filter cover assembly. The procedure for
cleaning the filter, or fitting a new filter, is as follows:

(1) Ensure that the Test Set is switched OFF and disconnected from the power supply and
other equipment.

(2) Release the four clips holding the filter cover on the fan and then carefully remove the
filter cover from the fan.

(3) Remove and clean the filter. Wash it in soapy water, rinse, and allow it to dry thoroughly.

(4) Place the filter back inside the filter cover and refit the cover on the fan.

6113 EDGE 3-17
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE

INITIAL FAILURE DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE

Before reporting problems with the 6113 Test Set, try to answer the following questions. Some
of the more common faults can be rectified by working through this procedure.

Hardware Faults

Does The Test Set Power Up OK?

(1) If nothing is displayed on the screen, check that the power fuses are OK.

(2) Vary the display contrast control and check that a control screen is displayed.

(3) Are the boot check screens displayed?

(4) Are all the boot check tests ticked '' as Pass?

(5) Are any of the boot check tests crossed 'X' as Fail?

(6) If all the boot check tests Pass, is the Main Menu screen displayed?

(7) Do the Self Tests pass? (Operate the Self Tests button in the Self Tests / System Menu
and then run the Self Tests).

Software Faults

Does The Software Work OK?

(1) Operate the control buttons on the Main Menu - do they all cause a response?

(2) Does the display start OK and then become corrupted?

(3) Are there any error/status messages?.

(4) What are the tests and actions that preceded the problem?.

(5) Is the failure repeatable? If so what are the steps?

(6) Is there a work-around that you have discovered?

3-18 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 3
PREPARATION FOR USE
6113 EDGE 3-19
80-0013

FAULT REPORTING

If problems are found with the operation of the 6113 software or hardware (that are not caused
by an obvious hardware failure) or with this manual, a Problem Report Sheet should be copied,
filled in, and faxed to the Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions Help Desk at the number quoted
on the sheet. A blank Problem Report Sheet can be found at the end of this Manual.

Please ensure that the Problem Report Sheet includes the following information:

(1) Customer Company Name and Location.

(2) Name of person reporting the problem.

(3) Unit serial number (marked on the rear of the Test Set).

(4) Current Software Issue in use
(i.e. Unit Software Version and
Software Versions: MAIN, BBP, DSP, Abis, Hardboot, Softboot).

(5) A full description of the problem, including details of whether the fault is continuous or
occasional, what operations preceded the occurrence of the fault, and any other relevant
information.

(6) Date.

(7) Severity of the fault (i.e. causes Test Set to become non-functional, causes some tests to
become non-functional, causes a test or part test to become non-functional, etc).

When the Problem Report Sheet is received, Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions will reply as
soon as possible with a faxed Response Sheet. If further investigation is required, another
Response Sheet will be generated when the problem has been cured.

6113 EDGE 4-(i)
80-0013
SECTION 4 TEST INFORMATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page / Hyperlink

INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................. 1
Radio System............................................................................................................ 1
A-bis Interface Impedance Control ........................................................................... 1
A-bis Controlled Tests............................................................................................... 2
Live Tests.................................................................................................................. 3
Date And Time.......................................................................................................... 3
NOTES ON A-bis-CONTROLLED TESTING .................................................................... 4
Channel Modes......................................................................................................... 4
A-bis Interface........................................................................................................... 4
Air Interface............................................................................................................... 6
BTS Power Control ................................................................................................... 6
Synchronisation to the BTS....................................................................................... 7
Standard Test Conditions ......................................................................................... 7
Hopping Tables......................................................................................................... 7
General Test Parameters ......................................................................................... 8
A-bis Settings.......................................................................................................... 16
A-bis Mapping Table............................................................................................... 16
Measurement Mode and Measurement Mode Override......................................... 16
Bit/Frame Error Ratio Measurements ..................................................................... 17
Block Error Ratio Measurements (BLER) - GPRS.................................................. 18
Block Error Ratio Measurements (BLER) - EGPRS............................................... 19
TCH Format Parameter .......................................................................................... 20
Test Patterns........................................................................................................... 23
Parameters - General ............................................................................................. 24
NOTES ON LIVE TESTING.............................................................................................. 25
Encryption ............................................................................................................... 25
Use of External Splitter/Combiners......................................................................... 25
Use of External 10dB Attenuator ............................................................................ 25
The Use of PMPs (Protected Monitor Points) ......................................................... 25
Display Of Traffic Channels In The RF Scan Table................................................ 26
Use of IMEI ............................................................................................................. 26
Use of Test Numbers.............................................................................................. 26
Selection of Bandwidth............................................................................................ 26
Use of Display Holding............................................................................................ 26
Use of TCH Power Tracking................................................................................... 27
RF Tests (B.O.S.S.) Mode...................................................................................... 27
NOTES ON CELL INTEGRITY TESTING AND ANALYSIS ............................................ 32
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 32
Additional Features ................................................................................................. 32
LIST OF TESTS................................................................................................................ 33
Functional Tests...................................................................................................... 33
Transmitter Tests.................................................................................................... 33
Receiver Tests........................................................................................................ 34
Manufacturer and BTS-Specific Tests.................................................................... 34
Interactive Test Mode ............................................................................................. 34
Live Tests................................................................................................................ 34
Special Functions Mode.......................................................................................... 35
Self-Check Tests .................................................................................................... 35
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-(ii) 6113 EDGE
80-0013

FUNCTIONAL TESTS....................................................................................................... 36
Configure BTS Test................................................................................................. 36
Reset BTS Test ....................................................................................................... 36
Cell Integrity Test .................................................................................................... 37
TRANSMITTER TESTS GSM MEASUREMENT MODE.................................................. 38
Cell Control Channel Generation Test .................................................................... 38
Transmitter Test GSM Measurement Mode............................................................ 40
Transmitter BER Test GSM Measurement Mode ................................................... 45
Static Power Control Test........................................................................................ 47
Downlink Power Control Test GSM Measurement Mode........................................ 49
TRANSMITTER TESTS EDGE MEASUREMENT MODE................................................ 51
Transmitter Test EDGE Measurement Mode.......................................................... 53
Transmitter BLER Test EDGE Measurement Mode ............................................... 58
RECEIVER TESTS GSM MEASUREMENT MODE......................................................... 60
Receiver BER Test GSM Measurement Mode ....................................................... 60
Absolute Sensitivity Test GSM Measurement Mode............................................... 63
Access Burst Test GSM Measurement Mode......................................................... 65
RX Level Test GSM Measurement Mode ............................................................... 67
RX Quality Test GSM Measurement Mode............................................................. 69
Receiver Signalling BER Test GSM Measurement Mode....................................... 71
RECEIVER TESTS GPRS MEASUREMENT MODE....................................................... 73
Receiver BLER Test GPRS Measurement Mode ................................................... 73
Absolute Sensitivity Test GPRS Measurement Mode............................................. 76
Access Burst Test GPRS Measurement Mode....................................................... 78
RECEIVER TESTS EDGE MEASUREMENT MODE....................................................... 80
Receiver BLER Test EDGE Measurement Mode ................................................... 80
Absolute Sensitivity Test EDGE Measurement Mode............................................. 83
Access Burst Test EDGE Measurement Mode....................................................... 85
INTERACTIVE TESTS...................................................................................................... 87
Multimode GSM Measurement Mode ..................................................................... 87
LIVE TESTS...................................................................................................................... 90
RF Tests Mode Test................................................................................................ 90
BTS Rx Sensitivity Test........................................................................................... 95
A-bis Protocol Analysis Mode.................................................................................. 96
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS................................................................................................... 102
Signal Generator Mode ......................................................................................... 102
Power Meter Mode................................................................................................ 104
Signal Generator and Power Meter Mode............................................................. 106
SELF CHECK TESTS..................................................................................................... 107
Self Check Burst Analysis ..................................................................................... 107
RF Tests Self Check Burst Analysis ..................................................................... 109
EDGE Self Check Burst Analysis.......................................................................... 111

CELL INTEGRITY TESTING AND ANALYSIS .................................................... ANNEX A

ILLUSTRATIONS

4.1 RF Tests Operation - Block Diagram ........................................................................ 91
4.2 A-bis Protocol Analysis Mode Configuration.............................................................. 97

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-(iii)
80-0013

TABLES
Table Page / Hyperlink

4.1 Standard Test Patterns ............................................................................................. 23
4.2 Log File Format ......................................................................................................... 99
4.3 Signal Formats ........................................................................................................ 103

SECTION 4 TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-1
80-0013

INTRODUCTION

The 6113 Digital Radio Test Set can perform off-air A-bis controlled tests on a BTS when it is
disconnected from the operational network, and on-air live tests when the BTS is connected to
the network and processing live traffic.

In addition, the 6113 can be used to emulate the network in order to thoroughly test an entire cell
site. This is done with the cell in operational mode but isolated from the remainder of the
network.

WARNING: CERTAIN TESTS (E.G CELL CONTROL CHANNEL GENERATION TEST, AND
MULTIMODE) CAN LEAVE THE BTS IN A STATE IN WHICH IT WILL
CONTINUE TO TRANSMIT UNTIL THE TEST IS ABORTED BY THE
OPERATOR. ALL DUE ATTENTION MUST BE PAID TO ENSURING THAT
THE TEST IS STOPPED AT AN APPROPRIATE TIME, AND THAT THE BTS
HAS STOPPED TRANSMITTING.

DO NOT DISCONNECT ANY RF CABLES UNTIL THE TEST IS COMPLETE
OR HAS BEEN ABORTED AND THE BTS HAS STOPPED TRANSMITTING.

Radio System

The following Radio Systems can be tested when the appropriate Options are loaded. The
selection is made in the BTS Information / Radio System option of the Main Menu.

Parameter Name Default Value Range
Radio System E-GSM 900 GSM 850
E-GSM 900
GSM 900 + GSM-R
DCS 1800
PCS 1900
Multi-band (GSM 850) (Note)
Multi-band (E-GSM 900) (Note)
Multi-band (DCS 1800) (Note)
Multi-band (PCS 1900) (Note)

Note: Not available for LIVE TESTS.

A-bis Interface Impedance Control

The Test Set A-bis interface has two modes of operation:

Low impedance mode
High impedance mode.

For A-bis Controlled tests, the interface is automatically set to low impedance (because the BTS
is disconnected from the Network and the Test Set is in complete control of the BTS).

For Live Tests mode, the interface is set to high impedance (because it is used to monitor the
link between a BTS and a BSC in an operational Network, without disrupting the link).

On power-up, the Test Set A-bis Interface is internally disconnected and so is in a safe state.
The interface is set to high impedance when Live Tests mode is selected at the MMI, and it is
set to low impedance when A-bis Controlled Tests or Test Sequences is selected. The
impedance is not changed when returning to the Main Menu.

A WARNING message is displayed before the interface is set to low impedance to instruct the
operator to disconnect the Test Set A-bis from the BTS to BSC link, to avoid accidental
disruption of the link.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-2 6113 E DGE
80-0013

A-bis Controlled Tests

The 6113 is designed to test one transceiver in a BTS at a time. All A-bis controlled tests are
aimed at verifying correct operation of the BTS hardware.

Before performance testing of the BTS is undertaken, the following actions are performed:

(1) After switching on the 6113, allow at least 5 minutes warm-up before commencing tests.
If frequency measurements are to be made, allow at least 30 minutes warm-up before
commencing tests.

(2) The parameters of the BTS under test must be entered via the BTS Information Menu on
the Test Set (see Section 5).

(3) The mapping of A-bis timeslots to the transceivers to be tested and the BCF (if relevant)
is defined. (See Section 7).

(4) Certain A-bis Timeslot zero parameters can be set up if required (see Section 7).

(5) Operational software and any other configuration data is downloaded to the BTS. (See
Section 7).

When the actions in (1) to (5) above have been performed, then testing can commence.
The following actions are performed at the start of each test:

(6) The 6113 establishes A-bis (LAPD) signalling links to the BCF and the Transceiver under
test.

(7) The 6113 commands the BTS to activate a Cell Control Channel (CCH) at a defined
frequency and level.

(8) The 6113 synchronises to the CCH.

(9) If necessary for the particular test to be performed, the 6113 then clears the CCH
configuration and reconfigures the BTS to generate only Traffic Channels.

(10) The 6113 then activates a Traffic Channel (TCH) on a single timeslot at the same
frequency and level, and begins to source and sink traffic over the A-bis and Air
Interfaces.

(11) The 6113 establishes an Air Interface signalling (LAPDm) link, and verifies that the BTS
indicates establishment of an Air Interface link by means of messages sent across the
A-bis Interface. Initially, this link is established at a signal level of -40 dBm on the uplink
path from 6113 to BTS. Once the link is established, the BTS receiver signal level is
reduced to that specified in the test.

The 6113 then performs the required test, by analysing data received over the A-bis Interface
and Air Interface.

At the end of each test, the BTS will generally be left in the 'Idle' state.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-3
80-0013

Live Tests

Live Tests are designed to monitor the performance of a BTS without taking it off the air. If a
deterioration is observed, the BTS can then be taken off the air for maintenance in a planned
and controlled manner, and the performance verified using the full set of A-bis controlled tests
before returning it to operational service. For Live Tests (non-intrusive) mode of testing, the
following actions must be performed. All other preparations for Live Tests are described under
the heading NOTES ON LIVE TESTING later in this Section.

After switching on the 6113, allow at least 5 minutes warm-up before commencing tests. If
frequency measurements are to be made, allow at least 30 minutes warm-up before
commencing tests.

Date And Time

Date

Date is displayed and represented in the format DD MMM YY, where DD = day, MMM = month,
YY = year. For example:

04 OCT 97

In all instances of a two-digit year, the inference rules are as follows:

Abbreviated Format Full Format

80 to 99 1980 to 1999
00 to 79 2000 to 2079

Time

Time is displayed and represented in the format HH : MM : SS, where HH = Hour, MM = Minute,
SS = Second. For example:

14 : 23 : 59

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-4 6113 E DGE
80-0013

NOTES ON A-bis-CONTROLLED TESTING

Channel Modes

Both the A-bis and the Air Interfaces are capable of supporting the full range of channel modes
for Static Layer-1 tests.

Encryption (an optional enhancement) may be specified for all Receiver Tests except Rx Level
and Rx Quality.

The Test Set will accommodate either combined or non-combined CCHs; only the FCCH, SCH
and BCCH (containing the System Information messages) are required to be present for the
6113 to synchronise. Since these channels appear in identical places for combined and non-
combined CCHs, the 6113 will work with either. However, where relevant the combined format
is used.

A-bis Interface

Two types of A-bis board may be fitted:

E1 (European standard, 2.048 Mbit/s data rate)
T1 (USA standard, 1.554 Mbit/s data rate)

Note: Only one type of A-bis board may be fitted at any one time.

The Test Set emulates the BTS-BSC interface, both in order to control the BTS during testing
and to transmit, receive and validate traffic.

A-bis Layer 1

The 6113 Test Set supports the A-bis link specified in GSM recommendation 08.54, at a data
rate of 2.048 Mbit/s (1.554 Mbit/s for T1).

The Test Set supports sub-multiplexing of 64 kbit/s traffic channels to 4 x 16 kbit/s, as specified
in GSM recommendation 08.54. Traffic frame structure and handling is as specified in
recommendation GSM 08.60. The Test Set does not support local speech transcoding within
the BTS.

Signalling is supported at 64 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s and 16 kbit/s rates.

The Test Set supports 2 signalling channels and 1 traffic channel simultaneously on the A-bis
interface. The timeslots or sub slots assigned to signalling and those assigned to traffic are
selectable to allow individual transceivers within the BTS under test to be addressed.

CRC4, together with associated E-bits, and the static state of bits 3 to 8 transmitted by the 6113
in the non-frame alignment signal frame of timeslot zero can be individually controlled as
required (E1 A-bis only).

T1 A-bis frame format can be set to either D3/D4 or ESF mode, as required by the BTS setup.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-5
80-0013

A-bis Layer 2

Data Link Layer support on the A-bis interface is to GSM recommendation 08.56 (essentially
LAPD) with modifications as required by certain BTSs. Terminal end-point identifiers (TEIs) can
be used (where required) to address specific transceivers within the BTS.

A-bis Layer 3

Layer 3 support on the A-bis interface is to GSM recommendation 08.58, to the extent necessary
for testing of basic BTS functionality.

The values of Rx Level and Rx Quality reported by the BTS on the A-bis interface are displayed
to the user on the MMI screen.

Customer-Specific Layer-3 Messages

Certain Layer-3 signalling procedures on the A-bis interface (specifically the use of O + M
messages) are specific to the manufacturer of the BTS, and they can also vary depending on
the version of the BTS. The 6113 contains the necessary software to accommodate such
variations. Details of these variations are given in Section 7 of this Handbook.

All error messages generated by the BTS are received by the Test Set. However, only error
messages relevant to the test being run will be displayed on the MMI screen.

Timeslot Mapping

The mapping of traffic and signalling channels on the air interface to timeslots on the A-bis
interface is BTS-manufacturer specific.

The A-bis 'mapping table' that is provided for this purpose is checked at the start of testing for
consistency.

To assist in the definition of the mapping, each transceiver is allocated an 'identifier' (ID). This
(non-GSM defined) parameter acts as a 'label' to point to a particular mapping of A-bis slots.

Other Interfaces

Other interfaces are provided in the 6113 for use with the BTSs of certain manufacturers. For
further details, refer to the relevant Option in Section 7.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-6 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Air Interface

The Test Set emulates the basic functions of a Mobile Station (MS) on the MS-BSS air interface.

Only a subset of the normal Mobile Station (MS) functions (those that are required for test
purposes) are emulated.

The Test Set contains one transmitter which is used to generate a traffic channel for the BTS
receiver and simulates a MS by generating a pulsed signal on the nominated slot, with other
slots disabled.

When tests are being conducted on the BTS transmitter, signals to the BTS receiver are
maintained to simulate a normal connection to an MS. Similarly, when testing the BTS receiver,
the BTS transmitter is instructed to generate bursts as usual. Uplink and downlink LAPDm
signalling links are maintained throughout any tests (the only exception to this is the Cell Control
Channel Generation test, where a LAPDm link is not established).

The value of timing advance commanded by the BTS is used and acted on by the 6113.

SACCH Data

The SACCH data transmitted to the BTS by the 6113 mimics that produced by a real mobile,
including a 'dummy' measurement report, containing the following information (as defined in
GSM Rec. 04.08, section 10.5.2.11):

BA-USED : 0
DTX-USED : 0
RXLEV-FULL-SERVING-CELL : 7
RXLEV-SUB-SERVING-CELL : 0
MEAS-VALID : 0
RXQUAL-FULL-SERVING-CELL : 0
RXQUAL-SUB-SERVING-CELL : 0
NO-NCELL-M : 0
RXLEV-NCELL-1..7 : all 0
BCCH-FREQ-NCELL-1..7 : all 0
BSIC-NCELL-1..7 : all 0

Unlike a 'real' mobile, the 6113 transmits a dummy burst during the TCH idle frame.

BTS Power Control

The MAXimum BTS Power Level is defined by the user in the Configure BTS test. It is entered
by the user in dBm. All tests allow the BTS Transmitter Power Level to be set in the range MAX
and Levels 1 to 6. Power Level 1 is then 2 dB below MAX, Power Level 2 is 4 dB below MAX,
etc.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to the Test Set, the maximum power of the BTS should
be limited by the user to +47 dBm, using an external attenuator. For
example, a Class 4 BTS can have a maximum power of +49 dBm and the
user should insert a 3 dB external attenuator.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-7
80-0013

Synchronisation to the BTS

It is essential that the Test Set and BTS are initially synchronised in time to ensure that the BTS
and Test Set frame structures are locked. Frequency synchronisation is useful but not essential
to assessing the frequency error of the BTS without taking into account the frequency error of
the 6113 frequency standard.

For the purpose of initial time synchronisation, the Test Set timebase (i.e. frame structure) must
be synchronised to the BTS. At the beginning of each test, therefore, the Test Set emulates a
mobile and synchronises to a Cell Control Channel generated by the BTS (under the command
of the Test Set). During the test, the 6113 periodically adjusts its timebase to maintain
synchronisation.

If required, frequency synchronisation can be easily achieved if the BTS locks to the 2.048 Mbit/s
A-bis link from the Test Set (this is phase-locked to the Test Set frequency standard). If this is
not possible, the 6113 can be locked to a 10 or 13 MHz signal generated from the BTS.

Note that if a 10 MHz or 13 MHz signal from the BTS does not have adequate phase noise and
spurious performance then certain measurements made by the 6113 can be affected. Consult
Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions for more details.

Standard Test Conditions

The majority of tests are performed using a standard set of test conditions.

Functional tests, and any tests that are designed to test the digital or transmitter hardware of the
BTS, use a relatively strong signal level on the uplink (i.e. Test Set to BTS) designed to ensure
error-free communication between the Test Set and the BTS (default: -85 dBm).

Tests that are designed to test the receiver section of the BTS use a lower level signal.

Where possible, test conditions and limits follow those defined in the GSM Base Station
Equipment Specification, GSM Rec. 11.20.

If a test failure occurs, the MMI indicates the reason for the failure. See Section 6 of this
handbook for information on the various failure categories.

Hopping Tables

Note: Not all BTSs support hopping.

The hopping tables for each available radio system can be changed from the Parameters /
Hopping Table option in the Main Menu (if the BTS under test supports hopping).

Parameter Default Value Range
Origin Channel Number 0 (E-GSM 900)
0 (E_GSM 900 + R)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
128 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM 900)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM 900 + R)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Hopping Tables:
E-GSM 900 and
E-GSM 900 + R table

DCS 1800 and PCS
1900 table

GSM 850 table
Active Cells:
1, 5, 51, 55, 59, 63, )
120, 124 )

513, 514, 574, 575, )
633, 634, 635, 636 )

129, 133, 179, 183, )
187, 191, 248, 251 )
Cells:
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM 900)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM 900 + R)

512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)

128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-8 6113 E DGE
80-0013

General Test Parameters

The user first specifies the BTS manufacturer and the model. These parameters are used to
select the appropriate O + M messages, and other necessary parameters (see Section 7).

The following GSM and other parameters may be selected by the operator as 'global'
parameters. These parameters will apply to each test, unless specifically overridden by
parameters defined in a test.

In all cases, except those identified in Section 7, the values used for these parameters does not
normally affect testing and they can all be set to their default values.

Base Station ID

Parameters Default Value Range
Network Colour Code 0 0 to 7
Base Station Colour Code 0 0 to 7

Note: (1) Network Colour Code (NCC)

This code enables a mobile to determine the country to which the base
station belongs. Normally 0 to 3 are used for the 'first' network operator,
and 4 to 7 for the 'second' network operator within the country.

(2) Base Station Colour Code (BCC)

This defines the colour code of the base station so that a mobile can
distinguish neighbouring base stations.

Control Channel Description

IMSI Attach/Detach Allowed 1 0 to 1
Blocks Reserved for
Access Grant 0 0 to 7
CCCH Configuration (04.08 defined bits) 1 0, 1, 2, 4, 6
Multiframes Between Paging Requests 2 2 to 9
T3212 Timeout Value 0 0 to 255

Note: (1) IMSI Attach/Detach Allowed(ATT)

This parameter determines whether IMSI attach and detach procedures are
to be used in a cell.

(2) Blocks Reserved for Access Grant

This parameter defines the number of blocks on each common control
channel (CCCH) that are reserved for access grant messages.

(3) CCCH Configuration

A CCCH can be assigned several physical channels, in part combined with
SDCCHs (stand-alone dedicated control channels).

The value '1' specifies one physical channel for CCCH, with combined
SDCCHs.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-9
80-0013

(4) Multiframes Between Paging Requests

This parameter determines at what intervals (in multiframes of 51 frames)
the paging call from the base station is repeated.

(5) T3212 Timeout Value

This timer controls how often the mobile performs a location update when
in the idle mode, by specifying the period between location updating.
T3212 is sent in the Control Channel Description. A '0' indicates that
periodic updating is not used.

Cell Channel Description

Origin Channel Number 0 0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM + R)
512 to 885 (DCS)
512 to 810 (PCS)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)

Cell Allocation Table Channels 6, 16, 26,
36, 46, 56, 66, 76,
86, 96, 106 and 116
are active (E-GSM 900
and E-GSM + R).
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM + R)
Any combination of channels may
be selected (active).

Channels 516, 526,
536, 546, 556, 566,576,
586, 596, 606, 612, 622,
632 are active (DCS 1800
and PCS 1900)
512 to 885 (DCS)
512 to 810 (PCS)
Any combination of channels may
be selected (active).

Channels 134, 144, 154,
164, 174, 184, 194, 204,
214, 224, 234, 244 are
active (GSM 850)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Any combination of channels can be
selected (active).

Note: Cell Allocation Table (CAT)

This table defines the channels (ARFCNs) to be used in the cell.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-10 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Cell Options

Power Control Indication 0 0 to 1
DTX Indicator 2 0 to 2
Radio Link Timeout T100 8 4 to 64

Note: (1) Power Control Indication

This parameter specifies whether a mobile (when monitoring) is to measure
the power on the BCCH carrier and include it in the measurement report. It
is sent in the Cell Options element in SYS INFO 3 on the BCCH and SYS
INFO 6 on the SACCH. A '0' indicates that the mobile does not measure
the power.

(2) DTX Indicator

The code in this field specifies whether a mobile station may, or should, or
may not, use discontinuous transmission.

(3) Radio Link Timeout T100

Radio Link Timeout (T100 in the MS) is sent in the Cell Options information
element. The mobile uses this value to determine whether there is still
good radio contact with the base station. The S counter in the mobile is
loaded with this value (in SACCH frames) and the value is

-- decremented by 1 if an SACCH message cannot be decoded, or
-- incremented by 2 if an SACCH message is properly received.

If the value drops to 0, the mobile communicates that it has lost the base
station.

Neighbour Cells Description

Origin ARFCN 0 (E-GSM 900) 0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM)
0 (E-GSM 900 + R) 0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM + R)
512 (DCS 1800) 512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900) 512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 (GSM 850) 128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Extend Origin ARFCN No No, Yes
Extended Origin ARFCN 0 (E-GSM 900) 0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM)
0 (E-GSM 900 + R) 0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM + R)
512 (DCS 1800) 512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900) 512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 (GSM 850) 128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Neighbour Cell Table Channels 10, 20, 80,
100, 110, 120 are active
(E-GSM 900 and
E-GSM 900 + R)
Channel 512 (DCS 1800)
Channel 512 (PCS 1900)
Channels 147, 153, 213,
223, 247 are active
(GSM 850)
Up to 31 E-GSM or E-GSM + R
channels,
or 44 DCS channels,
or 44 PCS channels,
may be selected (active).

Up to 31 GSM 850 channels.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-11
80-0013

Note: (1) Neighbour Cell Table

This table defines the CCH frequencies of Neighbouring cells. It is used for
Adjacent Cell Monitoring by the mobile and for inter cell handover.

(2) BCCH Allocation Sequence Number

The value 0 indicates that the BCCH is idle.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-12 6113 E DGE
80-0013

RACH Control

Maximum Retransmissions 2 1, 2, 4, 7
Tx Spread Integer 5 3-12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32, 50
Cell Barred 0 0 to 1
Call Re-Establish 1 0 to 1
PLMN Permitted 255 0 to 255
Access Control Class 32767 0 to 65535

Note: (1) Maximum Retransmissions

This field defines the maximum number of repeated attempts at
transmission by the mobile.

(2) Tx Spread Integer

This field defines the number of timeslots for the mobile on which
transmission of the RACH is distributed.

(3) Cell Barred

A cell can be barred; that is, a mobile can be denied access to the base
station. The codes for this field are:

0 = cell is not barred
1 = cell is barred

(4) Call Re-Establish

The code in this field permits or denies a mobile return to the cell.

0 = Return to cell permitted
1 = Return to cell denied

(5) PLMN Permitted (NCC Permitted)

This field identifies which Public Land Mobile Networks (PLMNs) the mobile
is allowed to monitor, with each network uniquely identified by its Network
Colour Code (NCC).

The eight NCCs are represented by an 8-digit binary number. The network
with colour code 0 is the LSB of this number, and the network with colour
code 7 is the MSB. If a '1' is entered at a particular position in this binary
number, the mobile is to monitor base stations that belong to this NCC
(PLMN). Those NCCs for which a '0' is entered are ignored.

The binary number is then converted to its decimal equivalent. For
example, if base stations that belong to the PLMN with the network colour
code of 3 are to be monitored, then the PLMN Permitted field has the
following value:

8 ( 2
3
)

If all PLMNs are to be monitored, then the PLMN Permitted value entry is:

255 ( 2
0
+ 2
1
+ . . . . . . .+ 2
7
)
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-13
80-0013

(6) Access Control Class

Each mobile is assigned to one of 16 access groups. One or more of these
groups can be denied access to the base station.

The 16 access groups are represented by a 16-digit binary number; access
group 0 is LSB of this number, and access group 15 is MSB. If there is a
'1' at a particular position in this binary number, then access will be denied
to the corresponding group. Where there is a '0', the relevant group is
allowed to access the base station.

The number in the Access Control Class field is the decimal equivalent of
the 16-digit binary number. For example, if groups 1, 9, 12 and 14 are to
be denied access to the base station, then the number in the field is:

20994 ( 2
1
+ 2
9
+ 2
12
+ 2
14
= 2 + 512 + 4096 + 16384 )

If no groups are to be denied access, then the Access Control Class
number is 0.

Location Area ID

Cell Identity Value 1 0 to 65535
Mobile Country Code 1 0 to 999
Mobile Network Code 1 0 to 99
Location Area Code 1 0 to 65535

Note: (1) Cell Identity Value

This field contains the identity number of the cell. Each identity number is
only issued once in a network and permits unique identification of the cell.

(2) Mobile Country Code (MCC)

This is a code number that represents the country of origin of a base
station or network, and it is sent by the base station to the mobile to convey
that information. A selection of the codes are as follows:

Country Code Country Code
Austria 232 Italy 222
Belgium 206 Luxemburg 270
Cyprus 280 Malta 278
Denmark 238 Monaco 212
Germany 262 Netherlands 204
Finland 244 Norway 242
France 208 Portugal 268
Gibralta 266 San Marino 292
Great Britain 234 Spain 214
Greece 202 Sweden 240
Greenland 290 Switzerland 228
Hungary 216 Turkey 285
Iceland 274 Yugoslavia 220
Ireland 272

(3) Mobile Network Code (MNC)

This is the code of the network to which the base station belongs.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-14 6113 E DGE
80-0013

(4) Location Area Code (LAC)

This is an identity number given to the site of a base station. This number
is only issued once in a network. In this way, a base station is uniquely
identified by the values MCC, MNC,and LAC.

The value '0' is used in this field to show that there is no valid local area
identification (LAI).

Cell Selection

Cell Reselect Hysteresis 12 dB 0 to 14 dB (2 dB steps)
Max Mobile Tx Power Level 15 0 to 31
Min Mobile Rx Signal Level 0 0 to 63

Note: (1) Call Reselect Hysteresis

This is the threshold level for a mobile to select a new base station.

When a mobile tries to signal again, starting from its idle mode, it will only
call another base station if the reception from it is better (by this threshold
level) than from the previous one.

(2) Max Mobile Tx Power Level (MS-TxPWR-MAX-CCH)

This is the maximum permitted transmitting power of the mobile when it
first gains access to the system (on the CCH). The power value entered is
the GSM mobile control level defined in GSM recommendation 05-05 as
follows:

E-GSM 900 / GSM 850

Entry 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
dBm 43 41 39 37 35 33 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13

DCS 1800 / PCS 1900

Entry 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
dBm 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0

Values 16 to 29 are allowed in GSM recommendation 04-08 but are not
defined by GSM, and so they are assumed to continue according to the
same progression.

Value 30 and 31 are defined as +33 dBm and + 32 dBm respectively.

(3) Min Mobile Rx Signal Level (RxLEV-ACCESS-MIN)

The signal from the base station must arrive at the mobile with a certain
minimum power level for the mobile to register with the cell. The minimum
level, starting from -110 dBm, is increased by this value set. For example,
a minimum receive level of -63 dBm is set by entering '47' in this field.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-15
80-0013

Encryption Kc

Encryption FF FF FF FF (any 16 hex digits)
Kc FF FF FC 00

Timing Advance

Initial Timing Advance 0 0 to 63 bits
Follow Timing Advance No No, Yes

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-16 6113 E DGE
80-0013

A-bis Settings


CRC-4 bit OFF OFF, ON
CRC-4 E-bit OFF OFF, ON (Note 1)
Slot 0 bits 3 to 8 31 0 to 63 (Note 2)
T1 (frame format) ESF D3/D4, ESF
A-bis Submultiplexing Rate 16 K 8 K, 16 K (Note 3)

Note: (1) Editable only if CRC-4 is ON

(2) Expressed as the decimal equivalent of the state of bits. Bit 3 is MSB.

(3) Dependent upon the type of BTS. (Refer to the heading TCH Format
Parameter).

A-bis Mapping Table

See Section 7.

Measurement Mode and Measurement Mode Override

For most of the A-bis controlled tests, the Measurement Mode setting of the test set determines
which version of a given test is to be performed (GSM, GPRS or EDGE). Depending on the
mode selected some tests are not available.

The Measurement Mode setting is controlled via the MMI as detailed in Measurement Mode.

Within the parameter set of each test affected by the choice of Measurement Mode, a
Measurement Mode Override parameter has been added. This defaults to the current value of
Measurement Mode for interactive testing, or specifies which measurement mode to use for
non-interactive testing.

The section Functional Tests Available provides a quick reference to which tests operate in a
given measurement mode. Within the description of each test, the values of Measurement
Mode Override for that parameter are also detailed.

Availability of the measurement modes is as follows:
GSM available as standard
GPRS requires Option 313
EDGE requires Option 440

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-17
80-0013

Bit/Frame Error Ratio Measurements

Note: (1) In order to perform Receiver BER tests for data channel rates DATA F2.4,
DATA F4.8, DATA F9.6 and DATA F14.4, the 6113 Test Set must have Option
312 and Option 330 (for DATA F14.4) installed and activated.

(2) The data channel rates must then be selected from the TCH Format parameter.

(3) For data channel rates, only Class lb bits are checked, i.e. there are no Class ll
bits.

Certain measurements make use of Bit/Frame error ratio measurements to measure the
degradation in link performance experienced under various conditions.

The BER of either the uplink (Test Set to BTS) or downlink (BTS to Test Set) may be evaluated.

Uplink BER measurements (on the BTS receiver) are performed by the Test Set transmitting
pre-defined traffic (speech) frames to the BTS over the Air Interface. Traffic Frames received
back at the Test Set via the A-bis interface are compared with the expected data to evaluate the
Bit Error Ratio.

Frame erasure is detected by means of the Bad Frame Indicator (BFI) bit within the received
frame (see GSM Rec. 08.60 if TCH Format parameter is set to Full Rate or EFR; see GSM Rec.
08.61 if TCH Format parameter is set to Half Rate).

Downlink BER measurements (on the BTS transmitter) are performed by sending traffic frames
over the A-bis interface, and accumulating bit error ratio statistics using traffic frames received
across the Air interface.

Separate counts of both Class II and Class Ib BERs (Note 1), and the FER (Note 2), are made.
(Class II and Class Ib speech bits are subject to different degrees of error correction within the
BTS: Class Ia bits are not measured since these are heavily error corrected). In a normal burst,
the number of Class Ib bits and Class II bits present depends on the TCH Format setting as
follows:

OPTION 312 / 330 INSTALLED
Data Rate Clb Cll Data Rate Clb only
Full Rate 132 78 DATA F2.4 72
Enhanced Full Rate 124 70 DATA F4.8 120
Half Rate 73 17 DATA F9.6 240
DATA F14.4 290 (Note 3)

Note: (1) (Residual) Bit Error Ratio, defined as the number of faulty bits divided by total bits,
excluding those from frames signalled as having been erased.

(2) Frame Erasure Ratio, defined as the number of erased frames divided by the total
number of frames.

(3) Includes M1 and M2.

Accumulation of Class Ib, Class II and FER events proceeds in parallel - the 'count' for each type
normally stops when enough samples have been accumulated. The test continues until the
required 'count' for all data types is sufficient, or the number of 'events' (or errors) is exceeded
for any of the types.

Under some fault conditions where continuous, or near-continuous, frame erasure is occurring,
but the FER samples have been set to zero, the test could 'hang up' whilst the 6113 waits for
Class Ib and Class II bits to be received. To overcome this, a timeout is applied, calculated
from the maximum measurement time that would be expected plus a small contingency.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-18 6113 E DGE
80-0013

BER is measured on traffic channels only (the type of TCH being that selected by the TCH
Format test parameter. See heading TCH Format Parameter below).

FER can be measured on Traffic Channels (TCH) and Random Access Channels (RACH).

The number of samples over which the BER/FER is measured must be adequate to guarantee
statistically significant results, sufficient to correctly identify a bad BTS but not to fail a good BTS.

To ensure that this constraint is met, the test limits applied are, where possible, those specified
in GSM Rec. 11-20. By default, samples are collected for at least the period of a superframe.

A test failure will occur if any of the three BER/FER parameters exceeds the specified
maximum.

Block Error Ratio Measurements (BLER) - GPRS

Note: (1) In order to perform Receiver BLER tests for GPRS channel rates CS1 and CS2
the 6113 Test Set must have Software option Option 313 (GPRS BLER) and
Hardware Option 016 (Extended BBP) installed and activated.

(2) The required channel rate must then be selected from the TCH Format
parameter.

(3) For GPRS channel rates, only BLER results are checked, i.e. bit errors are
displayed for information ONLY.

Certain measurements make use of Block Error ratio measurements to measure the

For GPRS testing, the BLER of the 'uplink' (Test Set to BTS) may be evaluated ONLY.

Uplink BLER measurements (on the BTS receiver) are performed by the Test Set transmitting
pre-defined traffic data frames (using a GPRS channel rate) to the BTS over the Air Interface.
Data Traffic Frames received back at the Test Set via the A-bis interface are compared with the
expected data to evaluate the Block Error Ratio.

The detection of block errors, is dependent upon BTS manufacturer. It is generally evaluated by
means of a Bad Frame Indicator (BFI) bit within each received frame; which identifies the entire
frame as being un-usable. Other BTS manufacturers identify Bad frames by sending 'Idle'
frames in the place of data frames.

The 6113 counts both block error events (Note 1), and bit error events (Note 2). The BLER
value, determines the PASS/FAIL result of the test. This value is compared against an operator
defined limit parameter (BLER Limit), specified within the test parameters. It should be noted,
that the bit error value is displayed ONLY for operator information and does NOT affect the
PASS/FAIL result of the test.

Note: (1) Block Error Ratio, defined as the number of 'bad' frames divided by the total
number of frames received.

(2) Bit Error, defined as the total number of faulty bits obtained, including those from
frames identified as 'bad'.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-19
80-0013

Accumulation of block and bit errors proceeds in parallel - the 'count' for BLER normally stops
when enough samples have been accumulated. The Calculation of bit errors, is produced from
two sources.

(1) During each data frame comparison, errant bits within the frame are counted, and added
to the running total of bit errors for the test currently in progress.

(2) Block errors, identified either by the setting of a BFI flag, or the receipt of an 'idle' frame
(see explanation above), cause the bit error count to be updated by the total number of
data bits within that frame. Thus in the presence of significant Block errors, the bit error
indication increases rapidly.

Under some fault conditions where continuous, or near-continuous, block errors are occurring,
but where the BLER samples have been set to zero, the test could 'hang up' whilst the 6113
waits for BLER indications to be received. To overcome this, a time-out is applied; calculated

The number of samples over which the BLER is measured must be adequate to guarantee
statistically significant results, sufficient to correctly identify a bad BTS, but not to fail a good
BTS. By default, samples are collected for at least the period of a superframe.

A test failure will occur, ONLY if the BLER value exceeds the specified maximum limit.

Block Error Ratio Measurements (BLER) - EGPRS

Note: (1) In order to perform BLER tests for EGPRS channel rates MCS1-4 (GMSK) and
MCS5-9 (8 PSK) the 6113 Test Set must have Software option Option 440
(EGPRS) and Hardware Option 018 (Extended BBP) installed and activated.

(2) The required channel rate must then be selected from the TCH Format parameter.

(3) For EGPRS channel rates, only BLER results are checked.

Certain measurements make use of Block Error ratio measurements to measure the

For EGPRS testing, the BLER of the 'uplink' (Test Set to BTS) or downlink (BTS to Test Set)
may be evaluated.

Uplink BLER measurements (on the BTS receiver) are performed by the Test Set transmitting
pre-defined traffic data frames (using EGPRS channel rates) to the BTS over the Air Interface.
Data Traffic Frames received back at the Test Set via the A-bis interface are compared with the
expected data to evaluate the Block Error Ratio.

The detection of block errors, is dependent upon BTS manufacturer. It is generally evaluated by
means of a Bad Frame Indicator (BFI) bit within each received frame; which identifies the entire
frame as being un-usable. Other BTS manufacturers identify Bad frames by sending 'Idle'
frames in the place of data frames.

Downlink BLER measurements (on the BTS transmitter) are performed by sending EGPRS data
traffic frames over the A-bis interface, and accumulating Block Error Ratio statistics, using data
traffic frames received across the Air interface from the BTS.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-20 6113 E DGE
80-0013

The 6113 counts BLER events (Note 1). The BLER value, determines the PASS/FAIL result of
the test. This value is compared against an operator defined limit parameter (BLER Limit),
specified within the test parameters.

Note: (1) Block Error Ratio, defined as the number of 'bad' frames divided by the total
number of frames received.

(2) Accumulation of BLER errors proceeds automatically - the 'count' for BLER
normally stops when enough samples have been accumulated.

Under some fault conditions where continuous, or near-continuous, Block errors are occurring,
but where the BLER samples have been set to zero, the test could 'hang up' whilst the 6113
waits for BLER indications to be received. To overcome this, a time-out is applied; calculated

The number of samples over which the BLER is measured must be adequate to guarantee
statistically significant results, sufficient to correctly identify a bad BTS, but not to fail a good
BTS. By default, samples are collected for at least the period of a superframe.

A test failure will occur, ONLY if the BLER value exceeds the specified maximum limit.

TCH Format Parameter

The choice of data rate available in the TCH Format test parameter is constrained by the
following factors:

(1) Selected BTS Type

(2) Currently fitted options

(3) Current measurement mode

GSM measurement mode

In GSM measurement mode the choice of data rates for TCH format parameter is constrained
by the choice of BTS type and availability of options 312 and 330.

In the following table data rate choices have been grouped together thus e.g. Transmitter BER
can have at most FR, EFR, HR 0 8K, HR 1 8K, but may only present FR, EFR if the test set
does not support half rate for the selected BTS.

Similarly, Receiver BER can have at most FR, EFR, HR 0 8K, HR 1 8K, Data F2.4, Data F4.8,
Data F9.6, Data F14.4 if all relevant options are fitted.

Test Name TCH Format groups available
Transmitter BER Baseline, HR8K
Receiver BER Baseline, HR8K, Option312, Option330
Absolute Sensitivity Baseline, HR8K, Option312, Option330
RX Level Baseline, HR8K, Option312, Option330
RX Quality Baseline, HR8K, Option312, Option330
Multimode Baseline, HR8K

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-21
80-0013

Baseline group is FR, EFR - available as standard.

HR8K group (Half Rate 8K) is HR 0 8K, HR 1 8K available if selected BTS type supports half
rate (see Note 3 below).

Option 312 group is Data F2.4, Data F4.8, Data F9.6 available if option 312 or option 330 has
been purchased.

Option 330 group is Data F14.4 - available if option 330 (includes option 312) has been
purchased and selected BTS type supports the channel type.

Note: (1) The following entries can be displayed in the Format box in the Status Bar:

TCH/F TCH/EFR TCH/H TCH/F2.4
TCH/F4.8 TCH/F9.6 TCH/F14.4
SDCCH/4 SACCH/C4 FACCH/F SACCH/TF
SDCCH/8 SACCH/C8 FACCH/H SACCH/TH
BCCH or RACH

(2) Default values for FER, Clb and Cll limits when each data rate is selected are as
follows:

Full Rate : FER 0.100 %
Classlb 0.400 %
Classll 2.000 %

EFR : FER 0.100 %
Classlb 0.100 %
Classll 2.000 %

Half Rate 0 / 1 : FER 0.025 %
Classlb 0.001 %
Classll 0.720 %

(Option 312 or Option 330 Installed)
Data F2.4 Classl 0.000 %
Data F4.8 : Classl 0.000 %
Data F9.6 Classl 0.001 %
Data F14.4 (330) Classl 0.001 %

(3) For Universal BTS, half rate is only available if the A-bis Submultiplexing Rate
parameter on the A-bis Settings screen is set to 8K rather than 16K. For other
BTS types this parameter is disabled.

GPRS measurement mode (requires Option 313)

In GPRS measurement mode the choice of data rates for TCH format parameter is currently
GPRS CS1 or GPRS CS2. The default value is GPRS CS1. If the test set does not support
GPRS with a particular BTS type it is empty.


PDCH/CS-1 PDCH/CS-2
BCCH or RACH PRACH

(2) The default value for BLER limit is 10.000 %.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-22 6113 E DGE
80-0013

EDGE measurement mode (requires Option 440)

In EDGE measurement mode the choice of data rates for TCH format parameter contains at
most EGPRS MCS-1 to EGPRS MCS-9. It may be constrained further by choice of BTS type.
The default value is EGPRS MCS-1. If the test set does not support EDGE with a particular BTS
type it is empty (see Note 3 below).


PDCH/MCS-1 PDCH/MCS-2 PDCH/MCS-3 PDCH/MCS-4
PDCH/MCS-5 PDCH/MCS-6 PDCH/MCS-7 PDCH/MCS-8
PDCH/MCS-9
BCCH or RACH PRACH

(2) The default value for BLER limit is 10.000 %.

(3) For Universal BTS, EDGE data rates are only available after a particular
manufacturers PCU link type has been selected as the BTS model. This is
because the protocols for the PCU link are manufacturer specific.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-23
80-0013

Test Patterns

A choice of ten standard test patterns (speech frames) is available for BER/FER testing,
numbered 0-9, given in Table 4.1. Other tests where the data is selectable also use these
patterns.

Each test pattern/speech frame contains 260 bits, formed from the 32 (hex) bytes listed. The
LSB from each byte is output first (for example, for test pattern No.4 [72,C3,..], the binary
sequence would be 0100111011000011..).

Two alternatives for test pattern 'C1' (data reversals, as specified in GSM Rec. 11.10) are
provided, due to the two possible start states, 0 or 1.

Depending on the requirement, the appropriate number of bits will be used from the start of the
test pattern on each frame. For instance, a BER test on a full rate speech channel will use the
first 260 bits (32.5 bytes) of the appropriate test pattern, and use the same bits for subsequent
frames. These patterns are used for all frame coding schemes up to and including MCS-9.

Table 4.1 Standard Test Patterns

Number Pattern Remarks
0 155 bytes of AA, 'C1 (01010....)',
start 0

1 155 bytes of 55 'C1' (10101....),
start 1

2 155 bytes of 00 All 0's

3 155 bytes of FF All 1's

4 72, C3, 40, 79, BE, 1F, 6C, 35, Random
CA, 3B, 58, B1, 96, 17, 04, ED,
22, B3, 70, E9, 6E, 0F, 9C, A5,
7A, 2B, 88, 21, 46, 07, 34, 5D,
02repeated to 155 bytes

5 A6, E7, 94, 3D, 32, 83, 00, 39, Random
7E, DF, 2C, F5, 8A, FB, 18, 71,
56, D7, C4, AD, E2, 73, 30, A9,
2E, CF, 5C, 65, 3A, EB, 48, E1,

6 0B, E8, 01, A6, E7, 94, 3D, 32, Random
83, 00, 39, 7E, DF, 2C, F5, 8A,
FB, 18, 71, 56, D7, C4, AD, E2,
73, 30, A9, 2E, CF, 5C, 65, 3A,
0Brepeated to 155 bytes

7 E5, BA, 6B, C8, 61, 86, 47, 74, Random
9D, 12, E3, E0, 99, 5E, 3F, 0C,
55, 6A, 5B, F8, D1, 36, 37, A4,
0D, C2, D3, 10, 09, 0E, 2F, 3C,

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-24 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Table 4.1 Standard Test Patterns (Continued)

Number Pattern Remarks

8 2C, F5, 8A, FB, 18, 71, 56, D7, Random
C4, AD, E2, 73, 30, A9, 2E, CF,
5C, 65, 3A, EB, 48, E1, 06, C7,
F4, 1D, 92, 63, 60, 19, DE, BF,
0Crepeated to 155 bytes

9 99, 5E, 3F, 0C, 55, 6A, 5B, F8, Random
D1, 36, 37, A4, 0D, C2, D3, 10,
09, 0E, 2F, 3C, C5, 1A, 4B, 28,
41, E6, 27, D4, 7D, 72, C3, 40,

Note: It is important to remember that Test Pattern 2 is normally interpreted by the Test Set as
a series of erased frames. Therefore if it is selected for BER measurements, the 6113
will not accumulate any Class Ib/II samples (if the number of FER samples selected is
non-zero, the test will never terminate).

Parameters - General

The 'default values' listed for each parameter in the detailed test descriptions refer to the default
value used by the MMI program and stated in the relevant GSM Regulations.

All values are integers, with the following exceptions:

Parameter Units Resolution

Power Levels dB/dBm 0.1 dB
Phase values degrees 0.01 degree

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-25
80-0013

NOTES ON LIVE TESTING

(Hyperlink to Section 5 / LIVE TESTS MENU)

Note: Specific information about a testing a particular BTS type is given in the relevant Option
Description in Section 7 Manufacturer-Specific Information (published separately and
issued only to valid users of each type of BTS).

Encryption

If the network-under-test uses encryption then the 6113 Test Set must be fitted with Encryption
Option 10R.

Use of External Splitter/Combiners

Some BTS types do not provide suitable monitor points for either the combined transmitter
output and/or the pre-multicoupler receiver input. Consequently the multiple transmitter outputs
must be combined together before connection to the input of the 6113 and/or the output of the
6113 must be split and fed to multiple BTS receivers.

In both cases a low power splitter/combiner can be used. Normally 2 ways are sufficient, but
occasionally more are required.

(Both 2-way and 4-way (with two terminations) splitter/combiners are available from Racal
Instruments Wireless Solutions).

Note: Some types of BTS do not provide Tx monitor points. In such cases, accurate Tx
measurements cannot be made.

Use of External 10dB Attenuator

Some BTS types provide transmitter monitor ports with outputs greater than 0 dBm, and/or do
not provide receiver monitor ports. In these situations a direct connection to a BTS receiver
antenna port must be made. In addition, even if suitable BTS receiver monitor ports are
available it may be preferable to test by connecting directly to the receive antenna connections.

In all cases, external 10 dB attenuators must be used to reduce the levels into, and/or out of, the
6113, when using the rear panel B.O.S.S. RF connections. (Suitable low power attenuators,
with SMA or TNC connectors, are available from Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions).

The Use of PMPs (Protected Monitor Points)

Many network operators install A-bis monitor points in each BTS room. Some of these are of
the Protected Monitor Point (PMP) type. These all have some form of protection to prevent
short circuiting of the A-bis, and the output signal is therefore heavily attenuated. Sometimes
the attenuation is as much as 30 dB, reducing the signal to a level that is too small for the 6113
to process correctly.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-26 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Display Of Traffic Channels In The RF Scan Table

When the 6113 scans for RF channels, it only searches for BCCH carriers. Having found one
(or more) BCCH carrier, the Test Set reads the System Information number 1 message
transmitted on the BCCH; this provides information on the channel numbers in use as traffic
(TCH) carriers (i.e. non-BCCH carriers) in the cell or sector. This information is then displayed
in the scan table. Unfortunately some networks do not transmit System Information 1 (it is not
necessary if frequency hopping is not used) and therefore no information, or sometimes
incorrect information, is available. If this happens it will be necessary to ask the BSC for the
channels in use before testing them.

Use of IMEI

Some networks do now check the mobile IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) during
registration or call set-up.

If the IMEI is found to be invalid or blacklisted, then the call will be rejected by the network and
the message Call Rejected will appear on the 6113 MMI. If this happens then a valid IMEI
should be entered in the Live Testing Parameters menu.

Any GSM phone will display its 15 digit IMEI when the following keys are pressed: *#06#. The
displayed IMEI can then be entered into the 6113. Alternatively, contact Racal Instruments
Wireless Solutions for a valid IMEI to use.

Use of Test Numbers

When selecting a number to dial during call set-up, it is often useful to use a test number
provided by the Network Operator. However, some test numbers can cause problems:

(1) Some Test Numbers do not answer an incoming call correctly, thus preventing the 6113
from recognising that the call has completed successfully.

(2) Some Test Numbers have an automatic time-out and drop the call after a few minutes.
This will stop the measurements made by the 6113 and a new call will be required.

Selection of Bandwidth

The selection of NARROW or WIDE as the filter type when making Live Tests measurements
should be as follows:

(1) The default selection is NARROW and this can normally be used under all circumstances.

(2) If the highest possible measurement accuracy is required then WIDE can be selected, as
long as there are no large interfering signals close to the wanted signal.

Use of Display Holding

This parameter can be found in the Live Tests / Parameters menu. The default setting is Off
and this should normally be used unless the signal being monitored is intermittent (this can be
the case if frequency hopping or DTX (discontinuous transmission) is in use in the cell being
monitored). In this case selecting On will cause the last reading to be held while the signal is
not present, until a new reading is obtained.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-27
80-0013

Use of TCH Power Tracking

This parameter can be found in the Live Testing / Parameters menu. The default setting is On
and this should be used unless the signal being monitored is hopping and downlink power
control is in use in the cell. In this case selecting Off will prevent the 6113 giving erroneous
measurements as the level of the intermittent signal being monitored varies.

Note that, in this case, it is also necessary to set the Expected Power Level in the Parameters
menu to the correct value (i.e. the actual maximum power being measured by the 6113).

RF Tests (B.O.S.S.) Mode

The purpose of the 6113 RF Tests Mode test is to provide a simple means of regularly
monitoring the performance of a BTS without taking it off the air. If a deterioration is observed in
the performance of one of the transmitters or receivers then the BTS can be taken off the air, in
a controlled and planned manner, and the offending item quickly replaced. The performance of
the BTS can then be revalidated using the full set of test procedures (with A-bis control) and
returned to service, thus helping to avoid unplanned breaks in service.

RF Tests Mode emulates the action of a mobile when the BTS-under-test is connected to an
operational network; it allows the operator to perform measurements on the BTS transmitters
and receivers to determine their performance without directly controlling the BTS.

Note: RF Tests Mode facilities are available with Test Set software version 03.01 onwards.
On-air BTS transmitter measurements can be performed with standard issue software.

On-air BTS receiver measurements can only be performed when Option 310 software
has been installed in the Test Set. The addition of hardware Option 56 improves the
performance of the RF Tests Mode (refer to Section 1).

Option 54 includes both Option 310 and Option 56, and provides a complete upgrade for
RF Tests Mode.

RF Tests Mode facilities are described in the following paragraphs and in Section 5. Additional
information about interconnections is provided in the Manufacturer-Specific options.

Related Documents

(1) GSM 4.08 Mobile radio interface layer 3 specification. (GSM 900 Phase 1 - v3.13.0)

(2) GSM 4.08 DCS Mobile radio interface layer 3 specification. (DCS 1800 Phase 1 - v3.1.0)

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-28 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Measurement Capability

Measurements on the BTS transmitter are made by synchronising to the BTS control channel
and measuring either the control channel or associated traffic channels.

When the Test Set is synchronised to a CCH or TCH, the following measurements are
performed on the BTS transmitter signal:

RMS phase error
Peak phase error
Frequency error
Phase error mask pass/fail
Power profile mask pass/fail (when enabled) (only valid when measuring a TCH)
Modulation spectrum mask pass/fail (when enabled).

The Test Set also displays the following information relating to or extracted from the CCH:

CCH channel number
Mobile Country Code (MCC)
Mobile Network Code (MNC)
Cell Identity (CI)
Location Area Code (LAC)
Network Colour Code (NCC)
Base-station Colour Code (BCC)

When the Test Set is in a call and the A-bis connection between the BTS and BSC is being
monitored, the BTS receiver RBER is monitored (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R).

The Test Set can also measure the absolute sensitivity of the BTS by changing the uplink power
and noting the point at which the receiver BER passes beyond a pre-defined threshold. (Option
310 or Option 54 / 54R).

Network operator names are decoded from the MNC where known, otherwise they are displayed
as decimal numbers.

A-bis Configuration

When the Test Set enters Live Tests Mode the A-bis connections are automatically set to high-
impedance to prevent disruption of the A-bis link.

Connections from the Test Set to the BTS vary according to the type of BTS. Refer to Section 7
Manufacturer-Specific Options for a description of the connections required for RF Tests Mode.

Phase 2 Support

In RF Tests Mode the 6113 only supports full-rate speech calls (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R).

The Test Set is capable of measuring Phase 2 as well as Phase 1 dummy bursts; however, the
transmitted Classmark indicates Phase 1 capability only.

In addition to the full E-GSM band, RF Tests Mode can also be used in the GSM 850, DCS 1800
and PCS 1900 bands, depending on which hardware option is fitted.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-29
80-0013

Dual Band Operation

The Test Set does not indicate dual mode capability to the network. The supported frequency
bands indicated in the 'mobile' classmark only indicate the current radio system. (Option 310 or
Option 54 / 54R).

During E-GSM 900 operation, the Test Set does not indicate support for the G1 band in the
messages sent to the network. (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R).

Channel Configurations

Both encryption and hopping are supported on the SDCCH and the TCH.

Control Channel

The 6113 automatically supports combined and non-combined control channels.

Traffic Channel

The 6113 only supports full-rate speech on its traffic channel.

Measurement Reports (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R)

When in a call, the Test Set returns measurement reports as required by the network, except
that the values are set as required by the Test Set and not measured from the signal. Under
normal operation the Test Set returns RXLEV set to a low value in order to encourage the BTS
to transmit at as high a level as possible.

Neighbour cell measurement reports are all set to indicate no measurements available to
dissuade the BTS from handing the Test Set over to a different cell.

Uplink Power Control

When in a call, BTS requests for a change in Test Set (mobile) Tx power level are not actioned.
However, the Test Set reports that the Tx power level has been changed in accordance with the
BTS request.

SIM Handling (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R)

The Test Set can read and use a live SIM to provide a known identity to the network and also to
execute the GSM authentication/encryption algorithm. However it does not update any fields on
the SIM.

A check for the presence of a SIM reader and a SIM is made on the first attempt to connect to
the network in RF Tests Mode.

The MMI provides facilities for entering a PIN and unlocking a PIN-locked SIM, but there are no
facilities for entering a PUK (PIN Unblock Key) for unblocking a SIM following three
unsuccessful attempts to enter a PIN.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-30 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Note: (1) If a PIN is required, the operator is prompted to enter a PIN.

(2) The PIN entry numbers are displayed as asterisks.

(3) The number of retries available is displayed.

(4) If the SIM being used is blocked (due to 3 PIN entry errors), the operator is
informed.

Call Encryption (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R)

The call setup process automatically supports encryption when requested by the network. If the
network requests an encrypted call and the Test Set does not have the encryption Option fitted,
the Test Set will terminate the call setup process and notify the operator of the reason.

Parameter Files

The values entered for the RF Tests Mode test parameters, and the RF Tests Mode Absolute
Sensitivity Test parameters (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R), are stored in Parameter files. In
addition, the Number to Dial is also stored.

Level Offsets

Level offsets (if selected) are applied to all power values on the receive and transmit side.

Display Hold

This parameter is controlled from the Parameters screen. It allows the operator to control how
the Test Set clears measurements from its screen when they are no longer current. With this
parameter set to Off (the default condition) the Test Set will keep measurements on screen for
approximately 1 second after the signal has been lost; after that they will be cleared. With the
parameter set to On the measurements will be held on screen indefinitely, or until the operator
resynchronises (locks to a CCH) or changes any parameter.

Measurements will be cleared on the following conditions:

(1) The operator presses the Clear Min/Max button in a graph screen or the BER screen.

(2) A different Channel Number, Timeslot, BTS Rx Level or Pattern is entered.

(3) The Lock to CCH button is pressed.

(4) Display Hold is parameter is set to Off.

(5) On exit from the RF Tests Parameters screen.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-31
80-0013

Printing

The printer must be set up before entering RF Tests mode. If this is not done, it is necessary to
exit RF Tests mode to set up the printer. Printing in this mode only supports Epson FX-80 type
printers. Printing the Summary screen will result in a text table of numeric results being sent to
the printer or memory card, printing any other screen will cause a graphical screen dump to be
sent to the print device in FX80 graphics format.

Results may be printed manually by pressing the Print button in any screen, or automatically by
using the Print on Fail parameter in the RF Tests parameters screen. This parameter has three
possible values; the values and their effects are listed below:

Print on Fail: Effect
All When a limits failure occurs, the Test Set suspends measurements
then automatically cycles through the summary and relevant graph
screens for the current mode, and prints each screen.
Off No automatic printing at all.
Failures When a limits failure occurs, the Test Set suspends measurements
then automatically cycles through the summary and relevant graph
screens and prints only the screens showing a failure.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-32 6113 E DGE
80-0013

NOTES ON CELL INTEGRITY TESTING AND ANALYSIS

(Option 311 must be fitted) (Refer to ANNEX A CELL INTEGRITY TESTING AND ANALYSIS
and Section 5 Annex B AUTOCITA TEST SEQUENCE).

Introduction

The 6113 with Cell Integrity Testing and Analysis (CiTA) option (Option 311) fitted can be used
to fully test a complete cell site including all antennas, couplers, low noise amplifiers and other
ancillary RF equipment. The 6113 is used as a network emulator to control the entire cell site
during calls made to or from a standard mobile terminal fitted with a Racal Instruments Wireless
Solutions Test SIM. The use of this special test SIM from Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions
ensures that the live cell site under test is not accessible to any other mobiles in the vicinity.

An additional facility called AutoCiTA allows a number of tests to be run as a test sequence

Note: The Cell Integrity tests must only be run by, or with the express permission of,
users who hold a relevant licence to operate a high power radio transmitter.

When these tests are successfully completed they give the user confidence that:

(1) All antennas are fully functional.
(2) All antennas are correctly connected.
(3) All antenna cables are functional.
(4) All connections at the masthead are functional.
(5) Any remote masthead Low Noise Amplifiers are fully operational.
(6) The power supply to the LNAs is operational.

All the tests are carried out in real-time and the fully post processed results are available
immediately, giving indications of any cell imbalance or inefficiency.

Individual CiTA tests are run from the A-bis Controlled Tests / Functional Tests / CiTA menu
(see Section 5).

An AutoCiTA facility allows sequences of CiTA tests to be configured and run from the Test
Sequences Menu (see Section 5 Annex B AUTOCITA TEST SEQUENCE).

Additional Features

Antenna Balancing

Ideally, signal losses in both the uplink and the downlink directions should be equal. Since the
output levels of both the BTS and the mobile terminal are known by (and are under the control
of) the 6113, the RF losses in both directions can be independently calculated. The user can
specify the maximum deviation from equality of loss that will be tolerated, and a PASS/FAIL
result is displayed accordingly. Fine adjustments can then be made to the antennas themselves
to achieve equality within the cell.

Cell Coverage Testing

Having invoked the appropriate test at the cell site, the user can measure the BER for each
timeslot and assess the speech quality by making Mobile Originated calls from remote locations
within the cell. This functionality helps the user to locate areas of bad coverage within the
defined cell coverage area, which can then be improved by using the Antenna Balancing
function.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-33
80-0013

LIST OF TESTS

The following list details the tests that can be performed: (each is defined in more detail later in
this Section and in Section 6).

Note: (1) The parameters of the BTS under test must be entered (using the BTS
Information screen on the MMI) before commencing tests.

(2) Additional manufacturer-specific tests are described in Section 7.

Functional Tests

Configure BTS Test Brings the BTS to a fully 'configured' state, ready
for testing.

Reset BTS Test Resets the BTS to a 'non-configured' state.

Cell Integrity Test Checks that all the RF equipment and
interconnections on a cell site are operational.

Transmitter Tests

Cell Control Channel Generation Test Checks generation of the Cell Control Channel by
the BTS.

Transmitter Test Checks that the transmitted signal has the GSM-
defined GMSK modulation accuracy (phase) or
8PSK modulation accuracy (EVM) and does not
exceed the defined frequency error.

Checks that the average power level of the
transmitted pulse is within the GSM-defined
tolerance.

Checks that the power profile of the transmitted
pulse conforms to the GSM-defined mask.

Allows the user to view the modulation spectrum of
the transmitted pulse.

Transmitter BER/BLER Test Checks the basic baseband signal processing
(Static Layer 1) functions.on the downlink (BTS to
MS) side of the BTS.

Static Power Control Test Checks that the transmitted BCCH signal conforms
to the GSM-defined average output power level of
the power steps.

Downlink Power Control Test Checks that the transmitted TCH signal conforms
to the GSM-defined average output power level of
the downlink power decrements.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-34 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Receiver Tests

Receiver BER/BLER Test Checks the basic baseband signal processing
(Static Layer 1) functions on the uplink (MS to BTS)
side of the BTS, and checks that the BER or BLER
is acceptable at Reference Input Sensitivity level.

Absolute Sensitivity Test Measures the actual sensitivity of the transceiver
by finding the threshold at which the measured
BER or BLER deteriorates beyond the limit
specified by the operator.

Access Burst Test Checks the performance of the BTS in detecting
and reporting the presence of Random Access
Channel Requests (RACH) or Packet RACH
(PRACH).

RX Level Test This test checks the performance of the BTS in
measuring and reporting the level of the received
signal (RX LEV) on the uplink side of the BTS.

RX Quality Test This test checks the performance of the BTS in
measuring and reporting the quality of the received
signal (RX QUAL) on the uplink side of the BTS.

Receiver Signalling BER Test This test performs BER tests on signalling
channels.

Manufacturer and BTS-Specific Tests

These features provide additional tests and
controls for specific BTS types. See Section 7 for
details.

Interactive Test Mode

Multimode This mode is useful for fault finding and diagnosis.
All the major GSM measurements are performed,
and the test runs continuously. The operator can
vary the majority of the test parameters without
terminating the test. Test results are displayed
simultaneously, and are continuously updated.

Live Tests

RF Tests Mode Test Provides facilities for monitoring the performance
of a BTS without taking it off the air.

BTS Rx Sensitivity Test Measures the absolute sensitivity of a BTS.

A-bis Protocol Analysis Mode Provides facilities for monitoring (non-intrusive) and
recording the signal and data traffic on the A-bis.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-35
80-0013


Signal Generator Mode This mode allows the 6113 to operate as a
signal generator that can transmit a variety of
GSM structured signals and other signals. No
signal monitoring is performed in this mode.

Power Meter Mode This mode allows the 6113 to operate as a
Power Meter to monitor the power on a
nominated channel, or to indicate the channel
that contains maximum power.

Signal Generator and Power Meter
Mode
This mode combines the functionality of both
Signal Generator Mode and Power Meter Mode,
using a common ARFCN and common screen.

Self-Check Tests

Self Check Burst Analysis This test analyses the burst parameters and BER
of the 6113 Test Set using an internal loopback.
The test relates to the RF facilities available at the
front panel of the Test Set.

RF Tests Self Check Burst Analysis This test analyses the burst parameters and BER
of the 6113 Test Set using an internal loopback.
The test relates to the B.O.S.S. RF facilities
available at the rear panel of the Test Set.

EDGE Self Check Burst Analysis This test analyses the burst parameters and BLER
of the 6113 Test Set with 8PSK modulation using
an internal loopback. The test relates to the RF
facilities available at the front panel of the Test Set.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-36 6113 E DGE
80-0013

FUNCTIONAL TESTS

(Hyperlink to Section 5 / A-bis CONTROLLED TESTS MENU)

Configure BTS Test

Purpose of Test

The test brings the BTS up to a 'configured' state, ready for further testing. It is also used to
change the number of the transceiver-under-test, where the BTS-under-test has more than one
transceiver fitted.

Test Parameters

The parameters are BTS-type dependent. See Section 7 for details.

Test Method

This is dependent on the BTS type. See Section 7 for details.

Test Results

At the completion of the test, the Test Set returns a pass/fail indicator (including reason for
failure if necessary).

Reset BTS Test

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Reset BTS)

Purpose of Test

This test takes the BTS from the 'configured' state to a Reset state.

Test Parameters

These are dependent on the BTS type. See Section 7 for details.

Test Method

This is dependent on the BTS type. See Section 7 for details.

Test Results


Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-37
80-0013

Cell Integrity Test

(Option 311 must be installed)

Individual CiTA tests can be run from the A-bis Controlled Tests / Functional Tests / CiTA menu
(see Section 5).

The preparation for use required for this test is different to that required for the other tests, and
the test procedures are extensive. Therefore a full description of the test is provided in
Section 4 Annex A CELL INTEGRITY TESTING AND ANALYSIS.

Refer to the heading NOTES ON CELL INTEGRITY TESTING AND ANALYSIS earlier in this
Section for additional information.

An additional facility called AutoCiTA is available with Option 311. This allows a sequence of
CiTA tests to be configured and run using the Test Sequences Menu. This facility is described
in Section 5 Annex B AUTOCITA TEST SEQUENCE.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-38 6113 E DGE
80-0013

TRANSMITTER TESTS GSM MEASUREMENT MODE


Cell Control Channel Generation Test

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Cell Control Channel Generation Test GSM)

Purpose of Test

This test checks the generation of the Cell Control Channel (CCH) by the BTS.

WARNING: THIS TEST CAN BE LEFT IN A STATE IN WHICH THE BTS TRANSMITS
CONTINUOUSLY UNTIL THE TEST IS ABORTED BY THE OPERATOR. ALL
DUE ATTENTION MUST BE PAID TO ENSURE THAT THE TEST IS ABORTED
AT AN APPROPRIATE TIME AND THE BTS HAS STOPPED TRANSMITTING.


Test Parameters

Channel Number 90 (E-GSM 900) 0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM 900)
90 (E-GSM+R 900) 0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 (DCS 1800) 512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900) 512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850) 128 to 251 (GSM 850)
BTS Tx Level Max Max, 1 to 6 (Note 1)
Network Colour Code 0 0 to 7 (Note 2)
Base Station Colour Code 0 0 to 7 (Note 2)
Maintain BCCH Off Off, On (Note 3)

Note: (1) Level 1 is 2 dB below Max (defined in Configure BTS test), level 2 is 4 dB
below Max, etc.

(2) Network and Base Station Colour Code parameters override 'global'
defaults for this test.

(3) When On is selected for the Maintain BCCH parameter, the BTS will
continue transmitting indefinitely until the test is aborted by selecting Abort
at the MMI display.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-39
80-0013

Test Method

The BTS is instructed to generate a Cell Control Channel by the Test Set, using System
Information message information downloaded from the Test Set. The Test Set then
synchronises to the BTS.

The content of each of the System Information messages forming the BCCH (i.e. System
Information Types 1-4) is checked against that expected. The FCCH and SCH are implicitly
tested as part of the synchronisation process - the SDCCH and SACCH (and hence the content
of System Information messages Types 5 and 6) are not specifically checked.

Note: The 6113 receiver may correct for some errors in the BTS transmission, hence a 'bit
exact' check is not possible.

If Maintain BCCH is set toOff, then the BCCH is de-activated at the end of the test; if Maintain
BCCH is set to On then the BCCH is maintained at the end of the test, and the BTS will
continue to transmit indefinitely until Abort is selected at the MMI display.

No LAPDm (Air Interface) signalling link is established for this test.

Pass/Fail Criteria

The test will pass if all data elements checked have been found to be correctly transmitted.

Test Results


Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-40 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Transmitter Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Transmitter Test GSM)

Purpose of Test

Phase/Frequency Error

To establish whether the BTS is transmitting a signal with the prescribed GMSK modulation
(phase) accuracy. This test is also used to measure the frequency error of the transmitted
signal.

Power Profile

To measure the power profile of bursts transmitted by the BTS, and verify that they conform to a
specified power-vs-time mask.

Power Level

To measure the specified BTS Tx power level and check that it is within the defined tolerance.

be limited by the user to +47 dBm, using an external attenuator. (For
user should insert a 3 dB external attenuator).

Modulation Spectrum

To measure the spectrum generated by signal modulation.

Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information
(Note 4)
Channel Number 90 (E-GSM 900)
90 (E-GSM + R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM 900)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Hopping Off Off, On
Timeslot 4 0 to 7
BTS Rx Signal Level -85.0 dBm -120.0 to-40.0 dBm
Number of Bursts 10 1 to 999
TRX Configuration TCH BCCH, TCH
Test Pattern 6 0 to 9
Burst Number Any Any, 1, 2, 3, 4

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-41
80-0013

Frequency Error Limit 48.0 Hz
48.0 Hz
95.0 Hz
95.0 Hz
43.0 Hz
0.0 to 5000.0 Hz (E-GSM 900)
0.0 to 5000.0 Hz (E-GSM +R 900)
0.0 to 5000.0 Hz (DCS 1800)
0.0 to 5000.0 Hz (PCS 1900)
0.0 to 5000.0 Hz (GSM 850)
RMS Phase Error Limit 5.00 deg 0.00 to 10.00 deg
Peak Phase Error Limit 20.00 deg 0.00 to 30.00 deg (Note 3)
RMS EVM Limit 8.0 % (Note 5) 0.0 to 100.0 %
Peak EVM Limit 22.0 % (Note 5) 0.0 to 100.0 %
95% tile EVM Limit 11.0 % (Note 5) 0.0 to 100.0 %
Origin Offset Limit -35.0 dB (Note 5) -80.0 to 0.0 dB
Expected Power Level (Note 2) 0.0 to 100.0 dBm
Power level Limit (+) 3.0 dB (2.0 dB) 0.0 to 3.0 dB Phase 1 (Phase 2)
Power level Limit (-) 0.0 dB (2.0 dB) 0.0 to 3.0 dB Phase 1 (Phase 2)
Power Profile Mask
Checking
On Off, On
Modulation Spectrum
Mask Checking
On Off, On
TCH Power Level Max Max, 1 to 15
Encryption Off Off, A5/1,A5/2

below Max, etc.

(2) The default value is BTS specific; it is the same value as entered for
Maximum BTS Output Power in the Configure BTS test.

Where applicable, this figure should include losses expected in the
combiner and any other calculated losses in the BTS between the TRX and
the output interface. Allow for the fact that the test may not necessarily
start at the maximum power level. Loss in the RF lead between the BTS
and the Test Set should not be included because this loss can be
compensated by the Level Offset file.

(3) The phase error graph mask is set by the value of the Peak Phase Error
Limit parameter (only).

(4) In GSM Measurement Mode a side effect is to pick a GMSK test using
TCH/FS.

(5) These parameters do not apply in GSM Measurement Mode.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-42 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Test Method

Following synchronisation, the Test Set will activate a traffic channel in the downlink direction
(BTS-MS) and speech frames for transmission will be supplied over the A-bis interface.

The 'test pattern' to be transmitted is defined as one of the 10 pre-defined patterns also used for
bit error ratio testing (see Table 4.1 Standard Test Patterns).

The signal from the BTS is downconverted in the Test Set and the IF signal is sampled at 16
times bit rate, with samples evenly distributed over the burst.


For GMSK modulation, the samples are used to generate the demodulated data, and the
measured phase trajectory is then compared with the 'ideal' phase trajectory reconstructed from
the demodulated data to give the phase error. The rms and peak phase error is calculated over
the burst. The regression line of the phase error is a measure of the frequency error.

The largest, smallest and mean values for each measurement are then displayed.

Additional notes are:

(1) The position of the training sequence within the burst is determined by an algorithm that
will search over a range of 10 bits relative to the position expected.

(2) The Test Set always demodulates the data from the received burst, and no check is made
to ensure that the received data matches the transmitted data.

(3) Normally, a new burst is captured as soon as the previous burst has been analysed (i.e.
consecutive bursts cannot be measured).

(4) Only traffic bursts from the BTS are analysed. Thus SACCHs and dummy bursts are
masked out.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-43
80-0013

Power Profile

The power profile is evaluated by sampling the power over one burst . (Note: No averaging of
bursts is performed by this test).

The power profile will be matched against the power/time template using the method described
in the GSM Recommendations. However, the method of specifying the burst timing differs
slightly in the 6113 from that used in GSM Recommendations 05.05 and 11.20. The Test Set
takes 6 samples per bit, and in consequence the power/time template is rounded to the nearest
1/6 bit increment. Also, the dynamic range of the Test Set limits the lowest measurable level to
approximately -52 dBc. Thus, the power/time limits applied are as follows:

Time Level
-40.62 s to -17.85 s < -30 dBc
-17.85 s to -9.85 s < -6 dBc
-9.85 s to -0.00 s < +4 dBc
+0.00 s to +542.77 s -1 dBc to +1 dBc
+542.77 s to < +552.62 s < +1 dBc
+552.62 s to +560.62 s < - 6 dBc
+560.62 s to +587.08 s < -30 dBc

Note: (1) 'Time' is relative to the start of bit 0.

(2) 'Level' is instantaneous power relative to average power in the useful part
of the burst.

Power Level

The power output accuracy is evaluated by sampling the power over several bursts (as dictated
by the Number of Bursts parameter) and then averaging. Low power bursts (e.g. idle frames)
are not included in the measurement.

The BTS is ordered to set the transmitted output power to the specified value, and the output is
checked against the Positive Limit and Negative Limit parameters.

Modulation Spectrum

The modulation spectrum is evaluated by sampling the power over the number of bursts
specified by the user.

Pass/Fail Criteria

Phase/Frequency Error)

The test will fail if any of the measured values exceed the limits specified.

Power Profile

The pulse profile must fall within the limits specified.

Power Level

The (averaged) power measured must be within the specified tolerance. The test will fail if the
(averaged) measurement exceeds the prescribed limits.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-44 6113 E DGE
80-0013
Test Results


failure if necessary) and a list of the test results.

Note that the minimum and maximum values do not necessarily relate to the same data burst -
minimum value is the lowest measured of all the bursts, maximum value is the highest
measured of all the bursts, etc.

In addition, the full data array graph of the last sample taken is available for diagnostic purposes.

Power Profile


Power Level

The MMI Results screen displays the result of the test, including a pass/fail indicator.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-45
80-0013

Transmitter BER Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Transmitter BER Test GSM)

Purpose of Test

This test verifies the basic baseband signal processing (Static Layer 1) functions on the downlink
(BTS towards MS) side of the BTS. Baseband signal processing functions include multiplexing
and coding/interleaving/encrypting.

Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information

90 (E-GSM + R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM 900)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Hopping Off Off, On
Timeslot 4 0 to 7
TCH Format Full Rate (Note 1)
Sample Time 10s 1 to 300000 s
FER Limit 0.000 % 0.000 to 100.000 %
Class Ib Limit 0.000 % 0.000 to 100.000 %
Class II Limit 0.000% 0.000 to 100.000 %
Encryption Off Off, A5/1, A5/2

Note: (1) The range of data rates available varies according to the BTS. Refer to A-
bis CONTROLLED TESTING / TCH Format Parameter earlier in this
Section.

(2) Level 1 is 2 dB below Max (defined in Configure BTS test), level 2 is 4 dB
below Max, etc.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-46 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Test Method

Following synchronisation, a traffic channel on the specified transceiver, on the specified
ARFCN and Air Interface slot, is activated. The BTS is then instructed to transmit a defined bit
pattern (as input to the BTS via the A-bis interface).

The signal transmitted by the BTS is received on the Air Interface, and the BER measured. The
measured FER/BER under normal conditions should be zero, although alternative limit values
are allowed.

Pass/Fail Criteria

A test failure is registered if any of the bit error ratio limits are exceeded.

Test Results

failure if necessary), and a list of the bit error ratio statistics gathered during the measurement
process:

(1) FER samples
(2) FER events
(3) Class Ib samples
(4) Class Ib events
(5) Class II samples
(6) Class II events

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-47
80-0013

Static Power Control Test

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Static Power Control (BCCH) Test)

Purpose of Test

Two combined tests are provided to measure the BTS power output accuracy, and check the
ability of the BTS to control its output level in steps. These are:

Test 1 Measurement of 2 dB fixed BCCH power level steps (Power Levels 1 to 6).

Test 2 Measurement of cumulative step deviation.

Test Parameters


90 (E-GSM+R 900) 0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 (DCS 1800) 512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900) 512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850) 128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Timeslot 4 0 to 7
BTS Rx Signal Level -85.0 dBm -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
Number of Steps 6 0 to 15
Number of Averages 10 1 to 10000
First Step Expected Level (Note 1) 0.0 to 100.0 dBm
Power Level Limit (+) 3.0 dB [2.0 dB] 0.0 to 3.0 dB Phase 1 [Phase 2]
Power Level Limit (-) 0.0 dB [2.0 dB] 0.0 to 3.0 dB Phase 1 [Phase 2]
Step Accuracy Limit (+/-) 0.5 dB [1.0 dB] 0.0 to 3.0 dB Phase 1 [Phase 2]
Cumulative Error (+/-) 3.0 dB [3.0 dB] 0.0 to 6.0 dB Phase 1 [Phase 2]

Note: (1) The default value is BTS specific; it is the same value as entered for


(2) Although some BTS types are capable of 15 BCCH steps, GSM 11-21 only
requires 6 steps to be tested.

(3) Where shown, the choice of default values are Phase 1 or Phase 2
according to the selection made at the BTS Information Menu.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-48 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Test Method

Following synchronisation, the Test Set activates a traffic channel in the downlink direction
(BTS-MS) on the specified transceiver, ARFCN and Air Interface slot. Traffic for transmission is
supplied over the A-bis interface.

by the Number of Averages parameter). Low power bursts (e.g. idle frames) are not included in
the measurement.

Test 1

The BTS is ordered to set the transmitted output power to each power control level according to
the parameter Number of Steps, and the output is checked against these factors and the Step
Accuracy Limit parameter.

Test 2

This test is performed as an additional test within Test 2: the output is checked against the
Cumulative Error parameter.

Pass/Fail Criteria

The (averaged) power measured must be within the specified tolerance at each power level.

The test will fail if any one (averaged) measurement exceeds the prescribed limit.

Test Results

The MMI Results screen displays the results of tests being performed at each selected step
level, together with an overall pass/fail indication (including reason for failure if necessary).

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-49
80-0013

Downlink Power Control Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Downlink Power Control (TCH) Test GSM)

Purpose of Test

This test measures the BTS power output accuracy, and checks the ability of the BTS to control
its output level in steps by measurement of downlink power control decrements at Power Levels
21 to 7.

Note: This facility is only available when the BTS software supports downlink power control.

Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information

90 (E-GSM + R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM 900)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Hopping Off Off, On
Timeslot 4 0 to 7
BTS Tx Level Max Max, 1 to 6
Number of Steps 15 TB, TMB, 1 to 15 (Note 1)
Number of Averages 10 1 to 10000
Step Accuracy Limit 0.5 dB (1.0 dB) 0.0 to 3.0 dB Phase 1 (Phase 2)
Cumulative Error 3.0 dB (3.0 dB) 0.0 to 3.0 dB Phase 1 (Phase 2)

Note: (1) The 'Number of Steps' must not be confused with the Step Number (BCCH
Step Numbers are 0 to 6, TCH Step Numbers are 7 to 21).
TB = top and bottom. TMB = top, middle and bottom.

(2) Where shown, the choice of default values are Phase 1 or Phase 2
according to the selection made at the BTS Information Menu.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-50 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Test Method

Following synchronisation, the Test Set activates a traffic channel in the downlink direction
(BTS-MS) on the specified transceiver, ARFCN and Air Interface slot. Traffic for transmission is
supplied over the A-bis interface.

The step power output accuracy is evaluated by sampling the power over several bursts (as
dictated by the Number of Averages parameter). Low power bursts (e.g. idle frames) are not
included in the measurement.

Test 1

the parameter Number of Steps, and the output is checked against these factors and the
Cumulative Error parameter.

Test 2

the parameter Number of Steps, and the output is checked against these factors and the Step
Accuracy parameter.

Pass/Fail Criteria

The (averaged) power measured must be within the specified tolerance at each power level.

The test will fail if any one (averaged) measurement exceeds the prescribed limit.

Test Results

The MMI Results screen displays the results of tests being performed at the selected step
levels, together with an overall pass/fail indication (including reason for failure if necessary).

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-51
80-0013

TRANSMITTER TESTS EDGE MEASUREMENT MODE



(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Cell Control Channel Generation Test EDGE)

Purpose of Test

This test checks the generation of the Cell Control Channel (CCH) by the BTS.



Test Parameters

90 (E-GSM+R 900) 0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 (DCS 1800) 512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900) 512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850) 128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Network Colour Code 0 0 to 7 (Note 2)
Base Station Colour Code 0 0 to 7 (Note 2)
Maintain BCCH Off Off, On (Note 3)

below Max, etc.

(2) Network and Base Station Colour Code parameters override 'global'
defaults for this test.

(3) When On is selected for the Maintain BCCH parameter, the BTS will
continue transmitting indefinitely until the test is aborted by selecting Abort
at the MMI display.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-52 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Test Method

The BTS is instructed to generate a Cell Control Channel by the Test Set, using System
Information message information downloaded from the Test Set. The Test Set then
synchronises to the BTS.

The content of each of the System Information messages forming the BCCH (i.e. System
Information Types 1-4) is checked against that expected. The FCCH and SCH are implicitly
tested as part of the synchronisation process - the SDCCH and SACCH (and hence the content
of System Information messages Types 5 and 6) are not specifically checked.

Note: The 6113 receiver may correct for some errors in the BTS transmission, hence a 'bit
exact' check is not possible.

If Maintain BCCH is set toOff, then the BCCH is de-activated at the end of the test; if Maintain
BCCH is set to On then the BCCH is maintained at the end of the test, and the BTS will
continue to transmit indefinitely until Abort is selected at the MMI display.

No LAPDm (Air Interface) signalling link is established for this test.

Pass/Fail Criteria

The test will pass if all data elements checked have been found to be correctly transmitted.

Test Results


Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-53
80-0013

Transmitter Test EDGE Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Transmitter Test EDGE)

Purpose of Test


To establish whether the BTS is transmitting a signal with the prescribed 8PSK modulation
(EVM) accuracy. This test is also used to measure the frequency error of the transmitted signal.

Power Profile

To measure the power profile of bursts transmitted by the BTS, and verify that they conform to a
specified power-vs-time mask.

Power Level

To measure the specified BTS Tx power level and check that it is within the defined tolerance.

be limited by the user to +47 dBm, using an external attenuator. (For
user should insert a 3 dB external attenuator).

Modulation Spectrum

To measure the spectrum generated by signal modulation.

Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information
(Note 4)
90 (E-GSM + R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM 900)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Hopping Off (Note 5) Off, On
Timeslot 4 0 to 7
TRX Configuration TCH BCCH, TCH
Burst Number Any Any, 1, 2, 3, 4
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-54 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Frequency Error Limit 48.0 Hz
48.0 Hz
95.0 Hz
95.0 Hz
43.0 Hz
0.0 to 5000.0 Hz (E-GSM 900)
0.0 to 5000.0 Hz (E-GSM +R 900)
0.0 to 5000.0 Hz (DCS 1800)
0.0 to 5000.0 Hz (PCS 1900)
0.0 to 5000.0 Hz (GSM 850)
RMS Phase Error Limit 5.00 deg (Note 5) 0.00 to 10.00 deg
Peak Phase Error Limit 20.00 deg (Note 5) 0.00 to 30.00 deg
RMS EVM Limit 8.0 % 0.0 to 100.0 %
Peak EVM Limit 22.0 % 0.0 to 100.0 % (Note 3)
95% tile EVM Limit 11.0 % 0.0 to 100.0 %
Origin Offset Limit -35.0 dB -80.0 to 0.0 dB
Expected Power Level (Note 2) 0.0 to 100.0 dBm
Power level Limit (+) 3.0 dB (2.0 dB) 0.0 to 3.0 dB Phase 1 (Phase 2)
Power level Limit (-) 0.0 dB (2.0 dB) 0.0 to 3.0 dB Phase 1 (Phase 2)
Power Profile Mask
Checking
On Off, On
Modulation Spectrum
Mask Checking
On Off, On
TCH Power Level Max Max, 1 to 15
Encryption Off (Note 5) Off, A5/1,A5/2

below Max, etc.



(3) The EVM graph mask is set by the value of the Peak EVM Limit parameter
(only).

(4) In EDGE Measurement Mode a side effect is to pick an 8PSK test using a
nominated MCS.

(5) These parameters do not apply in EDGE Measurement Mode.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-55
80-0013

Test Method

Following synchronisation, the Test Set will activate a traffic channel in the downlink direction
(BTS-MS) and speech frames for transmission will be supplied over the A-bis interface.

The 'test pattern' to be transmitted is defined as one of the 10 pre-defined patterns also used for
bit error ratio testing (see Table 4.1 Standard Test Patterns).

The signal from the BTS is downconverted in the Test Set and the IF signal is sampled at 16
times bit rate, with samples evenly distributed over the burst.

Error Vector Magnitude (EVM)

For 8PSK modulation, the samples are used to generate the demodulated data, which is then
re-modulated and compared against the received data to determine the EVM. The rms, peak
and 95
th
percentile EVM is calculated over the burst. The calculation of EVM is also used to
determine the frequency error

The largest, smallest and mean values for each measurement are then displayed.

(1) The position of the training sequence within the burst is determined by an algorithm that
will search over a range of 10 bits relative to the position expected.

(2) The Test Set always demodulates the data from the received burst, and no check is made
to ensure that the received data matches the transmitted data.

(3) Normally, a new burst is captured as soon as the previous burst has been analysed (i.e.
consecutive bursts cannot be measured).

(4) Only traffic bursts from the BTS are analysed. Thus SACCHs and dummy bursts are
masked out.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-56 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Power Profile

The power profile is evaluated by sampling the power over one burst . (Note: No averaging of
bursts is performed by this test).

The power profile will be matched against the power/time template using the method described
in the GSM Recommendations. However, the method of specifying the burst timing differs
slightly in the 6113 from that used in GSM Recommendations 05.05 and 11.20. The Test Set
takes 6 samples per bit, and in consequence the power/time template is rounded to the nearest
1/6 bit increment. Also, the dynamic range of the Test Set limits the lowest measurable level to
approximately -52 dBc. Thus, the power/time limits applied are as follows:

Time Level
-40.62 s to -18.00 s < -30 dBc
-18.00 s to -10.00 s < -6 dBc
-10.00 s to 0.00 s < +4 dBc
0.00 s to 2.00 s -2 dBc to +2.4 dBc
2.00 s to 4.00 s 0 dBc to +2.4 dBc
4.00 s to 538.77 s -15 dBc to +4 dBc
538.77 s to 540.77 s 0 dBc to +2.4 dBc
540.77 s to 542.77 s -2 dBc to +2.4 dBc
+542.77 s to +552.77 s < +4 dBc
+552.77 s to +560.77 s < - 6 dBc
+560.77 s to +587.08 s < - 30 dBc

Note: (1) 'Time' is relative to the start of bit 0.

(2) 'Level' is instantaneous power relative to average power in the useful part
of the burst.

Power Level

by the Number of Bursts parameter) and then averaging. Low power bursts (e.g. idle frames)
are not included in the measurement.

The BTS is ordered to set the transmitted output power to the specified value, and the output is
checked against the Positive Limit and Negative Limit parameters.

Modulation Spectrum

The modulation spectrum is evaluated by sampling the power over the number of bursts
specified by the user.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-57
80-0013

Pass/Fail Criteria

EVM

The test will fail if any of the measured values exceed the limits specified.

Power Profile

The pulse profile must fall within the limits specified.

Power Level

The (averaged) power measured must be within the specified tolerance. The test will fail if the
(averaged) measurement exceeds the prescribed limits.

Test Results

EVM

failure if necessary) and a list of the test results.

Note that the minimum and maximum values do not necessarily relate to the same data burst -
minimum value is the lowest measured of all the bursts, maximum value is the highest
measured of all the bursts, etc.

In addition, the full data array graph (error vs bit and IQ vector for 8PSK modulation) of the last
sample taken is available for diagnostic purposes.

Power Profile


Power Level

The MMI Results screen displays the result of the test, including a pass/fail indicator.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-58 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Transmitter BLER Test EDGE Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Transmitter BLER Test EDGE)

Purpose of Test

This test verifies the basic baseband signal processing (Static Layer 1) functions on the downlink
(BTS towards MS) side of the BTS. Baseband signal processing functions include multiplexing
and coding/interleaving/encrypting.

Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information

90 (E-GSM + R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM 900)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Timeslot 4 0 to 7
TCH Format EGPRS MCS-1 (Note 1)
Sample Time 10s 1 to 300000 s
BLER Limit 0.000 % 0.000 to 100.000 %
Class Ib Limit 0.000 % (Note 3) 0.000 to 100.000 %
Class II Limit 0.000% (Note 3) 0.000 to 100.000 %
Encryption Off (Note 3) Off, A5/1, A5/2

Section.

below Max, etc.


Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-59
80-0013

Test Method

Following synchronisation, a traffic channel on the specified transceiver, on the specified
ARFCN and Air Interface slot, is activated. The BTS is then instructed to transmit a defined bit
pattern (as input to the BTS via the A-bis interface).

The signal transmitted by the BTS is received on the Air Interface, and the BLER measured.
The measured BLER under normal conditions should be zero, although alternative limit values
are allowed.

Pass/Fail Criteria

A test failure is registered if the block error ratio limit is exceeded.

Test Results

failure if necessary), and a list of the statistics gathered during the measurement process:

(1) Block error samples
(2) Block error events
(3) Bit error samples
(4) Bit error events

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-60 6113 E DGE
80-0013

RECEIVER TESTS GSM MEASUREMENT MODE


Receiver BER Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Receiver BER Test GSM)

Purpose of Test

This test can be used for two purposes:

(1) Testing baseband signal processing.

(2) Testing sensitivity compliance.

Baseband Signal Processing

This test verifies the basic baseband signal processing (static layer 1) functions on the uplink
side of the BTS. Baseband signal processing functions include multiplexing and decoding /
deinterleaving / decrypting. In order to perform this test, the test parameter values must be
altered as required (see Test Method for details).

Sensitivity Compliance

This test verifies the ability of the BTS to receive a signal, with an acceptably low error ratio, at
the specified minimum signal level. The default test parameters are set for this test, but may be
changed as required.

Note: This is a compliance test, i.e. it does not establish the limit sensitivity for a given error
ratio, but merely checks that the error ratio is sufficiently low for a given input signal.
The Absolute Sensitivity test is available for measuring the limit sensitivity.

Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information

90 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Hopping Off Off, On
Timeslot 4 0 to 7
Sample Time 10 s 1 to 300000 s
FER Limit (Note 3) 0.000 to 100.000 %
Class Ib Limit (Note 3) 0.000 to 100.000 %
Class II Limit (Note 3) 0.000 to 100.000 %

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-61
80-0013

Section.

(2) Level 1 is 2 dB below Max (defined in Configure BTS Test), level 2 is 4 dB
below Max, etc.

(3) The default value and applicability of the limit parameters varies according
to the BTS and the selected TCH Format. Refer to A-bis CONTROLLED
TESTING / TCH Format Parameter earlier in this Section.

Test Method


The following parameters should be set as shown:

BTS Rx Signal Level : -85 dBm or as required
FER Limit : 0 %
Class Ib Limit : 0 %
Class II Limit : 0 %

Following synchronisation, the BTS is instructed to activate a traffic channel on the specified
transceiver, at a defined frequency and level. An uplink BER measurement is then made.


The default parameters for BTS Rx Signal Level and BER statistics should be used.

Following synchronisation, the Test Set activates a traffic channel on the specified
transceiver/ARFCN/timeslot, with the BTS receiver input level set to the prescribed limit value.

The Test Set then evaluates the bit error ratio for the uplink path (MS-BTS).

Pass/Fail Criteria


The test will pass if all FER/BER values, for all levels, are less than the defined limits.

The test will fail if any limit is exceeded.


The test will pass if the error ratios for BER/FER are less than the maximum values specified.

The test will fail if any of these values exceed the limits set.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-62 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Test Results

Baseband Signal Processing/ Sensitivity Compliance

failure if necessary), and a list of the bit error ratio statistics gathered during the measurement
process:

(1) FER samples
(2) FER events
(3) Class Ib RBER samples
(4) Class Ib RBER events
(5) Class II RBER samples
(6) Class II RBER events

Note: For circuit switched speech channel rates items 1 to 6 above are returned.
For circuit switched data channel rates items 3 to 4 only are returned.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-63
80-0013

Absolute Sensitivity Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Absolute Sensitivity Test GSM)

Purpose of Test

This test measures the sensitivity of the transceiver, by finding the threshold at which the
measured BER deteriorates beyond the limit specified by the operator.

Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information

90 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Hopping Off Off, On
Timeslot 4 0 to 7
Initial Level -104.0 dBm -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
Final Step Size 0.5 dB 0.1 to 2.0 dB
Pass/Fail Threshold -104.0 dBm -120.0 to -40.0 dBm (Note 2)
Test pattern 1 0 to 9
FER Limit (Note 4) 0.000 to 100.000 %

Section.

(2) Pass/Fail Threshold may be selected with 0.1 dB resolution, but actual
sensitivity will be measured to the resolution specified by the final step size.

below Max, etc.

to the BTS and the selected TCH Format. Refer to A-bis CONTROLLED
TESTING / TCH Format Parameter earlier in this Section.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-64 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Test Method

Following synchronisation, the Test Set activates a Traffic Channel on the BTS under test.

Initially, the signal level applied to the BTS is set to the Start Level specified by the user
(-40 dBm to -120 dBm). The level is then reduced in large, medium and small steps in order to
find the absolute sensitivity point as quickly as possible.

The quick BER check uses pre-defined samples and limits, as follows:

Test Pattern As specified in test parameters
FER Samples 25
FER Events 0
Class Ib Samples 3300
Class Ib Events 2
Class II Samples 1950
Class II Events 2

The number of samples is chosen to be a reasonable number, (for accuracy), commensurate
with a short measurement time (about 1 second).

From this point, the test decreases the power level in 2 dB steps until the following BER test
fails:

FER samples 50
FER Events 1
Class Ib Samples 6600
Class Ib Events (Note)
Class II Samples 3900
Class II Events (Note)

Note: Chosen to be 20 % of the final RBER specified at the start of the test.

When this BER is reached, the step size is reduced to the Final Step Size specified by the user
(0.1 dB to 2.0 dB). The level is decreased by this step size and the BER is measured based on
the user-specified number of samples until the number of events is reached.

During any phase of this procedure, if the BER recovers to 0 %, the step size is increased to
5 dB and quick BER measurements taken. This is to ensure that the 'knee' of the BER curve is
reached as rapidly as possible.

Having determined the absolute sensitivity level, the Test Set compares this value with the
threshold given as part of the test parameters, in order to determine whether the test has passed
or failed.

Pass/Fail Criteria

The test will pass if measured sensitivity is not higher than the limit value specified.

The test will fail if the measured BER is too high at the maximum input level (-40 dBm) or does
not meet the Pass/Fail threshold.

Test Results

failure if necessary), and the measured sensitivity.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-65
80-0013

Access Burst Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Access Burst Test GSM)

Purpose of Test

The 6113 sends a number of Channel Request messages on the Random Access Channel
(RACH) over the air interface at a given signal level, and the BTS Channel Required responses
on the A-bis interface are examined to check the ability of the BTS to detect and report on the
presence of RACHs.

Note: This is a compliance test and is performed at a single level.

Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information

90 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Number of RACHs 200 0 to 10000000 (Note 2)
RACH Type Circuit Switch Circuit Switch, Packet Switch (Note 3)
RACH Delay Start 0 bits 0 to 130 bits (Note 4)
RACH Delay Stop 63 bits 0 to 130 bits (Note 4)
Timing Error (+/-) 3 bits 1 to 130 bits
Spurious RACH test length 3 minutes 1 to 1440 minutes (24 hours) (Note 5)
FER Limit 0.5 % 0.000 to 100.0 %

below Max, etc.

(2) '0' initiates search for spurious RACHs for the specified test length.

(3) This parameter dose not apply in GSM Measurement Mode..

(4) RACH Delay Start and RACH Delay Stop define the timing advance
applied.

(5) The Number of RACHs parameter must be set at 0 to enable the listen for
RACHs facility to operate, for the length of time defined by the Length of
Spurious RACHs Test parameter.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-66 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Test Method

(RACH) uplink over the CCH utilising Access Bursts; the Random Reference field is varied in a
random sequence and the Establishment Cause field is set to 'Other Cases'. The BTS responds
with a 'Channel Required' message over the uplink A-bis interface. RACHs are sent at a user-
defined power level and timing offset (RACH Delay). A RACH is generated as soon as possible
after the previous one has been detected on the A-bis, or every 400 ms for the first 5 samples
and every 100 ms thereafter if no correct RACH is detected. The value of the Random
Reference and measured Timing Advance is verified in the Channel Required Message on the
A-bis.

Setting the number of RACHs to zero will initiate a search for spurious RACHs for the length of
time set by the value of the Spurious RACH Test Length parameter.

Spurious RACHs can also occur on the A-bis mixed in with 'real' ones, therefore the number of
RACHs received in the test results can be greater than the number sent.

Pass/Fail Criteria

The test will pass if the percentage of failed RACHs does not exceed the selected FER Limit
value.

Test Results

Test results are given as the number of RACHs and the number of failed RACHs (Events).
Reasons for failure are listed as follows:

Invalid Channel Request
No Channel Request
Bad Timing Advance

These Events are then assessed as failures with respect to Timing Advance. The top 6 failures
(with respect to Timing Advance) are shown.

The number of spurious RACHs received during the test are also shown. These are not
considered to be failures.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-67
80-0013

RX Level Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / RX Level Test GSM)

Purpose of Test

This test verifies the performance of the BTS in measuring and reporting the level of the
received signal (RX LEV) on the uplink side of the BTS.

Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information

90 (E-GSM + R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM 900)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Hopping Off Off, On
Timeslot 4 0 to 7
Initial Level -91.5 dBm -120.0 to 40.0 dBm
Step Size 2 dB 1 to 10 dB
Number of Samples 4 1 to 10
RX Level Error (+/-) 4 1 to 10

Note: (1) The range of data rates available varies according to the BTS. Refer to
A-bis CONTROLLED TESTING / TCH Format Parameter earlier in this
Section.

below Max, etc.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-68 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Test Method

A traffic channel is established between the BTS and the 6113 using the defined ARFCN,
Transceiver, and Timeslot. The basic principle of the test is to read and display the BTS signal
measurement reports using a defined uplink signal level, and then to reduce the uplink signal
level and record the new measurement values. The test repeats the measurements for the
required number of steps. The step size governs the increment between uplink signal levels.
The number of samples defines how many measurement reports are read and stored for each
step.

For each step the MMI displays the following:

Requested uplink signal level
Expected RX LEV value
Minimum received RX LEV value
Maximum received RX LEV value
The calculated mean of the received RX LEV values
The number of RX QUAL values received at each of the 8 possible quality levels (0 to 7)

Pass/Fail Criteria

At the completion of the test the MMI displays a PASS or FAIL status based on the reported
maximum and minimum RX LEV values for each step. The test will FAIL if the minimum or
maximum value for a step exceeds the expected RX LEV value +/- the error limit.

Test Results

The MMI Results screen displays the results of tests at each selected level. The Rx Level Mean
value is highlighted if it fails. An overall pass/fail indication is given (together with reason for
failure , if necessary).

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-69
80-0013

RX Quality Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / RX Quality Test GSM)

Purpose of Test

A traffic channel is established between the BTS and the 6113 using the defined ARFCN,
Transceiver, and Timeslot. This test verifies the performance of the BTS in measuring and
reporting the quality of the received signal (RX QUAL) on the uplink side of the BTS. The test
also reads the Level measurement reports (RX LEV) and displays them as part of the test
results for comparison. This test differs from the RX Level test in that a BER test is performed
on the traffic channel.

Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information

90 (E-GSM + R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM 900)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Hopping Off Off, On
Timeslot 4 0 to 7
Initial Level -102.0 dBm -120.0 to 40.0 dBm
Step Size 1.0 dB 0.1 to 10.0 dB
RX Qual Test Limit 80.000 0.000 to 100.00 %

Section.

below Max, etc.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-70 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Test Method

The basic principle of the test is to read and display the BTS signal measurement reports using
a defined uplink signal level, and then to reduce the uplink signal level and record the new
measurement values. The test repeats the measurements for the required number of steps.
The step size governs the increment between uplink signal levels. The number of samples
defines how many measurement reports are read and stored for each step. For each step a
BER test is initiated in the 6113 which continues until the required number of samples have been
obtained. When the required number of samples have been obtained, the BER result is
calculated.

For each step the MMI displays the following:

Requested uplink signal level
Sample No.
Expected RX Quality value
The calculated Class II RBER result
The percentage spread of RX QUAL values received at each of the 8 possible quality
levels (0 to 7)

The expected RX Quality is derived from the following table (extracted from GSM Rec. 11.21):

RXQUAL BER range Required events at correct RXQUAL value
0 < 0.10 % 90 %
0/1 0.10 % to 0.26 % 75 %
1 0.26 % to 0.30 % 75 %
1/2 0.30 % to 0.51 % 75 %
2 0.51 % to 0.64 % 85 %
2/3 0.64 % to 1.00 % 85 %
3 1.00 % to 1.30 % 90 %
3/4 1.30 % to 1.90 % 90 %
4 1.90 % to 2.70 % 90 %
4/5 2.70 % to 3.80 % 90 %
5 3.80 % to 5.40 % 95 %
5/6 5.40 % to 7.60 % 95 %
6 7.60 % to 11.00 % 95 %
6/7 11.00 % to 15.00 % 95 %
7 > 15.00 % 95 %

Pass/Fail Criteria

If the results fall within the limits selected in the test parameters then the test result is shown as
PASS.

Test Results

Signal Level, Expected Quality, Receiver Quality and calculated RBER for each sample are
displayed. An overall test PASS or FAIL is also shown, together with a reason for any failure.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-71
80-0013

Receiver Signalling BER Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Receiver Signalling BER Test GSM)

Purpose of Test

This test performs BER tests on signalling channels.

Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information

90 (E-GSM + R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM 900)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Timeslot 4 (Note 2)
Channel Format SDCCH/4 (Note 2)
Sub slot 2 (Note 2)
BTS Rx Signal Level -104.0 -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
FER Limit 0.100 0.000 to 100.00 %

below Max, etc.

(2) Channel formats in GSM Measurement Mode are as follows:

Channel Format Timeslot Sub-slot
SDCCH/4 inactive 0 to 3
SACCH/C4 inactive 0 to 3
FACCH/F 0 to 7 inactive
SACCH/TF 0 to 7 inactive
SDCCH/8 0 to 7 0 to 7
SACCH/C8 0 to 7 0 to 7
FACCH/H 0 to 7 0 to 1
SACCH/TH 0 to 7 0 to 1

Availability of SDCCH/8, SACCH/C8, FACCH/H, SACCH/TH is dependent
on BTS type selection.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-72 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Test Method

SDCCH/4 and FACCH/F and SDCCH/8 and FACCH/H

The 6113 locks to the CCH and activates the selected channel to establish an RF signalling link.
Ciphering is activated (if selected). The 6113 then sends an ASSIGNMENT COMPLETE over
the RF interface and waits for a message on the A-bis interface.

The 6113 then repeatedly sends the transparent message in an I frame over the A-bis interface
and records the number of correct return (same) messages received on the RF interface.

When the selected Number of Samples (messages) has been sent, the signalling link is
released and the channel deactivated.

SACCH/TF and SACCH/TH

Ciphering is activated (if selected). The 6113 then sends an ASSIGNMENT COMPLETE on the
SAPI 13 link over the RF interface and waits for a message on the A-bis interface.

The 6113 then repeatedly sends the transparent message in an I frame over the A-bis interface
and records the number of correct return (same) messages received on the RF interface.


SACCH/C4 and SACCH/C8

Ciphering is activated (if selected). The 6113 then sends MEASUREMENT REPORTs over the
RF interface and waits for the MEASUREMENT RESULT on the A-bis interface, examining the
contents of the L3 info (MEAS RSP).

The 6113 then repeatedly sends the MEASUREMENT REPORTs in a UI frame over the A-bis
interface and records the number of correct return (same) messages received on the RF
interface.


Pass / Fail Criteria

The test will FAIL if the ratio of events-to-samples exceeds the value set in the FER Limit
parameter.

Test Results

The recorded number of samples, events and calculated FER is displayed and continually
updated during the test. If the current FER exceeds the value set for the FER Limit parameter
then the FER Ratio box is highlighted.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-73
80-0013

RECEIVER TESTS GPRS MEASUREMENT MODE


Receiver BLER Test GPRS Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Receiver BLER Test GPRS)

Purpose of Test









Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information

90 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Timeslot 4 0 to 7
TCH Format GPRS CS-1 (Note 1)
BTS Rx Signal Level -104.0 dBm (Note 3) -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
BLER Limit 10 % 0.000 to 100.000 %

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-74 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Section.

below Max, etc.

(3) The BTS Rx Signal Level Parameter will default to the compliance level for
the static reference sensitivity measurement under Normal conditions.

CS1 to CS3 = -104.0, CS4 = -101.0

(4) These parameters do not apply in GPRS Measurement Mode.

Test Method



BLER Limit : 0 %

transceiver, at a defined frequency and level. An uplink BLER measurement is then made.


The default parameters for BTS Rx Signal Level and BLER statistics should be used.


The Test Set then evaluates the block error ratio for the uplink path (MS-BTS).

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-75
80-0013

Pass/Fail Criteria


The test will pass if all BLER values, for all levels, are less than the defined limits.



The test will pass if the error ratio for BLER is less than the maximum value specified.

The test will fail if this value exceeds the limits set.

Test Results


failure if necessary), and a list of the block error ratio statistics gathered during the
measurement process:

Block Error samples
Block Error events
Bit Error samples
Bit Error events

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-76 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Absolute Sensitivity Test GPRS Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Absolute Sensitivity Test GPRS)

Purpose of Test

measured BLER deteriorates beyond the limit specified by the operator.

Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information

90 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Timeslot 4 0 to 7
TCH Format GPRS CS-1 (Note 1)
Initial Level -104.0 dBm (Note 4) -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
Pass/Fail Threshold -104.0 dBm (Note 4) -120.0 to -40.0 dBm (Note 2)
BLER Limit 10 % 0.000 to 100.000 %

Section.


below Max, etc.

(4) The BTS Rx Signal Level Parameter should default to the compliance level
for the static reference sensitivity measurement under Normal conditions.

CS1 to CS3 = -104.0, CS4 = -101.0


Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-77
80-0013

Test Method



The quick BLER check uses pre-defined samples and limits, as follows:

BLER Samples 25
BLER Events 0


From this point, the test decreases the power level in 2 dB steps until the following BLER test
fails:

BLER samples 50
BLER Events 1

Note: Chosen to be 20 % of the final BLER specified at the start of the test.

When this BLER is reached, the step size is reduced to the Final Step Size specified by the user
(0.1 dB to 2.0 dB). The level is decreased by this step size and the BLER is measured based on

During any phase of this procedure, if the BLER recovers to 0 %, the step size is increased to
5 dB and quick BLER measurements taken. This is to ensure that the 'knee' of the BLER curve
is reached as rapidly as possible.

or failed.

Pass/Fail Criteria


The test will fail if the measured BLER is too high at the maximum input level (-40 dBm) or does

Test Results


Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-78 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Access Burst Test GPRS Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Access Burst Test GPRS)

Purpose of Test

presence of RACHs.


Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information

90 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
FER Limit 0.5 % (Note 6) 0.000 to 100.0 %

below Max, etc.


(3) This parameter is only enabled when the BTS type selected supports
sending the Extended Packet Access Burst via RACH.

applied.


(6) For GPRS and EDGE modes the FER limit is 0.5% in Circuit Switch and
15% in Packet Switch.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-79
80-0013

Test Method

random sequence and the Establishment Cause field is set to 'Other Cases'. (For the Packet
Switch version the Extended Packet Access Burst is utilised with an Establishment Cause of
Packet Access Single Block). The BTS responds with a 'Channel Required' message over the
uplink A-bis interface. RACHs are sent at a user-defined power level and timing offset (RACH
Delay). A RACH is generated as soon as possible after the previous one has been detected on
the A-bis, or every 400 ms for the first 5 samples and every 100 ms thereafter if no correct
RACH is detected. The value of the Random Reference and measured Timing Advance is
verified in the Channel Required Message on the A-bis.



Pass/Fail Criteria

value.

Test Results


No Channel Request
Bad Timing Advance



Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-80 6113 E DGE
80-0013

RECEIVER TESTS EDGE MEASUREMENT MODE


Receiver BLER Test EDGE Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Receiver BLER Test EDGE)

Purpose of Test









Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information

90 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Timeslot 4 0 to 7
BTS Rx Signal Level -104.0 dBm (Note 3) -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
BLER Limit 10 % 0.000 to 100.000 %

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-81
80-0013

Section.

below Max, etc.

(3) The BTS Rx Signal Level Parameter will default to the compliance level for
the static reference sensitivity measurement under Normal conditions.

MCS1 to MCS3 = -104.0, MCS4 = -101.5
MCS5 = -101.0, MCS6 = -99.5, MCS7 = -96.0, MCS8 = -93.0,
MCS9 = -91.5


Test Method



BLER Limit : 0 %

transceiver, at a defined frequency and level. An uplink BLER measurement is then made.


The default parameters for BTS Rx Signal Level and BLER statistics should be used.


The Test Set then evaluates the bit error ratio / block error ratio for the uplink path (MS-BTS).

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-82 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Pass/Fail Criteria


The test will pass if all BLER values, for all levels, are less than the defined limits.



The test will pass if the error ratio for BLER is less than the maximum value specified.

The test will fail if this value exceeds the limits set.

Test Results


failure if necessary), and a list of the block error ratio statistics gathered during the
measurement process:

Block Error samples
Block Error events
Bit Error samples
Bit Error events

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-83
80-0013

Absolute Sensitivity Test EDGE Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Absolute Sensitivity Test EDGE)

Purpose of Test

measured BLER deteriorates beyond the limit specified by the operator.

Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information

90 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Timeslot 4 0 to 7
Initial Level -104.0 dBm (Note 4) -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
Pass/Fail Threshold -104.0 dBm (Note 4) -120.0 to -40.0 dBm (Note 2)
BLER Limit 10 % 0.000 to 100.000 %

Section.


below Max, etc.


MCS1 to MCS3 = -104.0, MCS4 = -101.5
MCS5 = -101.0, MCS6 = -99.5, MCS7 = -96.0, MCS8 = -93.0,
MCS9 = -91.5


Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-84 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Test Method



The quick BLER check uses pre-defined samples and limits, as follows:

BLER Samples 25
BLER Events 0


From this point, the test decreases the power level in 2 dB steps until the following BLER test
fails:

BLER samples 50
BLER Events 1

Note: Chosen to be 20 % of the final BLER specified at the start of the test.

When this BLER is reached, the step size is reduced to the Final Step Size specified by the user
(0.1 dB to 2.0 dB). The level is decreased by this step size and the BLER is measured based on

During any phase of this procedure, if the BLER recovers to 0 %, the step size is increased to
5 dB and quick BLER measurements taken. This is to ensure that the 'knee' of the BLER curve
is reached as rapidly as possible.

or failed.

Pass/Fail Criteria


The test will fail if the measured BLER is too high at the maximum input level (-40 dBm) or does

Test Results


Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-85
80-0013

Access Burst Test EDGE Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Access Burst Test EDGE)

Purpose of Test

presence of RACHs.


Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information

90 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
FER Limit 0.5 % (Note 6) 0.000 to 100.0 %

below Max, etc.


(3) This parameter is only enabled when the BTS type selected supports
sending the Extended Packet Access Burst via RACH.

applied.


(6) For GPRS and EDGE modes the FER limit is 0.5% in Circuit Switch and
15% in Packet Switch.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-86 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Test Method

random sequence and the Establishment Cause field is set to 'Other Cases'. (For the Packet
Switch version the Extended Packet Access Burst is utilised with an Establishment Cause of
Packet Access Single Block). The BTS responds with a 'Channel Required' message over the
uplink A-bis interface. RACHs are sent at a user-defined power level and timing offset (RACH
Delay). A RACH is generated as soon as possible after the previous one has been detected on
the A-bis, or every 400 ms for the first 5 samples and every 100 ms thereafter if no correct
RACH is detected. The value of the Random Reference and measured Timing Advance is
verified in the Channel Required Message on the A-bis.



Pass/Fail Criteria

value.

Test Results


No Channel Request
Bad Timing Advance



Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-87
80-0013

INTERACTIVE TESTS

(Hyperlink to Section 5 / MULTIMODE MENU)

Multimode GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Multimode GSM)

Purpose of Test

The Multimode Test performs continuous measurements on the BTS transmitter and receiver
and displays the results of these measurements in real time. The test allows parameters to be
changed as the test runs so that the operator can see in real time the effect on the BTS of
changing the operating conditions. This test is particularly useful as an aid to fault diagnosis.



Test Parameters

Measurement Mode
Override
See Measurement
Mode information

90 (E-GSM + R 900)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM 900)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Hopping Off Off, On
Timeslot 4 0 to 7
BTS Tx Level Max 1 to 6, Max
BTS Rx Signal Level -104.0 dBm -120.0 to -40
Burst Number Any Any, 1 to 4
Video Averages 50 1 to 999 (Note 2)
Frequency Offset 0 Hz -500 to 500 Hz
Expected Power Level (Note 3) +0.0 to +100.0 dBm
Timing Advance 0 bits 0 to 63 bits

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-88 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Section.

(2) 1 = No averaging.



(4) In GSM Measurement Mode a side effect is to pick a GMSK test i.e. phase
error measurement.

Test Method

Set the Test Parameters to the required initial values and then press the Run Test button on the
on the Test : Multimode screen. The Test Set initiates 'dummy' two-way traffic between the Test
Set and the BTS and then starts the Multimode test. The test consists of a series of tests which
are executed continuously:

Downlink BER
BTS Power Measurement
Power Profile
Modulation Spectrum

While the tests are running, the MMI can be used to change the following Test Parameters:

Rx Level
Frequency Offset
BTS Power Level
Test Pattern
Timing Advance

Each time a Test Parameter is changed the test is stopped, the Multimode is reconfigured, and
then the test is restarted, automatically.

To stop the test, press the Abort button on the Test : Multimode screen.

Video Averaging

Video Averaging of the Modulation Spectrum graph is implemented as follows.

For an averaging value of n the data displayed each burst (the Averaged Data) is calculated by
always weighting the New burst data by 1/n and accordingly the old Averaged Data (the Saved
Data) by (n-1)/n, so that:

Averaged Data =
(( ) ) n xSavedData NewBurstData
n
- + 1

and then

Saved data = Averaged data

Until the averaging value is reached, averaging is true, i.e.:

Averaged Data =
1 2 stBurstData ndBurstData New nth BurstData
n
+ + + ... ( )

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-89
80-0013

The video averaging value (Video Averages parameter) defaults to 50 bursts and ranges from 1
(i.e. no averaging) to 999 bursts. This is in compliance with the GSM recommendations
11.20/11.21 for Base Station testing (11.21 request at least 200 bursts, and 11.20 requests at
least 500).

Until the averaging value is reached, the count is displayed in the top left-hand corner of the
graph. The averaging is restarted whenever a parameter is edited or when the Restart
Averaging button is pressed.

Pass/Fail Criteria

Pass/Fail criteria are only applied to the Power Profile test, Modulation Spectrum test and Phase
Error test and are indicated on the Multimode : Summary screen.

Note: (1) PASS/FAIL criteria for the Power Profile test conform to the GSM Standard.

(2) The PASS/FAIL mask for the Modulation Spectrum test takes into account the
performance characteristics of the Test Set in the noise regions.

(3) The PASS/FAIL mask for the Phase Error test is set by value of the fixed peak
phase error limits (only).

Test Results

The following (continuously updated) test results are provided on the Multimode : Summary
screen; they are presented as bargraphs with upper/lower limit markers, and numeric values.

Rx Class II RBER
Tx Class II RBER
BTS Tx Power
RMS Phase Error
Peak Phase Error
Frequency Error

The user must apply own PASS/FAIL decision from the evidence of the test results.

A PASS/FAIL indication for the Power Profile test and the Modulation Spectrum test is also given
(see Notes 1 and 2 under the heading Pass/Fail Criteria above).

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-90 6113 E DGE
80-0013

LIVE TESTS

RF Tests Mode Test

Purpose of the Test

The purpose of the 6113 RF Tests Mode test is to provide a simple means of regularly
monitoring the performance of BTS transmitters, and receivers (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R),
without taking the BTS off the air.

If a deterioration is observed in the performance of one of the transmitters or receivers then the
BTS can be taken off the air, in a controlled and planned manner, and the offending item quickly
replaced. The performance of the BTS can then be revalidated using the full set of test
procedures (with A-bis control) and returned to service, thus helping to avoid unplanned breaks
in service.

Test Parameters

FER Limit 0.100 0.000 to 100.000 % (Note 1)
Class Ib RBER Limit 0.400 0.000 to 100.000 % (Note 1)
Class II RBER Limit 2.000 0.000 to 100.000 % (Note 1)
Expected Power Level 0.0 dBm -100.0 to +100 0 dBm
Power Level Limit () 6.0 dBm 0.0 to 100.0 dBm
Frequency Error Limit () 48.0 Hz 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz (E-GSM 900)
95.0 Hz 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz (DCS 1800)
95.0 Hz 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz (PCS 1900)
43.0 Hz 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz (GSM 850)
Peak Phase Error Limit 20.00 deg 0.00 to 30.00 deg (Note 3)
Power Profile Mask
Checking
OFF OFF, ON
Modulation Spectrum
Mask Checking
OFF OFF, ON (Note 2)
Power Tracking ON OFF, ON
Display Holding OFF OFF, ON
Print on Fail OFF OFF, ALL, FAILURES
Link Establish Level -40.0
-47.0
-20.0
-20.0
-40.0 to -120.0 (Simplex)
-47.0 to -120.0 (Duplex)
-20.0 to 100.0 (B.O.S.S. Simplex)
-20.0 to 100.0 (B.O.S.S. Duplex)
In-Call Level -40.0
-47.0
-20.0
-20.0
-40.0 to -120.0 (Simplex)
-47.0 to -120.0 (Duplex)
-20.0 to 100.0 (B.O.S.S. Simplex)
-20.0 to 100.0 (B.O.S.S. Duplex)
IMEI Number 12345612001000 <NOT APPLICABLE>
Scan Start Channel
Number
1
975
512
512
128
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM 900)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Scan Stop Channel
Number
124
1023
885
810
251
01 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM 900)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R
900)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-91
80-0013

Note: (1) These items are only relevant when Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R is fitted.

(2) The Modulation Spectrum Mask is set to match the performance
characteristics of the Test Set.

(3) The phase error graph mask is set by the value of the Peak Phase Error
Limit parameter (only).

Test Method

The following diagram shows the sequence of operations. A description of how to perform the
RF Tests Mode test is given in Section 5 / LIVE TESTS MENU.

Scan for CCHs
Synchronise
Enter new TCH
ARFCN and slot
Register
Place Call
Select CCH/
TCH
Measure CCH and
Display Measurements
Detach
Set Limits
Print Errors/
Results
Measure CCH and
Set Limits
Print Errors/
Results
Set Limits
Print Errors/
Results
Measure TCH and
Clear Call
Measure BTS
Rx Sensitivity
Measure TCH and
Place Call
STANDARD ISSUE SOFTWARE
OPTION 310
OPTION 54 / 54R

Figure 4.1 RF Tests Operation - Block Diagram

Synchronise

The Test Set attempts to synchronise to the CCH on the currently specified channel. If a valid
CCH is found then the measurements screen (RF Tests Summary) becomes 'live' and the
Signal status is shown as "Control Channel", otherwise the Signal status is shown as
"Synchronising" and the Test Set continues to attempt to synchronise to the CCH until either a
channel is found or Re-scan is selected, or the operator exits from RF Tests mode.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-92 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Scan for CCHs

The operator can press the Scan / Channel Table button to switch to the Scan / Channel Table
screen. If the Channel Table contains no existing entries then the Test Set will automatically
start the 'Scan for CCH' procedure, otherwise the Test Set will display the results of the previous
scan. A new scan can be triggered by pressing the Rescan button.

If there are existing entries then the user can select one of them. If this selection is a different
CCH from the one being monitored then a 'Synchronise to Cell Control Channel' is triggered. If it
is not a CCH the Test Set synchronises to the associated CCH and then measures the TCH.

Scanning Algorithm

The Test Set scans for signals across the frequency band, generating a list of channels suitable
for testing. The range of channels to be scanned can be changed by the operator.

If a CCH is found then the Test Set stores the BSIC reported by the 'Synchronise to CCH'
function and waits for System Information messages to be received. From this the following
elements are extracted and stored:

MCC, MNC, LAC, CI. (System Information type 3)
TCH allocation (System Information type 1)

The approximate power level for CCHs is also obtained.

The Test Set indicates its progress as it scans through the frequency band, and the information
displayed represents the Channel being checked. Whenever a suitable CCH is found the
relevant information on that Channel is entered in the table. If a System Information type 1
message is not received, then only CCH information is displayed.

The operator can halt the scan process at any time.

When the scan is complete or halted, the operator can select a CCH or TCH from a scrolling list;
the information presented is:

Channel type (CCH or TCH), channel number.

For CCHs the following additional information is also presented:

Level, MCC, MNC, Cell Identity, Location Area Code.

Network operator names are decoded from the MNC, unknown names are displayed as decimal
numbers. Network country codes are not decoded.

If a CCH is selected, the Test Set synchronises to the channel and starts monitoring it. If a TCH
is selected the Test Set synchronises to the associated CCH and then starts monitoring the
TCH.

Select CCH/TCH

The operator can select a channel from the list presented in the Channel Table. There are two
options available:

(1) If the operator selects a CCH from the list presented in the Scan Table the Test Set
synchronises to the selected CCH and commences measuring it.

(2) If the operator selects a TCH from the Scan Table the Test Set locks to the associated
CCH then moves to the selected TCH and commences measuring it.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-93
80-0013

Measure CCH

To measure a CCH the operator can either select an entry from the scan table or enter the
known CCH ARFCN using the Channel Number button, and then use the Lock to CCH button to
lock to the CCH. The Test Set measures the BCCH carrier, displaying results on the screen.
BER measurements are not available.

In the measurement display (RF Tests Mode Summary) the Test Set can be configured to print
measured values if they exceed pre-determined limits, as well as 'print on demand'.

Measure TCH

When the Test Set is synchronised, it can be switched to monitor a pure TCH carrier associated
with the current CCH, if the channel is known. To do this the (TCH) Channel number and
timeslot to be monitored are both entered. The Test Set attempts to perform measurements on
this new Channel / Timeslot combination. If no signal is found then the Signal status is shown
as "Invalid Measurement", otherwise the status is shown as "Traffic channel" or Dummy Burst.

To monitor a new CCH carrier, the above procedure is followed but the Lock to CCH button is
also pressed to tell the Test Set to synchronise to the new CCH. If the Test Set loses
synchronisation due to lack of power in the selected channel, the operator must select a new
channel as above and then use the Lock to CCH option.

In the RF Tests Summary (measurement) display, the Test Set can be configured to print
measured values if they exceed pre-determined limits, as well as 'print on demand'.

Register (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R)

When the Test Set is locked to a CCH, the operator can request the Test Set to register with the
network (performing a location update).

The Test Set indicates progress in a separate screen.

If the registration fails then the MMI indicates the reason for the failure and reverts to transmitter
measurements on the CCH. The call state remains at 'Not Registered'.

Place Call (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R)

Using a valid network SIM, the Test Set can place out-going MO (mobile originated) calls. All
types of the call set-up procedure (early, late and very early assignment etc.) are supported.

When the Test Set has locked to a control channel the operator can initiate a call. The Test Set
then initiates MO call setup. If the Test Set is not registered then registration procedure is
automatically invoked.

When the call is connected the Test Set transmits a defined data pattern to the BTS and
attempts to locate the pattern on the A-bis link. If the pattern is found then the BTS receiver
RBER is measured. If no pattern is found then the RBER measurements boxes are left blank.

When a call is set-up the Test Set automatically switches to measuring the TCH.

The Test Set indicates progress through the call set-up procedure in a separate screen.

If the call set-up fails then the MMI indicates the reason for the call failure and the Test Set
reverts to transmitter measurements only. The call state remains at 'Registered' to allow
successive call set-up attempts.

If an A-bis pattern is not found during this procedure a message is displayed to warn the user.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-94 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Clear Call (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R)

When a call is in progress the operator can request the call to be cleared. The Test Set initiates
the MO call clearing procedure.

The protocol progress is shown on a separate screen.

The Test Set also supports MT call clearing.

If the user exits from RF Tests mode the call is cleared (and the IMSI detached) automatically,
following the same procedure as above.

Detach (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R)

When the Test Set is registered to a BTS the operator can request that it is detached. The Test
Set initiates a detach IMSI procedure.

The protocol progress is shown on a separate screen.

If the operator exits from RF Tests mode the IMSI will be detached automatically, following the
same procedure as above.

Display Measurements - Receiver BER (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R)

To measure the BTS receiver BER, the 6113 Test Set places a call with the BTS and monitors
the BTS A-bis link connections. The Test Set generates a known data pattern to stimulate the
BTS receiver, and BER analysis is performed by comparing this pattern with the data pattern
received from the A-bis.

The BTS receiver BER can be monitored when the Test Set is in a call and the A-bis connection
between the BTS and BSC is being monitored.

BTS Rx Sensitivity (Absolute) (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R)

When the Test Set is registered and a call is set up, the user can perform the BTS Rx Sensitivity
test. This is initiated from a dedicated button on the MMI, and has its own set of test
parameters. It is in effect a test within a test. The BTS Rx Sensitivity test is described later in
this Section. The MMI controls are described in Section 5 / LIVE TESTS MENU.

Pass/Fail Criteria - RF Tests Mode

No overall pass/fail result is provided for RF Tests Mode. The results of each measurement are
displayed, together with the limits set by the operator; the purpose of the test is to display and
highlight the measurements that are beyond those limits.

Test Results - RF Tests Mode

The results of all measurements are displayed, and graphs are available where applicable. All
results screens can be printed, and a print-on-fail option is also provided.

When a limit failure occurs the Test Set suspends measurements and then automatically
switches through the Summary screen and relevant graph screens for the current mode and
performs a screen dump for each screen. Optionally, the printing can be restricted to the
Summary screen and the screen for the parameter that is failing.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-95
80-0013

BTS Rx Sensitivity Test

Purpose of the Test

This test measures the absolute sensitivity of a BTS receiver by ramping down the uplink power
and noting the point at which the measured receiver RBER on the A-bis deteriorates beyond the
limit specified by the operator.

Test Parameters


Initial Level -104.0 dBm -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
Pass/Fail Threshold -104.0 dBm -120.0 to -20.0 dBm (Note)
FER Limit 0.200 % 0.000 to 100.000 %
Class Ib RBER Limit 0.400 % 0.000 to 100.000 %
Class II RBER Limit 2.000 % 0.000 to 100.000 %

Note: Pass/Fail Threshold may be selected with 0.1 dB resolution, but actual sensitivity
will be measured to the resolution specified by the final step size.

Test Method

This test must be performed during the RF Tests Mode test.

Following registration and call setup, the Measure BTS Rx Sensitivity option must be selected
at the MMI to cause a Traffic Channel to be activated on the BTS under test.

The test is then performed in a similar manner to the Absolute Sensitivity test in the main
Receiver Tests.

Pass/Fail Criteria


The test will fail if the measured BER is too high at the maximum input level (-40 dBm) or does

Test Results


Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-96 6113 E DGE
80-0013


Introduction

A-bis Protocol Analysis mode allows users to investigate the A-bis link between a BSC and
associated BTS. It provides two main facilities:

(1) Monitoring and logging of signalling and traffic data being carried over a 2.048 Mbit/s (E1)
or a 1.54 Mbit/s (T1) A-bis link between a BSC and a BTS, in both Uplink and Downlink
directions.

(2) Replay of previously stored log files.

A-bis Protocol Analysis mode uses the E1 or T1 interface, depending on which of the two
Options is fitted to the 6113, and supports 4 Signalling channels and 1 Traffic channel
simultaneously.

Logging of Layer 2 frames allows the user to examine the link for general fault conditions, i.e.
unreliability resulting in multiple retries. The logging of Layer 3 frames allows the user to
examine the messages passing between the BSC and BTS to verify the correct sequencing for
Call Setups, etc.

When A-bis Protocol Analysis mode is used, the 6113 acts as a high impedance (non-invasive)
monitor on the A-bis link. It cannot be used while the 6113 is controlling the BTS in 'normal'
mode.

Refer to Section 5 / LIVE TESTS MENU for a description of how to use the MMI to control A-bis
Protocol Analysis Mode.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-97
80-0013

Facilities Provided

The function of A-bis Protocol Analysis mode is to enable a 6113 to monitor the A-bis Signalling
and Traffic data flowing between a BSC and a BTS without disrupting the link. The following
diagram illustrates the equipment configuration.

BSC BTS
6113
A-bis LINK

Figure 4.2 A-bis Protocol Analysis Mode Configuration

The following facilities are provided:

(1) The ability to select up to four A-bis slots on which to monitor data, using either 64 kbit/s
32 kbit/s or 16 kbit/s signalling.

Note: If 16 kbit/s or 32 kbit/s signalling is used, each sub-slot monitored counts as one
channel.

(2) The ability to record the Layer 2 and Layer 3 Signalling frames for later review.

(3) The ability to record a Traffic frame for later review.

(4) The ability to filter out certain Signalling messages to minimise data logged.

(5) The ability to replay stored log files.

The 6113 A-bis interface is operated in high impedance mode at all times whilst A-bis Protocol
Analysis Mode is selected.

A-bis Connections - OUT/MONITOR, IN

Note: A-bis connectors on the 6113 Test Set are illustrated in Section 3 / FRONT PANEL
CONNECTIONS.

To decode data on a link the 6113 requires a clock derived from one of the link directions. It is
normal to use the Downlink (BSC to BTS) direction as the master clock; however, the Uplink
(BTS to BSC) direction can also be used.

Connection must be made to A-bis Connector 2 (the IN connector) on the 6113 front panel (the
6113 always recovers the clock from this connector when in Live Tests Mode).

Default assigments are Connector 1 to Uplink (BTS to BSC) and Connector 2 to Downlink (BSC
to BTS).

Since A-bis Protocol Analysis mode operates in high impedance, the operator may use
whichever A-bis connection is most suitable. However, the choice of connection must match the
MMI selection for A-bis (i.e. Balanced or Unbalanced) made from the BTS Information screen.

The Balanced connectors are the two three pin banana sockets; the upper socket is Connector 1
and the lower is Connector 2. The Unbalanced connectors are the two coax connectors; the left
hand socket is Connector 1 and the right hand socket is Connector 2.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-98 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Channel Selection

A-bis Signalling and Traffic frames can be monitored at the following rates:
64 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s Signalling Channels
16 kbit/s, 8 kbit/s Traffic Channel

Four Signalling channels and one Traffic channel are provided. Each channel may be selected
to monitor one of the physical connectors on the 6113 front panel.

The following parameters must be entered via the MMI display:

A-bis signal direction, Uplink or Downlink.
A-bis Slot.
A-bis Data Rate (64/32/16 kbit/s for signalling 16/8 kbit/s for Traffic).
A-bis Sub-slot for data rates less than 64 kbit/s.
A value for the SAPI, Signalling channels only.
A value for the TEI, Signalling channels only.

The last two parameters will default to ALL. Entering a single value for the SAPI or TEI allows
the user to restrict the amount of data recorded.

Up to four Signalling channels and one Traffic channel can be defined and selected for logging
as required.

Logging

When the logging channels have been defined, the user can start and stop logging as required.
Logging conditions cannot be changed while logging is in progress.

Data can be logged to a memory card in either of the two PCMCIA sockets.

While logging is in progress, Layer 3 messages are displayed in real time on the MMI screen.
The Layer 3 message name is displayed together with decoded Layer 2 data and relevant
channel information. (The user cannot review the data while logging is in progress).

When logging to memory card, logging will continue as long as there is disk space available.

When logging to memory card, select the name of the log file to be used for storing the data,
otherwise a default log file name will be used. The log file selected will stay in use until the
operator selects another. Note that the log file chosen will be overwritten with new log data on
subsequent monitor sessions. A protocol analysis session is defined as starting when the Start
Monitor button is pressed on the A-bis Protocol Analysis mode screen, and ends when the Stop
Monitor button is pressed. One log file is used until the operator saves the data, at which point
another log file name must be selected.

The log files are given an automatic file extension of .LOG.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-99
80-0013

Signalling Channels

Up to 4 signalling channels may be defined for logging. The data received on these channels
comprises Layer 2 frames in LAPD format.

Traffic Channel

Only 1 traffic channel may be defined for logging. The data received on this channel will
comprise the raw data read from the TRAU frame, including all the control bits.

Timestamping

All received frames are timestamped with the actual time. This timestamp has a resolution of
2 mS.

Log File Format

The data stored in the log file comprises Layer 2 frames, Layer 3 frames and Traffic frames. For
each frame stored there is an accompanying timestamp and channel data to identify the source
of the data. This allows the log file replay mode to tag the data with the source information.

The data stored is a mix of text strings and Hex data. Header data is stored at the start of the
log file, followed by the logged data.

The following table illustrates a typical log file format.

Note: (1) All text strings are NULL terminated.

(2) Only the actual channels with logged data appear in the list of channel definitions.

(3) The Layer 3 Message ID field is not present on a Layer 2 or Traffic frame.

Table 4.2 Log File Format

Field Format Example / Comment
Date and Time ASCII Text 17 May 1996 09:54:00
BTS Manufacturer ASCII Text BANJO
BTS Model ASCII Text GX 2.0
BTS Software Version ASCII Text GX 5.3
Clock Source ASCII Text External Uplink
Channel Definition 1 ASCII Text SIG1 UL 31 64K - 62 0
Channel Definition 2 ASCII Text SIG2 DL 31 64K - 62 0
Channel Definition 3 ASCII Text SIG1 UL 15 64K - 0 1
Channel Definition 4 ASCII Text SIG2 DL 15 64K - 0 1
Channel Definition 5 ASCII Text TRF UL 2 16K 1
Layer Log ID 0 = L2, 1 = L3, 2 = TRF
Length Hex Length of complete log entry
Timestamp
Channel Code Hex 0 = SIG1, 1 = SIG2, 2 = SIG3, 3 = SIG4,
4 = TRF
L3 Message ID Hex Only relevant to a Layer 3 frame
Frame Data Hex Actual frame data.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-100 6113 E DGE
80-0013
Decode

For Layer 2 messages, Signalling channel, SAPI and TEI are decoded for log file replay.

For Layer 3 messages, message name and type are decoded (for all BTS types, including the
Universal 08.58 type, that support the use of LAPD) in real time and during log file replay.

Note: LAPB, X25, Q703, SS7, FTP, and PPP messages are not supported.

Real Time Display

Layer 3 messages can be displayed during logging mode. This enables the operator to see the
progress of any call setups, etc. No timestamp is displayed with this data.

Alternatively the logging status of each channel can be displayed

Log File Replay

Log file replay can be performed on log files stored on a memory card. The log file to be
replayed is selected by its filename.

The recorded data may be replayed with various filtering applied to limit the amount of displayed
data. Layer 2, Layer 2 + Layer 3, or just Layer 3 data can be displayed.

The frames of data displayed comprise a header and the selected data, followed by a Hex dump
of the frame data.

Searching

A search facility allows the operator to locate a particular Layer 3 message on a specific
channel. This allows the operator to move quickly to any point in the log file.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-101
80-0013

Filtering

Logging Mode

In Logging Mode, Measurement Reports can be filtered out. Note that if these messages are
enabled for logging, the operator also has the option to suppress them during Log File Replay
mode.

Log File Replay Mode

In Log File Replay mode, the operator can select :

-- the channels to be viewed.
-- the Layers to be viewed.
-- viewing of Measurement Reports.

To open a log file for review, the sequence of actions is as follows:

(1) Open the log file.

(2) Select the channels and layers to be viewed.

The contents of the log file are then displayed.

An Auto Scroll button allows the user to view the log contents quickly, and a Pause button allows
the user to stop the scroll.

The view position can be adjusted in small amounts, and a search key can be used to move to a
selected position within the file.

Printing

Printing is only available during Log File Replay mode.

The contents of the current buffer, or the current displayed page, can be printed as required.
The print output can be directed to the various ports available on the Test Set. Note that the
entire log file can be printed: if the file is large and does not fit into the buffer, frames are
buffered in from the memory card.

Parameter Files

Relevant A-bis Protocol Analysis mode parameters, together with other general setup
parameters, can be stored for later recall. Parameters stored include:

Channel definitions.
Filter definitions.

The parameters related to A-bis Protocol Analysis mode are attached to the main parameter
database and hence are saved and recalled together with the normal Parameters file.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-102 6113 E DGE
80-0013

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

(Hyperlink to Section 5 / SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MENU)


Signal Generator Mode allows the 6113 to act as a signal generator that can transmit a variety of
GSM structured signals and other signals from the RF OUT connector. No monitoring of
returned signals is performed in this mode and so there are no test procedures, other than those
devised by the user. There are no special setting up procedures.

The MMI facilities for controlling the Signal Generator mode are described in Section 5 under the
heading SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MENU.

Signal Parameters


90 (E-GSM+R 900) 0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 (DCS 1800) 512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900) 512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850) 128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Frequency Offset 0 Hz -999999 to 999999 Hz
Output Level -40.0 dBm -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
Signal Format (Note) Off Unmodulated
GMSK: 0000....
GMSK: 1111....
GMSK: 0101....
GMSK: Training Sequence
8PSK: 0000..
8PSK: 1111..
8PSK: 0000.. (No Rot)
8PSK: 1111.. (No Rot)
8PSK: 0101.. (Bits)
8PSK: Inc. Symbols
8PSK: Random
Off
Pulsing Off Off, On
Training Sequence 0 0 to 7 (GSM defined)

Note: Available signal formats are described in the following table.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-103
80-0013

Table 4.3 Signal Formats

Downlink Signal Type Description
Carrier Unmodulated Transmits a CW signal.
Carrier GMSK modulated with
0000....
Transmits a signal modulated with all zeros (i.e. all burst
data set to zero).
1111....
Transmits a signal modulated with all ones (i.e. all burst
data set to one).
0101....
Transmits a signal with all burst data set to a data
pattern of 01.
Training Sequence (GMSK) Transmits a signal with all burst data set to the
(repeated) training sequence determined by the selected
parameter value (0 to 7).
Carrier 8PSK modulated with
0000.
symbols set to zero).
1111.
symbols set to 7).
0000. with no 3/8 phase
rotation
symbols set to 0), but with no 3/8 phase rotation after
each symbol.
1111. with no 3/8 phase
rotation
symbols set to 7), but with no 3/8 phase rotation after
each symbol.
alternating bits
Transmits a signal with all burst data set to a symbol
pattern of alternating 2 (010) and 5 (101) to give an
alternating pattern of bits.
incrementing symbols
Transmits a signal with burst data set to a symbol
pattern of incrementing symbols (i.e. 0, 1, 2, .. 7).
random data
Transmits a signal with burst data set to a random set of
symbols. The same pattern is transmitted repeatedly,
but a different pattern is defined each time the test is
started.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-104 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Power Meter Mode

WARNING: USE OF THIS MODE REQUIRES THE BTS UNDER TEST TO TRANSMIT
CONTINUOUSLY. WHEN THE TEST IS COMPLETE OR ABORTED, ALL DUE
ATTENTION MUST BE PAID TO ENSURE THAT THE BTS STOPS
TRANSMITTING AS REQUIRED.


Power Meter Mode is provided as an aid to verifying the integrity of the RF path from a BTS to a
6113 Test Set.

Selecting the Power Meter facility enables the Test Set to operate as an independent Power
Meter instrument. In this mode it will find and track a single modulated signal or unmodulated
continuous wave (CW) signal, power level 0 to 50 dBm, within the downlink frequency range of
the E-GSM 900 / GSM 850 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 bands. (Any modulated signals must be
transmitting in all 8 timeslots).

The Power Meter facility can either scan a selected band to find the signal with maximum power,
or it can monitor a single frequency within a selected band. Note that only one signal can be
tracked in a band, two close peaks (i.e. less than 10 channels apart) may not be distinguished.

To verify the BTS Tx path, use a modulated carrier from the BTS and check the presence of the
received signal using the Test Set Power Meter mode.

To verify the 6113 Rx path, use an unmodulated carrier (CW) from a signal generator and check
the presence of the signal using the Test Set Power Meter mode.

To operate the Test Set as a Power Meter, the following procedure must be followed:

Scanning for Maximum Signal

(1) Connect the RF signal path to be monitored to the RF IN / DUPLEX connector on the front
panel of the Test Set, as described in Section 3 / FRONT PANEL CONNECTIONS and in
Section 7 Manufacturer-Specific Information.

(2) In the BTS Information Menu, set the required radio system (only) of the BTS of interest.
Note that this will determine the scan frequency range (i.e. GSM 850, E-GSM 900,
DCS 1800 or PCS 1900 band).

(3) Select Power Meter option from the Special Functions Menu screen at the MMI.

(4) Toggle the Scan Type button to display MAX POWER. This will cause the Power Meter
to scan the frequency band (selected in the BTS Information screen) for the channel
containing maximum power.

(5) Press the Rescan button. Initially, the Signal box will toggle between SEARCHING and
NO SIGNAL.

(6) If the Power Meter detects a signal within the selected frequency band, the Signal box will
display FOUND. If the signal is tracked successfully, the signal box will display
TRACKING (after approximately 10 seconds). The Nearest ARFCN box will display the
channel number, and the BTS Tx Power bargraph will indicate the power in the signal.
The decimal value of the power level (in dBm) is also displayed.

Note: Until TRACKING is displayed, any readings are unreliable.
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-105
80-0013

Monitoring a Single Channel

(1) Connect the RF signal path to be monitored to the RF IN / DUPLEX connector on the front
panel of the Test Set, as described in Section 3 / FRONT PANEL CONNECTIONS and in

(2) In the BTS Information Menu, set the required radio system (only) of the BTS of interest.
Note that this will determine the scan frequency range (i.e. GSM 850, E-GSM 900,
DCS 1800 or PCS 1900 band).

(3) Select Power Meter option from the Special Functions Menu screen at the MMI.

(4) Toggle the Scan Type button to display NO SCAN.

(5) Set the number of the ARFCN to be monitored in the ARFCN button.

(6) Press the Rescan button. Initially, the Signal box will display NO SIGNAL.

(7) If the Power Meter detects a signal within the selected channel, the Signal box will display
FOUND. If the signal is tracked successfully, the signal box will display TRACKING (after
approximately 10 seconds). The Nearest ARFCN box will display the channel number,
and the BTS Tx Power bargraph will indicate the power in the signal. The decimal value
of the power level (in dBm) is also displayed.

Note: Until TRACKING is displayed, any readings are unreliable.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-106 6113 E DGE
80-0013


WARNING: USE OF THIS MODE MAY REQUIRE THE BTS UNDER TEST TO TRANSMIT


This mode combines the functionality of both the Signal Generator Mode and the Power Meter
Mode. The ARFCN selection is common to the two modes. The Menu facilities are presented
on a combined display (refer to Section 5 / Signal Generator and Power Meter Menu).

Refer to the headings Signal Generator Mode and Power Meter Mode for a description of how to
use each facility.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-107
80-0013

SELF CHECK TESTS

(Hyperlink to Section 5 / SELF TESTS / SYSTEM MENU)

These tests are used to confirm that the Test Set itself is operating correctly. It is recommended
that they are run once a week, or when a malfunction is suspected.

If the B.O.S.S. RF Module (Option 54 / Option 56) is not fitted, then use the Self Check Burst
Analysis test. If Option 54 or Option 56 is fitted, then the RF Tests Self Check Burst Analysis
test should be used as well as the Self Check Burst Analysis test.

If any of the Self Check tests fail, advice should be sought from the Help Desk at Racal
Instruments Wireless Solutions, or from the nearest approved Racal Instruments Wireless
Solutions GSM repair and calibration centre.

Self Check Burst Analysis

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / Self Check Burst Analysis)

Purpose of Test

Burst Analysis

This test analyses the burst parameters of the 6113 Test Set using an internal loopback. The
RF facilities available at the front panel of the Test Set are the subject of this test.

Bit Error Ratio

This test checks the Bit Error Ratio of the 6113 Test Set using an internal loopback.

Test Parameters

Self Check frequency 897.500 MHz (E-GSM 900) 880.000 to 915.000 MHz
895.000 MHz (E-GSM+R 900) 876.200 to 915.000 MHz
1747.500 MHz (DCS 1800) 1710.000 to 1785.000 MHz
1880.000 MHz (PCS 1900) 1850.000 to 1910.000 MHz
836.500 MHz (GSM 850) 824.000 to 849.000 MHz
Self Check slot 4 0 to 7
FER Limit 0.000 % 0.000 to 100.000 %
Class Ib Limit 0.000 % 0.000 to 100.000 %
Class II Limit 0.000 % 0.000 to 100.000 %
Peak Phase Error Limit 20.00 deg 0.00 to 30.00 deg (Note)
Frequency Error Limit 43.0 Hz (GSM 850) 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz
48.0 Hz (GSM+R 900) 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz
95.0 Hz (DCS 1800) 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz
95.0 Hz (PCS 1900) 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz
Power Level Error Limit 3.0 dB 0.0 to 10.0 dB
Tx Signal Attenuation 0.0 dB +0.0 to +80.0 dB

Note: The phase error graph mask is set by the value of the Peak Phase Error Limit
parameter (only).
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-108 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Test Method

Select the Run Test option from the MMI display after setting the parameters as required.

Pass/Fail Criteria

Note: The Power Level measurement is not shown on the screen. If the final overall result is
FAIL and all the individual displayed measurements show PASS, then this is due to the
Power Level measurement being FAIL.

Burst Analysis

In each case, the returned mean phase error should be < 5 , and the maximum phase error
should be < 20 . The power profile of the analysed burst must be within the graphical limits
displayed. Specific areas of the graph may be enlarged for closer examination.

Bit Error Ratio

The returned Bit Error Ratios should be zero in all cases, and the measured input level should
be approximately +12 dBm 3 dBm.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-109
80-0013

RF Tests Self Check Burst Analysis

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / RF Tests Self Check Burst Analysis)

Purpose of Test

Burst Analysis

This test analyses the burst parameters of the 6113 Test Set using an internal loopback. The
B.O.S.S. RF facilities available at the rear panel of the Test Set are the subject of this test.

Bit Error Ratio

This test checks the Bit Error Ratio of the 6113 Test Set using an internal loopback.

Test Parameters

Parameter Default Range
Value

Self Check frequency
897.500 MHz (E-GSM 900) 880.000 to 915.000 MHz
895.000 MHz (E-GSM+R 900) 876.200 to 915.000 MHz
1747.500 MHz (DCS 1800) 1710.000 to 1785.000 MHz
1880.000 MHz (PCS 1900) 1850.000 to 1910.000 MHz
836.500 MHz (GSM 850) 824.000 to 849.000 MHz
FER Limit 0.000 % 0.000 to 100.000 %
Class Ib Limit 0.000 % 0.000 to 100.000 %
Class II Limit 0.000 % 0.000 to 100.000 %
Peak Phase Error Limit 20.00 deg 0.00 to 30.00 deg (Note)
48.0 Hz (GSM) 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz
95.0 Hz (DCS 1800) 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz
95.0 Hz (PCS 1900) 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz

Note: The phase error graph mask is set by the value of the Peak Phase Error Limit
parameter (only).

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-110 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Test Method


Pass/Fail Criteria


Burst Analysis

In each case, the returned mean phase error should be < 5 , and the maximum phase error
should be < 20 . The power profile of the analysed burst must be within the graphical limits
displayed. Specific areas of the graph may be enlarged for closer examination.

Bit Error Ratio

The returned Bit Error Ratios should be zero in all cases.

Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 4-111
80-0013
EDGE Self Check Burst Analysis

(Hyperlink to Section 6 / EDGE Self Check Burst Analysis)

Purpose of Test

Burst Analysis

This test analyses the burst parameters of the 6113 Test Set using an internal loopback with
8PSK modulation. The RF facilities available at the front panel of the Test Set are the subject of
this test.

Block Error Ratio

This test checks the Block Error Ratio of the 6113 Test Set using an internal loopback.

Test Parameters

Self Check frequency 897.500 MHz (E-GSM 900) 880.000 to 915.000 MHz
895.000 MHz (E-GSM+R 900) 876.200 to 915.000 MHz
1747.500 MHz (DCS 1800) 1710.000 to 1785.000 MHz
1880.000 MHz (PCS 1900) 1850.000 to 1910.000 MHz
836.500 MHz (GSM 850) 824.000 to 849.000 MHz
BLER Limit 0.000 % 0.000 to 100.000 %
Peak EVM Limit 22 % 0.000 to 100.000 %
RMS EVM Limit 8 % 0.000 to 100.000 %
95%tile EVM Limit 11 % 0.000 to 100.000 %
Origin Offset Limit -35 dB -80.0 to 0.0 dB
48.0 Hz (GSM+R 900) 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz
95.0 Hz (DCS 1800) 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz
95.0 Hz (PCS 1900) 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz

Note: The EVM graph mask is set by the value of the Peak EVM Limit parameter (only).
Section 4
TEST INFORMATION
4-112 6113 E DGE
80-0013

Test Method


Pass/Fail Criteria


Burst Analysis

In each case, the returned mean EVM should be < 8 %, and the maximum EVM should be < 22
%. The power profile of the analysed burst must be within the graphical limits displayed.
Specific areas of the graph may be enlarged for closer examination.

Block Error Ratio

The returned Block Error Ratios should be zero in all cases.

SECTION 4 ANNEX A

CELL INTEGRITY TESTING AND ANALYSIS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page / Hyperlink

PURPOSE OF THE TEST .................................................................................................. 1
PREPARATION FOR USE ................................................................................................. 1
TEST PARAMETERS......................................................................................................... 2
Channel Number....................................................................................................... 2
Timeslot .................................................................................................................... 2
BTS TX Level ............................................................................................................ 2
BER Sample Time .................................................................................................... 3
Audio Loopback ........................................................................................................ 3
Test Pattern .............................................................................................................. 3
TCH Format .............................................................................................................. 3
Call Set-up ................................................................................................................ 3
Uplink Power Control ................................................................................................ 3
Mobile TX Level ........................................................................................................ 3
Registration Criteria .................................................................................................. 4
IMSI........................................................................................................................... 4
IMEI........................................................................................................................... 4
Display Power Levels................................................................................................ 4
RX/TX RF Loss Error ................................................................................................ 4
Loopback Delay ........................................................................................................ 4
TEST METHODS................................................................................................................ 5
6113 Originated Call with Mobile Audio Loopback.................................................... 5
6113 Originated Call with 6113 Audio Loopback ...................................................... 5
6113 Originated Call with 6113 Audio Loopback and Mobile Audio Loopback......... 5
Mobile Originated Call with Mobile Audio Loopback ................................................. 6
Mobile Originated Call with 6113 Audio Loopback.................................................... 6
Mobile Originated Call with 6113 Audio Loopback and Mobile Audio Loopback ...... 6
Test Automation and Remote Sequencing............................................................... 7

6113 EDGE 4A-(i)
80-0013
SECTION 4 ANNEX A CELL INTEGRITY TESTING AND ANALYSIS

PURPOSE OF THE TEST

The Cell Integrity Testing and Analysis (CiTA) option (Option 311) allows the 6113 to be used to
fully test a complete cell site including all antennas, couplers, low noise amplifiers and other
ancillary RF equipment. The 6113 is used as a network emulator to control the entire cell site
during calls made to or from a standard mobile terminal fitted with a Racal Instruments Test
SIM. The use of this special test SIM ensures that the live cell site under test is not accessible
to any other mobiles in the vicinity.

NOTE: The Cell Integrity tests must only be run by, or with the express permission of,
users who hold a relevant licence to operate a high power radio transmitter.

These tests give the user confidence that:

All antennas are functional.
All antennas are correctly connected.
All antenna cables are functional.
All connections at the masthead are functional.
Any remote masthead Low Noise Amplifiers are operational.
The power supply to the LNAs is operational.

A facility called AutoCiTA is also provided. This allows a sequence of CiTA tests to be
configured and run. Refer to Section 5 Annex B AUTOCITA TEST SEQUENCE.

PREPARATION FOR USE

(1) The 6113 must have Option 311 activated. This is accomplished by entering a Keyword
(obtained from Racal Instruments Help Desk in the U.K). Enter the Keyword by selecting
the softkey Change Software Options from the Self Tests/System / Test Set Options
menu.

(2) The 6113 must have software version 5.01 or later fitted.

(3) The mobile terminal supplied with Option 311 is fitted with a Racal Instruments test SIM;
this mobile and SIM must be used for the tests. The tests will not run with any other SIM
or test SIM. When the BTS is activated and goes 'live', a test network is enabled which is
inaccessible to other mobile users, and which is accessible only to the mobile fitted with
the Racal Instruments Test SIM.

(4) Before running the Cell Integrity test, the BTS must be fully installed and all RF antenna
connections securely made. The only connections required to the 6113 are the A-bis
interface connections.

(5) The Configure BTS test must be run on any TRX such that the 6113 gains control of the
BTS. It is important that the parameter Max BTS Power is correctly set when this test is
run; this should accurately reflect the power expected at the BTS antenna connectors.

Note: (1) With Ericsson BTSs, this parameter is used to set the BTS power expected at the
output of the power amplifier, i.e. before the antenna combining/duplexing
network. In this instance, offsets should be used to compensate for the extra
signal loss between the power amplifier output connector and the antenna ports.

(2) Normally, it should not be necessary to set any receive offsets.

6113 EDGE 4A-1
80-0013
Section 4 Annex A

TEST PARAMETERS


90 (E-GSM+R 900) 0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM+R 900)
512 (DCS 1800) 512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900) 512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
190 (GSM 850) 128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Timeslot All All, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
BER Sample Time 10 1 to 300000 s
Audio Loopback BER None, BER, Voice, BER & Voice
TCH Format Full Rate Full Rate, EFR
Call Set-up Mobile Terminated Mobile Originated, Mobile Terminated
Uplink Power Control Off Off, UL QUAL : 1, UL LEV : 20
Mobile Tx Level 10 0 to 31
Registration Criteria IMSI Any Mobile, IMSI, IMEI, IMSI & IMEI
IMSI 00 10 10 123456789 0 to 999999999999999
IMEI Not Applicable 0 to 999999999999999
Display Power Levels RF Loss (dB) RXLEV, RF Loss (dB)
Rx/Tx Air Loss Error (+/-) 10 0 to 30 dB
Loopback Delay 1.0 0.0 to 10.0 s
VQA Off Off, On
Port COM1 COM1, COM2

Channel Number

A channel number should be selected which is within the range of channels allocated for the
user's network. A channel number which will be used as the CCH carrier for the site or sector is
the ideal selection. If several TRXs are to be tested to confirm the integrity of more than one
antenna coupling network, it is useful to operate the test over a range of ARFCNs within the
user's available spectrum allocation. This will check for any possible co-channel or adjacent
channel interference problems.

Timeslot

A specific timeslot may be selected, or the 6113 may be programmed to place calls sequentially
on all timeslots (with the exception of timeslot zero) by selecting the value All for this test.

Note: If the parameter Call Set-up is set to Mobile Originated, the Timeslot selection
parameter will not be available. In this instance, timeslot selection is made from the
keypad of the mobile terminal.

BTS TX Level

Level 1 is 2 dB below Max (defined in Configure BTS test), level 2 is 4 dB below Max, etc.

The BTS TX level should be set to be the same as that defined for the site or sector by the
user's site plan. However, if tests are to be made in very close proximity to the BTS, it is
advisable to test at a lower level, i.e. level 6, to ensure that the mobile is operating within its
calibrated range.

4A-2 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 4 Annex A
BER Sample Time

The duration of the BER test over the air interface can be set with this parameter.

Audio Loopback

This parameter sets the loopback functions during the test as follows:

BER A loopback is applied in the mobile terminal allowing BER tests to be
made over the air interface. The call will automatically end once the
BER test has completed.

Voice A loopback is applied in the 6113 allowing voice quality assessments
to be made by the user.

Note: If this option is selected by the user, the parameters BER
Sample Time and Test Pattern will not be available.

BER & VOICE The above BER and Voice options are applied sequentially.

Test Pattern

This parameter is used to select the test pattern to be used for the BER test over the air
interface.

TCH Format

This parameter allows the user to select either full rate speech or enhanced full rate (EFR)
speech. If EFR is selected and the mobile terminal does not support EFR speech, the test will
automatically run with normal full rate speech.

Call Set-up

The user can select either Mobile Originated calls or Mobile Terminated calls. For automation, it
is better to select Mobile terminated. For remote (drive) testing, Mobile Originated is the more
useful selection.

Uplink Power Control

The user can specify the use of uplink power control to maintain the mobile's power such that
RXLEV reports received at the BTS are always at a value of 20, or such that the RXQUAL
reports received at the BTS are always at a value of 1. It is recommended that this parameter is
set to UL:20 to keep the mobile terminal within its useful calibrated power range.

Mobile TX Level

The transmit level of the mobile terminal can be preset using this parameter. (The parameter
will not be available if Uplink Power Control has been set to specify RXLEV or RXQUAL
stability).

6113 EDGE 4A-3
80-0013
Section 4 Annex A
Registration Criteria

When this test is run in operational conditions, it is imperative that this parameter is set to IMSI &
IMEI.

IMSI

The IMSI of the Racal Instruments Test SIM must be entered here. The default value is correct
for the Racal Instruments Test SIM (001010123456789).

IMEI

The IMEI of the mobile terminal MUST be entered here. Although the mobile can be dismantled
to gain this information, it is easier to enter the key sequence * # 0 6 # on the mobile to display
its IMEI.

Display Power Levels

Power levels can be displayed as either RXLEV values or as RF Loss (dB).

RX/TX RF Loss Error

The user can preset the acceptable margin of error. This parameter is not available if the
Display Power Levels parameter is set to RXLEV values.

Loopback Delay

This parameter is used to set the delay required before speech is echoed back to the speaker.

4A-4 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 4 Annex A

TEST METHODS

6113 Originated Call with Mobile Audio Loopback

The Racal Instruments Test SIM must be fitted to the mobile.

The 6113 instructs the BTS to generate a combined BCCH on the ARFCN selected by the user
and at a user defined power level. The system information for the control channel is derived
from the information set in the Parameters / GSM Parameters menu. The user is prompted to
switch on the mobile handset, which then registers to the 6113 test network, provided that its
IMSI and IMEI have been correctly entered in the 6113 test parameters menu. The cell is barred
to all users except those defined by the user in the IMSI and IMEI parameters.

Following registration, the mobile is paged and a call is assigned to the selected timeslot, or to
timeslot 1 if All has been selected in the Timeslots parameter. The mobile is instructed to loop
back the traffic frames and a BER test is performed for the specified duration, during which the
interim BER measurements are displayed together with the uplink RXLEV reports, the uplink
RXQUAL reports, the downlink RXLEV reports and the downlink RXQUAL reports. Upon
completion of the test, the call is terminated. If the Timeslots parameter has been set to All,
subsequent calls are made automatically, checking each timeslot in turn.

This test can be fully automated if the mobile handset is configured for auto-answer mode.

6113 Originated Call with 6113 Audio Loopback

This test allows the user to assess the voice quality of the air interface link between the BTS and
the mobile handset. Registration and call set up are performed in an identical manner to the
6113 Originated Call with Mobile Audio Loopback detailed above.

Once the call is in progress, the 6113 will loop back the traffic frames to the mobile after the
delay defined in the Loopback Delay parameter, thus allowing the user to assess the quality of
the link. If All timeslots have been previously selected for testing, the caller will be paged on the
next untested timeslot each time a call is terminated until all timeslots have been tested.

6113 Originated Call with 6113 Audio Loopback and Mobile Audio
Loopback


Registration and call set up are performed in an identical manner to the 6113 Originated Call
with Mobile Audio Loopback detailed above. This test is a concatenation of the previous two
tests. During the first stage, a BER test is run with audio loopback activated within the mobile
handset. When this is complete, loopback is removed from the mobile and applied to the 6113,
allowing voice quality assessment to be made. If the Timeslots parameter has been set to All,
subsequent calls are made automatically, checking each timeslot in turn.

6113 EDGE 4A-5
80-0013
Section 4 Annex A

Mobile Originated Call with Mobile Audio Loopback


Registration is performed in a similar manner to the 6113 Originated Call with Mobile Audio
Loopback detailed above. The 6113 then waits for a mobile originated call. A simple coding
system allows the user to select from the mobile keypad the timeslot number to be assigned by
the 6113 for the call. A BER test is then performed for the duration specified in the BER Sample
Time parameter. For example, to test on timeslot one, the user should dial 001. To test on
timeslot 6, the user should dial 006. An unlimited number of calls can be made. The test
completes when the mobile terminal is switched off.

Mobile Originated Call with 6113 Audio Loopback

Registration is performed in a similar manner to the 6113 Originated Call with Mobile Audio
Loopback detailed above. The 6113 then waits for mobile originated calls. Selection of the
timeslot to be used for the test is made in the manner described above in the Mobile Originated
Call with Mobile Audio Loopback. The 6113 loops back traffic frames such that the user can
assess the quality of the speech received at the mobile terminal.

Mobile Originated Call with 6113 Audio Loopback and Mobile Audio
Loopback


Registration and call set up are performed in an identical manner to the 6113 Originated Call
with Mobile Audio Loopback detailed above. This test is a concatenation of the Mobile
Originated Call with Mobile Audio Loopback test and the Mobile Originated Call with 6113 Audio
Loopback test. During the first stage, a BER test is run with audio loopback activated within the
mobile handset. When this is complete, loopback is removed from the mobile and applied to the
6113, allowing voice quality assessment to be made. Sequential testing of all timeslots can be
performed in a similar manner to that described in the Mobile Originated Call with Mobile Audio
Loopback test above.

4A-6 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 4 Annex A
6113 EDGE 4A-7
80-0013

Test Automation and Remote Sequencing

It is possible to create simple sequences of tests which allow the user to (drive) test all sectors,
antennas etc. without returning to the cell site between tests. The construction of such
sequences will be dependent upon the actual BTS type and its RF configuration. An example of
a simple sequence to drive test a sectored 4+4+4 configuration would be as follows:

(1) User sets up a suitable results file.

(2) Run Configure BTS Test (TRX 1 - First sector).

(3) User switches ON mobile.

(4) Run Cell Integrity Test (Mobile Originated - unlimited calls possible).

(5) User switches OFF mobile (Forces sequence to start the next test).

(6) Run Change TRX Test (TRX 5 - Second sector).



(9) User switches OFF mobile (Forces sequence to start the next test).

(10) Run Change TRX Test (TRX 9 - Third sector).



(13) User switches OFF mobile.

(14) Sequence completes.

Note: It may be necessary to run tests on intermediate TRXs if the antenna coupling system
requires it. For example, it is possible that only two TRXs per sector use a particular
group of antennas. In this case, the test should be run on one of each pair of TRXs to
ensure that all antennas and couplings are checked.

SECTION 5

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS USER INTERFACE

LIST OF CONTENTS

Page / Hyperlink

INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................. 1
Date And Time.......................................................................................................... 1
Status Bar ................................................................................................................. 2
MENU STRUCTURE .......................................................................................................... 3
MAIN MENU........................................................................................................................ 4
PARAMETERS MENU........................................................................................................ 6
Parameter Control Screen ........................................................................................ 6
File Selection Screen - File Read.............................................................................. 9
File Selection Screen - File Write............................................................................ 10
GSM Parameter Selection Screen.......................................................................... 11
Configuration Parameter Edit Screen ..................................................................... 12
Bitmap Edit Parameter Screen ............................................................................... 17
OFFSETS MENU.............................................................................................................. 18
RESULTS MENU.............................................................................................................. 20
Saving Results To File............................................................................................ 22
FILE MANAGER MENU ................................................................................................... 23
File Manager - Copy File Screen ............................................................................ 25
File Manager - Rename File Screen....................................................................... 26
Generic Text Editor ................................................................................................. 28
View File Screen ..................................................................................................... 31
SELF TESTS / SYSTEM MENU....................................................................................... 33
Test Set Options Menu ........................................................................................... 34
Test Set Settings Menu........................................................................................... 35
BTS INFORMATION MENU............................................................................................. 36
Mapping Table Screen............................................................................................ 38
LIVE TESTS MENU.......................................................................................................... 39
RF Tests (B.O.S.S.) Menu...................................................................................... 40
A-bis Protocol Analysis Menu ................................................................................. 68
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MENU......................................................................................... 81
Signal Generator Menu........................................................................................... 82
Power Meter Menu.................................................................................................. 84
Signal Generator and Power Meter Menu............................................................... 85
A-BIS CONTROLLED TESTS MENU.............................................................................. 88
Measurement Mode and Measurement Mode Override......................................... 88
Select Test Screen.................................................................................................. 89
Measurement Mode Selection Screen.................................................................... 90
Functional Tests Available...................................................................................... 91
Transmitter Tests Available (GSM)......................................................................... 91
Receiver Tests Available (GSM)............................................................................. 91
Multimode Tests Available (GSM) .......................................................................... 91
Receiver Tests Available (GPRS)........................................................................... 92
Transmitter Tests Available (EDGE)....................................................................... 92
Receiver Tests Available (EDGE)........................................................................... 92
Test Parameter Select Screen................................................................................ 93
Single Test Execution Screens............................................................................... 98
Test Results Screen - Results Area Format ......................................................... 100
Results Graph Screens......................................................................................... 106
6113 EDGE 5-(i)
80-0013
Section 5
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS - USER INTERFACE

MULTIMODE MENU....................................................................................................... 114
Multimode Summary Results Screen.................................................................... 114
Multimode BER Results Screen............................................................................ 119
Multimode : Phase/Frequency Error Results Screen ............................................ 123
Multimode Power Profile Results Screen.............................................................. 126
Modulation Spectrum Results Screen................................................................... 129
TEST SEQUENCES MENU............................................................................................ 133
Defining and Loading Sequences ......................................................................... 134
Running Sequences .............................................................................................. 142
INFORMATION SCREEN MENU.................................................................................... 146
MENU UNDER REMOTE CONTROL............................................................................. 147

PROGRAMMING TEST SEQUENCES................................................................. ANNEX A
AUTOCITA TEST SEQUENCE............................................................................. ANNEX B

ILLUSTRATIONS


5.1 Typical Status Bar........................................................................................................ 2
5.2 MMI Primary Menu Structure and Facilities................................................................. 3
5.3 Main Menu (GSM) ....................................................................................................... 4
5.4 Parameter Control Screen........................................................................................... 6
5.5 File Select - File Read Screen..................................................................................... 9
5.6 File Select - File Write Screen................................................................................... 10
5.7 GSM Parameter Selection Screen ............................................................................ 11
5.8 Configuration Parameter Edit Screen........................................................................ 12
5.9 Numeric Parameter Edit Screen 1............................................................................. 14
5.10 Numeric Parameter Edit Screen 2........................................................................... 16
5.11 Bitmap Edit Parameter Screen................................................................................ 17
5.12 Level Offsets Screen ............................................................................................... 18
5.13 Results Menu Screen .............................................................................................. 20
5.14 Results File Screen.................................................................................................. 22
5.15 File Manager Screen ............................................................................................... 23
5.16 File Manager - Copy File Screen............................................................................. 25
5.17 File Manager - Rename File Screen........................................................................ 26
5.18 Select From List Screen .......................................................................................... 27
5.19 Typical Text Editor Screen....................................................................................... 28
5.20 Typical View File Screen.......................................................................................... 31
5.21 System Menu Screen .............................................................................................. 33
5.22 Test Set Options Screen ......................................................................................... 34
5.23 Test Set Settings Screen......................................................................................... 35
5.24 BTS Information Screen .......................................................................................... 36
5.25 Mapping Table Screen............................................................................................. 38
5.26 Live Tests Mode Screen.......................................................................................... 39
5.27 RF Tests Mode Menu Structure .............................................................................. 41
5.28 RF Tests Summary Screen (Not Registered).......................................................... 42
5.29 RF Tests Summary More Screen (Not Registered) ................................................ 45
5.30 RF Tests - Parameters Screen................................................................................ 47
5.31 Typical Scan / Channel Table (Scan In Progress) Screen ...................................... 48
5.32 Typical Scan/ Channel Table (Scan Complete) Screen .......................................... 49
5.33 Typical Mobile Registration Screen ......................................................................... 53
5.34 PIN Entry Screen..................................................................................................... 55
5.35 RF Tests Summary Screen (Registered) ................................................................ 56
5.36 RF Tests Summary More Screen (Registered) ....................................................... 58
5.37 Typical Call Setup Screen ....................................................................................... 60
5.38 Typical Call Set Up Screen...................................................................................... 61

5-(ii) 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5
5.39 RF Tests Summary Screen (Call Present).............................................................. 63
5.40 Summary More Screen (Call Present) .................................................................... 65
5.41 BTS Rx Sensitivity Screen ...................................................................................... 67
5.42 A-bis Monitor Mode Screen (Logging Status) ......................................................... 70
5.43 Typical A-bis Protocol Analysis (Data Display) Screen ........................................... 71
5.44 Configure Channels Screen.................................................................................... 72
5.45 Define Log File Screen............................................................................................ 73
5.46 Replay Log Screen.................................................................................................. 74
5.47 Typical Log File Header Display.............................................................................. 75
5.48 Typical Log File Scroll Display................................................................................. 76
5.49 Select Channels / Mode Screen.............................................................................. 77
5.50 Define Search Key Screen...................................................................................... 79
5.51 Select Log File Screen ............................................................................................ 80
5.52 Special Functions Screen........................................................................................ 81
5.53 Signal Generator Screen......................................................................................... 82
5.54 Power Meter Screen................................................................................................ 84
5.55 Signal Generator and Power Meter Screen ............................................................ 85
5.56 Signal Generator and Power Meter Combined Screen........................................... 87
5.57 Select Test Screen.................................................................................................. 89
5.58 Measurement Mode Selection Screen.................................................................... 90
5.59 Test Parameter Select Screen................................................................................ 93
5.60 Parameter Edit Screen............................................................................................ 95
5.61 Numeric Parameter Edit Screen ............................................................................. 97
5.62 Typical Test Information Screen (Test Running)..................................................... 98
5.63 Typical Test Information Screen (Test Complete) .................................................. 99
5.64 Results Area - BER............................................................................................... 100
5.65 Circuit Switched Data BER.................................................................................... 100
5.66 Packet Switched BLER ......................................................................................... 101
5.67 Results Area - Static Power Control ...................................................................... 101
5.68 Results Area - Rx Absolute Sensitivity.................................................................. 102
5.69 Results Area - RACH ............................................................................................ 102
5.70 Results Area Rx Level ........................................................................................ 103
5.71 Results Area - Rx Quality...................................................................................... 103
5.72 Transmitter Test Results Screen .......................................................................... 104
5.73 Transmitter Test Results Screen (8PSK) .............................................................. 105
5.74 Typical Phase Error Graph Screen ....................................................................... 106
5.75 Typical Power Profile Graph Screen ..................................................................... 108
5.76 Typical Modulation Spectrum Graph Screen......................................................... 110
5.77 Typical EVM Graph Screen................................................................................... 112
5.78 Typical IQ Vector Screen ...................................................................................... 113
5.79 Multimode Summary Results Screen.................................................................... 114
5.80 Multimode Summary Results More Screen........................................................... 116
5.81 Multimode Test Information Screen...................................................................... 118
5.82 Multimode BER Results Screen............................................................................ 119
5.83 Multimode BER Results More Screen................................................................... 121
5.84 Multimode Phase/Frequency Error Results Screen.............................................. 123
5.85 Multimode Phase/Frequency Error Results More Screen..................................... 124
5.86 Multimode Power Profile Results Screen.............................................................. 126
5.87 Multimode Power Profile Results More Screen..................................................... 127
5.88 Modulation Spectrum Results Screen................................................................... 129
5.89 Modulation Spectrum Results More Screen.......................................................... 131
5.90 Sequence Selection Screen.................................................................................. 134
5.91 Sequence File Definition Screen........................................................................... 136
5.92 End of Test Actions Screen................................................................................... 138
5.93 End of Sequence Actions Screen.......................................................................... 140
5.94 Sequence Test Information Screen....................................................................... 143
5.95 Sequence Summary Results Screen .................................................................... 145
5.96 Main Menu - Information Screen........................................................................... 146
5.97 Menu Under Remote Control ................................................................................ 147

TABLES

6113 EDGE 5-(iii)
80-0013
Section 5

5.1 Hopping Tables............................................................................................................ 7
5.2 GSM Parameters......................................................................................................... 8
5.3 A-bis Settings............................................................................................................. 37
5.4 Radio Systems........................................................................................................... 37

5-(iv) 6113 EDGE
80-0013
SECTION 5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS - USER INTERFACE

INTRODUCTION

This Section describes the graphical Man Machine Interface (MMI) for the 6113 Digital Radio Test Set.
The MMI is displayed on a 4 grey scale 640 x 200 pixel LCD, and uses the front panel spinwheel, softkeys
(referred to as 'buttons' in this manual) and numeric keys for control and data entry.

The MMI controls are particularly easy to use. In most situations the operator uses either the spinwheel or
specially-defined softkey buttons for selecting from the list. Where softkey buttons are displayed with
up/down scroll arrows, the spinwheel may also be used.

Some softkey buttons are used to toggle a parameter through a small set of defined states. For example,
the Results button in the Results Menu screen has three states: 'OFF' and 'FILE' and PARALLEL. The
method chosen for controlling these functions uses buttons which only display the current option in a small
box within the button; the option toggles through the list of selections when the button is selected. When
there is a larger selection of options, the MMI displays a scrolling list from which an option may be
highlighted and selected using either the spinwheel or the up/down arrow buttons.

The MMI uses various different types of file on the memory card, including sequence files, parameter files,
and results files. These files all have fixed extensions for use by the system.

File Type Extension
Downloadable application code MOT or BIN
Offsets LEV
Parameter PRM
Sequence SEQ
Results PRT

Note: (1) MOT files can be downloaded from a PC; BIN files can be downloaded from a
PCMCIA memory card.

(2) Other files can be viewed using the View File facility (described later in this
Section under the heading FILE MANAGER MENU / View File Screen).

Date And Time

Date

Where the date is displayed and represented in the format DD MMM YY, then DD = day, MMM = month,
YY = year. For example: 04 JUN 01 (i.e. last two digits of year).

In all instances of a two-digit year, the inference rules are as follows:

Abbreviated Format Full Format
00 to 79 2000 to 2079

Where the date is displayed and represented in the format DD MMM YYYY, then DD = day,
MMM = month, YYYY = year. For example: 04 JUN 2002 (i.e. all four digits of year).

Time

Time is displayed and represented in the format HH : MM : SS, where HH = Hour, MM = Minute,
SS = Second. For example: 14:23:59

6113 EDGE 5-1
80-0013
Section 5

Status Bar

The Status Bar is always displayed at the bottom of every screen. It is used to display status information
relevant to the Test Set. The following diagram illustrates a typical Status Bar.

Offsets : 0.00 dB Rslts : OFF
T.A. : RXLEV: RXQUAL:
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.1 Typical Status Bar

T.A.:

This bar shows the Timing Advance value extracted from the Channel Request message received from
the BTS.

If there is a No Channel Request message, the T.A. box is filled with the transmitted Timing Advance
value followed by an asterisk.

RXLEV: / RXQUAL:

These boxes display the RXLEV and RXQUAL values reported by the BTS as it monitors the signal
transmitted by the Test Set.

GPIB:

This box is used to display the GPIB port status.

Standard

The Standard box (not labelled) displays the currently selected frequency standard - 10 MHz or 13 MHz;
the display is in reverse video if the frequency standard is out of lock.

RESULTS:

This box indicates the destination port for test results (when selected in the Results Menu). Results can
be printed, sent to a file, sent to a device connected to one of the communications ports, or ignored.

OFFSETS:

This box displays the Tx/Rx offset levels specified via the Offsets Menu.

Offsets : 0.00 dB Indicates that no offset has been specified.
Offsets : 10.00 dB Indicates 10 dB for Tx and Rx.
Tx : 10.00, Rx : 5.00 dB Indicates different offsets for Tx and Rx.

5-2 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

MENU STRUCTURE

Details of the primary menu structure and the facilities available with each option, together with details of
how the displays are controlled and edited, are given in the following paragraphs. The following diagram
illustrates the primary structure of the MMI menus and the facilities provided. All the menu descriptions
provided in this Section are structured under the same primary facility headings.

Read
File
Write
File
Parameters
GSM
Parameters
Menu
Offsets
Menu
Results
Menu
Main
Menu
File
Manager
System
Menu
Self Tests /
Set Results
Results
Header
Test
File
Copy/Delete
Make/Change
Directory
BTS
Information
Change BTS
Information
Change BTS
Interface
Parameters
Format
Card
Set
Date/Time
Test Set
Options
I/O Port
Allocation
Test Set
Settings
System
Serial Nos
Update
Software
Self
Tests
Reset
Test Set
Mode
Menu
Live Tests
A-bis Protocol
Analysis
Parameters
RF Tests
(B.O.S.S.)
Parameters
Information
Screen
Test
Sequences
Menu
Run / Define
Sequence
A-bis
Tests Menu
Test
Parameters
Test
Information
Test
Results
Graph
Functional
Tests
Transmitter
Tests
Receiver
Tests
Controlled
Multimode
Test
Special
Functions
Signal
Generator
Power
Meter Menu
Parameters
Parameters
View
File
Destination

Figure 5.2 MMI Primary Menu Structure and Facilities
6113 EDGE 5-3
80-0013
Section 5

MAIN MENU

The main menu is the first menu the operator sees when the instrument is powered up. It gives top-level
access to all the facilities. This menu is the only place where the 6113 logo is displayed. The actual logo
displayed is determined by the Radio System selected in the BTS Information / Radio System Menu, and
can be 6113 GSM, 6113 GSM 850, '6113 DCS 1800' or '6113 PCS 1900'. When an option is selected
from the menu, the logo is removed.

Special
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44 Main Menu
Parameters
Results
File
Manager
Controlled
Sequences
Self Tests
System
Offsets
Test
BTS
Live Tests
Tests
Information
Functions
A-bis
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Information
Screen

Figure 5.3 Main Menu (GSM)

Menu Options

Option Button Function

Parameters This option selects the Parameter Menu which allows control
of various system parameters such as the default global GSM
parameters and the default Test Set parameters.

Offsets This option allows the user to edit the Level Offset parameters
to compensate for RF losses between the Test Set and BTS
under test.

Results This option selects the Results Menu which allows the user to
enter header information to be included with the results. If
results printing is selected, the operator is able to select and
configure the printer port (using the I/O Port Allocation option in
the Self Tests/System Menu). ). Alternatively, test results can
be sent to either a file on PCMCIA memory card or to a
hardware device connected to either of the Test Set I/O ports

File Manager This option selects the File Manager function which allows the
user to manage the files on the Memory Cards.

Self Tests / System This option selects the System Menu which allows the user to
view and set various Test Set configuration options and to run
the Self Test.

5-4 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

BTS Information The BTS Information screen allows the user to configure the
Test Set to all the manufacturer-specific details that are
relevant to the BTS under test, including the A-bis Interface
parameters and RF connections. The Test Set uses the
information on this screen to set BTS dependent test options
and configurations.

Live Tests This option selects the Live Tests Menu for using non- allowing
all BTS dependent options to be set intrusive test modes to
test an operational BTS.

Special Functions This option selects the Special Functions test screen which
allows the user to select the Signal Generator mode, Power
Meter mode, or combined Signal Generator & Power Meter
mode of operation as required.

A-bis Controlled Tests This option selects the A-bis Controlled Tests Menu where the
user selects a particular test, and sets the parameters, to test
the BTS.

Test Sequences This option selects the Test Sequences Menu which allows the
user either to select and run, or to define, a stored sequence of
tests.

Restore Pwr Dwn /
Information Screen /
Display Logo
Restore Pwr Down is not used. At the first press of this button
the logo is displayed and the button is labelled Information
Screen. Pressing Information Screen displays the summary
information screen (non editable). The button can then be
used to toggle between the logo and the information screen.

CAUTION: A-bis Impedance Switching

When the 6113 is powered ON, the A-bis interface connectors are initially open circuit.

Selecting either the A-bis Controlled Tests option or the Test Sequences option sets
the A-bis impedance low (75 or 120 ohms, according to the selection at the Interface
option of the BTS Information Menu).

Selecting the Live Tests option sets the A-bis impedance high.

Once the the A-bis impedance is set either high or low, by pressing the keys as
described above, the impedance remains as set until:

(1) When the impedance is low, Live Tests option is selected and the impedance is
set high.

(2) When the impedance is high, either A-bis Controlled Tests option or Test
Sequences option is selected and the impedance is set low. In this instance, the
following warning is also displayed:

WARNING
This operation will cause the
A-bis connectors to revert to low impedance.
Where connection is to a live system,
disconnect A-bis cables before continuing.

6113 EDGE 5-5
80-0013
Section 5

PARAMETERS MENU

The Parameters screen is displayed when Parameters option is selected at the Main Menu. This option is
used to control groups of default parameters that are permanently in effect in the Test Set.

Parameter Control Screen

Read
File
Write
File
Parameters
GSM
Parameters
EXIT
Timing
Output
Port
16 MAR 2000 14:12:44
Parameters
File
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
View
Hopping
Table

Figure 5.4 Parameter Control Screen

Menu Options


Read File This option displays a File Selection Screen, allowing the user to
select a parameter file on the memory card to load into the Test
Set as its new parameter state.

Write File This option displays a File Selection Screen, allowing the user to
save the current parameter state in a file on the memory card.

View Parameters File Displays a File Select screen for selecting a file on memory card
to view.

Timing Output Port Displays a Configuration Parameter Edit screen for changing
the configuration state, and the start and stop times for the
timing port (SYNC OUT).

Hopping Table Displays a Configuration Parameter Edit screen for changing
the Hopping Table selections (not available if the BTS does not
support hopping). See Table 5.1 Hopping Tables.

GSM Parameters This option displays the GSM Parameter Selection Screen,
allowing the user to select a group of GSM parameters to edit
(see Table 5.2 GSM Parameters).

EXIT This option returns the user to the Main Menu.
5-6 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Table 5.1 Hopping Tables

Origin Channel Number 0 (E-GSM 900)
0 (E_GSM 900 + R)
512 (DCS 1800)
512 (PCS 1900)
128 (GSM 850)
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM 900)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM 900 + R)
512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)
128 to 251 (GSM 850)
Hopping Tables:
E-GSM 900 and
E-GSM 900 + R table

DCS 1800 and PCS
1900 table

GSM 850 table
Active Cells:
1, 5, 51, 55, 59, 63, )
120, 124 )

513, 514, 574, 575, )
633, 634, 635, 636 )

129, 133, 179, 183 )
187, 191, 248, 251 )
Cells:
0 to 124, 975 to 1023 (E-GSM 900)
0 to 124, 955 to 1023 (E-GSM 900 + R)

512 to 885 (DCS 1800)
512 to 810 (PCS 1900)

128 to 251 (GSM 850)

6113 EDGE 5-7
80-0013
Section 5

Table 5.2 GSM Parameters

Parameter Sub-group Parameter Name Default Value Range
Base Station ID Network Colour Code 0 0 to 7
Base Station Colour
code
0 0 to 7
Control Channel ISMI Attach-Detach
Allowed
1 0 to 1
Description Blocks reserved for
access grant
0 0, 1, 2 or 0 to 7
CCCH Configuration 1 0, 1, 2, 4, 6
Multiframes between
paging requests
2 2 to 9
T312 Timeout Value 0 0 to 255
Cell Channel E-GSM /
Description GSM 850
Origin ARFCN 0
128
0 to 124, 975 to 1023
128 to 251
Cell Allocation Table Bitmap Not Applicable
DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Orgin ARFCN 512 512 to 885 / 512 to 810
Cell Allocation Table Bitmap Not Applicable
Cell Options Power Control Indicator 0 0, 1
DTX indicator 2 0 to 2
Radio Link Timeout T100 8 4 to 64
Neighbour Cells
Description
Origin ARFCN 0
128
0 to 124, 975 to 1023
128 to 251

E-GSM / GSM 850

Extended Origin ARFCN 0
128
0 to 124, 975 to 1023
128 to 251
Neighbour Cell Table Bitmap Not Applicable
Origin ARFCN 512 512 to 885 / 512 to 810

DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Extended Origin ARFCN 512 512 to 885 / 512 to 810
Neighbour Cell Table Bitmap Not Applicable
RACH Control Maximum
Retransmissions
2 1, 2, 4, 7
Tx Spread Integer 5 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11,
12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32, 50
Cell Barred 0 0, 1
Call Re-establish 1 0, 1
PLMN Permitted 255 0 to 255
Access Control Class 32767 0 to 65535
Location Area ID Cell Identity Value 1 0 to 65535
Mobile Country Code 1 0 to 999
Mobile Network Code 1 0 to 99
Location Area Code 1 0 to 65535
Cell Selection Cell Reselect Hysterisis 12 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14
Max Mobile Tx Power Lvl 15 0 to 31
Min Mobile Rx Signal Lvl 0 0 to 63
Encryption Kc Encryption Kc FFFFFFFF
FFFFFC00
00000000 to
FFFFFFFF
5-8 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

File Selection Screen - File Read

Parameters :
Cancel
Files
Directories
File Name:
Directory:
Description:
PRM
Select Parameter File to Read
TEST 1
A:\TESTS\BTS
Parameter file for TEST BTS 1
Accept
List
List
Memory Card
A:
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
Offsets: 10 dB Rslts : OFF
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.5 File Select - File Read Screen

Menu Options


Memory Card Used to select the memory card in slot A: or slot B:, displaying
the option selected.

Accept Accepts the current file selection (from the List Files option),
reads the information from the file into memory and then returns
to the previous menu. No confirmation message is displayed.

List Files Switches to Select from List screen to select a file from a
scrolling list.

List Directories Switches to Select from List screen to select a directory from a
scrolling list.

Cancel Discards the current file selection and then returns to the
Parameters Menu without loading the file.

Note: (1) The Description for the currently selected parameter file is read from the file and
displayed on the bottom line of the table.

(2) The file extensions are fixed so that only files relevant to the current context are
displayed.

(3) Selection of all file names and directories is done from scrolling lists.

6113 EDGE 5-9
80-0013
Section 5

File Selection Screen - File Write

Parameters
Cancel
Edit
Filename
Edit
Directories
File Name:
Directory:
Description:
PRM
Enter Parameter File to Write
TEST 2
A:\TESTS\BTS
Parameter file for TEST BTS 2
Description
Files
Accept
List
List
Memory Card
A:
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.6 File Select - File Write Screen

Menu Options



Accept Accepts the current file selection, writes information from
memory to the file and then returns to the previous menu. No
confirmation message is displayed.

Edit Filename Switches to Text Edit mode for the user to type in a file name.

scrolling list.

scrolling list.

Edit File Description Switches to Text Edit mode for the user to type in a file
description.

Parameter Control screen without loading the file.

Note: (1) If the selected file already exists, a confirmation message is displayed asking the
user to confirm overwriting the existing file.

(2) If an existing file is selected the Description field is refreshed from the selected
file.

5-10 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

GSM Parameter Selection Screen

This screen is used to select a GSM parameter group, from a scrolling list of Configuration Parameter
Groups which may be selected with the spinwheel or Scroll Soft keys. Selecting an option from the list
displays the appropriate Configuration Parameter Edit Screen allowing the user to edit the parameter
group selected.

EXIT
Select
Parameters 15 NOV 2001 14:12:44
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Base Station ID
Control Channel Description
Cell Channel Description
Cell Options
Neighbour Cells Description
RACH Control
Location Area ID
Cell Selection
Encryption Kc
Timing Advance

Figure 5.7 GSM Parameter Selection Screen

Menu Options


Select Accepts the current selection and switches to the Configuration
Parameter Edit Screen

Moves the current selection up one item.

Moves the current selection down one item.

EXIT Returns to the Parameters Menu.

6113 EDGE 5-11
80-0013
Section 5

Configuration Parameter Edit Screen

This screen is used to select and edit parameters. The exact operation is dependent upon the type of
parameter selected. The screen has two modes of operation:

(1) Select Parameter

The desired parameter is selected by scrolling the selection bar through the list of items, using
either the spinwheel or the up/down arrow keys.

(2) Edit Parameter

The selected parameter is edited by incrementing or decrementing, or entering a number from the
numeric keypad, or resetting the parameter to its default value. There are four types of parameter:

Numeric: A parameter which can vary between a range of numeric values.

Toggle: A parameter which can have one of the values from a pre-defined list.

Bitmap: A parameter which has a pictorial bitmap representation.

Text: A parameter which has an editable text string associated with it.

RACH Control
Cancel
All
All
Reset
EXIT
Edit
Parameter
19 AUG 1999 14:12:44
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Parameter Value Default
2
5
0
1
255
32767
Range : 0 to 1
Maximum Retransmissions
TX Spread Integer
Access Control Class
Call Re-Establish
PLMN Permitted
2
5
1
255
32767
Cell Barred
0

Figure 5.8 Configuration Parameter Edit Screen

Menu Options


Cancel All Discards all the changes made to the set of parameters
displayed restoring the previous values, then return to the
previous menu.

Reset All Sets all the parameters displayed to their default values.
5-12 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Edit Parameter For toggle or numeric parameters, this button displays the
Numeric Parameter Edit Screen 1; for bitmap parameters a
bitmap edit screen is displayed; for text parameters a text edit
screen is displayed (described under FILE MANAGER MENU).

For toggle or numeric parameters, it increments the currently
selected parameter. For bitmap parameters, it displays a
bitmap edit screen.

Moves the current parameter selection up one item, accepting
any changes made to previous parameter.

Moves the current parameter selection down one item,
accepting any changes made to previous parameter.

0 For toggle or numeric parameters, it decrements the currently
selected parameter. For bitmap parameters it displays a bitmap
edit screen.

EXIT Accepts all the changes made to the set of parameters
displayed and sets up the new values in the Test Set, then
returns to the previous menu.

Note: (1) The screen always starts with the spinwheel in 'Parameter Select' mode. (When
the Edit Parameter option is selected, then Numeric Parameter Edit Screen 1 is
displayed and the spinwheel can be used to change the value of the selected
parameter).

(2) The range for the currently selected parameter is displayed on the bottom line of
the table.

(3) Pressing numeric keys on the keyboard selects:

-- Numeric Parameter Edit Screen 2 with a numeric or toggle parameter selected.
-- Text Entry / Edit screen with a text parameter selected, or
-- Bitmap Edit screen with a bitmap parameter selected.

(4) The spinwheel can be used to scroll up and down the parameter list.

6113 EDGE 5-13
80-0013
Section 5

Numeric Parameter Edit Screen 1

This screen is displayed when the Edit Parameter option is selected at the Configuration Parameter Edit
screen.

RACH Control
EXIT
Accept
Cancel
Reset
Parameter
19 AUG 1999 14:12:44
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
2
5
0
1
255
32767
Range : 0 to 1
TX Spread Integer
Call Re-Establish
PLMN Permitted
2
5
1
255
32767
Cell Barred
0

Figure 5.9 Numeric Parameter Edit Screen 1

Menu Options


Cancel Resets the parameter to its previous value.

Reset Parameter Resets the parameter to its default value.

Accept Accepts the change made to the parameter and returns to the
Configuration Parameter Edit Screen.

For toggle or numeric parameters, increments the currently
selected parameter.

any changes made to previous parameter, and returns to the
Configuration Parameter Edit screen.

accepting any changes made to previous parameter, and
returns to the Configuration Parameter Edit screen.

0 For toggle or numeric parameters, it decrements the currently
selected parameter.

EXIT Cancels any changes made to the parameter and returns to the
Configuration Parameter Edit screen.
5-14 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Note: (1) The spinwheel may be used to increment or decrement the value of the selected
parameter.

(2) Pressing a numeric key on the keyboard will:

-- edit the parameter selected and display Screen 2.
or
-- display the Bitmap Edit screen if a bitmap parameter is selected
or
-- display the the Text Edit screen (described under FILE MANAGER MENU) if a
text parameter is selected..

(3) In this screen, the spinwheel or +/- softkeys cannot increment or decrement the
value of the selected parameter beyond its maximum or minimum values.

6113 EDGE 5-15
80-0013
Section 5

Numeric Parameter Edit Screen 2

This screen is displayed when a numeric key on the keypad is pressed in the Configuration Parameter
Edit screen or the Numeric Parameter Edit Screen 1.

RACH Control
Cancel
Accept
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
2
5
0
1
255
1
Range : 0 to 1
TX Spread Integer
Call Re-Establish
PLMN Permitted
2
5
1
255
1
Cell Barred
1

Figure 5.10 Numeric Parameter Edit Screen 2

Menu Options


Accept Accepts the change made to the parameter and returns to the
Configuration Parameter Edit Screen (Note 2).

Cancel Discards changes made to the selected parameter and restores
the previous value, and returns to the Configuration Parameter
Edit screen.

Note: (1) In this screen, only the numeric keys can be used to edit the parameter value.
The spinwheel and the key can be used to move the cursor to facilitate editing.

(2) If a parameter value is edited beyond its maximum or minimum value, an error
message is displayed and the parameter is returned to its previous value, then the
screen returns to the Configuration Parameter Edit screen..

5-16 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Bitmap Edit Parameter Screen

The Bitmap Edit Parameter screen is displayed when the user attempts to change a bitmap parameter.

Cell Allocation Table
Toggle
Current Bit 0
Parameter Cell Allocation Table
Cancel
Reset
Parameter
Bit
Accept
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44 Range
0 : 124
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
1 - 20
21 - 40
41 - 60
61 - 80
81 - 100
101 - 120
121 - 124
1 5 10 15 20
0

Figure 5.11 Bitmap Edit Parameter Screen

Menu Options


Range Toggles the range between 0 : 124 and 975 : 1023.

the previous value.

Reset Parameter Resets the parameter to its default value.

Toggle Bit Toggles the state of the current bit, and moves the selection
point to the next bit.

Moves the current selection point up one item.

Moves the current selection point down one item.

Moves the current selection point right one item.

Moves the current selection point left one item.

Accept Accepts all the changes made to the displayed bitmap and

Note: (1) The currently selected bit number is displayed in the Current Bit box of the table.

(2) The spinwheel may be used to scroll left and right through the bitmap, wrapping
round at the edge of lines.
6113 EDGE 5-17
80-0013
Section 5

OFFSETS MENU

The Level Offsets screen is displayed when Offsets option is selected at the Main Menu. This screen
allows the user to apply level offsets to the BTS transmit and receive paths to compensate for path losses.
These offsets can be saved as .LEV files on the memory card and recalled for use as necessary. The
View File facility (see FILE MANAGER MENU / View File Screen) can be used to view the files.

Note that the format of the entry in the Offsets box (in the Status Bar) varies according to the offsets
applied, as follows:

Offsets : 0.00 dB When zero (0.00 dB) offsets are selected for Tx and Rx.
Offsets : 10.00 dB When Tx and Rx offsets are the same value (e.g. 10.00 dB.
Tx 20.0, Rx 10.0 dB When different values are selected for Tx and Rx. (The values
are rounded up to the nearest one decimal place).

The adoption of the Simplex or Duplex value for Rx depends upon the setting of the RF Connect button in
the BTS Information screen.

Note that Level Offsets is not a parameter; it simply indicates whether offsets On or Off.

Edit : Level Offsets 22 NOV 2001 14:12:44
Read
File
Write
File
Cancel
All
View
Offsets
File
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Reset
All
EXIT
Edit
Parameter
Level Offsets OFF
Range: -99.99 to 99.99 dB
(A negative value specifies loss in path)
dB 0.00
Off
BTS Tx Offset 10.00
0.00 dB
BTS Duplex Rx Offset
BTS Simplex Rx Offset 10.00
15.00 0.00 dB
Level Offsets On

Figure 5.12 Level Offsets Screen

Menu Options


Read File This option displays a File Selection Screen, allowing the
operator to select a level offsets file on the memory card to load
into the Test Set. When loaded, the offsets are applied if the
Level Offsets parameter has been set to On.

Write File This option displays a File Selection Screen, allowing the user to
save the current level offsets state in a file on the memory card.

Cancel All Cancels all the edits and returns them to the previous values.

5-18 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Reset All Resets all the offset values to their default values.

View Offsets File Displays a File Select screen for selecting, displaying and
printing an offsets file.

Edit Parameter Displays a Configuration Parameter Edit screen for editing the
selected parameter.

Increments the currently selected parameter.



0 Decrements the currently selected parameter.

displayed and sets the new values in the Test Set, then returns
to the previous menu.

6113 EDGE 5-19
80-0013
Section 5

RESULTS MENU

The Results screen is displayed when Results option is selected at the Main Menu. This screen allows
the user to define how and where the test results are saved/presented.

Header and footer information can be included with the results if required.

Results
Print
BTS Serial
Number(s)
Operator
Remarks
Test Results Header
BTS Serial Number(s)
Operator
Remarks
Results
Edit
Filename
Header
Print
Footer
EXIT
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
FILE
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.13 Results Menu Screen

Menu Options


BTS Serial Number(s) Switches to Text Editor screen for the user to type in BTS serial
number (Note 4).

Operator Switches to Text Editor screen for the user to type in operator
name (Note 4).

Remarks Switches to Text Editor screen for the user to type in remarks
information (Note 4).

Results Toggling the Results button gives the choice of printing results
to a FILE (on a memory card) or sending them to a printer via
the PARALLEL port, or via another port (which can be selected
at the Self Tests/System / I/O Port Allocation options at the
Main Menu), or switching results OFF. (Note 1).

Edit Filename This button is only displayed when FILE is selected at the
Results button. It displays a File Selection screen with facilities
to edit the filename. The filename is placed in the Rslts box of
the Status Bar. (See Note 2). The legend changes to Configure
Port if a different printer port has been selected at the Self
Tests/System / I/O Port Allocation options at the Main Menu

5-20 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Print Header Causes a header to be sent to the printer port. Only displayed
when anything other than OFF is selected at the Results
button.

Print Footer Causes a footer to be sent to the printer port. Only displayed if
anything other than OFF is selected at the Results button.

EXIT Returns to the Main Menu.

Note: (1) If another port (e.g. COM1) is subsequently selected for the results printer in the
SELF TESTS / SYSTEM MENU / I/O Port Allocation option, then this port is
added to the selection available. (See also Note 2).

(2) If an alternative port (e.g. COM1) has been selected (see Note 1) then the Edit
Filename button legend changes to Configure Port. Selecting the Configure Port
option displays a Parameter Select screen for setting the port parameters.

(3) A typical printout of header and footer is as follows:

**********************************************************************************************
* 6113 BTS Test Results Sheet 16 NOV 2001 13:56:49 *
* *
* BTS Manufacturer : Banjo *
* BTS Model : XYZ *
* BTS Software Version : 04/5 *
* BTS Serial Number(s) : 1234, 1235 *
* *
* BTS Tx Offset : 10.00 dB *
* BTS Duplex Rx Offset : 15.00 dB *
* *
* Operator : Mr X *
* Remarks : AAAA *
* *
**********************************************************************************************
Test finished at : 13:56:51
Test Equipment : RACAL INSTRUMENTS 6113
Serial Number 1001
Software Version 4.01

**********************************************************************************************

(4) These settings are stored in non volatile memory, and so the settings are retained
when the unit is powered off.

6113 EDGE 5-21
80-0013
Section 5

Saving Results To File

To save results to a file, the file should be established and selected before the test or test sequence is
run.

A results file is created as follows:

(1) Place a suitable memory card in the front panel (slot A: or B:).

(2) Select the Results option at the Main Menu to display the Results screen.

(3) In the Results screen, toggle the Results button to FILE.

(4) Enter the BTS Serial Number(s), Operator name and Remarks information using the button
facilities.

(5) Use the Edit Filename option to enter a filename and description (see the following diagram). Note
that the filename has the extension .PRT but this can be changed using the Edit Extension
facility.

(6) Use the Print Header and Print Footer options to print the header and footer with the results, if
required.

(7) Press the Accept button to accept the file. Note that the filename is then entered in the Rslts: box in
the Status Bar. Until the filename is entered/selected, the box displays Rslts: OFF or Rslts:
PARALLEL (unless another results file has been selected/entered previously). Then press the
EXIT button to return to the Main Menu.

The presence of the file can be checked by pressing the Results / Edit Filename buttons again and then
pressing the List Files button. Check that the name of the new file is shown in the scrolling list of files.

Note: Refer to FILE MANAGER MENU / Generic Text Editor for a description of how to use the text edit
facilities.

19 JUN 1998 15:29:36
Cancel

List
Files
List
Directories
Enter Results File to Write
Results
LG3TEST
B:\BUILD5.PRT\
File Name
Directory
Accept
B:
Memory Card
Edit
Extension
List All
Files
Edit
Filename
Edit
Description
PRT
Description Production Test series 3W/BG-004
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.14 Results File Screen

5-22 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

FILE MANAGER MENU

Selecting the File Manager option at the Main Menu displays the File Manager screen which gives access
to all the File Manager facilities.

The File Manager provides facilities for managing files on the two memory card slots. The two memory
card slots are referred to as drives A: and B: and are labelled as such on the front panel.

Note: Windows 95TM files may be read, but the display is limited to a DOS format presentation (i.e.
********.***). Extended filenames greater than 8 characters, whose first 8 characters are identical,
are arbitrarily sequenced by Windows 95 as ~1, ~2, ~3, etc for DOS purposes, and this sequence
takes no account of any numeric indication in the filename. Use the Date / Time indication on the
File Manager screen to identify such files.

File Manager
EXIT
Change
Directory
Copy
File
Delete
Format
Card
A:
Memory Card
Make
Directory
21 NOV 2001 14:12:44
View File
Directory: A:\
File Ext RO Size Date / Time
BUILD_3
JONNAA
ABX_3C
PRTEST_3
OFFSET_1
TEMPFILE
DEF
PRM
TXT
13 Jun 98 13:21:40
14 Jun 98 09:31:49
01 Jun 98 14:41:44
12 Jun 98 14:07:20
12 Jun 98 16:52:52
26 Jun 98 13:56:37 13244
678
512
42
16437
LEV
PRT
SEQ 12139
r
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Rename
File Disk free space : 96.45 kB
Change RO
Attribute
r

Figure 5.15 File Manager Screen

Menu Options



Copy File Displays a File Manager - Copy File screen with the currently
selected file as the copy-from file.

Delete Deletes the currently selected file/directory.

Make Directory Displays a the Generic text editor to enter the name of the new
directory.

Format card Performs a DOS format on the memory card.

Change RO Attribute Toggles the Read Only attribute 'r' of the selected file on and off.

View File Displays the contents of the file highlighted.
6113 EDGE 5-23
80-0013
Section 5

Change Directory Moves to the highlighted subdirectory. If the current item is not
a subdirectory then a beep is generated.

Moves the current steps viewed up one item.

Moves the current steps viewed down one item.

Rename File Displays a Renamed File.

Exit Returns to the Main Menu.

Note: (1) 'Format Card' option is confirmation protected.

(2) Delete File' option is confirmation protected.

(3) A character r in the RO column indicates Read Only file.

5-24 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

File Manager - Copy File Screen

File Manager
Cancel
Edit
Filename
Directories
List
Files
List
Memory card
A:
Accept
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Copy File
File Name:
Directory:
FILE1.PRM
A:\TESTS
Copy from:
A:\TESTS\FILE1.PRM
Copy to:

Figure 5.16 File Manager - Copy File Screen

Menu Options



Accept Accepts the current file selection, copies file to location
specified, and then returns to the previous menu.


scrolling list.

scrolling list.

previous menu without copying the file.

Note: If the selected file already exists, a confirmation message is displayed asking the user to
confirm overwriting the existing file.

6113 EDGE 5-25
80-0013
Section 5

File Manager - Rename File Screen

File Manager
Cancel
Edit
Filename
Memory card
A:
Accept
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Rename File
File Name: FILE1.PRM
Old Filename:
A:\TESTS\FILE1.PRM
New Filename:

Figure 5.17 File Manager - Rename File Screen

Menu Options



Accept Accepts the current file selection, copies file to location
specified, and then returns to the previous menu.


previous menu without copying the file.

Note: If the selected file already exists, a confirmation message is displayed asking the user to
confirm overwriting the existing file.

5-26 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Select From List Screen

This screen provides facilities for a file to be selected from a scrolling list. Selection of directories from a
scrolling list works the same way, with the addition that all parent directories up to the root directory are
also present in the list.

File Manager
Select
EXIT
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Copy File
File Name:
Directory:
FILE1.PRM
A:\TESTS
Copy from:
A:\TESTS\FILE1.PRM
Copy to:
TESTS_1.PRT
BUILD_X6.SEQ
ACCEPT_2.SEQ
TESTS_2.PRT

Figure 5.18 Select From List Screen

Menu Options


Select Accepts the current selection, returns to the previous screen
and updates the File Name field.



EXIT Returns to the previous screen without updating the File Name
field.

Note: The spinwheel can be used to scroll up and down the parameter list.

6113 EDGE 5-27
80-0013
Section 5

Generic Text Editor

Editor Presentation

Parameters 15 JUN 1998 12:34:56
EXIT
Accept
Edit Mode
File Name
Directory
Description
Enter Parameter File to Write
ERS
A:\
Upper
Overwrite
PRM
Parameter file for BANJO CTX
Case
Character
Spinwheel
Use Spinwheel to select character then press ENTER
Cancel
ABCDEFGH IJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890\ *.?_$:#%!"&( ),+ - / ;< G
Clear Line
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.19 Typical Text Editor Screen

Menu Options


Case This option is only displayed for the full character set. It toggles
the case of the alphabetic characters highlighted on the
Character Bar between Upper and Lower case. The default is
Upper case.

Cancel Discards the present edit and displays the previous text.

Clear Line Removes all text from the Text Line. The cursor is placed at the
extreme left.

Accept Returns to the previous screen with the edit on the Text Line
established.

Spinwheel Toggles between Character and Cursor mode.

In Character mode the spinwheel moves the highlight along the
Character Bar, and the arrow buttons move the cursor along
the line of text.

In Cursor mode the the spinwheel moves the cursor along the
line of text and the arrow buttons move the highlight along the
Character Bar.

5-28 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Moves the cursor to the left along the line of text when the
Spinwheel button is in Character mode; it moves the highlight to
the left along the Character Line when the Spinwheel button is
in Cursor mode.

Moves the cursor to the right along the line of text when the
Spinwheel button is in Character mode; it moves the highlight to
the right along the Character Line when the Spinwheel button is
in Cursor mode.

Edit Mode Toggles the edit mode between Insert and Overwrite.

Cancel Discards the present edit and returns to the previous screen.

Note: (1) The character highlighted on the Character Bar is established on the Text Line by
pressing the ENTER button on the keypad; if the highlighted character is
alphabetic, the Case button determines whether it is Upper case or Lower case.

(2) The Delete () button on the keypad deletes characters on the line of text when
the Spinwheel button is in both Character mode and Cursor mode.

(3) A Reset Parameter button appears between the Cancel and Clear Line buttons
when the Text Editor has been entered from a Configuration Parameter Edit
screen.

6113 EDGE 5-29
80-0013
Section 5

Using the Text Editor

Use the Text Editor screen to edit a selected line of text as follows:

(1) Move the cursor along the line of text to the required point for inserting or deleting characters.

(2) Delete a character on the line of text by using the key on the keypad.

(3) Add a character by highlighting the required character on the Character Bar and pressing the
ENTER key on the keypad. (If the Case button is displayed, toggle the button to select Upper case
or Lower case before pressing ENTER).

(4) Use the spinwheel and the arrow buttons to move the cursor and the highlight, as follows:

Toggle the Spinwheel button to Character to use the spinwheel to move the highlight.
Toggle the Spinwheel button to Cursor to use the spinwheel to move the cursor.

When the spinwheel moves the highlight the arrow buttons will move the cursor, and vice versa.

(5) Toggle the Edit Mode button to select Overwrite mode or Insert mode of editing

(6) Use the Clear Line button to clear a whole line of text.

(7) Use the Cancel button to discard an edit and restore the original text.
(If the Text Editor has been entered from a Configuration Parameter Edit screen, use the Reset
Parameter button to restore the default setting of the parameter).

Depending on the text being edited, the characters available on the Character Bar are automatically
changed, as follows:

(8) A full character set for general text processing:

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890\*.?_$:#%!&(),+-/;<=>[]^@
^ this is a space

(9) A DOS character set for filenames and extensions:

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ1234567890_- $%&@{}

(10) A DOS character set including full stop:

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ.1234567890_- $%&@{}*

(11) A HEX character set:

1234567890ABCDEF

(12) A Numeric character set:

The numeric buttons on the keypad are used for numeric characters.

5-30 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

View File Screen

The View File screen is displayed by pressing the View File button in any of the following screens:

Screen
File Manager
Parameters
Offsets
Test Sequences

A File Select screen is displayed. Select the required file and then press the Accept button to display the
following screen:

View File : Find Step
EXIT
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
Top of File
Page Up
Page Down
End of File
5
Print
(FILE DISPLAY AREA)
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.20 Typical View File Screen

Menu Options


Top of File Displays the top of the file.

Page Up Moves the displayed region of the file upwards by one page
(screen area).

Moves the displayed region up by one line.

Moves the displayed region down by one line.

Page Down Moves the displayed region of the file down by one page
(screen area).

End of File Displays the end of the file.

Find Step This button only operates when Sequence files or Results files
are displayed. It places the selected step number at the top of
the displayed region.
6113 EDGE 5-31
80-0013
Section 5

Print Sends the file to the configured printer (refer to the heading
RESULTS MENU).

EXIT Returns to the previous screen.

5-32 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

SELF TESTS / SYSTEM MENU

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / SELF CHECK TESTS)

The System Menu allows the operator access to a limited set of the 6113 internal functions.

19 NOV 2001 09:35:23
EXIT
Reset
Update
Software
Set
Software Versions MAIN
BBP
DSP
ABIS
5.05
1.02V
1.02
1.06I
Unit Serial Number 2371
Self Tests
Date / Time
System
Unit Software Version 5.05
Options
I/O Port
Allocation
Test Set
10 Oct 01
22 Jun 01
29 Jan 98
26 Apr 01
Date Last Calibrated 02 Nov 01
Test Set
Hardboot 1.02 19 Oct 95
Softboot 2.03 12 Aug 98
Unit Elapsed Hours On
Test Set
Settings
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
3064 System
Serial Nos

Figure 5.21 System Menu Screen

Menu Options


Test Set Options Displays a list of the software options and hardware options
fitted to the Test Set, and a Change Software Options option for
entering new option facilities.

Set Date / Time Displays a Configuration Parameter Edit screen with hours,
minutes, etc, as the parameters. The defaults are set to the
Test Set internal time when the screen is entered.

I/O Port Allocation Displays a Port Configuration screen for the DEBUG, PRINTER
and CONTROLLER ports. Selections from this screen allow the
ports to be allocated and configured.

Test Set Settings Displays a Configuration Parameter Edit screen for changing
the GPIB address, buzzer state, frequency standard, etc.

System Serial Nos Displays the Board Number, Issue, Serial Number, and Mod
Strike of all PCBs in the Test Set.

Update Software Allows the operator to initiate software update from memory
card.

Self Tests Displays a list of self tests. Selecting Test Parameters displays
a Configuration Parameter Edit screen for editing the
parameters of the selected test; pressing Run Test runs it.

Reset Test Set Resets the Test Set. This option is protected by a 'Confirm'
function.

Exit Returns to the Main Menu.
6113 EDGE 5-33
80-0013
Section 5

Test Set Options Menu

This screen is displayed when the Test Set Options option is selected at the Self Tests / System Menu. It
displays the various hardware and software options that are fitted to the Test Set, and allows the software
option entries to be changed.

Test Set Options
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
Change
Software
Options
Software Options:
001 EGSM
202 Banjo BTS
310 BOSS BTS Rx Measurements
002 DCS 1800
04E FREQUENCY STANDARD ABIS HALF RATE
Hardware Options:
Encryption Options
EXIT
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.22 Test Set Options Screen

Menu Options


Change Software Displays a facility for entering new software options.
Options

EXIT Returns to the previous screen

5-34 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Test Set Settings Menu

This screen allows some facilities provided by the Test Set to be adjusted.

Test Set Settings
Cancel
All
All
Reset
EXIT
Edit
Parameter
Parameter Value
Default
10MHz
Quiet
Allowed List : OFF, Quiet, Loud
Frequency Standard 10MHz
Buzzer Volume Loud
Status Message Time Stamping OFF ON
16 JUN 1998 14:12:44
GPIB Address 2 20
Display GPIB Traffic OFF OFF
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.23 Test Set Settings Screen

Menu Options


displayed and restores the previous values, then returns to the
System menu.


Edit Parameter Displays a Configuration Parameter Edit screen for editing the
selected parameter.





displayed and sets the new values in the Test Set, then returns
to the previous menu.

Note: The screen always starts with the spinwheel in 'Parameter Select' mode.
6113 EDGE 5-35
80-0013
Section 5

BTS INFORMATION MENU

BTS Information
Software
Manufacturer
Exit
Model
A-bis
Settings
Mapping
Table
Interface
Abis Unbal
RF Connect
Code Path
Radio
System
Simplex
BTS Model :
BTS Software Version :
BTS type
BTS Software Code Path :
BTS Manufacturer :
Radio System :
GSM 900
A : \
XXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXX
XXX
BTS
BTS
BTS
BTS S/W
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
BTS Reports
Full

Figure 5.24 BTS Information Screen

Menu Options


Abis Settings This option displays the Configuration Parameter Edit Screen
allowing the user to edit the A-bis settings. (Refer to Table
5.3 A-bis Settings).

Mapping Table Switches to a BTS-specific A-bis mapping screen. The
screen allows the entries to be changed or to be set to
default values. (See Note 1). Refer to Section 7 for details.

Interface This button toggles the selection between 'Abis Unbal', 'Abis
Bal' and 'V11' for the IN and OUT/MONITOR A-bis ports.
See Section 7.

RF Connect This button toggles the selection between Simplex and
Duplex signalling, and between B.O.S.S. Simplex and
B.O.S.S. Duplex signalling when Option 56R or Option 54 /
54R is fitted.

BTS Reports BTS event reports can be displayed. This button toggles the
selection between OFF, Full and Summary. (This button is
only displayed for certain types of BTS).

Radio System Displays a scrolling list of types of radio system available for
selection, as shown in Table 5.4 Radio Systems

BTS Manufacturer Displays a scrolling list of BTS Manufacturers available for
selection (see Note 1).
5-36 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

BTS Model Displays a scrolling list of BTS models available for selection
(see Note 1).

BTS Software Displays a scrolling list of BTS Manufacturer software
versions available for selection (see Note 1).

BTS S/W Code Path Displays a scrolling list of paths available for selection and
downloading code.

Exit Accepts the current selections and then returns to the Main
Menu.

Note: (1) The BTS types that may be selected are enabled by the options fitted to the Test
Set. If information for a non-allowed BTS type is then selected, "Not Set" is
displayed in the BTS Model box and the information is not displayed.

(2) The BTS directory path cannot be modified if no memory cards are present.

(3) The memory card selected will default to the last card selected if still inserted.

(4) The Interface button will toggle between A-bis and V11 regardless of which is
relevant. This option should be kept at 'A-bis' (default) unless the V11 interface is
being used.

(5) When the Test Set is switched ON, or after a Reset, if the RF Connect button is
toggled before the BBP (Baseband Processor) board has stabilized, then the
selection will toggle but a beep is sounded and the red RF OUT LED remains
extinguished -- until the BBP board has stabilised.

Table 5.3 A-bis Settings

E1 CRC4 Bit
CRC4 E-bit
Slot 0 Bits 3 to 8
Off
Off
31
Off, On
Off, On
0 to 63
T1 T1 Frame Format ESF ESF
D3/D4
A-bis Submultiplexing Rate 16K 16K, 8K

Table 5.4 Radio Systems

Radio System E-GSM 900 GSM 850
E-GSM 900
GSM 900 + GSM-R
DCS 1800
PCS 1900
Multi-band (GSM 850)
Multi-band (E-GSM 900)
Multi-band (DCS 1800)
Multi-band (PCS 1900)
6113 EDGE 5-37
80-0013
Section 5

Mapping Table Screen

The A-bis Mapping Table screen is BTS-specific; refer to the relevant Section 7 Option description for
details. The button controls, however, are the same for all screens and are described below.

Clear
Line
THE A-BIS MAPPING SCREEN IS
MANUFACTURER-SPECIFIC.
REFER TO SECTION 7 OPTIONS FOR DETAILS.
NOTE:
Abandon
Changes
Clear
Entry
Default
Mapping
Mapping Table 19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
EXIT
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.25 Mapping Table Screen

Menu Options


Clear Line Clears all entries on the current selected line.

Accepts the changes made to the selected entry and moves the
current selection up one item.

current selection down one item.

current selection right one item.

current selection left one item.

Abandon Changes Cancels all changes to the entries and sets them back to their
original values.

Clear Entry Sets the selected entry to "-".

Increments the currently selected entry.

0 Decrements the currently selected entry.

Default Mapping Sets all entries to their default values.

Exit Accepts the changes made to entries and returns to the BTS
Information Menu.
5-38 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

LIVE TESTS MENU

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / LIVE TESTS)

CAUTION: Live Tests must be selected on the Main Menu before the Test Set is connected to a
BTS-to-BSC A-bis link, otherwise the link may be disrupted. (When Live Tests option
is selected, the A-bis connections are set to high impedance).

Similarly, disconnect the 6113 from the link before exiting the Live Tests screen.

Note: If the enhanced RF Module (Option 54 / 54R or Option 56R) is fitted, check that the B.O.S.S. RF
IN / DUPLEX and B.O.S.S. RF OUT connectors are being used (see Section 3 Preparation for
Use.

Selecting Live Tests option at the Main Menu displays the following screen. This screen provides access
to two facilities for testing a BTS:

RF Tests (B.O.S.S.)

19 MAR 2002 12:42:48 Live Tests
RF Tests
A-bis
Protocol
EXIT
BTS
Information
Analysis
(B.O.S.S.)
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Radio System Type :
BTS Manufacturer :
GSM 850
XXXXXXXXX
BTS Model : XXX
Interface :
RF Configuration :
A-bis, Unbalanced
Simplex
Unit Software Version : 05.06F
CURRENT SETTINGS
BTS Software Version : XX

Figure 5.26 Live Tests Mode Screen

Menu Options


BTS Information Displays the BTS Information (Live Tests) screen. (This screen
is similar to the BTS Information screen available at the Main
Menu, but it excludes facilities that are not applicable) .

RF Tests (B.O.S.S.) Displays the RF Tests Summary Screen (Not Registered) for
performing live testing on an operational BTS.

A-bis Protocol Displays the A-bis Protocol Analysis screen. Use this for
Analysis monitoring (non-intrusive) the A-bis link between a BTS and a
BSC in an operational network.

EXIT Exits the RF Tests screen and returns to the Main Menu.
6113 EDGE 5-39
80-0013
Section 5

RF Tests (B.O.S.S.) Menu

Note: RF Tests Mode facilities are available with Test Set software version 03.01 onwards. On-air BTS
transmitter measurements can be performed with standard issue software.

On-air BTS receiver measurements can only be performed when Option 310 RF Tests BTS Rx
Measurements software has been installed in the Test Set. The addition of hardware Option 56R
RF Tests Hardware Upgrade kit improves the performance of the RF Tests Mode (refer to
Section 1 Technical Specification).

Option 54 / 54R Complete RF Tests Capability includes both Option 310 and Option 56, and so
provides a complete upgrade for RF Tests Mode.

Preparations for Testing

Select the SELF TESTS / SYSTEM / Test Set Options menu and check the presence of the following:

(1) If transmitter tests only are to be performed, check that the Test Set software version is 03.01 or
later.

(2) If receiver tests are to be performed, check that Option 310 is listed.

(3) If enhanced RF Tests performance is required, check that B.O.S.S. RF Module is listed is listed.

Select Live Tests option from the Main Menu.

CAUTION: When Live Tests option is selected at the Main Menu, the A-bis connections are set to
high impedance.

Connection to the operational A-bis link must not be made until Live Tests is selected
at the Test Set, otherwise the link will be disrupted.

Similarly, disconnect the Test Set from the operational A-bis link before selecting A-
bis Controlled Tests option or Test Sequences option (both of which will set low
impedance A-bis connections).

Select RF Tests (B.O.S.S.) option from the Live Tests screen to display the RF Tests Summary screen,
and then connect the 6113 Test Set to the BTS as described in the relevant BTS-Specific option
description.

Place a SIM reader in the Test Set PCMCIA slot and insert a SIM card that is valid for the network to
which the Test Set is connected, or that is covered by a 'roaming' agreement.

Note that as soon as the RF connections are made and the Test Set has been locked to a CCH (indicated
by the message "Control Channel" in the Signal status box), the transmitter measurements are performed,
and can be observed in the measurement boxes and graphs by selecting the appropriate buttons in the
RF Tests Summary screen.

The following diagram shows a block schematic of the RF Tests Mode test operation. The next diagram
shows the menu screens used for RF Tests Mode, and the transitions between them.

Refer to the description of the RF Tests (B.O.S.S.) Mode facilities in Section 4 before commencing the
test procedure.

5-40 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

B.O.S.S.
Summary
Scan:
in progress
Scan:
complete
Detailed
measurement
Summary:
More...
Detailed
measurement:
More...
Edit
parameters
Enter Number
to Dial
Scan / Channel Table
Rescan
Scan complete
Power Profile
Modulation Spectrum
Scan / Channel Table
CCH/TCH Selected
Register
Process
More...
More...
Summary
More...
More...
Edit Limits/Parameters Done
Done
Sensitivity
Done
Place Call
Place Call
Scan Table empty
Stop
BER
Phase Error
Option 310 or
Detach
Clear Call
Measure
BTS Rx
Sensitivity
Option 310 or
Option 54 / 54R
Progress
Option 310 or
Option 54 / 54R
Option 54 / 54R
Complete
Edit
Parameters
Done
Edit Limits/
Parameters
Edit Limits/
Parameters

Figure 5.27 RF Tests Mode Menu Structure

6113 EDGE 5-41
80-0013
Section 5

RF Tests Summary Screen (Not Registered)

The RF Tests Summary screen is displayed when the RF Tests option is selected at the Live Tests
screen.

The following diagram illustrates the screen when the 'mobile' (Test Set) is not yet registered and no call is
present.

RF Tests - Summary
Power
Profile
EXIT
Phase
Error
Modulation
Spectrum
19 MAR 2002 12:00:00
100 -100 Frequency Error
10 0 RMS Phase Error
Peak Phase Error
40 0
More...
Scan/
Channel Table
Register
Printer
Scan/
Channel
16 -16 BTS Tx Power
Place
Call
BER Test Status
BER
Table
Parameters
Hz -96.70
Deg 4.80
Deg 12.60
dBm 2.50
No call present
Signal Control Channel Call Status Not Registered
MNC Test Network MCC 234
CI 18325 LAC 43210 NCC 1 BCC 4
CCH Channel
90
90
Lock to CCH
Configure
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Mod Spectrum Pass Power Profile
Off
Pass Phase Graph

Figure 5.28 RF Tests Summary Screen (Not Registered)

Menu Options


BER Switches to the BER results screen (if Option 310 / 54 / 54R is
fitted. See Section 7). If Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R is not
fitted, a Warning message is displayed. (The BER Results
screen is similar to same in Multimode).

Phase Error Switches to the RF Tests Phase/Frequency Error results screen
(similar to same in Multimode).

Power Profile Switches to the RF Tests Power Profile results screen (similar
to same in Multimode).

Modulation Spectrum Switches to the RF Tests Modulation Spectrum results screen

Configure Printer Provides facilities for selecting and configuring a port for printing
results (identical to the Results screen when Results option is
selected at the Main Menu). When a RESULTS port has been
configured, the button legend changes to Print Results.
Pressing Print Results sends the results data to the printer port.
If a graph screen is displayed, the button legend changes to
Print Screen and the screen area between the buttons is sent
(in Epson FX-80 format) to the printer port.
5-42 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Parameters Displays a parameter edit screen for defining error limits and
certain print options.

Register Initiates the registration procedure (if Option 310 or Option 54 /
54R is fitted. See Section 7). The Registration Progress screen
is displayed for the duration of the procedure. The button
legend changes to Detach when registered.

If Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R is not fitted, a Warning
message is displayed.

Place Call Switches to the Call Parameters screen (if Option 310 or Option
54 / 54R is fitted. See Section 7). When a call is in progress,
the button legend changes to Clear Call.

If Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R is not fitted, a Warning
message is displayed.

Scan / Channel Table Switches to the Scan / Channel Table screen. This button is
removed when the 'mobile' (Test Set) is registered and a call is
setup (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R).

Lock to CCH Performs a (manual) Lock to Cell Control Channel on the
channel number indicated.

More... Switches to the RF Tests Summary More screen (Not
Registered).

EXIT Stops the monitoring procedure and returns to Live Tests Menu.

Note: (1) The Signal box displays the measurement state using one of the following messages:

Message Meaning
Synchronising The Test Set is attempting to synchronise to the Cell
Control Channel.
Control Channel The Test Set is measuring on timeslot zero of a CCH.
Traffic Channel cn, TS ts The Test Set is measuring a traffic channel on a
TCH.
cn is the channel number, ts is the timeslot.
Traffic/Dummy cn, TS ts The Test Set is measuring one of:
-- A traffic channel on a CCH carrier.
-- An idle channel filled with Phase 1 dummy
bursts on a CCH carrier.
Dummy burst The Test Set is measuring an idle channel filled with
Phase 2 dummy bursts.
No Power The Test Set cannot find any power on the specified
channel and timeslot
Invalid Measurement An error was encountered when performing the
measurement.
No Training The expected training sequence was not found in the
signal.
No BCCH The Control Channel signal has been lost.

(2) The measurement boxes display dashes when the Signal box displays "Synchronising"
or "No Power" or other error conditions.
6113 EDGE 5-43
80-0013
Section 5

(3) When the Test Set is attempting to synchronise to a signal, the Signal box alternates
between Synchronising and an appropriate error message, as follows:

Message Meaning
Sync fail - no signal No signal power was found on the channel.
Sync fail - no FCCH Signal power was found but the FCCH could not be
found.
Sync fail - poor FCCH An FCCH was found but the received signal quality
was too low to achieve synchronisation.
Sync fail - no SCH An FCCH was found but the Test Set could not lock
to the SCH.
Sync fail - no BCCH A control channel was found and the Test Set
synchronised to it but the BCCH information could
not be decoded.

(4) The Call Status box displays the GSM Layer 3 state as follows (if Option 310 or Option
54 / 54R is fitted):

Not Registered The Test Set is only monitoring, or attempting to
monitor, the Cell Control Channel. If the operator
requests a call in this state, the Test Set will
register and place a call.
Registered The Test Set has performed the location update
procedure, has registered with the network, and is
monitoring the CCH and waiting for the operator to
place a call.
Call Ch n, TS x The Test Set is in a call. The Call Status box also
displays the TCH channel number (XXXX or
"HOP" when hopping) and the TCH timeslot
(YYY), e.g. "Call CH62, TS4.

(5) The Phase Error, Power Profile and Modulation Spectrum screens and their
associated 'More...' screens are similar to the Multimode screens except that the right-
hand side control buttons are modified to copy the buttons defined for the RF Tests
Summary screen, and the Print button and Parameter buttons have been added. The
Print button button initiates a screen dump to the configured printer, and the Parameter
button displays a Configuration Parameter Edit screen for changing associated
parameters.

(6) The RBER bargraph and the RF Tests BER screen display dashes until a call is in
place and the A-bis function has successfully located the traffic data stream on the
BTS A-bis interface.

(7) The BTS Tx Power parameter range is Expected Power Level (Power Level Limit +
10 dB).

(8) If Register or Place Call options are selected when the Test Set has not synchronised
to a control channel, a warning message is displayed and the Test Set continues trying
to synchronise.

5-44 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

RF Tests Summary More Screen (Not Registered)

Note: The Channel No button on this screen allows a channel to be entered manually without using the
scan. The Timeslot button allows a particular timeslot on the chosen channel to be monitored.
However, if there is no power present (i.e. no signal on the selected channel), the measurements
will all be blank.

RF Tests - Summary
EXIT
90
4
19 JUN 1998 12:00:00
More...
Scan/
Channel Table
Channel No.
Timeslot
Power
Profile
Phase
Error
Modulation
Spectrum
Printer
BER
Parameters
Peak Phase Error
40 0
16 -16 BTS Tx Power
BER Test Status
Hz -96.70
Deg 4.80
Deg 12.60
dBm 2.50
No call present
Signal Control Channel Call Status Not Registered
CI 18325 LAC 43210 NCC 1 BCC 4
CCH Channel
90
Narrow
Bandwidth
90
Lock to CCH
Configure
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Off
Pass Phase Graph

Figure 5.29 RF Tests Summary More Screen (Not Registered)

Menu Options






6113 EDGE 5-45
80-0013
Section 5

Parameters Displays a parameter edit screen defining error limits and

Channel No. Edits the number of the Channel (ARFCN) being monitored, or
displays the channel number selected in the Channel Table for
monitoring.

Timeslot Edits the number of the timeslot being monitored.

Bandwidth Toggles the receiver bandwidth between Wide and Narrow.
This button is not displayed if Option 56 is not fitted.

Lock to CCH Performs a Lock to Cell Control Channel on the channel number
indicated.

More... Switches back to the RF Tests Summary screen.

EXIT Returns to the Live Tests screen.

5-46 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

RF Tests - Parameters Screen

This screen is displayed when the Parameters option in one of the RF Tests Summary screens is
selected. It allows the user to select the test limits, and whether or not to print the measured values when
a test failure occurs. The screen is a standard parameter edit screen.

When a limit failure does occur the Test Set suspends measurements then automatically switches
through the summary screen and relevant graph screens for the current mode and performs a screen
dump for each screen. Optionally, the printing may be restricted to the Summary screen and the screen
for the parameter that is failing.

Parameter Value
Allowed list : On, Off
RF Tests - Parameters 19 JUN 1998 12:00:00
Cancel
All
All
Reset
EXIT
Edit
Parameter
Frequency Error Limit (+/-) 48.00
Power Tracking On
RMS Phase Error Limit 5.00
Peak Phase Error Limit
20.00
Power Profile Mask Checking Off
Mod Spectrum Mask Checking Off
Expected Power Level 0.0
Power Level Limit (+/-) +6.0
2.000
Class Ib Limit 0.400
FER Limit 0.100
Class II Limit
Default
48.00
On
5.00
20.00
Off
Off
0.0
+6.0
2.000
0.400
0.100
Hz
deg
deg
dBm
%
%
%
dB
Display Holding Off Off
More...
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.30 RF Tests - Parameters Screen

The following scrollable parameters are 'off the screen' (indicated by More at the bottom of the list):

Parameter Default Value
Print on Fail Off
Link Establish Level -40.0 (Simplex RF connection selected)
-47. 0 (Duplex RF connection selected)
-20.0 (B.O.S.S. Simplex RF connection selected)
-20.0 (B.O.S.S. Duplex RF connection selected)
In-Call Level -40.0 (Simplex RF connection selected)
-47. 0 (Duplex RF connection selected)
-20.0 (B.O.S.S. Simplex RF connection selected)
-20.0 (B.O.S.S. Duplex RF connection selected)
IMEI Number 12345612001000
Scan Start Channel Number 1 (E-GSM 900), 128 (GSM 850), 512 (DCS 1800 or PCS 1900)
Scan Stop Channel Number 124 (E-GSM 900), 251 (GSM 850), 885 (DCS 1800),
810 (PCS 1900)

Note: (1) FER Limit, Class Ib RBER Limit , Class II RBER Limit, and IMEI parameters are only
relevant when Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R is fitted.

(2) The significance of Print on Fail parameter values are as follows:
Off = If any test fails, nothing is printed.
All = If any test fails, all RF Tests screens are printed.
Failures = Only the screens of tests that failed are printed.
6113 EDGE 5-47
80-0013
Section 5

Scan / Channel Table (Scan In Progress) Screen

This screen displays the list of Channels found during a scan, and some values extracted from their
System Information messages if the channels are CCHs. The TCH channels shown are extracted from
the System Information messages rather than from the scan process.

Channel MCC LAC
23
Channel Table
Stop
Level (dBm) MNC
-41.4 234 Banjo 1442
64 234 -73.6 1ABC 427
CI BSIC
438
923
7,4
1,0
Type
CCH
CCH
121 -98.4 001
Test 0
0 0,5 CCH
12 TCH
13
TCH
14
TCH
65 TCH
69 TCH
73 TCH
77 TCH
Progress Channel 123
Display
Scan Range
Scan Range : 1 to 124
19 JUN 1998 12:00:00
CCH + TCH
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.31 Typical Scan / Channel Table (Scan In Progress) Screen

Menu Options


Display Toggles the display (and the legend) between Display CCH
Only and Display TCH + CCH. The default display is Display
CCH + TCH.

Scan Range Aborts the scan in progress and switches to the Scan
Parameters screen to allow the scan parameters to be edited.

Moves the table up one item.

Moves the table down one item.

Stop Stops the scan and displays the Scan / Channel Table (Scan
Complete) Screen.

Note: (1) The Progress box displays the channel numbers as each one is scanned for CCH
activity. If activity is detected then the channel number and relevant information
(including all TCHs from the Cell Allocation Table) are added to the table above.

(2) The arrow keys are only shown when there are too many items to fit on the screen.

(3) The default display mode is 'CCH + TCH'.

(4) If the network does not transmit System Information message type 1 (containing the
Cell Allocation Table) then the Test Set cannot display any lists of TCHs.
5-48 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Scan / Channel Table (Scan Complete) Screen

This screen is displayed when the scan completes or is halted. It displays the list of Channels found and
some values extracted from their System Information messages if the channels are CCHs. The TCH
channels shown are extracted from the System Information messages rather than from the scan process,
and there are no measurements. (Note that the TCH channels displayed are those set in the Cell
Allocation Table).

Channel MCC LAC
Channel Table
Cancel
Accept
Level (dBm) MNC
64 234
-73.6 1ABC 427
CI BSIC
923 1,0
Re-Scan
Type
CCH
121 -98.4 001 Test 0 0 0,5 CCH
12 TCH
13
TCH
14
TCH
65 TCH
69 TCH
73 TCH
77 TCH
Progress Idle
Display
CCH 23 -41.4 234 Banjo 1442 438 7,4
Scan Range
Scan Range : 15 to 121
19 JUN 1998 12:00:00
CCH + TCH
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.32 Typical Scan/ Channel Table (Scan Complete) Screen

Menu Options


Re-scan Triggers the start of the scanning process. This also clears the
contents of the table.

Display Toggles the display (and the legend) between Display CCH
Only and Display TCH + CCH. Default is Display CCH + TCH.

Scan Range Aborts the scan in progress and switches to the Scan
Parameters screen for editing the scan range parameters.

Accept Accepts the current selection and returns to previous screen.
The selected Channel becomes the current Channel in the
Channel No. button in the RF Tests Summary More screen.

Move the current selection up one item.

Move the current selection down one item.

Cancel Returns to the RF Tests - Summary screen. The current
Channel is unchanged.

6113 EDGE 5-49
80-0013
Section 5

Note: (1) When no scan is running the Progress box displays '"Idle".

(2) If a CCH is selected the Test Set synchronises to and starts monitoring that channel.
If a TCH is chosen the Test Set synchronises to the associated CCH then starts to
monitor the TCH.

(3) The arrow keys are always shown.

(4) The default display mode is 'CCH + TCH.

(5) If the network does not transmit System Information message type 1 (containing the
Cell Allocation Table) then the Test Set cannot display any lists of TCHs.

5-50 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Register (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R)

When the Test Set has been locked to a CCH (indicated by the message "Control Channel" in the Signal
status box) and a valid SIM is inserted, select the Register option to cause the 'mobile' (Test Set) to
register with the network. A PIN Entry screen is displayed for entering the PIN which the Test Set uses to
unlock the SIM. Enter the correct PIN number (3 tries are allowed) and press the Accept button.

If the PIN number is correct and the SIM is valid then the network is informed of the presence of the
'mobile' (Test Set), and a location update procedure is initiated; the progress of this procedure is displayed
on the Mobile Registration Progress screen.

When the location update has been successfully completed, a Registration Complete message is
displayed at the end of the list of progress messages to show that the Test Set is registered as a 'mobile'
on the network and ready to make calls. The display then changes to the RF Tests Summary
(Registered) screen; the Call Status box displays the message "Registered."

If the registration fails then the MMI indicates the reason for the failure and reverts to the RF Tests
Summary screen and transmitter measurements; the Call Status remains at "Not Registered".

Place Call (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R)

The Test Set can place mobile originated (MO) calls. The Test Set supports all variations of the call setup
procedure (early, late and very early assignment, etc).

A call can be placed from the RF Tests Summary (Unregistered) screen or the RF Tests Summary
(Registered) screen.

If the call is placed from the Unregistered screen then the Registration process is performed automatically
before setting up the call.

To place a call from the RF Tests Summary (Registered) screen, press the Place Call button to display
the Call Parameters screen and enter the Number to Dial and Test Pattern. Press the Accept button and
then press the Place Call button again. The Call Setup Progress screen is displayed together with a
series of progress messages until the Call Status / Setup Complete message box is displayed. Note that
the Place Call button then becomes Clear Call.

When the call is connected the Test Set transmits a defined data pattern to the BTS and tries to locate the
same pattern on the A-bis link; all A-bis channels are scanned. If the pattern is found then the BTS
receiver BER is measured and the measurements are displayed in the RBER graph at the top of the RF
Tests Summary (Registered) screen (it may take some time for the measurements to appear, depending
on how many A-bis channels are active). The RF Channel No and Slot No are displayed in the Call Status
box. (If no pattern is found then the RBER measurement boxes are left blank).

When a call is set up the Test Set automatically switches to measuring the TCH; the Phase Error,
Frequency, etc, measurements are for the Tx TCH.

If the call setup fails then the MMI indicates the reason for the call failure and the Test Set reverts to
transmitter measurements only. The Call State remains at "Registered" to allow successive call setup
attempts.

6113 EDGE 5-51
80-0013
Section 5

Clear Call (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R)

When a call is in progress the operator can select the Clear Call option. This causes the Test Set to
initiate the MO (mobile originated) call clearing procedure. The protocol progress is shown (on a separate
screen).

When the call has been cleared another channel can be selected and tested. Note that if no traffic is
present, then repeated operation of the Place Call / Clear Call button will automatically iterate through all
the air timeslots (a feature of most BTSs).

5-52 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Mobile Registration Progress Screen

This screen displays the progress of the 'mobile' (Test Set) registration process.

Mobile Registration 19 JUN 1998 12:00:00
Abort
Starting Camp On
Camp On Complete
Reading SIM
Location Update Request - IMSI ATTACH
Channel Request
Channel Request
Immediate Assignment Command
RR Connection Established
MM Connection Established
Reading SIM
Authenticated
SIM: Pin number required
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.33 Typical Mobile Registration Screen

Menu Options


Abort Aborts the 'mobile' (Test Set) registration procedure and returns
to the RF Tests Summary menu.

Note: (1) If the SIM is protected by a PIN, the operator is prompted to enter a number using
the PIN Entry screen.

(2) After successful registration, a Registration Complete message is displayed and
the RF Tests Summary screen is displayed.

If restration fails then the Abort option changes to EXIT and appropriate error
messages are displayed.

The list of progress messages is:

"Starting Camp On"
"Camp On complete"
"Reading SIM"
SIM: PIN number required
"Authenticated"
"Authentication error"
"RR connection established"
MM connection established
"Location updated"
"Location update rejected"
"Location update request"
"Location update request - IMSI ATTACH
6113 EDGE 5-53
80-0013
Section 5

"MM Identity request"
"MM Identity request - TMSI"
"MM Identity request - IMSI"
"MM Identity request - IMEI"
"MM Identity response"
"MM Identity response - TMSI"
"MM Identity response - IMSI"
"MM Identity response - IMEI"
"Ciphering started"
"Ciphering not commanded"
"Immediate assignment failure"
"Register Mobile"
"Registration complete"
"Registration failed"
"Detach IMSI"
"IMSI detached"

"SIM Information" )
"SIM blocked" )
"Please insert SIM" ) 'Pop-up' messages
"Please enter the PIN code:" )
"e.g. 01234567" )

"Assignment Command"
"Assignment Failure"
"Channel Request"
"Immediate Assignment Failure"

"Immediate assignment Command"
"Immediate assignment Extended Command"
"Immediate assignment Reject Command"
"Handover Command"

5-54 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

PIN Entry Screen

This screen is displayed automatically at registration or call setup if the Test Set detects that the SIM
being used is locked. The screen allows the operator to enter a PIN (using the numeric keypad) which the
Test Set will use to unlock the SIM. This is a standard password entry screen for 8 numeric characters.

If the entered PIN is not correct the operator is prompted to try again, and the number of retries remaining
(indicated on the screen) is updated. At the third incorrect attempt the operator is advised that the SIM is
blocked and call setup / registration is automatically aborted.

Mobile Registration 19 JUN 1998 12:00:00
Cancel
Accept
Starting Camp On
Camp On Complete
Reading SIM
SIM : PIN number
Please enter the PIN code:
Retries remaining : 3
********
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.34 PIN Entry Screen

Menu Options


Accept Accepts the entered PIN; this is used to unlock the SIM.

Cancel Cancels the PIN entry process. This consequently aborts the
call setup procedure and returns to the RF Tests Summary
screen.

6113 EDGE 5-55
80-0013
Section 5

RF Tests Summary Screen (Registered)

This screen is displayed when the mobile (Test Set) is successfully registered.

RF Tests - Summary
Power
Profile
EXIT
Phase
Error
Modulation
Spectrum
19 JUN 1998 12:00:00
More...
Detach
Printer
Place
Call
BER
Parameters
Peak Phase Error
40 0
16 -16 BTS Tx Power
BER Test Status
Hz -96.70
Deg 4.80
Deg 12.60
dBm 2.50
No call present
Signal Control Channel Call Status
Registered
CI 18325 LAC 43210 NCC 1 BCC 4
CCH Channel
90
Configure
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Off
Pass Phase Graph

Figure 5.35 RF Tests Summary Screen (Registered)

Menu Options







5-56 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Detach Detaches the Test Set from the network and returns to the RF
Tests Summary Screen (Not Registered).

Place Call Switches to the Call Setup screen to allow parameters relevant
to the call to be edited.

More... Switches to the RF Tests Summary More Screen (Registered).

EXIT Detaches the IMSI and returns to the Live Tests menu.

Note: The Signal box displays the measurement state with the following set of messages:

No BCCH The Test Set has lost the Cell Control Channel
Control Channel The Test Set is measuring on Timeslot zero of a CCH.

The measurement boxes remain empty when the signal box displays Synchronising or No Power or
other error conditions.

The Call Status box displays the GSM Layer 3 state with the message:

Registered The Test Set has performed the location update procedure, has
registered with the network and is monitoring the CCH and waiting
for the operator to place a call.

The BER Test Status box displays No call present and the RF Tests BER screen measurement fields
display dashes until a call is in place and the A-bis function has successfully located the traffic data stream
on the BTS' A-bis interface.

The BTS Tx Power range is Expected Power Level (Power Level Limit + 10dB).

6113 EDGE 5-57
80-0013
Section 5

RF Tests Summary More Screen (Registered)

RF Tests - Summary
Power
Profile
EXIT
Phase
Error
Modulation
Spectrum
19 JUN 1998 12:00:00
More...
Printer
Bandwidth
Narrow
BER
Parameters
Peak Phase Error
40 0
16 -16 BTS Tx Power
BER Test Status
Hz -96.70
Deg 4.80
Deg 12.60
dBm 2.50
No call present
Signal Control Channel Call Status
Registered
CI 18325 LAC 43210 NCC 1 BCC 4
CCH Channel
90
Configure
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Off
Pass Phase Graph

Figure 5.36 RF Tests Summary More Screen (Registered)

Menu Options







5-58 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

This button is not displayed if an Enhanced RF module (Option
56) is not fitted and selected.

More... Switches to the RF Tests Summary Screen (Registered).

EXIT Detaches the IMSI and returns to the Live Tests menu.

6113 EDGE 5-59
80-0013
Section 5

Call Setup Screen

This screen is displayed when the Place Call option is selected at the RF Tests Summary screen. It
allows the operator to enter the number to dial and the test pattern, and then proceed with placing a call.

Parameter
Value Default
Allowed list : N/A
Call Setup
19 JUN 1998 12:00:00
Cancel
All
All
Reset
EXIT
Place
Call
Edit
Parameter
Test Pattern 6 6
Number to Dial 01628123456
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.37 Typical Call Setup Screen

Menu Options


Cancel All Discards all changes made to the set of parameters displayed,
restoring the previous values, then returns to the previous
screen.

Reset All Sets all the displayed parameters to their default values.

Edit Parameter Switches to parameter edit mode.

Place Call Accepts the number to dial and starts the call set up process.
The display switches to the Call Setup Progress screen.

Moves the parameter selection up one item, accepting the
changes made to the previous parameter.

Moves the parameter selection down one item, accepting the
changes made to the previous parameter.

Cancel Rejects the entered number and returns to the RF Tests
Summary screen.

5-60 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Call Set Up Progress Screen

This screen displays the progress of the call set up procedure.

Call Setup 19 JUN 1998 12:00:00
Abort
Channel Request
RR connection established
MM connection established
CM service requested
Reading SIM
Authenticated
Cyphering started
Setup
Alerting
Connect
Connect acknowledge
Reading SIM
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.38 Typical Call Set Up Screen

Menu Options


Abort Aborts the call setup procedure and returns to the RF Tests
Summary menu.

Note: (1) There is a short delay (~ 2 seconds) after successful call set up for the operator to
read the 'Call accepted' or equivalent message before control returns to the RF
Tests Summary screen.

(2) The list of progress messages is:

"Starting Camp On"
"Camp On complete"
"Reading SIM"
"Authenticated"
"Authentication error"
"RR connection established"
"MM connection established"
"Location updated"
"Location update rejected"
"Location update request"
"Location update request - IMSI ATTACH"
"CM service rejected"
"CM service requested"
"CM service accepted"
6113 EDGE 5-61
80-0013
Section 5

"MM Identity request"
"MM Identity request - TMSI"
"MM Identity request - IMSI"
"MM Identity request - IMEI"
"MM Identity response"
"MM Identity response - TMSI"
"MM Identity response - IMSI"
"MM Identity response - IMEI"
"Ciphering started"
"Ciphering not commanded"
"Immediate assignment failure"
"Call dropped" (pop up message)
"TMSI reallocated"
"Set-up"
"Alerting"
"Call confirmed"
"Call proceeding"
"Connect"
"Connect acknowledge"
"Disconnect"
"Release"
"Release complete"
"CC Status enquiry"
"CC Status"
"Progress message unrecognised"

5-62 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

RF Tests Summary Screen (Call Present)

This screen is displayed when a call is successfully connected.

RF Tests - Summary
Power
Profile
Phase
Error
Modulation
Spectrum
19 JUN 1998 12:00:00
Printer
BER
Parameters EXIT
More...
Clear
Call
Measure
BTS Rx
Sensitivity
Peak Phase Error
40 0
16 -16 BTS Tx Power
Hz -96.70
Deg 4.80
Deg 12.60
dBm 2.50
Signal Traffic Channel Call Status Call Ch 62, TS 4
CI 18325 LAC 43210 NCC 1 BCC 4
CCH Channel
90
4 0 Rx Class II RBER
% 0.00
Re-Scan
A-bis
Configure
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Off
Pass Phase Graph

Figure 5.39 RF Tests Summary Screen (Call Present)

Menu Options


BER Switches to the BER results screen (similar to same in
Multimode).

Phase Error Switches to the Phase/Frequency Error results screen (similar

Power Profile Switches to the Power Profile results screen (similar to same in
Multimode).

Modulation Spectrum Switches to the Modulation Spectrum results screen (similar to
same in Multimode).


Parameters Displays a parameter edit screen for changing the RF Tests
parameters as required before running the test.

Clear Call Clears the call and returns the display to the RF Tests Summary
screen (Registered).
6113 EDGE 5-63
80-0013
Section 5

Re-Scan A-bis Re-starts scanning the A-bis for the transmitted data pattern in
order to start the BTS Receiver BER test.

Measure BTS Rx Switches to the Sensitivity Parameters edit screen from
Sensitivity where the test may be run.

More... Switches to the RF Tests Summary More (Call Present) screen.

EXIT Clears the call, detaches the IMSI and returns to the Live Tests
Menu.

Note: The Signal box displays the measurement state with the following set of messages:

Traffic Channel cn, TS ts The Test Set is measuring one of:
a traffic channel on a TCH
a traffic channel on a CCH carrier.
cn is the channel number or HOP for a hopping call,
ts is the timeslot.
No Power The Test Set cannot find any power on the specified
channel and Timeslot.
Invalid Measurement An error was encountered when performing the
measurement

The measurement boxes remain empty until a valid signal is measured.

The Status box displays the GSM Layer 3 state with the following set of messages:

Call Ch cn, TS ts The Test Set is in a call.
cn is the channel number or HOP for a hopping call, ts
is the timeslot.

When a call is first placed the Test Set attempts to locate the transmitted data pattern on the
A-bis link; the progress of the scan is displayed in the BER Test Status box. Once the data
pattern has been located there is a short delay while the first BER measurement is taken,
after which the BER Test Status box is replaced by the Rx Class II RBER bargraph. If the
data pattern is not found then the BER Test Status box remains on screen and contains the
reason for the BER test not being performed.

The list of messages displayed during the A-bis scan is:

No call present No call is present, so no scan is
attempted.
Scanning A-bis for test pattern The Test Set is scanning the A-bis link
searching for traffic channels.
Checking A-bis TSx, SSy for test pattern The Test Set is checking a traffic
channel on timeslot x and sub-slot y for
the test pattern transmitted to the BTS.
Test pattern found on A-bis TSx, SSy The Test Set has found the test pattern
on timeslot x and sub-slot y.
Test pattern not found on A-bis The Test Set was not able to locate the
test pattern on the A-bis.
A-bis Downlnk connected! Please use
Uplnk
The Test Set has detected that the A-bis
is connected to the wrong link.

The BTS Tx Power range is Expected Power Level (Power Level Limit + 10 dB)

5-64 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

RF Tests Summary More Screen (Call Present)

RF Tests - Summary
Power
Profile
Phase
Error
Modulation
Spectrum
19 JUN 1998 12:00:00
Printer
BER
Parameters EXIT
More...
Peak Phase Error
40 0
16 -16 BTS Tx Power
Hz -96.70
Deg 4.80
Deg 12.60
dBm 2.50
Signal Traffic Channel Call Status Call Ch 62, TS 4
CI 18325 LAC 43210 NCC 1 BCC 4
CCH Channel
90
4 0 Rx Class II RBER
% 0.00
-47.0
BTS Rx Lvl
6
Pattern
Wide
Bandwidth
Configure
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Off
Pass Phase Graph

Figure 5.40 Summary More Screen (Call Present)

Menu Options


BER Switches to the BER results screen (similar to same in
Multimode).

Phase Error Switches to the Phase/Frequency Error results screen (similar

Power Profile Switches to the Power Profile results screen (similar to same in
Multimode).

Modulation Spectrum Switches to the Modulation Spectrum results screen (similar to
same in Multimode).


Parameters Displays a parameter edit screen for changing the RF Tests
parameters as required before running the test.

BTS Rx Level Edits the level at which the Test Set is transmitting.

Pattern Edits the number of the data pattern (0 to 9, see Section 4 /
Introduction / Test Patterns) that the test set is transmitting.
6113 EDGE 5-65
80-0013
Section 5

This button is only displayed if the B.O.S.S. Enhanced RF
Module is fitted and selected.

More... Switches to the RF Tests Summary Screen (Call Present).

EXIT Clears the call, detaches the IMSI and returns to the Live Tests
Menu.

5-66 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Measure BTS Rx Sensitivity (Option 310 or Option 54 / 54R)

The Test Set performs automatic sensitivity measurements by systematically reducing the Test Set
transmit power and monitoring the RBER measured on the A-bis until the RBER degrades beyond a pre-
determined threshold.

This absolute sensitivity test is similar to the A-bis Controlled version of the test but with a restricted set of
parameters (see Section 4) which specify only the measurement parameters.

The sequence of operations for measuring the BTS absolute sensitivity is as follows:

(1) Select the Measure BTS Rx Sensitivity button from one of the RF Tests Summary screens when a
call is in progress.

(2) The Test Set displays the list of parameters using the standard parameter edit screen so that they
can be modified as necessary.

(3) Select the Run Test button to initiate the test procedure.

(4) The Test Set runs the absolute sensitivity algorithm to determine the BTS sensitivity. Progress
messages are reported as in the normal mode of operation, and a single result with a Pass/Fail
decision is presented at the completion of the test.

BTS Rx Sensitivity Screen

This screen is displayed when the Measure BTS RX Sensitivity option is selected at one of the RF Tests
Summary screens. It is a standard Parameter Edit screen, and the Run Test button starts the test and
displays the test progress screen.

Test : Sensitivity
Cancel
All
All
Reset
EXIT
Run
Parameter
Value Default
Allowed list : -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
0.200 FER Limit 0.200 %
0.400
Class Ib Limit 0.400 %
2.000 Class II Limit 2.000 %
Test Pattern 6 6
Sample Time 10 10 s
-104.0 dBm
Final Step Size 0.5 dB
Initial Level -80.0 dBm
Pass/Fail Threshold -104.0
0.5
-80.0
Test
Edit
Parameter
19 JUN 1998 12:00:00
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.41 BTS Rx Sensitivity Screen

6113 EDGE 5-67
80-0013
Section 5

A-bis Protocol Analysis Menu

This section describes how to monitor an A-bis link between a BSC and a BTS, and how to monitor and
log the messages detected.

Initial Set Up

BTS Information Menu

Before monitoring can be performed, certain parameters must be initialised. Select the BTS Information
option from the Main Menu and enter the following parameters:

(1) Select / enter the correct information in the Radio System, BTS Manufacturer, BTS Model, and BTS
Software options.

(2) The Mapping Table option can remain set at default values.

(3) Set the Interface option to 'A-bis Bal' (balanced) or 'A-bis Unbal' (unbalanced) as required to match
the physical A-bis connections in use.

Self Tests / System Menu

Select the I/O Port Allocation option and use the Printer option to select and configure the printer port, or
select FILE and set the filename.

Live Tests Menu

Select the A-bis Protocol Analysis option and define the following parameters:

(1) Toggle the (A-bis) Connector 1 option button to the required allocation (i.e. Uplink or Downlink).
Note that A-bis Connector 2 is automatically set to the opposite allocation.

(2) Use the Configure Channels option to define up to 4 Signalling channels and 1 Traffic channel.
Enable/disable logging and measurement reports as required, and set the channel direction, data
rate, Sub Slot, SAPI and TEI.

(3) Use the Configure Logging option to select and configure a logging port, or select FILE and name
the log file.

When the above information has been entered, a parameter file can be created in the normal manner to
save the settings.

If a suitable parameter file is available it can be loaded and all the above steps omitted.

Starting A-bis Protocol Analysis Mode

When all the initial setup conditions have been defined as above, press the Start Monitor button on the A-
bis Protocol Analysis screen to begin logging data. Press the Stop Monitor button to stop logging data.

Either before or during logging, the Display Data / Logging Status button can be used to toggle the display
between the logging status for the channels and the actual real time display of data being logged.

5-68 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Replaying a Log File

If the Printer port has not been configured (as described earlier in Initial Setup / Self Tests/System Menu),
then it will be necessary to disconnect the A-bis and then exit Live Tests mode. From the Self Tests /
System Menu select the I/O Port Allocation option and configure the printer port, and for FILE set the
filename.

(All the other important parameter data is stored together with the log file data and used at replay time to
manage the data display).

Then from the Main Menu select Live Tests and then A-bis Protocol Analysis.

To replay log files the following steps are necessary:

A-bis Protocol Analysis Screen

From the A-bis Protocol Analysis screen, select the Replay Log option and then use the Select Log option
to select a log file for replay. The log file is automatically opened and the stored channel header data
displayed for the user to view.

Replay Log Screen

(1) From the Replay Log screen, use the Select Chans / Mode option to select which channels are to
be viewed and to select a particular view mode.

(2) Use the Define Search Key option to define a Search key, which will move to a particular message
in the log file.

Select a channel and SAPI.

Select a Layer 3 message.

(3) Use the Start Search button to move to a specific message, and then the Find Next button to move
to the next occurance.

(4) Use the Restart Log File button to move back to the start of the log file. The channel header data
will be displayed again.

(5) Use the Auto Scroll opton to start automatic view of the log file

or

Use the Arrow buttons to move up or down through the log file.

6113 EDGE 5-69
80-0013
Section 5

A-bis Protocol Analysis Screen

This screen is displayed when A-bis Protocol Analysis option is selected at the Live Tests screen.

On entry to the A-bis Protocol Analysis mode the information window shows logging status information.

A-bis Protocol Analysis (Logging Status)
EXIT
19 JUN 1998 12:34:56
Start
Monitor
Replay Log
Configure
Channels
Display
Channel Status Frames Received
Sig1 Logging 123
Sig3 Enabled 0
Traffic Logging 1234
Logging Status
Sig3 Enabled 0
Sig4 Enabled 0
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Logging
FILE
Edit Name
ABISPRO1
Status
Connector 1
Uplink
Stop Monitor
ABISPRO1

Figure 5.42 A-bis Monitor Mode Screen (Logging Status)

Menu Options


Configure Channels This button displays the Configure Channels screen which
allows the operator to define all the required signalling and
traffic channels.

Logging This button toggles between FILE and OFF.

Connector 1 This button toggles between Uplink and Downlink. Note that
Connector 2 is automatically set to the opposite status.

Replay Log This button displays the Replay Log screen which allows the
operator to select a log file for replay and to define the viewing
conditions. This button is greyed out when the system is
logging.

Display The legend in the box toggles between Data to display the real
time logging display, and Status to display logging status
information.

Start Monitor This button starts the process of logging channel data. At this
time the log file on the memory card will be opened if the
operator has chosen that as the destination. This button is
greyed out when monitoring is in progress.

5-70 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Stop Monitor This button stops the logging of channel data. At this point the
log file on the memory card will be closed if it is the selected
destination. The button does not appear until logging is in
progress.

EXIT Exits A-bis Protocol Analysis mode and returns to Live Tests
screen.

Note: (1) When the Logging Status window is selected, the Frames Received count will
increment as each frame is received on a channel.

(2) When the real time data window is selected, a scrolling view of the Layer 3
messages is displayed.

Example of Real Time Data Window

This screen is displayed when Display Data option is selected at the A-bis Protocol Analysis screen. A
typical real time data display is illustrated in the following diagram.

A-bis Protocol Analysis (Display Data) 19 JUN 1998 12:34:56
Sig1 SAPI=62 TEI=0 BANJO FILE STATUS REQUEST
Configure
Channels
Logging
Downlink
EXIT
Start
Monitor
Replay Log
Display
Sig2 SAPI=62 TEI=0 BANJO FILE STATUS ACK
Sig1 SAPI=62 TEI=0 BANJO RESET COMMAND
Sig1 SAPI=62 TEI=0 BANJO START COMMAND
Sig1 SAPI=62 TEI=0 BANJO DIST REPORT CTRL
Sig1 SAPI=62 TEI=0 BANJO FILE STATUS REQUEST
Sig2 SAPI=62 TEI=0 BANJO FILE STATUS ACK
Sig1 SAPI=62 TEI=0 BANJO DEFINE TRX TEI
Sig1 SAPI=62 TEI=1 BANJO ACTIVATE REQUEST
Sig2 SAPI=62 TEI=1 BANJO ACTIVATE ACK
Sig1 SAPI=62 TEI=1 BANJO CHANGEOVER COMMAND
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
ABISPRO1
FILE Status
Stop Monitor
ABISPRO1

Figure 5.43 Typical A-bis Protocol Analysis (Data Display) Screen

Note: The heading 'Data Display' remains on the screen with the message data scrolling beneath.

6113 EDGE 5-71
80-0013
Section 5

Configure Channels Screen

This screen is displayed when Configure Channels option is selected at the A-bis Protocol Analysis
screen. It allows the operator to configure up to 4 Signalling channels and 1 Traffic channel.

Select Channels/Mode
EXIT
Changes
Abandon 19 JUN 1998 12:34:56
Channel Sub Slot SAPI TEI Direction Enabled
Sig 1
Traffic
Measurement Reports Logged
Sig 2
Sig 3
Sig 4
Up Link Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
31 64K
15
0
62
1
0
1
2
Type
64K
64K
16K
16K
-
-
-
3
4
No
1
ALL
62
ALL
0
Range : 64 k, 32 k, 16 k
Slot
Dn Link
Dn Link
Up Link
Up Link
Reset to
Defaults
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.44 Configure Channels Screen

Menu Options




Moves the current parameter selection to the right one item,

Moves the current parameter selection to the left one item,

Abandon Changes Discards all the changes made to the set of parameters
displayed and restores the previous values.



Reset to Defaults Sets all the parameters displayed to their default values.

displayed and returns to the previous menu.

Note: (1) The range for the currently selected parameter is displayed at the bottom of the table.

(2) Measurement Reports are logged from all four Signalling channels, if enabled.

(3) If 'NO' is selected in the Enabled column, the channel and settings are ignored.
5-72 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Define Log File Screen

This screen is displayed if the operator has selected FILE at the Logging option in the A-bis Protocol
Analysis screen and then selects the Edit Name option. It allows a file name and a destination drive and
directory to be specified. In addition a brief description can be included which will form part of the log file.

A-bis Protocol Analysis
Cancel
19 JUN 1998 12:34:56 Memory Card
Accept
B:
List
Files
List
Directories
Enter Log File to Write
File Name
Directory
ABISPRO1 LOG
B:\
Description
Edit
Filename
Edit
Description
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.45 Define Log File Screen

Menu Options



Accept Accepts the entries made by the operator and returns to the
previous menu.

Edit Filename This button displays the standard text editor screen allowing the
operator to enter the log filename.

List Files This button displays a drop down list of all the files with the
extension .LOG in the currently selected directory, allowing the
operator to select a log file for use.

List Directories This button displays a drop down list of all the directories one
level above and below the current directory level, allowing the
operator to move to another directory.

Edit Description Displays a text editor screen allowing the operator to enter a
brief description which will be stored with the logging data.

Cancel Cancels all operator entries, restores the previous values and
6113 EDGE 5-73
80-0013
Section 5

Replay Log Screen

This screen is displayed if Replay Log option is selected at the A-bis Protocol Analysis screen. It provides
facilities for selecting log files to be replayed and printed.

A-bis Protocol Analysis : Replay Log
EXIT
19 JUN 1998 12:34:56 Select
Chans / Mode
Print Frames
Print Page
Define
Search Key
Restart
Log File
Start
Search
Scroll
Auto
40
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Select Log
ABISPRO1

Figure 5.46 Replay Log Screen

Menu Options


Select Chans / Mode Displays a screen which allows channels and display mode to
be selected. The default setting is for all channels and only
Layer 2 data to be displayed.

Define Search Key Displays a screen which allows a channel, SAPI, and Layer 3
message to be selected for the search process.

Start Search This button is greyed out until a search key has been defined.
The system will search forward only and from the current log file
position. The Restart Log File button can be used to restart
searching from the beginning of the log file. Once a search has
been completed the annotation on this button changes to Find
Next.

Restart Log File This button allows the display to return to the start of the Log
file.

Auto Scroll This button starts an automatic scroll process that scrolls the
data up the display. When the log file is scrolling this button is
relabelled Pause. Pressing the Pause button stops the scrolling
and returns to the Page Up / Down view. The button is then
relabelled as Scroll.

Select Log This button displays a File Select screen for selecting a specific
log file to replay.
5-74 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Print Frames This button sends the defined number of frames to the current
printer destination. To change the number of frames, press the
button once and then use the numeric keypad to enter the
required number, and then press the button again to send the
frames for printing.

Displays the previous message of the log file. The button
supports auto repeat operation.

Displays the next message in the log file. The button supports
auto repeat operation.

Print Page This button sends the currently displayed page contents to the
current printer destination.

EXIT Exits the Replay Logs Mode and returns to the previous menu.

Typical Log File Header Display

Okay
19 JUN 1998 12:34:56
11:31:46.000 Sig1 Downlink {Conf_ACTION_Ini}
frame type = I_COMMAND TEI = 0 SAPI = 62 cr = 1 pf 0 ns 56 nr 35
FA 01 70 46 80 80 00 0A 0B 00 80 1E 00 00 FF 02 01 01
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Log File Header
Date :
Time :
BTS Manufacturer :
BTS Model :
BTS Software Ver :
22 JUN 1998
14:53:25
BANJO
GX 2.0
F# 5.3

Figure 5.47 Typical Log File Header Display

The screen above shows typical information recorded at the start of the log file and displayed
when the log file is first opened. Pressing Okay returns the display to the Replay Log screen with
the log file ready for scrolling.

6113 EDGE 5-75
80-0013
Section 5

Typical Log File Scroll Display

EXIT
19 JUN 1998 12:34:56 Select
Chans / Mode
Print Frames
Print Page
Define
Search Key
Restart
Log File
Start
Search
Pause
40
11:31:46.000 Sig1 Downlink {Conf_ACTION_Ini}
frame type = I_COMMAND TEI = 0 SAPI = 62 cr = 1 pf 0 ns 56 nr 35
FA 01 70 46 80 80 00 0A 0B 00 80 1E 00 00 FF 02 01 01
11:31:46.004 Sig2 Uplink
frame type = RR TEI = 0 SAPI = 62 cr = 1 pf 0 nr 57
FA 01 01 72
11:31:46.185 Sig2 Uplink
F8 01 01 73
11:31:46.189 Sig1 Downlink
F8 01 01 47
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Select Log
ABISPRO1

Figure 5.48 Typical Log File Scroll Display

The diagram above illustrates the scroll display and the Layer 2 / Layer 3 message formatting. Note that
the highlight moves downwards as the display scrolls upwards, or as dictated by the up/down arrow
buttons (after the scroll has been stopped with the Pause button).

Note: (1) The data in this screen represents typical frames.

(2) The number of messages displayed varies according to the size of frames.

(3) The Arrow buttons allow the operator to move the display a 'message' at a time either up or
down.

5-76 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Select Channels / Mode Screen

This screen is displayed when Select Chans / Mode option is selected at the Log File Scroll Display
screen It allows the operator to select the channels to be displayed and the display format. Data
contained in the log file determines which channels are present and available for selection. On entry to
this screen the available channels are displayed.

Select Channels / Mode 19 JUN 1998 12:34:56
Select
Display
Measurement Reports Displayed
Channel
Sig 1
Traffic
Sig 2
Sig 3
Sig 4
64K
Type
64K
64K
16K
16K
Sub Slot
-
-
-
3
1
SAPI
0
62
ALL
62
TEI
0
1
ALL
1
31
15
1
2
4
Slot Direction
UL
UL
UL
DL
DL
Format
Display Format Layer 2 + 3
EXIT
Cancel
All
Reset
All
Display
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
- -

Figure 5.49 Select Channels / Mode Screen

Menu Options


Select Display This button displays a drop down list from which the operator
Format can select the required display format.

Cancel All Discards all the changes made displayed and restores the
previous values.

Reset All Sets all the selections their default values.

Increments the value of the currently selected item.

Moves the current selection up one item, accepting any
changes made to previous item.

Moves the current selection down one item, accepting any
changes made to previous item.

0 Decrements the value of the currently selected item.

EXIT Accepts all the changes made to the items displayed and

6113 EDGE 5-77
80-0013
Section 5

Note: (1) The default states for this screen are:

-- All available channels displayed.
-- Only Layer 2 messages displayed.

(2) If no Measurement Reports have been logged the operator cannot modify the
display status for that field.

5-78 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Define Search Key Screen

This screen is displayed when Define Search Key option is selected at the Replay Log screen. It allows
the search key to be defined as a Layer 3 message together with a logical channel and SAPI.

Replay Log : Define Search Key 19 JUN 1998 12:34:56
Select
Channel
Channel
Select
Message 0x01 (08.58) DATA REQuest
EXIT
Channel Sub Slot SAPI TEI Direction
Sig 1 Downlink 31 64K ALL ALL
Type
-
Slot
Select
SAPI
SAPI ALL
Message
Edit
Message
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.50 Define Search Key Screen

Menu Options

Select Channel This button displays a drop down list from which the operator
may select a channel. The list of channels depends on the
channel selection defined in the Select Channels / Mode screen.
Only those channels marked for display are included in the list.

Select SAPI This button displays a drop down list from which the operator
may select a SAPI. The list of SAPI values displayed comprises
all the possible values. This button is not available if the SAPI in
the channel specified is already defined. This screen is only
reached if the SAPI value defined in the channel configuration is
ALL, specifying all SAPIs to be logged.

Select Message This button displays a drop down list of messages from which
the operator may select a message. The list of messages
depends on the current channel selected.

Edit Message This button displays a screen which can be used with the
numeric keypad to enter the Hex number of an 08.58 message
to be used.

EXIT Cancels all operator entries, restores the previous values and

6113 EDGE 5-79
80-0013
Section 5

Select Log File Screen

This screen is displayed when the Select Log option is selected in the Replay Log screen. It allows the
operator to select a particular log file for replaying. A memory card must be available in one of the slots.
The operator is warned if there is no memory card present in either slot.

If a log file has been created as part of the A-bis Protocol Analysis session it will be available as the
default log file. If no log file had been created in the current session and a log file is not selected, then the
default log filename will be ABISPRO1.LOG.

Following selection, the log file will be opened and the first page of data displayed. The data displayed will
be governed by the current settings for the filters.

A-bis Protocol Analysis : Select Log File
Cancel
19 JUN 1998 12:34:56 Memory Card
Accept
B:
List
Files
List
Directories
Select Log File to Read
File Name
Directory
LOG
B:\
Description
ABISPRO1
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.51 Select Log File Screen

Menu Options


Accept Accepts the entries made by the operator and returns to the
previous menu.

List Files This button displays a drop down list of all files with the
extension .LOG in the currently selected directory, allowing the
operator to select a log file for use.

List Directories This button displays a drop down list of all the directories one
level above and one level below the current directory level,
allowing the operator to select another directory.

Cancel Cancels all operator entries, restores the previous values and

5-80 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MENU

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / SPECIAL FUNCTIONS)

This menu screen is displayed when the Special Functions option is selected at the Main Menu.

Special Functions
EXIT
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
Signal
Generator
Power Meter
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Signal
Generator &
Power Meter

Figure 5.52 Special Functions Screen

Menu Options


Signal Generator Displays the Signal Generator Mode screen for
controlling Signal Generator mode. Use this for
generating structured GSM signals and other signals
as required. No signal monitoring facilities are
provided in this mode.

Power Meter Displays the Power Meter screen for controlling
Power Meter mode. Use this for monitoring the
downlink power from a BTS.

Signal Generator & Power
Meter
Displays the Signal Generator and Power Meter test
screen. This screen allows the Signal Generator
mode and Power Meter mode to operate
simultaneously, using a common ARFCN.

EXIT Operating this button returns the display to the Main
Menu.

6113 EDGE 5-81
80-0013
Section 5

Signal Generator Menu

Signal Generator mode allows the 6113 to act as a signal generator instrument that can transmit a variety
of GSM structured signals and other signals from the RF OUT connector on the front panel (refer to
Section 3 Preparation for Use for connections). The signals can be changed while the signal generator is
running. There are no special setting up procedures other than those required by the user.

Additional information is given in Section 4 under the heading SPECIAL FUNCTIONS / Signal Generator
Mode.

From the Main Menu, select Special Functions / Signal Generator. The following screen is displayed.

Set up the signal parameters as required and then press Run Test to start the signal. Another screen is
then displayed to change the same parameters while the signal generator is running.

19 JUN 1998 12:42:48
Cancel
All
Test
Run
All
Reset
EXIT
Test : Signal Generator
Parameter
Edit
Parameter Value
90
Default
Output Level
0
Signal Format Off
-40.0
Frequency Offset
Range : 0 to 124, 975 to 1023
Pulsing Off
Training Sequence 0
dBm
90
0
-40.0
Off
Off
0
Channel Number
Hz
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.53 Signal Generator Screen

Menu Options


Edit Parameter Pressing this button allows the selected parameter to be edited
using the spinwheel. The button legend changes to Accept and
pressing this accepts the entered value (if it is within the allowed
range).



Run Test Accepts all the changes made to the set of parameters
starts the signal generator. The display then changes to the
Summary screens which can be used to change the signal
parameters while the signal generator is running.
5-82 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Increments the value of the currently selected parameter.



0 Decrements the value of the currently selected parameter.

displayed and then returns to the Special Functions Menu.

Note: (1) The screen always starts with the spinwheel in 'Parameter Select' mode.

the table.

(3) The spinwheel may be used to scroll up and down the parameter list.

(4) In this screen, the +/- softkeys cannot edit the value of the selected parameter
beyond the maximum or minimum values.

(5) With a numeric or toggle parameter selected, pressing numeric keys on the
keyboard selects the Numeric Parameter Edit screen. (Note that in this screen,
only the numeric keys can be used to change the value of the parameter).

6113 EDGE 5-83
80-0013
Section 5

Power Meter Menu

From the Main Menu, select Special Functions / Power Meter. The following screen is displayed.

In this mode the Test Set can operate as an independent power meter instrument. It can be used to scan
a selected downlink frequency band (GSM 850, GSM 900, DCS 1800 or PCS 1900) to find the signal with
maximum power, or it can monitor a single frequency within a selected band.

Additional information is given in Section 4 under the heading SPECIAL FUNCTIONS / Power Meter.

Note: In the BTS Information Menu, set the required radio system (only) of the BTS of interest. This will
determine the scan frequency range.

Power Meter
EXIT
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44 Scan Type
MAX POWER
Re-Scan
ARFCN
90
BTS Tx Power 0 50 dBm
Nearest ARFCN
Signal FOUND
90
-7.42
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.54 Power Meter Screen

Menu Options


Scan Type Toggles between MAX POWER and NO SCAN. MAX POWER
will search the selected radio band (GSM 850, GSM 900, DCS
1800 or PCS 1900 as selected in the BTS Information Menu) for
the maximum power signal. NO SCAN will monitor the channel
set in the ARFCN button. In each case the the nearest ARFCN
number and the monitored power are displayed on the screen.

Re-Scan Restarts the scan process. This should always be used after
setting the Scan Type option.

ARFCN If a known channel is to be monitored, set the number in this
button and then select NO SCAN at the Scan Type button.

EXIT Operating this button returns the display to the Special
Functions screen.
5-84 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Signal Generator and Power Meter Menu

From the Main Menu, select Special Functions / Signal Generator & Power Meter. The following screen is
displayed.

In this mode, Signal Generator Mode and Power Meter mode can both operate at the same time. This
screen allows some parameters for both the Signal Generator mode and Power Meter mode to be set up.

Set the parameters as required and then press Run Test; another combined screen for configuring and
monitoring both modes is then displayed as shown in Figure 5.56 Signal Generator and Power Meter
Combined Screen. Refer to the menu descriptions of both Signal Generator Menu and Power Meter
Menu for a description of how to use the two modes.

15 NOV 2001 12:42:48
Cancel
All
Test
Run
All
Reset
EXIT
Test : Power Meter and Signal Generator
Parameter
Edit
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Parameter Default
Output Level
Signal Format
Frequency Offset
Range : 0 to 124, 975 to 1023
Pulsing
Training Sequence
Value
90
0
Off
-40.0
Off
0
dBm
90
0
-40.0
Off
Off
0
Channel Number
Hz
Scan Type MAX POWER MAX POWER

Figure 5.55 Signal Generator and Power Meter Screen

Menu Options


Edit Parameter Pressing this button allows the selected parameter to be edited
using the spinwheel. The button legend changes to Accept and
pressing this accepts the entered value (if it is within the allowed
range).



starts the signal generator. The display then changes to the
Summary screens which can be used to change the signal
parameters while the signal generator is running.

6113 EDGE 5-85
80-0013
Section 5




displayed and then returns to the Special Functions Menu.


the table.



(5) With a numeric or toggle parameter selected, pressing numeric keys on the
keyboard selects the Numeric Parameter Edit screen. (Note that in this screen,
only the numeric keys can be used to change the value of the parameter).

5-86 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Signal Generator and Power Meter Combined Screen

Power Meter
EXIT
MAX POWER
Scan Type 19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
Re-Scan
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
ARFCN
90
Signal Generator
Freq Offset
0 Hz
Pulsing
OFF
Output Level
-40.0 dB
Signal Format
OFF
Training Seq
0
BTS TX Power 0 50 dBm
Signal SEARCHING Nearest ARFCN
Frequency
908.000000 MHz

Figure 5.56 Signal Generator and Power Meter Combined Screen

Menu Options

Scan Type Toggles between MAX POWER and NO SCAN. MAX POWER
will search the selected radio band (GSM 850, GSM 900, DCS
1800 or PCS 1900 as selected in the BTS Information Menu) for
the maximum power signal. NO SCAN will monitor the channel
set in the ARFCN button. In each case the the nearest ARFCN
number and the monitored power are displayed on the screen.

ARFCN If a known channel is to be monitored, set the number in this
button and then select NO SCAN at the Scan Type button.

Freq Offset This button allows an offset in the range -999999 to 999999 to
be applied to the transmitted signal.

Pulsing This button allows pulsing of the transmitted signal to be
switched On or Off.

Re-Scan Restarts the scan process. This should always be used after
setting the Scan Type option.

Output Level This button allows the level of the output signal to be set in the
range -120.0 to -40.0 dBm.

Training Seq This button allows one of the 8 GSM-defined training sequences
to be selected for use when Training Sequence is selected as
the output signal format by the Signal Format button.

Signal Format This button selects one of the available signal formats. (See
Section 4 / SPECIAL FUNCTIONS / Signal Generator Mode).

EXIT Operating this button returns the display to the Special
Functions screen.
6113 EDGE 5-87
80-0013
Section 5

A-BIS CONTROLLED TESTS MENU

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / LIST OF TESTS)

CAUTION: If the Test Set has previously been used for Live Tests the A-bis connections will
be at high impedance, and the following warning will be displayed. Ensure that the
6113 is disconnected from the operational BTS before continuing, otherwise the
operational link may be disrupted.

WARNING
A-bis connectors to revert to low impedance
Where connection is to a live system

The Select Test screen is displayed when A-bis Controlled Tests option is selected at the Main Menu.
The screen is used to select a particular test. First select Functional Tests, Transmitter Tests, Receiver
Tests or Multimode.

If Multimode is selected, then refer to the heading MULTIMODE MENU later in this Section for a separate
description of Multimode facilities.

If Functional Tests, Transmitter Tests or Receiver Tests is selected then use the up/down arrows or the
spinwheel to select a test from the scrolling list presented. The diagram overleaf illustrates the Receiver
Tests menu, and the RACH Test being selected from it.

Measurement Mode and Measurement Mode Override

Within the A-bis Controlled Tests section of the MMI, a button is available on the left side of the MMI to
display/select the Measurement Mode of the test set (see Measurement Mode).

If the button is pressed a new measurement mode can be selected from the list adjacent to the
Measurement Mode button. If a mode is greyed out then the required option has not been purchased and
is therefore not available. The selected mode is displayed in a window on the Measurement Mode button.

When the test set is switched on it will return to the Measurement Mode previously selected. Depending
on the mode selected some tests are not available or change their title i.e. BER to BLER and RACH to
PRACH, see Functional Tests Available.

Whenever Run Test or Edit Parameters is selected, the Measurement Mode Override parameter for
the test selected is initialised to the current Measurement Mode but, as the name suggests, this
parameter can be used to vary on a temporary basis the measurement mode of that test.

5-88 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Select Test Screen

Functional
Tests
EXIT
Tests
Tests
Transmitter
Receiver
Run
Test
GSM
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
Multimode
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Receiver BER
Absolute Sensitivity
Access Burst
Rx Level
Rx Quality
Receiver Signalling BER
Measurement
Mode
Edit
Parameters

Figure 5.57 Select Test Screen

Menu Options


Edit Parameters Accepts the current test selection and switches to the Test
Parameter Edit Screen.

Measurement Mode Access the Measurement Mode selection screen.

Move the current selection up one item.

Move the current selection down one item.

Run Test Accepts the current test selection and runs the test without
displaying the Test Parameter Edit screen.

Functional Tests Displays a scrolling list of Functional Tests.

Transmitter Tests Displays a scrolling list of Transmitter Tests.

Receiver Tests Displays a scrolling list of Receiver Tests.

Multimode Displays the Multimode screen (refer to the heading
MULTIMODE MENU later in this Section).

EXIT Returns to the Main Menu.

6113 EDGE 5-89
80-0013
Section 5

Measurement Mode Selection Screen

This screen shows what would be displayed after the Measurement Mode button is selected. In this case
the GPRS or EDGE options are not available and they are both greyed.

Functional
Tests
EXIT
Tests
Tests
Transmitter
Receiver
Run
Test Parameters
Edit 19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
Multimode
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Receiver BER
Access Burst
Rx Level
Rx Quality
Measurement
Mode
GSM
GSM
GPRS
EDGE

Figure 5.58 Measurement Mode Selection Screen

5-90 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Functional Tests Available

Test Results Information
Configure BTS Pass / Fail
Reset BTS Pass / Fail
CiTA Pass / Fail

Transmitter Tests Available (GSM)

Cell Control Channel Generation Pass / Fail
Transmitter Test Pass / Fail
Phase Error, graph
Frequency Error
BTS Power
Power Profile, graph
Modulation Spectrum, graph
Transmitter BER Pass/Fail, Samples/Events/Ratio for FER, Class lb and Class ll
Static Power Control Pass/Fail
Expected Power, Measured Power, Step Error, Cumulative Error
Downlink Power Control Pass/Fail

Receiver Tests Available (GSM)

Receiver BER Pass/Fail, Samples/Events/Ratio for FER, Class lb and Class II
Absolute Sensitivity Sensitivity threshold
Access Burst Successful/failed RACHs, reasons
Rx Level Pass/Fail, expected Rx level,
nominal/minimum/maximum/mean Rx levels
Rx Quality Test Complete/Fail, expected/minimum/maximum Rx levels, Rx
Quality values, Class ll BER
Receiver Signalling BER Test Complete/Fail; FER Samples, Events and Ratio

Note: Additional manufacturer-specific tests are available for certain BTS types. See Section 7
Manufacturer-Specific Information.

Multimode Tests Available (GSM)

Multimode Pass/Fail, Samples/Events/Ratio for FER, Class lb and Class II.
Phase Error (graph), Frequency Error, BTS Power, Power Profile
(graph), and Modulation Spectrum (graph).
Refer to the heading MULTIMODE MENU later in this Section.
6113 EDGE 5-91
80-0013
Section 5

Receiver Tests Available (GPRS)

Receiver BLER Pass/Fail, Samples/Events/Ratio for BLER
Access Burst Successful/failed PRACHs, reasons

Note: Transmitter Tests GPRS and Multimode Tests GPRS/EDGE are not applicable.

Transmitter Tests Available (EDGE)

Cell Control Channel Generation Pass / Fail
Transmitter Test Pass / Fail
EVM
BTS Power
Power Profile, graph
Modulation Spectrum, graph
Transmitter BLER Pass/Fail, Samples/Events/Ratio for BLER

Receiver Tests Available (EDGE)

Receiver BLER Pass/Fail, Samples/Events/Ratio for BLER
Access Burst Successful/failed PRACHs, reasons

5-92 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Test Parameter Select Screen

The Test Parameter Select screen is displayed when the Edit Parameter button on the Test Select screen
is pressed. Note that the name of the test is displayed at the top of the screen.

From this screen the selected test can be run, with the parameters as set, by pressing the Run Test
button.

To change the parameters before running the test, use the up/down arrows or the spinwheel to select a
parameter and then press the Edit Parameter button; the Parameter Edit screen is then displayed.

19 JUN 1998 12:42:48
Cancel
All
Test
Run
All
Reset
EXIT
Test : Access Burst
Parameter
Edit
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Parameter
Channel Number
BTS Rx Signal Level
Number of RACHs
RACH Type
BTS Tx Level
Allowed List : 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, Max
RACH Delay Start
Timing Error (+/-) 3
bits RACH Delay Stop
Value
90
Default
Max
200
Circuit Switch
-104.0
0
dBm
90
Max
-104.0
200
Circuit Switch
0 bits
63 63 bits
Spurious RACH Test Length
3 bits
3 3 mins
FER Limit 0.5 0.5 %
Measurement Mode Override GSM
GSM

Figure 5.59 Test Parameter Select Screen

Menu Options


Edit Parameter For toggle or numeric parameters this button displays the
Parameter Edit screen; for text parameters it displays a text edit
screen for editing the parameter type (described under FILE
MANAGER MENU).



displayed and sets up the new values in the Test Set, then runs
the test.

Increments the value of the currently selected parameter, or for
text parameters it displays a text edit screen for editing the
parameter type (described under FILE MANAGER MENU).
6113 EDGE 5-93
80-0013
Section 5



0 Decrements the value of the currently selected parameter, or for
text parameters it displays a text edit screen for editing the
parameter type (described under FILE MANAGER MENU).

displayed and then returns to the Single Tests Menu.


the table.


(4) Pressing numeric keys on the keyboard selects:

-- Numeric Parameter Edit screen with a numeric or toggle parameter selected.

(Note that in this screen, only the numeric keys can then be used to change the
value of the parameter).


5-94 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Parameter Edit Screen

This screen is displayed when the Edit Parameter button in the Test Parameter Select screen is pressed.
Use the spinwheel or the U and ; buttons to change the displayed value of the parameter. Note that the
allowed values are stated in the parameter box, and the controls cannot increase or decrease the value
beyond the allowed range of values.

Alternatively, use the numeric keys on the front panel to edit the parameter (see Numeric Parameter Edit
screen).

When all the parameters are set as required, press the Accept button. The display returns to the Test
Parameter Select screen from where the test may be run. Alternatively, pressing the Run Test button
accepts the change to the parameter and then runs the test.

19 JUN 1998 12:42:48
Cancel
Test
Run
Reset
EXIT
Test : Access Burst
Parameter
Accept
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Parameter
Channel Number
BTS Rx Signal Level
Number of RACHs
RACH Type
BTS Tx Level
Allowed List : 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, Max
RACH Delay Start
Value
90
Default
Max
200
Circuit Switch
-104.0
0
dBm
90
Max
-104.0
200
Circuit Switch
0 bits
63 63 bits
3 bits
3 3 mins
FER Limit 0.5 0.5 %
Measurement Mode Override GSM
GSM

Figure 5.60 Parameter Edit Screen

Menu Options


Accept Accepts the changes made and returns to the Test Parameter
Select screen

Cancel Discards changes made to selected parameter and restores the
previous value.

Reset Parameter Sets the parameter currently selected to default value.

displayed and sets up the new values in the Test Set, then runs
the test.

6113 EDGE 5-95
80-0013
Section 5

any changes made to previous parameter, and returns to the
Test Parameter Select screen.

accepting any changes made to previous parameter, and
returns to the Test Parameter Select screen.


EXIT Discards all the changes made to the set of parameters
displayed and then returns to the previous screen.

Note: (1) The spinwheel may be used to increment or decrement the value of the selected
parameter.

(2) Pressing a numeric key on the keyboard will:

-- edit the parameter selected and display the Numeric Parameter Edit screen.
or
-- display the the Text Edit screen (described under FILE MANAGER MENU) if a
text parameter is selected..

(3) In this screen, the spinwheel or +/- softkeys cannot increment or decrement the
value of the selected parameter beyond its maximum or minimum values.

5-96 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Numeric Parameter Edit Screen

This screen is displayed if one of the numeric keys on the front panel is pressed to change the value of a
selected Test Parameter. Use the and +/- keys on the front panel to correct any error and then use the
ENTER key on the front panel, or the Accept button on the screen, to enter the value. The display then
returns to the Test Parameter Select screen.

19 JUN 1998 12:42:48
Accept
Cancel
Test : Access Burst
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Parameter
Channel Number
BTS Rx Signal Level
Number of RACHs
RACH Type
BTS Tx Level
Allowed List : 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, Max
RACH Delay Start
Value
90
Default
6_
200
Circuit Switch
-104.0
0
dBm
90
Max
-104.0
200
Circuit Switch
0 bits
63 63 bits
3 bits
3 3 mins
FER Limit 0.5 0.5 %
Measurement Mode Override GSM GSM

Figure 5.61 Numeric Parameter Edit Screen

Menu Options


Accept Accepts the changes made and returns to the Test Parameter
Edit screen

the previous value, then returns to the Test Parameter Select
screen.

Note: (1) In this screen, only the numeric keys can be used to edit the parameter value.
The spinwheel and the key can be used to move the cursor to facilitate editing.

(2) If a parameter value is edited beyond its maximum or minimum value, an error
message is displayed and the parameter is returned to its previous value, then the
screen returns to the Test Parameter Select screen.

6113 EDGE 5-97
80-0013
Section 5

Single Test Execution Screens

When the Run Test button is pressed at the Test Select screen, Test Parameter Select screen, or the
Test Parameter Edit screen, the test is started and the Single Test Execution Screens are used to present
information to the user. The Test Information Screens are used to display information relating to the
progress of the test; the Test Results Screens are used to display test results. A Graph Screen is
available, where applicable, to provide graphical displays of measured Phase Error, Power Profile and
Modulation Spectrum data.

Test Information Screen (Test Running)

In Progress
14:25:26 Configuring Transmitter
14:25:26 Downlink A-bis idle speech frames enabled
Test Status
Running : Downlink Power Control Test
Results
Stop/
Edit
Abort
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
ARFCN
TRX ID
90
1
Timeslot
Format
4
---
BTS Rx Level
BTS Tx Level
-85.0
Max
dBm
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.62 Typical Test Information Screen (Test Running)

Menu Options


Test Results Switches to the Test Results screen. Note that the Test Results
screen is automatically displayed when the test is completed.

Stop /Edit Stops the test and displays the Test Parameter Edit screen to
allow parameter editing before repeating the test. Note that the
key legend will change to Edit Parameters when the test is
completed.

Abort Stops the test and displays the Test Results screen.

5-98 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Test Information Screen (Test Complete)

This screen provides a scrolling list of events that occurred during the test, and enables the operator to
edit the parameters and repeat the test.

FAIL - A-bis RSL link establish failed
Test Status
19 JUN 1998 16:21:47 Running : Downlink Power Control Test
Results
Edit
EXIT
Parameters
Repeat
Test
14:25:26 Activating A-bis RSL link to SC
14:25:27 Test complete
Configure
Printer
ARFCN
TRX ID
90
1
Timeslot
Format
4
---
BTS Rx Level
BTS Tx Level
-85.0
Max
dBm
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.63 Typical Test Information Screen (Test Complete)

Menu Options


Test Results Switches to the Test Results screen. Note that the Test Results
screen is automatically displayed when the test is completed.

Edit Displays the Test Parameter Edit screen to allow parameter editing
before repeating the test.

Repeat Test Repeats the test with the current test parameters.

results (identical to the Results screen when Results option is selected
at the Main Menu). When a RESULTS port has been configured, the
button legend changes to Print Test Info. Pressing Print Test Info
sends the list of events to the printer port. (On the Results screen the
button legend changes to Print Results. Pressing Print Results sends
the results data to the printer port).

EXIT Stops the test and displays the Single Tests menu.

Note: (1) The test starts with the display at the Test Information (Test Running) screen.
When the test completes with the Test Set having taken some valid
measurements, the MMI switches to the appropriate Test Results screen. From
the results screen the Test Information (Test Complete) screen may be viewed by
pressing the Test Information button on the Test Results screen.

(2) The spinwheel and the up/down arrows will scroll the list of events if it extends
beyond the viewing area.
6113 EDGE 5-99
80-0013
Section 5

Test Results Screen - Results Area Format

The following test results screens are shown as typical examples of the information and types of format
that are displayed.

Results Area - BER

Events Ratio
FER
%
0 0.000
Class lb RBER % 0 0.000
Class ll RBER %
Samples
500
66000
39000 15 0.038
Running : Receiver BER
Test Status PASS
19 JUN 1998 16:50:12
Measurement
Test
Information
Edit
Parameters
Repeat
Test
EXIT
Configure
Printer
ARFCN
TRX ID
90
1
Timeslot
Format
4
TCH/F
BTS Rx Level
BTS Tx Level
-85.0
Max
dBm
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.64 Results Area - BER

Circuit Switched Data BER

TCH/F9.6
Events Ratio
Class lb BER
%
0
0.000
Samples
120000
Running : Receiver BER
Test Status PASS
19 JUN 1998 16:50:12 Test
Information
Edit
Parameters
Repeat
Test
EXIT
Configure
Printer
ARFCN
TRX ID
90
1
Timeslot
Format
4
TCH/F9.6
BTS Rx Level
BTS Tx Level
-85.0
Max
dBm
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.65 Circuit Switched Data BER
5-100 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Packet Switched BLER

Events Ratio
Block Error
% 0 0
Bit Error % 0 0
Samples
500
92000
Running : Receiver BLER
Test Status FAIL - Measured values exceed limits
19 JUN 1998 16:50:12
Measurement
Test
Information
Edit
Parameters
Repeat
Test
EXIT
Configure
Printer
ARFCN
TRX ID
90
1
Timeslot
Format
4
PDCH/CS-1
BTS Rx Level
BTS Tx Level
-85.0
Max
dBm
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.66 Packet Switched BLER

Results Area - Static Power Control

Running : Static Power Control
Test Status FAIL : Measured Values Exceed Test Limits
19 JUN 1998 08:29:37
Step
1
2
6
4
3
5
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
FAIL
PASS
Status
+34.35
+44.00
+38.35
+36.35
+42.35
+40.35
dBm
Expected
Measured
+34.86
+44.35
+39.31
+37.04
+43.80
+41.54
dBm
Cumulative
+0.51
+0.35
+0.96
+0.69
+1.45
+1.19
Error dB
Step
+0.35
+1.45
+0.51
+0.96
+1.19
+0.69
Error dB
Test
Information
Edit
Parameters
Repeat
Test
Configure
Printer
ARFCN
TRX ID
90
1
Timeslot
Format
4
---
BTS Rx Level
BTS Tx Level
-85.0
Max
dBm
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.67 Results Area - Static Power Control
6113 EDGE 5-101
80-0013
Section 5

Results Area - Rx Absolute Sensitivity

Running : Absolute Sensitivity
Test Status FAIL : A-bis link to BCF failed
19 JUN 1998 08:30:12
Sensitivity 0.0 dBm
Test
Information
Edit
Parameters
Repeat
Test
EXIT
Configure
Printer
ARFCN
TRX ID
90
1
Timeslot
Format
4
TCH/F
BTS Rx Level
BTS Tx Level
-85.0
Max
dBm
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.68 Results Area - Rx Absolute Sensitivity

Results Area Access Burst

Running : Access Burst
Test Status Fail : A-bis link to BCF failed
19 AUG 1999 08:32:26 Test
Information
Edit
Parameters
Repeat
Test
EXIT
Configure
Printer
ARFCN
TRX ID
90
1
Timeslot
Format
4
RACH
BTS Rx Level
BTS Tx Level
-85.0
Max
dBm
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Samples
---
FER
Ratio
---
Events
---
---
---
---
No Channel Request
Bad Timing Advance
%
--- ---
--- ---
--- ---
TA Events
--- ---
--- ---
--- ---
TA Events
Spurious ---

Figure 5.69 Results Area Access Burst

5-102 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Results Area Rx Level

Running : RX Level
Test Status PASS
19 AUG 1999 08:52:59
Rx Level
Minimum
10
8
4
2
1
6
10
8
4
2
1
6
Rx Level
Maximum
10.00
8.00
4.00
2.00
1.00
6.00
Rx Level
Mean
-99.5
-101.5
-105.5
-107.5
-109.5
-103.5
dBm
Level
11
9
5
3
1
7
Nominal
Rx Level
Test
Information
Edit
Parameters
Repeat
Test
EXIT
Configure
Printer
ARFCN
TRX ID
90
0
Timeslot
Format
4
TCH/F
BTS Rx Level
BTS Tx Level
- - -
Max
dBm
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.70 Results Area Rx Level

Results Area - Rx Quality

Running : RX quality
Test Status FAIL - Rx QUAL test limits exceeded
19 AUG 1999 08:52:59
RX Quality (%)
0
100
25
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
62
25
0
0
0
0
37
75
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
87
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
0
0
75
100
12
0
6 7
1.229
2.110
10.256
20.326
48.692
5.576
BER %
-103.0
-104.0
-106.0
-107.0
-108.0
-105.0
dBm
Level
8
8
8
8
8
8
No.
Sample
72% 3/4
72% 3/4
76% 6/7
76% 6/7
76% 7
76% 5/6
Qual
Expected
Test
Information
Edit
Parameters
Repeat
Test
EXIT
Configure
Printer
ARFCN
TRX ID
90
1
Timeslot
Format
4
TCH/F
BTS Rx Level
BTS Tx Level
-85.0
Max
dBm
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.71 Results Area - Rx Quality

6113 EDGE 5-103
80-0013
Section 5

Transmitter Test Results Screen (GMSK)

Running : Transmitter Test
EXIT
Information
Edit
Repeat
Test
Parameters
Test Status FAIL - Measured Values Exceed Test Limits
Power Profile FAIL Modulation Spectrum PASS
BTS Output Power
Requested
dBm Fail +39
Measured
dBm +37.6 dB
Error
-1.4
Mean Minimum
Deg
Deg
Frequency Error Hz 12.840
RMS Phase Error 3.236
Peak Phase Error 9.844
Maximum
Hz 24.018
Deg 3.514
Deg 13.359
Deg
Deg
Hz 18.795
3.385
10.723
Phase
Error
Power
Profile
Modulation
Spectrum
Test
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
Configure
Printer
ARFCN
TRX ID
90
1
Timeslot
Format
4
BCCH
BTS Rx Level
BTS Tx Level
-85.0
Max
dBm
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.72 Transmitter Test Results Screen (GMSK)

Menu Options


Test Information Switches to Test Information screen.

Phase Error Displays the Phase Error graph screen.

Power Profile Displays the Power Profile graph screen.

Modulation Spectrum Displays the Modulation Spectrum graph screen.

Edit Parameters Switches to the Test Parameter Select screen. (This button is
Stop / Edit option while the test is running).


(On the Test Information screen the button legend changes to
Print Test Info. Pressing Print Test Info sends the list of events
to the printer port).

EXIT Returns to the Single Tests menu.

Note: When any of Phase Error, Power Profile or Modulation Spectrum buttons is selected,
that button becomes Test Results option in the related graph screen; operation of the
Test Results button in that graph screen then returns the display to this screen.
5-104 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Transmitter Test Results Screen (8PSK)

EXIT
Information
Edit
Repeat
Test
Parameters
Test Status FAIL - Measured Values Exceed Test Limits
Power Profile FAIL Modulation Spectrum PASS
BTS Output Power
Requested
dBm 2 +39
Measured
dBm +37.6 dB
Error
-1.4
Mean Minimum
%
%
Frequency Error Hz 12.840
RMS EVM 3.23
Peak EVM 9.84
Maximum
Hz 24.018
% 3.54
% 13.35
%
%
Hz 18.795
3.35
10.73
Power
Profile
Modulation
Spectrum
EVM

Test
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
Configure
Printer
ARFCN
TRX ID
90
1
Timeslot
Format
4
BCCH
BTS Rx Level
BTS Tx Level
-85.0
Max
dBm
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
% 95%tile EVM
% %
5.35 9.84 8.87
IQ Vector

Figure 5.73 Transmitter Test Results Screen (8PSK)

Menu Options


Test Information Switches to Test Information screen.

Power Profile Displays the Power Profile graph screen.

Modulation Spectrum Displays the Modulation Spectrum graph screen.

EVM Displays the EVM graph screen.

IQ Vector Displays the IQ Vector screen.

Edit Parameters Switches to the Test Parameter Select screen. (This button is
Stop / Edit option while the test is running).


(On the Test Information screen the button legend changes to
Print Test Info. Pressing Print Test Info sends the list of events
to the printer port).


Note: When any of Power Profile, Modulation Spectrum, EVM or IQ Vector buttons is selected,
that button becomes Test Results option in the related graph screen; operation of the
Test Results button in that graph screen then returns the display to this screen.

6113 EDGE 5-105
80-0013
Section 5

Results Graph Screens

The graph screen is used to display graphs of measured Phase Error, Power Profile and Modulation
Spectrum data. The softkeys allow the user to zoom in on various areas of the graph as well as displaying
the whole graph.

Phase Error Graph Screen (GMSK Modulation only)

19 JUN 1998 10:39:44
Exit
Graph Status
Edit
Repeat
FAIL - Measured values exceed test limits
Results
Test
Test : Transmitter Test
Test
Information
Modulation
Spectrum
Stop /
Test
Full
Screen
Vertical
+30:-30 Deg
Power
Profile
30
-30
0
0 140 20 40 60 80 100 120
20
10
-10
-20
D
e
g
Bits
Freq. Err Hz RMS Ph Err Deg Peak Ph Err Deg
Configure
Printer
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.74 Typical Phase Error Graph Screen

Menu Options


Test Information Switches to the Test Information screen.

Test Results Switches to the Test Results screen.

Power Profile Switches to the Power Profile graph screen.

Modulation Spectrum Switches to the Modulation Spectrum screen.

configured, the button legend changes to Print Screen.
Pressing Print Screen sends the screen data (area between the
buttons) in Epson FX-80 format to the printer.

Stop / Edit Stops the test and/or switches back to the Parameter Edit
screen to allow parameter editing before repeating the test.

Repeat Test Repeats the test with the current test parameters. (Note 1)
5-106 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Full Screen This option uses the whole screen to display the current graph,
with no space reserved for the status bar or softkeys. Any key
press returns to this screen.

Vertical Toggles the horizontal scaling between -30:+30 Deg and
-10:+10 Deg

EXIT Returns to the Single Tests Menu.

Note: (1) The 'Repeat Test' option is only present when the test is complete.

(2) The screen above is typical for a GMSK test (i.e. up to MCS4 coding
scheme). For 8PSK tests (MCS5 and above), the Phase Error screen is not
available. Instead, the EVM and IQ Vector pages can be displayed (see
EVM / IQ Vector sections below for examples).

6113 EDGE 5-107
80-0013
Section 5

Power Profile Graph Screen

19 JUN 1998 10:10:19
EXIT
Edit
Repeat
Full
Screen
Horizontal
-10 : +155
Vertical
dB -70 : +10
Graph Status
Error
Phase
Modulation
Spectrum
Test
Stop /
Test
Results
Test
Information
10
Bits
0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
d
B
-50
-60
-70
(The Power Profile mask varies according to the type of
BTS, and according to type of channel - i.e. BCCH or TCH.
Refer to Section 7 Manufacturer-Specific Information
for details).
Configure
Printer
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.75 Typical Power Profile Graph Screen

Menu Options



Phase Error Switches to Phase Error graph screen (Note 2).

Power Profile Switches to the Power Profile screen.


Modulation Spectrum Switches to Modulation Spectrum graph screen.


Stop / Edit Stops the test (if it is running) and displays the Test Parameter
Select screen.

Repeat Test Runs the test again (with any new parameter values entered)
(Note 1).

with no space reserved for the status bar or softkeys. Pressing
any button then returns the display to this screen.

Horizontal This option allows the user to toggle the horizontal scaling
between -10:+10 bits, -10:155 bits, 135:155 bits.
5-108 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Vertical This option allows the user to toggle the vertical scaling between
. -70:+10 dB and -5:+5 dB



scheme). For 8PSK tests (MCS5 and above), the Phase Error button is not
present, and the EVM and IQ Vector buttons are available (see EVM / IQ
Vector graph sections below for examples).

6113 EDGE 5-109
80-0013
Section 5

Modulation Spectrum Graph Screen

Exit
Graph Status
Edit
Repeat
FAIL - Measured values exceed test
Error
Phase
10
-70
-60
0
-10
-30
-20
-50
-40
0 200 400 -200 -400
dB
kHz
Test
Information
Test
Results
Stop /
Test
Full
Screen
Horizontal
500 kHz
100 500 300 -100 -300 -500
Power
Profile
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
Configure
Printer
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.76 Typical Modulation Spectrum Graph Screen

Menu Options



Phase Error Switch to Phase Error graph Screen (Note 2).

Power Profile Switch to Power Profile graph screen.




Repeat Test Repeats the test with the current test parameters (Note 1).


Horizontal Toggles the horizontal scaling between -500 : +500 and
-200 ; +200.



scheme). For 8PSK tests (MCS5 and above), the Phase Error button is not
present, and the EVM and IQ Vector buttons are available (see EVM / IQ
Vector graph sections below for examples).

5-110 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

The points on the graph are as follows:

(1) -500 kHz -54 dB
(2) -366.6 7kHz -54 dB
(3) -250 kHz -33 dB
(4) -200 kHz -30 dB
(5) -100 kHz +0.5 dB
(6) -100 kHz +10 dB

(7) +100 kHz, +10 dB
(8) +100 kHz +0.5 dB
(9) +200 kHz -30 dB
(10) +250 kHz -33 dB
(11) +366.67 kHz -54 dB
(12) +500 kHz -54 dB.

Note: The mask is compliant with the GSM Recommendations down to 54 dB.

6113 EDGE 5-111
80-0013
Section 5

EVM (Error Vector Magnitude) Graph Screen (8PSK modulation only)

19 JUN 1998 10:39:44
Exit
Graph Status
Edit
Repeat
Profile
Power
Test
Information
Test
Results
Stop /
Test
Full
Screen
Vertical
0:30 %
Modulation
Spectrum
30
0
0 140 20 40 60 80 100 120
20
10
%
Bits
EVM RMS: % Peak % 95%tile %
IQ Vector
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Freq. Err Hz Origin Offset Deg
Configure
Printer

Figure 5.77 Typical EVM Graph Screen

Menu Options




Modulation Spectrum Switches to Modulation Spectrum graph screen.


IQ Vector Switches to the IQ Vector Screen





Vertical Toggles the vertical scaling between 0 30% and 0 10%.


Note: The 'Repeat Test' option is only present when the test is complete.

5-112 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

IQ Vector Screen (8PSK modulation only)

19 JUN 1998 10:39:44
Exit
Graph Status
Edit
Repeat
Profile
Power
Test
Information
EVM
Stop /
Test
Full
Screen
Modulation
Spectrum
RMS EVM:
Peak EVM
95%tile EVM
%
Test
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Freq. Err Hz
Origin Offset
%
Configure
Printer
%
dB
Results

Figure 5.78 Typical IQ Vector Screen

Menu Options




Modulation Spectrum Switch to Modulation Spectrum graph screen.

EVM Switches to EVM (Error Vector Magnitude) graph screen.







Note: The 'Repeat Test' option is only present when the test is complete.

6113 EDGE 5-113
80-0013
Section 5

MULTIMODE MENU

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / INTERACTIVE TESTS)

When Multimode option is selected at the A-bis Controlled Tests screen, the Parameter Select and the
Parameter Edit screens can be used in a similar manner to those for Single Tests (described earlier in this
Section). Multimode is run by selecting the Run Test option at either of these screens.

Multimode Summary Results Screen

The Multimode Summary results screen is displayed when Run Test is selected at the Parameter Select
screen or the Parameter Edit screen to start the test. This screen displays a summary of the Multimode
test results, and these are updated in real time as the test progresses. The buttons on the right of the
screen enable two parameters to be changed while the test is running, as shown below. (Note that more
parameters can be changed from the Multimode : Summary Results More screen).

19 FEB 2002 14:17:52
Multimode : Summary
BER
Phase
Error
Power
Profile
Modulation
Spectrum
RX Class II BER 0 4 %
TX Class II BER 0 4
%
RMS Phase Error 0 10 Deg
Peak Phase Error 0 40 Deg
Frequency Error -200 200 Hz
Channel No.
90
Rx Level
-104.0 dBm
Timeslot
4
BTS Power
Max
More . . .
Abort
Test
Information
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Mod Spectrum --- Power Profile
---
Phase Graph
---

Figure 5.79 Multimode Summary Results Screen

Menu Options



BER Switches to the BER Results screen.

Phase Error Switches to the Phase/Frequency Error Results screen.

Power Profile Switches to the Power Profile Results screen.

Modulation Spectrum Switches to the Modulation Spectrum Results screen.

Rx Level Edits the BTS Rx Signal Level parameter.

BTS Power Edits the BTS Output Power Level parameter.
5-114 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

More Switches to the Multimode : Summary More screen where more
parameters can be changed in real time.

Abort / EXIT While the test is running, the legend on this button is Abort;
pressing it causes the test to abort and the display to change to
the Test Information screen. When the test completes, or
aborts, the legend changes to EXIT; pressing it returns the
display to the Main Menu.

Note: (1) When a measured value exceeds the defined test limits the gauge bar changes
from light to dark and the value given after the bar graph is 'highlighted'.

(2) When the test limits define a range of values between non-zero maximum and
minimum values, two error markers are shown, each halfway between the
centreline and the boundaries.

(3) Selecting one of the 'edit' buttons on the right of the screen causes it to be
highlighted. The user can then modify the parameter either by typing a value or
using the spinwheel. Error checking is as in the Edit Parameter screen.

(4) Selecting one of the additional-information buttons on the left of the screen
displays an additional information screen for the selected type of result (i.e. BER,
Phase Error, Power Profile and Modulation Spectrum). Note that the full range
of 'edit' buttons for changing parameters is still available in these additional
screens.

6113 EDGE 5-115
80-0013
Section 5

Multimode Summary Results More Screen

The Multimode : Summary More screen is displayed when More ... is selected at the Multimode :
Summary Results screen. This screen also displays the results in real time as the test progresses, and
enables more parameters to be changed in real time. The buttons on the right of the screen enable two
more parameters to be changed while the test is running:

Test Pattern
Frequency Offset

19 FEB 2002 14:17:52
Multimode : Summary
Limits
RX Class II BER 0 4 %
TX Class II BER 0 4
%
RMS Phase Error 0 10 Deg
Peak Phase Error 0 40 Deg
Frequency Error -200 200 Hz
Burst No.
Any
Test Pattern
3
Abort
Freq Offset
0 Hz
More . . .
Configure
Printer
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Mod Spectrum --- Power Profile
---
Phase Graph
---

Figure 5.80 Multimode Summary Results More Screen

Menu Options


Limits Displays a form to show the test limits for the measured data.

Test Pattern Edits the Test Pattern parameter.

Freq. Offset Edits the Frequency Offset parameter.


More Switches back to the Multimode Summary screen.

5-116 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5


Note: Selecting one of the 'edit' keys on the right of the screen causes it to be highlighted. The
user can then modify the parameter either by typing a value or using the spinwheel. Error
checking is as in the Edit Parameter screens.

6113 EDGE 5-117
80-0013
Section 5

Multimode Test Information Screen

This screen is displayed when Test Information option is selected at the Multimode Summary Results
screen.

Multimode : Test Information
Test Status
Phase
Error
Power
Profile
BER
Modulation
Spectrum
Summary
More...
Abort
Timeslot
BTS Power
Rx Level
dBm -85.0
4
Channel No.
90
MAX
14:53:47 Locking to Cell Control Channel
14:53:48 Synchronised to Cell Control Channel
14:53:48 Checking System Information Messages
14:53:50 System Information Messages Correct
14:53:56 Downlink A-bis frame type is now Speech
14:53:59 Establishing RF Link
14:53:59 RF Link Established
14:54:01 Starting Test
Test In Progress
19 JUN 1998 12:34:56
ARFCN
TRX ID
90
1
Timeslot
Format
4
TCH/F
BTS Rx Level
BTS Tx Level
-104.0
Max
dBm
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.81 Multimode Test Information Screen

Note: (1) Apart from the Summary option, the button facilities on this screen are identical to the
Multimode Summary Results screen.

(2) When the "Starting Test" message is displayed and the test starts, the display changes
automatically to the Multimode Summary Results screen.

(3) On the More... screen, the Configure Printer option changes to Print Test Info. Pressing
Print Test Info sends the list of events to the printer port.

5-118 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Multimode BER Results Screen

This screen is displayed when the BER additional information button is selected at the Multimode :
Summary Results screen. The results displayed are updated in real time. (Note that the same range of
'edit' buttons for changing parameters in real time is still available from the right of the screen).

Test
Phase
Error
19 JUN 1998 19:36:44
MultiMode : BER
Modulation
Spectrum
More...
Abort
Timeslot
BTS Power
Rx Level
dBm -85.0
4
Channel No.
90
MAX
Information
Profile
Power
Summary
RX Class Ib RBER
TX Class Ib RBER
RX FER
RX Class II RBER
TX FER
TX Class II RBER
Current
%
%
%
%
%
%
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
Minimum
%
%
%
%
%
%
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
Maximum
%
%
%
%
%
%
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
Mean
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
%
%
%
%
%
%
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.82 Multimode BER Results Screen

Menu Options



Summary Switches back to the Multimode : Summary Results screen.

Phase Error Switches to the Phase Error additional information screen.

Power Profile Switches to the Power Profile additional information screen.

Modulation Spectrum Switches to the Modulation Spectrum additional information
screen.



More Switches to the Multimode : BER Results More screen.

6113 EDGE 5-119
80-0013
Section 5

Note: (1) When a measured value exceeds the defined test limits, the value given is
'highlighted'.

(2) All values given in the Samples column are cumulative.

5-120 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Multimode BER Results More Screen

This screen is displayed when the More... additional information button is selected at the Multimode :

Limits
19 JUN 1998 19:36:44
MultiMode : BER Burst Number
Any
Test Pattern
3
Abort
Freq Offset
0 Hz
Configure
More . . .
Clear
Min / Max
Printer
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
RX Class Ib RBER
TX Class Ib RBER
RX FER
RX Class II RBER
TX FER
TX Class II RBER
Current
%
%
%
%
%
%
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
Minimum
%
%
%
%
%
%
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
Maximum
%
%
%
%
%
%
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
Mean
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
%
%
%
%
%
%

Figure 5.83 Multimode BER Results More Screen

Menu Options


Limits Displays the Multimode test limits being applied (these values
are preset and cannot be changed).

Clear Min / Max Resets the Minimum and Maximum values to zero.




More Switches to the Multimode : BER Results screen.

6113 EDGE 5-121
80-0013
Section 5

Note: (1) When a measured value exceeds the defined test limits, the value given is
'highlighted'.

(2) All values given in the Samples column are cumulative.

5-122 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Multimode : Phase/Frequency Error Results Screen

This screen is displayed when the Phase Error. additional information button is selected at the Multimode :

19 JUN 1998 12:00 MultiMode : Phase Error
Summary
Power
BER
Modulation
Spectrum
Timeslot
BTS Power
Rx Level
dBm -104.0
4
More...
Abort
Channel No.
90
MAX
30
-30
0
0 14 20 40 60 80 100 120 0
20
10
-10
-20
D
e
g
Bits
Profile
Test
Information
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
RMS Phase Error
Frequency Error
Peak Phase Error
Minimum
Deg
Deg
Hz
2.532
6.191
-26.144
Deg
Deg
Hz
Maximum
3.697
10.827
12.654
Mean
Deg
Deg
Hz
2.980
8.068
-3.977
Graph Status
---

Figure 5.84 Multimode Phase/Frequency Error Results Screen

Menu Options



BER Switches to the Multimode : BER results screen.

Summary Returns to the Multimode : Summary results screen.

Power Profile Switches to the Multimode Power Profile results screen.

Modulation Spectrum Switches to the Multimode Modulation Spectrum results screen.



More Switches to the Multimode : Phase/Frequency Error results
More screen


Note: When a measured value exceeds the defined test limits, the value given is 'highlighted'.
6113 EDGE 5-123
80-0013
Section 5

Multimode : Phase/Frequency Error Results More Screen

This screen is displayed when the More... additional information button is selected at the Multimode :
Phase/Frequency Error Results screen. The same results are displayed and updated in real time.
However, additional controls are provided to change the scale of the graph displayed. (Note that the
same range of 'edit' buttons for changing parameters in real time is still available from the right of the
screen).

30
-30
0
0 140 20 40 60 80 100 120
19 JUN 1998 18:09:47
MultiMode : Phase Error
Full
Limits
Vertical
Clear
Min / Max
20
10
-10
-20
Screen
-30 : +30
Deg
Burst Number
Any
Test Pattern
6
Abort
Freq Offset
0 Hz
More . . .
Bits
D
e
g
Configure
Printer
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
RMS Phase Error
Frequency Error
Peak Phase Error
Minimum
Deg
Deg
Hz
2.532
6.191
-26.144
Deg
Deg
Hz
Maximum
3.697
10.827
12.654
Mean
Deg
Deg
Hz
2.980
8.068
-3.977
Graph Status
---

Figure 5.85 Multimode Phase/Frequency Error Results More Screen

Menu Options



Full Screen Enlarges the graph display to occupy the full screen. Pressing
any button then restores the display to this screen.

Vertical Toggles the scale of the graph between -30 : +30 Deg, and
-10 : +10 Deg

Clear Min / Max Clears all displayed result values.



5-124 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

More Switches to the Multimode : Phase/Frequency Error results
screen



6113 EDGE 5-125
80-0013
Section 5

Multimode Power Profile Results Screen

This screen is displayed when the Power Profile additional information button is selected at the
Multimode : Summary Results screen. The results displayed are updated in real time. (Note that the
same range of 'edit' buttons for changing parameters in real time is still available from the right of the
screen).

19 FEB 2002 15:08:24
MultiMode : Power Profile
Phase
Error
BER
Modulation
Spectrum
Timeslot
BTS Power
Rx Level
dBm
-104.0
4
More...
Abort
Channel No.
90
MAX
Summary
Test
Information
10
Bits
0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
d
B
-50
-60
-70
OFFSETS: ON RESULTS: OFF
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
(The Power Profile mask varies according to the type of BTS,
Refer to Section 7 Manufacturer-Specific Information for
for details).
Measured BTS Pwr
Current
dBM 2.50
Minimum
dBm 2.29
Maximum
dBm 3.53
Graph Status
Fail

Figure 5.86 Multimode Power Profile Results Screen

Menu Options



BER Switches to the Multimode BER results screen.

Phase Error Switches to the Multimode Phase Error results screen.

Summary Switches back to the Multimode : Summary results screen.

Modulation Spectrum Switches to the Multimode Modulation Spectrum results screen.



More Switches to Switches to the Multimode Power Profile results
More screen.


5-126 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Multimode Power Profile Results More Screen

This screen is displayed when the More... button is selected at the Multimode : Power Profile results
screen. The same results are displayed and updated in real time, but additional controls are provided to
vary the size and scale of the graph. (Note that the same range of 'edit' buttons for changing parameters
in real time is still available from the right of the screen).

19 FEB 2002 15:08:24
MultiMode : Power Profile
Full
Screen
Horizontal
Limits
Vertical
Clear
Min / Max
-10 : 155
-70 : +10 dB
Burst Number
Any
Test Pattern
6
Abort
Freq Offset
0 Hz
More . . .
10
Bits
0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
d
B
-50
-60
-70
(The Power Profile mask varies according to the type of BTS,
Refer to Section 7 Manufacturer-Specific Information for
for details).
Configure
Printer
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Measured BTS Pwr
Current
dBM 2.50
Minimum
dBm 2.29
Maximum
dBm 3.53
Graph Status
Fail

Figure 5.87 Multimode Power Profile Results More Screen

Menu Options



Full Screen Enlarges the graph display to occupy the full screen. Pressing
any button then restores the display to this screen.

Horizontal Toggles the horizontal scale of the graph between -10:155,
-10:+10, and 135:155

Vertical Toggles the vertical scale of the graph between -70:+10 dB, and
-5:+5 dB

Clear Min / Max Clears all displayed result values.



6113 EDGE 5-127
80-0013
Section 5

More Switches back to the Multimode Power Profile results screen.



5-128 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Modulation Spectrum Results Screen

This screen is displayed when the Modulation Spectrum additional information button is selected at the
Multimode : Summary results screen. The results displayed are updated in real time. The mask is not
displayed until the count of averages is complete. (Note that the same range of 'edit' buttons for changing
parameters in real time is still available from the right of the screen).

Phase
Error
Summary
BER
Power
Profile
Timeslot
BTS Power
Rx Level
dBm -104.0
4
More...
Abort
Channel No.
90
MAX
Test
Information
10
-70
-60
0
-10
-30
-20
-50
-40
d
B
0
100 200 300 400 -100 -200 -300 -400 -500 500
10
kHz
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
19 FEB 2002 12:24:59 MultiMode : Modulation Spectrum
Graph Status Pass

Figure 5.88 Modulation Spectrum Results Screen

Menu Options



BER Switches to the Multimode BER results screen.

Phase Error Switches to the Multimode Phase Error results screen.

Power Profile Switches to the Multimode Power Profile results screen.

Summary Switches back to the Multimode : Summary results screen.



More Switches to the Multimode Modulation Spectrum results More
screen.

6113 EDGE 5-129
80-0013
Section 5

The points on the graph are as follows:

(1) -500 kHz -54 dB
(2) -366.6 7kHz -54 dB
(3) -250 kHz -33 dB
(4) -200 kHz -30 dB
(5) -100 kHz +0.5 dB
(6) -100 kHz +10 dB

(7) +100 kHz, +10 dB
(8) +100 kHz +0.5 dB
(9) +200 kHz -30 dB
(10) +250 kHz -33 dB
(11) +366.67 kHz -54 dB
(12) +500 kHz -54 dB.

Note: The mask is compliant with the GSM Recommendations down to 54 dB.

5-130 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Modulation Spectrum Results More Screen

This screen is displayed when the More... button is selected at the Multimode : Modulation Spectrum
Results screen. The same results are displayed and updated in real time, but additional controls are
provided to vary the size and scale of the graph. The mask is not displayed until the count of averages is
complete. (Note that the same range of 'edit' buttons for changing parameters in real time is still available
from the right of the screen).

Full
Screen
Limits
Horizontal
Restart
Averaging
500 kHz
Burst Number
Any
Test Pattern
6
Abort
Freq Offset
0 Hz
Configure
More . . .
Averaging
10 Printer
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
10
-70
-60
0
-10
-30
-20
-50
-40
d
B
0
100 200 300 400 -100 -200 -300 -400 -500 500
10
kHz
19 FEB 2002 12:24:59 MultiMode : Modulation Spectrum
Graph Status Pass

Figure 5.89 Modulation Spectrum Results More Screen

Menu Options



Full Screen Enlarges the graph display to occupy the full screen (displays
the current burst). Pressing any softkey then restores the
display to the button screen.

Horizontal Toggles the horizontal scale of the graph between
(+/-) 500 kHz, and (+/-) 200 kHz

Averaging Edits the Video Averaging parameter.

A count of averages performed is displayed in the top left hand
corner of the graph until it reaches the value set for this
parameter. Note that the mask is not displayed on the graph,
and the Modulation Spectrum value is not displayed on the
Summary screen, until the set number of averages is
performed.

Restart Averaging Restarts the video averaging from burst 1.

6113 EDGE 5-131
80-0013
Section 5



More Switches to Switches to the Multimode Modulation Spectrum
results More screen.


5-132 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

TEST SEQUENCES MENU

CAUTION: If the Test Set has previously been used for Live Tests the A-bis connections will
be at high impedance, and the following warning will be displayed. Ensure that the
6113 is disconnected from the operational BTS before continuing, otherwise the
operational link may be disrupted.

WARNING
A-bis connectors to revert to low impedance
Where connection is to a live system

This option allows the user to select, run, and to define, sequences of tests stored on a memory card.

A sequence is a series of commands carried out by the Test Set, to perform a number of tests. The
commands are stored using a BASIC-like language in files on a removable memory card.

Sequences may be set up either by recording a series of test and configuration commands as they are
entered from the front panel, or using some form of editor to create a file on memory card which may then
be read by the Test Set. The recording method allows simple sequences to be created (with no looping or
branching and limited control over results printing).

6113 EDGE 5-133
80-0013
Section 5

Defining and Loading Sequences

The Sequence Selection screen is displayed when Test Sequences option is selected at the Main Menu.
This screen gives the option of defining a new sequence file or loading an existing sequence file from
memory card. The View File facility (see FILE MANAGER MENU / View File Screen) can be used to view
a Results file or a Sequence file.

The Load Sequence option presents a standard File To Read screen, with options to list and select the
sequence files and directories available.

The Define Sequence option presents a standard File To Write screen, with options to list directories and
files and to edit the file name and description. Note that the default file extension for a sequence file is
.SEQ but this can be changed if required.

The View Sequence File and View Results File buttons both display a File Select screen for selecting a file
to view.

Sequence Selection Screen

19 JUN 1998 12:21:22 Sequence
EXIT
Load
Sequence
Define
Sequence
Repeat
TESTSEQ1
View
File
Results
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
View
Sequence
File
Results

Figure 5.90 Sequence Selection Screen

Menu Options


Load Sequence Switches to a File Selection Screen to select a sequence file
from memory card.

Define Sequence Switches to a File Write Screen to overwrite an existing file or to
define a new sequence file.

Results Displays the standard Results Menu screen (see RESULTS
MENU) .
5-134 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

View Sequence File Switches to a file selection screen for selecting a sequence file
to view.

View Results File Switches to a file selection screen for selecting a results file to
view.

Repeat Repeats the previous test sequence. (This button is not present
if a sequence file has not been run previously).

EXIT Returns to the previous menu.

6113 EDGE 5-135
80-0013
Section 5

Sequence File Definition Screen

The Define Sequence screen is presented when the Accept button on the Enter Sequence File To Write
screen is pressed to accept the file information.

Selecting tests for use in the sequence is performed in a similar way to selecting tests from the Single
Tests menu. That is, select Functional Tests, or Transmitter Tests, or Receiver Tests option. Then use
the up/down arrows or the spinwheel, and the Select button, to select one of the tests from the scrolling
list.

Following test selection, the Test Parameters of the test can be set to the required values (using the
Configuration Parameter Edit screen). On selecting EXIT the test is added to the sequence being
defined.

In addition, an End of Test Actions screen is displayed for defining the action to be taken at the end of the
selected test; set the actions as required and EXIT the screen.

The display then returns to the Sequence File Definition screen. Repeat the above procedure to add all
the tests required in the sequence. Note that the Test Parameters for each test should be set to the
required values as each test is selected. When all required tests have been included, press the EXIT
option at the Sequence File Definition screen to display the End of Sequence Actions screen; set the
actions as required then select EXIT to return to the Sequence Selection screen.

From the Sequence Selection screen, the newly defined sequence file, or one defined previously, can be
run by loading it using the Load Sequence option.

Functional
Tests
19 JUN 1998 14:07:49 Define Sequence
EXIT
Tests
Tests
Transmitter
Receiver
Select Parameters
Receiver BER
RX Level
RX Quality
Access Burst Test
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Measurement
Mode

Figure 5.91 Sequence File Definition Screen

Menu Options


Parameters Switches to the Parameters Menu to allow changes to the global
parameters (Note: Write File button is omitted).


5-136 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Select Accepts the current test selection and switches to the Test
Parameter Edit screen.

Functional Tests Displays a scrolling list of Functional Tests

Transmitter Tests Displays a scrolling list of Transmitter Tests

Receiver Tests Displays a scrolling list of Receiver Tests

EXIT If a test has been selected at the screen, then pressing EXIT will
display the End of Test Actions screen

Pressing EXIT without selecting a test will display the End of
Sequence Actions screen to complete the sequence selection
process.

6113 EDGE 5-137
80-0013
Section 5

End of Test Actions Screen

This screen is displayed when EXIT is selected at the Configuration Parameter Edit screen. Use this
screen to:

1) Select the actions that are required if the test Passes, and if the test Fails.

2) Select whether Test Information is recorded for the test.

Select (in the Value column) the action that is required for both Test Passed and Test Failed,
i.e 'Continue', 'Hold', 'Exit' or 'Repeat' where:

'Continue' = Start running the next test
'Hold' = Allow the operator to Repeat Test as many times as required. (Next Test
then runs the next test in the sequence).
'Exit' = Exits the Sequence
'Repeat' = Repeats the test

For the Print Results Condition parameter, select (in the Value column) the test result that must prevail to
cause the test results to be printed, i.e. 'Both', 'Pass', 'Fail' or 'None' where:

'Both' = Print results if test Passes or Fails
'Pass' = Print results if test Passes
'Fail' = Print results if test Fails
'None' = No results to be printed for Pass or Fail

For the Print Test Information parameter, select (in the Value column) the required mode of operation for
each test, i.e. 'Yes', or 'No' where:

'Yes' = Print test information
'No' = No test information to be printed

Both
Define Sequence : End of Test Actions
Cancel
All
All
Reset
EXIT
Edit
Parameter
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
Test Passed
Print Results Condition
Print Test Information
Hold
Both
Yes/No
Both
No
Hold
Continue
Test Failed Repeat
Allowed List : Continue, Hold, Exit, Repeat
Select Action on Test Return Value
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.92 End of Test Actions Screen

5-138 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Menu Options


previous menu.


Edit Parameter This button displays the Parameter Edit screen.

Toggles the currently selected parameter.



0 Toggles the currently selected parameter.

displayed and sets up the new values in the test sequence, then
returns to the Sequence File Definition screen.

the Edit Parameter option is selected, then the Parameter Edit screen is displayed
and the spinwheel can be used to change the value of the selected parameter).

the table.

6113 EDGE 5-139
80-0013
Section 5

End of Sequence Actions Screen

This screen is displayed when EXIT is selected at the Define Sequence screen after the last test has been
selected for the sequence. Use it to select the actions that are required at the end of the sequence,
regardless of whether the sequence Passes or Fails.

Select (in the Value column) the action that is required for both Print Results Summary and Add Form
Feed, i.e 'Yes' or 'No'.

Define Sequence : End of Sequence Actions
Cancel
All
All
Reset
EXIT
Edit
Parameter
19 AUG 1999 14:12:44
Print Results Summary Yes
No
Yes
Add Form Feed Yes
Allowed List : No, Yes
Select Actions at End of Sequence
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.93 End of Sequence Actions Screen

Menu Options


previous menu.


Edit Parameter This button displays the Parameter Edit screen.

Toggles the currently selected parameter..



0 Toggles the currently selected parameter.

displayed and sets up the new values in the test sequence, then
returns to the Sequence Selection screen.
5-140 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

the Edit Parameter option is selected, then the Parameter Edit screen is displayed
and the spinwheel can be used to change the value of the selected parameter).

the table.

6113 EDGE 5-141
80-0013
Section 5

Running Sequences

The 'Load Sequence' option in the Test Sequences Menu gives access to files stored on memory card
(referred to as drives A: and B:). Operating the Load Sequence button displays the Sequence Selection
screen, and a sequence file can then be selected from the 'Select Sequence File to Read' dialogue box.
When the sequence file has been selected and the Accept button is operated, the Test Set starts running
the sequence, carrying out the actions programmed in the file.

When the test sequence starts, the option Single Step is presented on the Test Information screen.
Setting this option to On causes the sequence to stop at the end of each test and display the results
screen for that test. The Repeat Test button can be used as required to repeat the test (without being
able to modify the parameters) and examine graphical results where appropriate. The test results screens
presented for each type of test are identical to the test results screens for each of the Single Tests,
described earlier in this Section. The sequence must be restarted each time by operating the Next Test
button.

During Single Step operation and at the end of a Sequence, the option button Print Results will appear (if
selected via the Results / Results/Printer options in the Main Menu). Operating this button causes the
results of the test to be printed via the configured port to either the printer (as hardcopy) or the selected
memory card (as a results file).

During the execution of the sequence the Test Set displays the Sequence Test Information screen as the
individual tests are run. Summary results of each test and each significant event are displayed in this
screen. From this screen, the operator can switch to the Test Results screen while the test is running to
watch the progress in detail. It is possible to switch between the Test Results screen and the Test
Information screen as required.

On completion of the sequence, whether it has run all the tests or been terminated by the user, the
Sequence Results Summary screen is displayed giving a brief summary of the results of all the tests run.

5-142 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Sequence Test Information Screen

This screen is displayed when the Accept button in the Select Sequence File to Read screen is pressed.
It indicates that the test sequence is running, and offers the Single Step option. It also displays a
statement of each significant event in the test sequence. Note that operating the Test Results button will
switch the display to the Test Results screen for the test in progress.

19 JUN 1998 14:10:51 Running : Configure BTS
Test Status
Test
Results
Test in Progress
Next
Test
Abort
Sequence
Repeat
Test
Single Step
ON
Step Sequence 1 A:\BUILD4.SEQ
10:25:13 - Connecting to the BSS
ARFCN
TRX ID
90
1
Timeslot
Format
4
---
BTS Rx Level
BTS Tx Level
-104.0
Max
dBm
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
Print
Results

Figure 5.94 Sequence Test Information Screen

Menu Options


Test Results Switches to the current test results screen.

Moves the current test information viewed up one item. This option is
only displayed when the test is complete.

Moves the current test information viewed down one item. This option is
only displayed when the test is complete.

Next Test If a test is in progress then the test is aborted and the next test in the pre-
programmed sequence is started. If the sequence is on hold then the
next test is started.

Repeat Test Repeats the test that has just failed. The Repeat Test key is only
available when a test is complete and the sequence is paused.

Print Results Sends results information to the selected printer port. If a printer port has
not been selected then a Configure Printer option is displayed instead.

Single Step Pressing this button toggles the state between 'ON' and 'OFF'.
'ON' - holds the sequence after each test.
'OFF' - does not hold the sequence after each test.
Both conditions take effect from the instant they are set.

Abort Sequence Aborts the current test and ends the sequence at this point.
6113 EDGE 5-143
80-0013
Section 5

Note: (1) This screen will display any information and status messages concerning the
progress of the test currently in progress.

(2) The Abort Sequence key is protected by a 'Confirm' function.

5-144 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5

Sequence Summary Results Screen

19 JUN 1998 15:29:36
EXIT
Results Summary : A:\JOB3.SEQ
Overall Result FAIL
Test Channel
Timeslot
Pass

2 90 4
3
Receiver BER
90 -
X
RACH Test X
1 Configure BTS
- -
Print
Summary
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.95 Sequence Summary Results Screen

Menu Options


Moves the current steps viewed up one item.

Moves the current steps viewed down one item.

Print Summary Sends the Summary Results shown to the currently selected
printer. If a printer port has not been selected then the button
option/legend is Configure Printer.

Exit Returns to the Sequence screen.

Note: The spinwheel has the same effect as pressing the up/down arrow buttons.

6113 EDGE 5-145
80-0013
Section 5

INFORMATION SCREEN MENU

At power up, the hard boot and softboot tests are run and the screen displays test information as each test
runs. At the end of the power-on test sequence, the 6113 logo is displayed together with the Main Menu
softkeys and Status Bar.

The Information Screen option is available from the Main Menu, when pressed the following screen is
displayed:

Special
Parameters
Results
File
Manager
Controlled
Sequences
Self Tests
System
Offsets
Test
BTS
Live
Tests
Tests
Information
Display
Logo
Radio System Type :
BTS Manufacturer :
BTS Model :
Interface :
RF Configuration :
GSM 900
XXXXXXXXX
XXX
BTS Software Version : XXXX
A-bis, Unbalanced
B.O.S.S. Duplex
Unit Software Version : XX.XX1
Current Settings
Main Menu
19 JUN 1998 14:12:44
Functions
A-bis
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.96 Main Menu - Information Screen

Menu Options


Display Logo This option displays the logo in the central screen area, and the
button legend changes to Information Screen. The display can
then be toggled between the Information Screen and the logo.

Note: The function of all other buttons is as described for the initial Main Menu screen.

5-146 6113 EDGE
80-0013
Section 5
6113 EDGE 5-147
80-0013

MENU UNDER REMOTE CONTROL

(Hyperlink to Section 6 Operating Instructions GPIB)

The 6113 Test Set can be controlled remotely via the GPIB interface.

The Test Set automatically enters remote control mode when a valid remote control command is received
via the GPIB interface. In this mode, the only control available from the Test Set front panel is the LOCAL
button which can be used to return the test set to 'Local' mode.

Instructions on how to control the 6113 Test Set via the GPIB Interface are given in Section 6 Operating
Instructions - GPIB.

19 JUN 1998 14:59:52 Remote Control
LOCAL
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5.97 Menu Under Remote Control

Menu Options


LOCAL Returns the Test Set to local control. The Main Menu is then
displayed, irrespective of the menu state when the Test Set was
set to 'Remote' control mode. If the Test Set has been set to
'Local' lock-out mode via the GPIB, this button is not displayed.

6113 EDGE 5A-(i)/(ii)
80-0013

SECTION 5 ANNEX A

PROGRAMMING TEST SEQUENCES

CONTENTS

Page / Hyperlink

INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................. 1
PROGRAMMABLE SEQUENCES..................................................................................... 1
RIBASIC SEQUENCE LANGUAGE................................................................................... 1
GENERAL COMMANDS.................................................................................................... 1
Notes on Syntax Definition:....................................................................................... 1
Sequence File Format............................................................................................... 2
List of Commands..................................................................................................... 3
STRING HANDLING COMMANDS.................................................................................. 11
Definitions ............................................................................................................... 11
String Identification ....................................................................................... 11
String Declaration ......................................................................................... 11
String Expressions........................................................................................ 11
String Functions............................................................................................ 12
Strings and Expressions as Keyword Parameters........................................ 12
PROGRAM FLOW COMMANDS..................................................................................... 13
LOOP STRUCTURES ...................................................................................................... 15
FOR...NEXT Loop................................................................................................... 15
REPEAT...UNTIL Loop ........................................................................................... 16
WHILE...ENDWHILE Loop ..................................................................................... 16
VARIABLES...................................................................................................................... 17
System Variables .................................................................................................... 17
BTSManufacturer.......................................................................................... 17
BTSModel ..................................................................................................... 17
ResultsFileConfigured .................................................................................. 17
RESULTS FORMATTING COMMANDS.......................................................................... 18
Graphical Results Commands ................................................................................ 21
RESULTS RETURNED AS RIBASIC SYSTEM VARIABLES ......................................... 22
SYSTEM CONSTANTS.................................................................................................... 25
OPERATORS.................................................................................................................... 25
EXPRESSIONS................................................................................................................. 25
LABELS............................................................................................................................ 26
COMMENTS..................................................................................................................... 26
ERROR HANDLING ......................................................................................................... 27
SEQUENCE FILE LISTINGS............................................................................................ 32

SECTION 5 ANNEX A PROGRAMMING TEST SEQUENCES
6113 EDGE 5A-1
80-0013

INTRODUCTION

Sequences of test programs, as created using the 6113 display facilities, are generated as
RIBASIC code and stored in DOS-compatible files on the Memory Card. This Annex describes
an alternative method of generating such test sequences by making direct use of the RIBASIC
language. Using the language itself gives the user more flexibility and greater scope in the
functions that can be programmed into a test sequence. Some examples are included at the
end of this Annex.

PROGRAMMABLE SEQUENCES

Sequences are read from the memory card one line at a time, each line is interpreted as it is
read and the appropriate actions carried out before the next line is read. Sequences are
programmed in RIBASIC - a BASIC-like language that supports features such as user-defined
variables, looping and conditional constructs. This allows detailed control over the test
sequences to be achieved. The language supports the existing pre-defined result sheet printout
but also allows the user complete control over what is sent to the printer. The sequence file
format and the list of commands available are described in the following paragraphs.

The programmed sequences do not automatically print the results sheet header and footer,
these have to be explicitly programmed. The Sequence Summary screen similarly has to be
written into the sequence.

The size of the sequence is only limited by the size of space available on the Memory Card.

RIBASIC SEQUENCE LANGUAGE

The following set of instructions forms the basis of the RIBASIC programming language to be
used for controlling the 6113. A PC equipped with a standard text editor and a PCMCIA card
adaptor is required to create DOS-compatible files of test sequences. These files must then be
copied to a PCMCIA card in order to use them in the 6113 Test Set (they can be selected from
the Sequence menus just like any other test sequence file). When using a text editor to create
and modify programs, the files should be saved as plain ASCII text and not as word processor
formatted documents. Any formatting characters would be seen by the Test Set as syntax errors
and the program would not run properly.

GENERAL COMMANDS

The following set of instructions forms the basis of a programming language intended to control
the 6113 Test Set.

Notes on Syntax Definition:

Words in BOLD type are reserved keywords. They may not be used for variable names.

Text enclosed in curly braces {} is optional and may be repeated any number of times.

Text enclosed in square braces [] is optional and may present only once.

The '|' symbol is used to separate two or more mutually exclusive options, one of which must be
present.

Section 5 Annex A
5A-2 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Sequence File Format

The sequence files are formatted as follows:

[Line 1] Optional test set software version and date. Format :
<Code version>, <Date> e.g. : '1.01A, 1 May 01'
In this release the contents of this line are ignored.

[Line 2] File description. Maximum length 80 characters. Text positioned here is displayed
as the Description Field of the File Selection Screen.

[Line 3 ...] RIBASIC program lines
[...] etc.

Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE 5A-3
80-0013

List of Commands

ASK "title", "message"
"title" Title for dialogue box.
"message" Message to be displayed in dialogue box.

Example: ASK "Results Printing", "Do you require a full printout?"

This command displays a dialogue box on the MMI screen with the specified title and message,
and waits for the operator to press one of the function keys. The function keys displayed are
'Yes' in the top right key and 'No' in the bottom right key. The system variable Reply is set to 1 if
the 'Yes' button is pressed or 0 if the No button is pressed.

CONFIG config_command_name <parameter list>
config_command_name = BTSTYPE | BTS CODE | MAPPING | PORTYPE |
ABISIMP | RFCONN | FAULTREP | DBSIC | DCOCD |
GSM850CECD| GSMCECD | GSMRCECD |
DCSCECD | PCSCECD | DCOPT | GSM850NCED |
GSMNCED | GSMRNCED | DCSNCED | PCSNCED |
GSM850HTD | GSMHTD | GSMRHTD | DCSHTD |
PCSHTD | GSM850HTD | DRACH | DLAID | DCSPS |
DENCP | DTA | TRFCFG | REFSTD | TIMOP | LEVOS
| TSOPT | CLRMAP

Example: CONFIG DRACH 2, 5, 0, 1, 255, 1

This command runs the configure command to update the 6113 parameter database using the
given parameters. The command name mnemonics are as follows:

BTSTYPE Radio System and BTS type
BTSCODE BTS Code download directory path name
MAPPING Map the TRF / BCF to TEI / A-bis slot (see below*)
PORTYPE BTS / BSC interface
ABISIMP A-bis port I/O impedance
RFCONN RF connection type
FAULTREP BTS reports style
DBSIC Base Station ID
DCOCD Control Channel parameters
GSM850CECD Cell Channel parameters - GSM 850
GSMCECD Cell Channel parameters - E-GSM
GSMRCECD Cell Channel Parameters - E-GSM + R
DCSCECD Cell Channel parameters - DCS 1800
PCSCECD Cell Channel parameters - PCS 1900
DCOPT Cell Option parameters
GSM850NCED Neighbour Cells Description parameters - GSM 850
GSMNCED Neighbour Cells Description parameters - E-GSM
GSMRNCED Neighbour Cells Description parameters - E-GSM + R
DCSNCED Neighbour Cells Description parameters - DCS 1800
PCSNCED Neighbour Cells Description parameters - PCS 1900
GSM850HTD GSM 850 Hopping Table parameters
GSMHTD E-GSM 900 Hopping Table parameters
GSMRHTD E-GSM 900 + R Hopping Table parameters
DCSHTD DCS 1800 Hopping Table parameters
PCSHTD PCS 1900 Hopping Table parameters
DRACH RACH Control parameters
DLAID Location Area ID
DCSPS Cell Selection parameters
DENCP Encryption Kc
TRFCFG A-bis settings
TIMOP Timing Output parameters
LEVOS Level Offset parameters
TSOPT Miscellaneous Test Set parameters (see below*)
CLRMAP

Note: For a description of these commands including parameters, refer to SECTION 6 /
DEVICE DEPENDENT COMMANDS / GENERAL SYSTEM OPERATION
COMMANDS / GLOBAL PARAMETER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS (except
for commands marked with asterisk).
Section 5 Annex A
5A-4 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Note: The following Configuration Command is not available via the GPIB.

CONFIG MAPPING This command can be used in two ways:
-- to send BCF mapping parameters to the Test Set
-- to send TRX mapping parameters to the Test Set

(BCF) MAPPING linid, tei, sig_slot, sub_slot

Sends the BCF mapping parameters to the Test Set.

Mapping Line Indicator linid 0 Must be 0 for BCF
(Note 1)
TEI tei BTS specific
(Note 2)
0 to 127
BCF Signalling Slot sig_slot BTS specific
(Note 2)
0 to 31
BCF Signalling Sub Slot sub_slot BTS specific
(Note 2)
16 kbit/s Signalling : 0 to 3
32 kbit/s Signalling : 6 or 7
64 kbit/s Signalling : -1

Note: (1) The Mapping Line Indicator parameter effectively maps sequence file /
parameter file MAPPING commands onto the Mapping Table screen
format.

(2) See Section 7 Manufacturer-Specific Information.

(TRX) MAPPING linid, trx, cell, tei, sig_slot, sub_slot, tch_slot1, tch_slot2, arfcn, rad

Sends the transceiver mapping parameters to the Test Set.

Mapping Line Indicator linid BTS specific (Note 2) 1 to 15 (Note 1)
Transceiver Identifier trx BTS specific (Note 2) 0 to 127
Cell Number cell BTS specific (Note 2) 0 to 127
TEI tei BTS specific (Note 2) 0 to 127
Signal Slot sig_slot BTS specific (Note 2) 0 to 31
Sub Slot sub_slot BTS specific (Note 2) 16 kbit/s Signalling: 0 to 3
32 kbit/s Signalling: 6 or 7
64 kbit/s Signalling: -1
Traffic Channel Slot 1 tch_slot1 BTS specific (Note 2) 0 to 31
Traffic Channel Slot 2 tch_slot2 BTS specific (Note 2) 0 to 31
Channel Number arfcn BTS specific (Note 2) (See heading Radio
System Channel Number
Ranges).
Rack Address rad BTS specific (Note 2) 0 to 15

Note: (1) The Mapping Line Indicator parameter effectively maps sequence file /
parameter file MAPPING commands onto the Mapping Table screen
format.

(2) See Section 7 Manufacturer-Specific Information.

Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE 5A-5
80-0013

Note: The following Configuration Command is not available via the GPIB.

CONFIG TSOPT gpaddr, gpdist, std, buzz, timst, seqbuzz
Sends miscellaneous parameters to the Test Set

Parameter Typical Value Range
gpaddr GPIB Address 20 0 to 30
gpdist Display GPIB Traffic 0 0 = Off, 1 = On
std Frequency Standard 0 0 = 10 MHz, 1 = 13 MHz
buzz Buzzer Volume 1 0 = Off, 1 = Quiet, 2 = Loud
timst Staus Message Time
Stamping
1 0 = Off, 1 = On
seqbuzz Test Sequence Buzzer 1 0 = Off, 1 = On

INTEGER <argument list>
<argument list> = variable_name [= <integer_value>]{, variable_name
[= <integer_value>]}

Example: INTEGER mob_lev = 15

This parameter declares integer variables and optionally sets their initial values.

OCTET_LIST <argument list>

Used to declare an array of OCTET (8 bit values) variables. The size declaration is required but
the initialisation is optional. The maximum number of elments in the array is 255. Note that the
array size is stored in array element [0], array element [1] contains the first item of data.

Examples:

OCTET_LIST kc[8] = #H11, #H22 #H33, #H44, #H55, #H66, #H77, #H88

OCTET_LIST cm_service_request_msg[17] =
16, ! L3 Msg length
5, ! PD = MM
#H24, ! Msg Type, N(SD) = 0
#H01, ! CKSN + CM Svc Type
3, ! Mob Stn Class Mk 2 length
09, ! Phase 1 Class 1 GSM with A5/1
00, ! No SMS, No EGSM
00, ! No more info
08, ! Mobile Identity length
09, #H10,#H10,#H10,#H32,#H54,#H76,#H98

INT_LIST <argument list>

Used to declare an array of INTEGER (32 bit values) variables. The size declaration is required
but the initialisation is optional. The maximum number of elements in the array is 2
32
. Note that
the array size is stored in array element[0], array element[1] contains the first item of data.

Example:

INT_LIST SDCCH4_ARFCN_LIST[7] =
1, ! hsn
2, ! maio
4, ! 4 ARFCN values
62, ! 1st ARFCN
72, ! 2nd ARFCN
82, ! 3rd ARFCN
92 ! 4th ARFCN

Section 5 Annex A
5A-6 6113 EDGE
80-0013

[LET] variable = <expression>

expression Any valid mathematical expression evaluating to a numeric
value.

Example: LET sample = step + n

This command assigns the value of expression to variable. The LET keyword is optional.
Integer expressions are converted to floating point if variable is REAL, and floating point
expressions are converted to integer if variable is INTEGER. If variable has not been declared
then it is declared using the same type of the expression as the variable type.

LOAD "parameter_file"

parameter_file [<file_path>]<file_name>

Example: LOAD "a:\test3\advance8"

This command loads a parameter file from memory card to the Test Set parameter database.

MESSAGE "title", "message", time

"title" Title for dialogue box.
"message" Message to be displayed in dialogue box.
time Display time in seconds. If this is zero the display time is
indefinite.

Example: MESSAGE "Operator Message", "Please turn the mobile OFF", 0

This command displays a dialogue box on the MMI screen with the specified title and message,
and waits for either the operator to press the 'Okay' function key or for the specified time period
to expire. The function key displayed is 'Okay' in the bottom right key.

PRINT <argument list>

<argument list> = [print_element { , | ; print_element } [ , | ; ] ]
print_element = "<text string>" | variable_name

Example: PRINT "Current value of offset = ", offset

This command sends text to the selected results file, printer device or Test Set I/O port.
Variables are formatted automatically according to type. If there is no trailing ';' on the end of the
argument list, a carriage-return/line-feed pair is printed.

PRINT FOOTER

Sends the sequence results sheet footer to the selected results file, printer device or Test Set
I/O port, using the default format.

PRINT FORMFEED

Sends a formfeed character to the selected results file, printer device or Test Set I/O port.

PRINT HEADER

Sends the sequence results sheet header to the selected results file, printer device or Test Set
I/O port, using the default format.

Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE 5A-7
80-0013

PRINT RESULTS

Sends results from the last test to the selected results file, printer device or Test Set I/O port,
using the default format.

PRINT SUMMARY

Sends a pass fail summary of all the tests in the sequence to the selected results file, printer
device or Test Set I/O port. The format of the summary form is the same as the displayed
sequence summary form.

REAL <argument list>

<argument list> = variable_name [= <float_value>]{, variable_name [=
<float_value>]}

Example: REAL pwrl_limit = 3.0

Declares floating point variables and optionally sets their initial values.

SET AUTOEOT state

state = ON | OFF

Example: SET AUTOEOT OFF

Default for this command is ON.

This command enables or disables the automatic actions taken on test completion. SET
AUTOEOT OFF is equivalent to SET EOTACTION OFF, CONTINUE, OFF, CONTINUE, NO.

SET EOTACTION pass_print, pass_action, fail_print, fail_action, testinfo_print

pass_print, fail_print = ON | OFF
pass_action, fail_action = CONTINUE | EXIT | HOLD | REPEAT
testinfo_print = YES | NO

Example: SET EOTACTION ON, CONTINUE, ON, EXIT, NO

Default for this command is ON, CONTINUE, ON, HOLD, NO.

This command sets the default actions to be taken when a test completes.

SUMMARY

Runs the Sequence Summary Screen, displaying the results of the tests run during the
sequence.

Section 5 Annex A
5A-8 6113 EDGE
80-0013

SETUPRESULTS

This command will display the results setup screen as shown in the following diagram during the
execution of an AutoCiTA sequence, allowing the user to configure a results file. An example of
its use is shown the example code for the ResultsFileConfigured variable.

Results
Print
BTS Serial
Number(s)
Operator
Remarks
Test Results Header
Operator
Remarks
Results
Edit
Filename
Header
Print
Footer
EXIT
25 DEC 2000 14:12:44
FILE
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

SETTITLE

This command changes the text in the title bar at the top of the following operator message
screen used during an AutoCiTA sequence. This is useful for indicating to a user the current
position in a loop for example. The code below will display the current value of the user defined
variable Num in the title bar:

INTEGER Num = 0 ! Define variable and initialise to zero
STRING Num$ = ! String variable for Num variable

FOR Num =1 TO 5 STEP 1

LET Num$ = CHR$(48+(Num)) ! Convert number to string value
SETTITLE Num value = + Num$ ! Change the title to reflect
! current value
MESSAGE Operator Message, Example of SETTITLE Command ,0

NEXT

The above code will produce the following screen.

OPERATOR MESSAGE
S D
F R
Offsets: 0.00db 20 10 MHz
Num value = 1 25 DEC 2000 12:34:56
RESULT.PRT GPIB:
T.A.: RXLEV: RXQUAL:
OKay
Example of SETTITLE command

Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE 5A-9
80-0013

INPUT <string>, [variable]

Allows the user to modify the contents of an RIBASIC variable while an RIBASIC sequence is
running.

Where: <string> = Input Description to be displayed in the Input Dialogue Box on the
MMI display (see following diagram).

variable = any type of RIBASIC variable. If it has not previously been
declared, the variable is assumed to be REAL unless it is followed by $ (in
which case it is treated as being a string variable). String variables can
contain up to 255 alpha-numeric characters.

Example: INPUT Enter input string, input_string$
INPUT Enter TCH level: , tch_level

The MMI displays a dialogue box in a Text Editor screen as illustrated in the following diagram.

Offsets: Off 20 10 MHz
Parameters 3 AUG 1998 12:34:56
Results: Off Std: GPIB:
EXIT
Accept
Edit Mode
Upper
Overwrite
Case
Character
Spinwheel
Use Spinwheel to select character then press ENTER
Cancel
Clear Line
Input Dialogue Box
Enter input string
TC
ABCDEFGH IJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1234567890\ *.?_$:#%!"&( ),+ - / ; G

Figure 5A.1 Typical Input Dialogue Box

When the required value has been entered in the box, pressing the Accept button transfers the
entry to the specified variable (e.g. input_string$).

Note that if the specified variable does not have a $ suffix, then the Character Bar is not
displayed and the Numeric Keypad is used to enter numerals.

Refer to Section 5 / FILE MANAGER MENU / Generic Text Editor for a description of how to use
the Text Editor facilities.

Section 5 Annex A
5A-10 6113 EDGE
80-0013

TEST config_command_name <parameter list>
config_command_name = RSTBTS | CNFGBTS | CHNGTRX | LINKTST |
FULLCALL | CCCG | TXTST | TXL | SPWRL |
DPWRL | RXL | SENS | CRACH | RXLEV | RXQUAL |
RXSIG | MULTMODE | SCBA | BSCBA
Test Mnemonics:

RSTBTS Reset BTS test
CNFGBTS Configure BTS
CHNGTRX Change TRX test
LINKTST Link test
FULLCALL CiTA
CCCG Cell Control Channel Generation test
TXTST Transmitter test
TXL Transmitter BER/BLER test
SPWRL Static Power Control test
DPWRL Downlink Power Control test
RXL Receiver BER/BLER test
SENS Absolute Sensitivity test
CRACH Access Burst test
RXLEV Received Signal Level test
RXQUAL Received Signal Quality test
RXSIG Receiver Signalling BER test
MULTMODE Multimode test
SCBA Self Check Burst Analysis test
BSCBA RF Tests Self Check Burst Analysis test

parameter list List of parameters in the same order as on the MMI test
parameters screen. The format is the same as that given in
the Section 6.

Note: (1) For a description of these commands including parameters, refer to
Section 6 / TEST COMMANDS AND PARAMETERS.

(2) Additional Manufacturer-Specific tests are available as listed in

Example: TEST CRACH 90, 0, -104.7, 10, -1, 3

Alternatively, use variables and define their values as follows:

INTEGER tcn = 90
INTEGER tlvl = 0
REAL rlvl = -104.7
INTEGER nrach = 10
INTEGER rdel = -1
INTEGER terr = 3
TEST CRACH tcn, tlvl, rlvl, nrach, rdel, terr

This command runs the test using the given parameters. If AUTOEOT is ON then the default
actions specified by the EOTACTION command are taken, otherwise program execution
continues as normal.

Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE 5A-11
80-0013

STRING HANDLING COMMANDS

Definitions

String Identification

Strings are identified by a variable name ending with a dollar symbol. String variable names are
not case sensitive and may contain up to 32 characters including the dollar symbol. The format
is:

alpha_char { alpha_char | _ } $
alpha_char any alphanumeric character

In the context of the RIBASIC variable space, the dollar symbol is stored as part of the variable
name. This allows string variables to have the same alphanumeric identifier as another variable
type.

String Declaration

Strings are declared using the STRING keyword. There is no defined limit for the number of
strings that can exist. The number of strings that can be used is only limited by the amount of
spare memory available to the RIBASIC environment.

Initialisation may occur during the declaration. The STRING keyword may be omitted for
initialisation, by only one declaration may then occur on that line. The format is:

STRING variable_name [ = "character_string" ]
{ , variable_name [ = "character_string" ] }
variable_name must be terminated with dollar symbol
character_string any character sequence

Example: STRING Testname$ = Handover Test, TestID$
TestInfo$ = Ensure handset is turned on

String Expressions

String variables can be initialised and re-assigned using the optional LET keyword syntax. The
LET keyword can be omitted.

[LET] variable_name = string_expression
string_expression any valid string expression evaluating to a string

Example: LET a$ = b$ + c$
d$ = "Hello"
e$ = CHR$(65) + CHR$(66)

String expressions are also valid as part of an IF conditional expression. However, the string
conditional expressions must return a Boolean result. For example:

IF string_condition THEN command
string_condition string_expression = string_expression
string_expression < string_expression
string_expression > string_expression
string_expression <> string_expression
string_expression any valid string expression evaluating to a string

String expressions can also contain string functions.
Section 5 Annex A
5A-12 6113 EDGE
80-0013

String Functions

New string functions required for string manipulation are as follows:

ASC string Returns ASCII code for first character in string.
string String variable or quoted string.

CHR$ cardinal8 Returns single character string of ASCII code cardinal8.
cardinal8 Cardinal value < 256

LEN string Returns length of string.
string String variable or quoted string.

MID$ string,start,length Returns sub-string of string
string String variable or quoted string
start Start of sub-string
length Length of sub-string

String functions must have a single variable or value for a each parameter. Expressions are not
allowed as function parameters.

For example:

value1 = 48
value2 = 5
PRINT CHR$(value1) ! Valid function parameter
PRINT CHR$(value1 + value2) ! Invalid parameter - expression not allowed

Strings and Expressions as Keyword Parameters

Some keywords require a quoted string as a parameter. However, as string variables will be
available to the RIBASIC programmer, string variables will be valid parameters to keywords.

Example: ASK "Run Test", "Do you want to run Test 1"
ASK "Run Test", ask_test$

String expressions will also be valid as keyword parameters.

For example: ASK "Run Test", "Do you want to run Test " + CHR$(ascii_testno)

To ensure consistent command formation, all keywords allow expressions as parameters, no
matter what parameter type is required.

Commands affected: ASK, CONFIG, LOAD, MESSAGE, PRINT, TEST and WAIT

Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE 5A-13
80-0013

PROGRAM FLOW COMMANDS

END

Halts the program execution and marks the end of the program.

GOSUB label

Example: GOSUB Measure

Transfers program flow to line labelled label and continues until a RETURN command is
encountered, then program flow resumes at the line following the GOSUB command.

GOTO label

Transfers program flow to line labelled label.

Example: GOTO test3

IF condition_expression THEN command_1 [ELSE command_2]

Examples: IF TestResult > 10 THEN GOTO exit3 ELSE GOTO test4
IF Reply = NO THEN GOTO Finish ELSE pwrl = 7

Evaluates condition_expression, if it is TRUE then command_1 is executed, otherwise if the
optional ELSE is present command_2 is executed. The commands may not contain further IF
statements.

IF condition_expression
if_code
{ELSE IF condition_expression
if_code}
[ELSE
else_code]
ENDIF

Example: IF add3 < 10
PRINT "Unit is OK"
ELSE IF add3 < 30
IF add3 < 20
PRINT "Unit can be repaired"
ELSE
PRINT "Return to Service Department"
ELSE
PRINT "Scrap the unit"
ENDIF

Evaluates the condition_expressions in turn until one evaluates to TRUE, then the following
if_code block is executed. If none are TRUE and ELSE is present then the else_code block is
executed. The if_code and else_code blocks may contain further IF statements.

Section 5 Annex A
5A-14 6113 EDGE
80-0013

RETURN

Returns program flow to the line following the most recent GOSUB command.

STOP

Halts program execution permanently.

WAIT <integer>

Halts program execution for a defined number of seconds.

Example: WAIT 20

Halts the program execution for 20 seconds.

ON ERROR GOTO | GOSUB label

When a program error is encountered, execution can be diverted to a specific error handler.

OFF ERROR

This command turns off error handling. If an error is encountered, program execution will
terminate.

RESUME

This command is used in conjunction with ON ERROR GOSUB to allow program execution to
continue.

Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE 5A-15
80-0013

LOOP STRUCTURES

Three types of loop structure are provided:

FOR...NEXT
REPEAT...UNTIL
WHILE...ENDWHILE

FOR...NEXT Loop

The FOR...NEXT loop is used to produce a fixed number of iterations, where a sequence block
is executed a predetermined number of times. A control variable (loop counter) is used to
determine the number of iterations.

FOR control_var = start TO end [STEP increment] [statement_block] NEXT

control_var An integer or real variable used as the loop counter.
start An expression for the initial value of the loop counter.
end An expression for the final value of the loop counter.
increment An expression for the amount the loop counter is changed
each loop repetition (the default is +1).
statement_block Any number of statements / commands.

Example: FOR count = 1.5 TO 1 STEP -0.1
PRINT I
NEXT

On first execution of the FOR...NEXT loop, the control variable is assigned the value of the start
expression. When the NEXT statement is reached, the control variable is incremented by the
amount defined by the increment expression. The increment expression cannot change while
the loop iterates because it is saved by the interpreter on the first execution of the FOR
command.

The statement blocks are only executed if the control variable is within the final value of the
loop counter. The criteria for deciding whether the control variable is within the final loop
counter value depend upon the value of the increment:

If the increment is positive then the control variable must be less then or equal to the final
value for the statement blocks to be executed.

If the increment is negative (i.e. a decrement) then the control variable must be less than
or equal to the final value.

On the first execution of the FOR...NEXT loop, if the control variable does not meet the
execution criteria of the final value, the loop is skipped.

Section 5 Annex A
5A-16 6113 EDGE
80-0013

REPEAT...UNTIL Loop

The REPEAT...UNTIL structure is used for repeating a sequence block until a certain condition
is true. This structure does not require the number of iterations to be explicitly stated.

REPEAT
[statement_block]
UNTIL condition

statement_block Any number of statements / commands.
condition A conditional expression evaluating to TRUE or FALSE.

Example i = 1.5
REPEAT
PRINT I
i = i - 0.1
UNTIL i = 1

On the first pass of the REPEAT...UNTIL loop the statement block will be executed. If the
UNTIL condition is not met, the program control returns to the first line of the statement block.
This continues until the UNTIL condition is met.

WHILE...ENDWHILE Loop

The WHILE...ENDWHILE loop is also used for repeating a sequence block until a certain
condition is true. However, the difference between this and the REPEAT...UNTIL loop structure
is the location of the exit condition test. The WHILE loop has an exit condition test at the start of
the loop, therefore allowing the loop to be skipped entirely. The REPEAT loop has the exit
condition test at the end of the loop, so the loop is always executed at least once.

WHILE condition
[statement_block]
ENDWHILE

condition a conditional expression evaluating to TRUE or FALSE

statement_block any number of statements / commands

Example: i = 1.5
WHILE i >= 1
PRINT i
i = i - 0.1
ENDWHILE

Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE 5A-17
80-0013

VARIABLES

There are four types of variable currently supported:

INTEGER variables are signed 32-bit quantities, range approximately 2.1475 x 10
9

REAL variables are single-precision floating-point values,
range approximately 3.4038 x 10
38

OCT variables are unsigned 8-bit quantities, range 0 to 255.

STRING variables are identified by a name ending with a dollar symbol. (See STRING
HANDLING COMMANDS for more details).

Variable names are not case-sensitive and may contain up to 32 characters. The format is:

alpha_char {alpha_char | digit | _ }
alpha_char any alphabetic character whose ASCII value is less than 128.
This excludes accented characters.
digit any digit between 0 and 9

When assigning a value of type REAL to an INTEGER variable, the floating point number will be
rounded to the nearest whole number. For example:

3.4 will become 3
3.6 will become 4
-3.2 will become -3
-3.8 will become -4

System Variables

BTSManufacturer

This system variable stores the current BTS Manufacturer value (determined from the Test Set).
This can be used to add intelligence to a sequence and allow it to operate according to which
BTS is in use. An example of its use is:

IF (BTSManufacturer = Nokia)
MESSAGE Operator Message, BTS Manufacturer is Nokia,0
ENDIF

BTSModel

This system variable stores the BTS Model. An example of its use is:

IF (BTSModel = Talk Family)
MESSAGE Operator Message, BTS Model is Talk Family,0
ENDIF

ResultsFileConfigured

This variable allows the sequence to determine if a results file has been configured prior to the
script execution. If the results file is not configured then the user can be informed or the results
setup screen can be displayed using the new SETUPRESULTS command. For example:

IF (ResultsFileConfigured = No) THEN SETUPRESULTS
Section 5 Annex A
5A-18 6113 EDGE
80-0013

RESULTS FORMATTING COMMANDS

A virtual text screen is provided to enable text to be positioned as required on a page. The
following commands allow text to be positioned on the virtual pad. A print formatting command
is also provided.

The 'virtual pad' is a virtual text screen on which the RIBASIC user can prepare text. It has
dimensions of 80 characters across by 64 lines down. The programmer can re-assign the
printer to the virtual pad to re-direct print output to this virtual text screen. Text can be positioned
anywhere on the virtual pad by using the PRINT TAB command. The virtual pad can then be
printed by using the DUMPPAD command. The major difference between the virtual pad and
standard computer screen output is that the virtual pad does not scroll up if printing past the last
line occurs. Any characters printed after the bottom right corner of the virtual pad are discarded.

The PRINT command output can be re-directed to either the selected results destination
(default) or to the virtual pad.

Note: In the following section:

The term PRINT refers to the process of sending text to either a Printer device, Result
File, or other Test Set I/O Port.

The term PRINTER refers to a destination device or port, this device could be either:

A hard copy device (Printer)
A Results File, located on the Test Set memory card
A remote device, connected to one of the test set I/O ports.

PRINTCMD device Directs the output directly to the results destination or to the pad

device PRINTER | PAD
where PRINTER is the normal printer / results file destination and PAD is the virtual pad.

Note: This command will only redirect the standard PRINT command output and does not
effect other printer commands such as PRINT FOOTER, PRINT FORMFEED, PRINT
RESULTS and graphical print commands. These commands are output directly to the
selected results port.

PRINT TAB( x [, y ] ); [expression {; TAB( x [, y ] ); [expression]} ]

Positions text anywhere on the pad.

x x coordinate of print device (integer)
y y coordinate of print device (integer)
expression any valid expression

If the y coordinate is omitted from the command then the print position is only adjusted in the x
plane. If the print device is set to PRINTER and the y coordinate is included in the command,
the print position is shifted down y lines.

DUMPPAD [ from_line [, to_line] ]

Dumps the virtual pad to the printer.

from_line Start print line of virtual pad.
to_line End print line of virtual pad.

If both parameters are omitted then the whole pad is sent to the printer. If one line is specified
as a single parameter, then that single line is sent to the printer. If two parameters are specified,
the range of specified lines are printed. The virtual pad cannot be used to store internal pre-
defined result summaries and other internal print commands. Therefore a formfeed is not
automatically sent to the printer when the DUMPPAD command is used, allowing the user to first
print headers and/or other system information. A formfeed can be forced by using a PRINT
FORMFEED command.

Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE 5A-19
80-0013

CLEARPAD This command clears the virtual pad.

This command takes no parameters.

PRINT USING format_string; expression {, expression} [ ; | , ]
This command formats the print output.

format_string string variable or quoted string of format description

The format_string controls and defines the format of the expression when it is printed. The
format string must follow the using keyword, otherwise a syntax error is produced. After the
format string, the list of expressions must follow. No other printing formatters (e.g. TAB) are
allowed.

The output format is defined with the following list of image specifiers:

(1) < [ + | - ] < [repeat_factor] D{D} > | < [repeat_factor] Z{Z} >
[ < . | R > [ [repeat_factor] D{D}] ] [ E+ [repeat_factor] <Z | D > { Z | D}] ] >
(2) | < [repeat_factor] A{A} >
(3) | < " " literals " " >

where the repeat_factor is a positive integer specifying the number of times the following literal is
to be repeated,

and < > denote grouped specifiers
[ ] denote optional specifiers
{ } denote optional specifiers that can be repeated
| denotes an OR operator

The format string must follow the using keyword, otherwise a syntax error is produced. After the
format string, the list of expressions must follow. No other printing formatters (e.g. TAB) are
allowed.

Effects of the image specifiers on the PRINT statement are shown in the following table:

TABLE 5A.1 PRINT USING SPECIFIERS

Image Specifier Description
+ Prints the number's sign ( + or - ).
- Prints the number's sign if negative, a blank if positive. If the sign field is
omitted then no sign is printed.
D Prints one digit character. A leading zero is replaced by a blank.
Z Prints one digit character. Leading zeros are printed.
. Prints a decimal-point radix indicator.
R Prints a comma (European) radix indicator.
E+ Prints an E, a sign followed by the exponent. The exponent size must
also be defined.
A Prints a string character. Trailing blanks are output if the number of
characters specified is greater than the number available in the
corresponding string. If the number of characters specified is less than
the number available, then the string is truncated.
literals Prints the characters of the string.

Section 5 Annex A
5A-20 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Examples:

Money = 72.34
PRINT USING "2D"; Money
will format and print 'Money' as: 72

Money = -2.34
PRINT USING "2D.D"; Money
will format and print 'Money' as: 2.3

Money = 2.34
PRINT USING "+ZZZ.D"; Money
will format and print 'Money' as: +002.3

Money = -2.34
PRINT USING "-2Z.3D"; Money
will format and print 'Money' as: 02.340

Power = -2.34
PRINT USING " ""POWER: "", -2Z.3D"; Power
will print: POWER: -02.340

PRINT USING " "" | "",+ZZ.DD,"" | "",DDR4D,"" | "",5A,"" | "" ": 9, -33, "HELLO TEST"
will print: | +09.00 | 33,0000 | HELLO |

PRINT USING "+4Z.DDD E+ZZ, "" & "", +.3ZE+5D"; 34, 38
will print: +0003.400E+01 & +-.380E+00002

PRINT USING "-3D.DDD E+ZZ, "" & "", 3DE+5D" ; 72, -6.55
will print: 720.000E-01 & 655E-00002

Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE 5A-21
80-0013

Graphical Results Commands

The graphical results of certain tests can be printed using the following commands. Note that
the graphical result output is only valid when the output device is set to an Epson FX80
compatible printer.

The following commands are available for printing graphical results:

PHASEDUMP [phase_range] Prints the last phase error graph.
phase_range WIDE ( 30) | NARROW ( 10)

MODSPDUMP [frequency_range] Prints the last modulation spectrum graph.
frequency_range WIDE (500 kHz) | NARROW (200 kHz)

POWERDUMP [bit_range] [power_range] Prints the last power profile graph.
bit_range FULL (-10:+155) | START (-10:+10) | END (+135:+155)
power_range WIDE (-70:+10 dB) | NARROW (-5:+5 dB)

EVMDUMP [evm_range] Prints the last EVM graph.
evm_range WIDE ( 30%) | NARROW ( 10%)

IQDUMP [iq_range] Prints the last IQ graph.
iq_range OUT (0 to 1 I/Q) | IN (0 to 0.5 I/Q)

Note: All parameters are optional and default parameters are underlined. The range
parameters allow printing of the standard zoom areas of the results graphs.

Section 5 Annex A
5A-22 6113 EDGE
80-0013

RESULTS RETURNED AS RIBASIC SYSTEM VARIABLES

The list of system variables is as follows:

Test Name Variable Name Variable Type Description
Transmitter TxMinFreq Float Minimum Frequency Error
TxMaxFreq Float Maximum Frequency Error
TxMeanFreq Float Mean Average Frequency Error
TxMinRmsPhase Float Minimum RMS Phase Error
TxMaxRmsPhase Float Maximum RMS Phase Error
TxMeanRmsPhase Float Mean Average RMS Phase Error
TxMinPeakPhase Float Minimum Peak Phase Error
TxMaxPeakPhase Float Maximum Peak Phase Error
TxMeanPeakPhase Float Mean Average Peak Phase Error
TxRequested Float Requested Power Level
TxRequestedDb Float Requested Power Level in dBs
TxPower Float Measured Power Level
TxError Float Error of Power Level
TxProfile Integer Power Profile Test ( Pass or Fail)
TxModulation Integer Modulation Spectrum Test ( Pass or
Fail)
TxMinPeakEVM Float Minimum Peak EVM
TxMaxPeakEVM Float Maximum Peak EVM
TxMeanPeakEVM Float MeanPeakEVM
TxMinRmsEVM Float Minimum RMS EVM
TxMaxRmsEVM Float Maximum RMS EVM
TxMeanRmsEVM Float Mean RMS EVM
TxMin95pcEVM Float Minimum 95
th
percentile EVM
TxMax95pcEVM Float Maximum 95
th
percentile EVM
TxMean95pcEVM Float Mean 95
th
percentile EVM
TxOriginOffset Float Origin Offset
TxEVM Integer EVM Test (Pass or Fail)
Static Power StaticTarget Float Array Target Power Level
Level StaticMeasured Float Array Measured Power Level
StaticStepErr Float Array Step Error
StaticCumErr Float Array Total Cumulative Error
Downlink Power DnlnkMeasured Float Array Measured Power Level
Level DnlnkStepSize Float Array Step Size
DnlnkStepErr Float Array Step Error
DnlnkCumErr Float Array Total Cumulative Error
Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE 5A-23
80-0013

TX BER TxFers Integer Number of FER samples in BER
measurement
TxFere Integer Number of FER events in BER
measurement
TxFerr Float Ratio of FER samples in BER
measurement
TxC1bs Integer Number of Class Ib samples in BER
measurement
TxC1be Integer Number of Class Ib events in BER
measurement
TxC1br Float Ratio of Class Ib samples in BER
measurement
TxC2s Integer Number of Class II samples in BER
measurement
TxC2e Integer Number of Class II events in BER
measurement
TxC2r Float Ratio of Class II samples in BER
measurement
RX BER RxFers Integer Number of FER samples in BER
measurement
RxFere Integer Number of FER events in BER
measurement
RxFerr Float Ratio of FER samples in BER
measurement
RxC1bs Integer Number of Class Ib samples in BER
measurement
RxC1be Integer Number of Class Ib events in BER
measurement
RxC1br Float Ratio of Class Ib samples in BER
measurement
RxC2s Integer Number of Class II samples in BER
measurement
RxC2e Integer Number of Class II events in BER
measurement
RxC2r Float Ratio of Class II samples in BER
measurement

Note: When the value chosen for TCH format parameter is a circuit switched data rate i.e.
Data F2.4, Data F4.8, Data F9.6, Data F14.4, the variables RxFers, RxFere, RxFerr hold
the results of the BER measurement.
When the value chosen for TCH format parameter is a GPRS or EGPRS rate, the
variables RxFers, RxFere, RxFerr hold the results of the Block Error portion of the BLER
measurement. RxC1bs, RxC1be, RxC1br hold the results of the Bit Error portion of the
BLER measurement.
Refer to A-bis CONTROLLED TESTING / TCH Format Parameter in Section 4 for more
details.
Section 5 Annex A
5A-24 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Absolute
Sensitivity
Sensitivity Float The lowest BTS Output Power Level at
which the specified BER can be
maintained.
Rach RachFers Integer Samples Count
RachFere Integer Failures Count
RachFerr Float Failure Ratio
RachAccessFail Integer Invalid Access Request Count
RachFoundFail Integer Not Found
RachTimingFail Integer Bad Timing Advance
RachSpurious Integer Spurious Count
RX Level RXLevNomLev Integer Array Nominal RX Level value of current step.
RXLevTestLev Float Array Requested Signal Level of current step.
RXLevMin Integer Array Minimum RX Level value reported.
RXLevMax Integer Array Maximum RX Level value reported.
RXLevMean Float Array Mean RX Level value reported.
RX Qual RXQualLev Float Array Requested Signal Level of current step.
RXQualSamples Integer Array Number of Samples.
RXQual0 Integer Array Number of Samples of RX Quality Level 0.
RXQualBer Float Array Result of Class II BERTest
N/A RadioSys Integer System radio band
N/A ErrorMsg$ String RI Basic error that has just been trapped.
N/A ErrorLn Integer Line number where error has just been
trapped.
N/A TestResult Integer Set to pass/fail result on completion of
TEST command.
N/A Reply Integer Set to 0 or 1 by ASK command.
N/A Time$ String Contains the time in the format
HH:MM:SS
N/A Date$ String Contains the date in the format
DD MMM YYYY

Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE 5A-25
80-0013

SYSTEM CONSTANTS

System constants are pre-defined variable names that are set automatically by the Test Set, and
may be used by the sequence program.

For example: IF TestResult = TestComplete THEN PRINT "Test Complete"

Constant Value
Pass 0 (TestResult value)
FailTestAborted 16 (TestResult value)
TestComplete 26 (TestResult value)
FailNoBTSTypeSet 34 (TestResult value)

No 0 (Reply value)
Yes 1 (Reply value)

OPERATORS

Mathematical +, -, *, /, =, B_AND, B_OR, B_XOR, B_NOT, B_RIGHT, B_LEFT, MOD
Conditional <, <=, >, >=, <>, =.
Logical AND, NOT, OR
Precedence (highest first):
()
B_LEFT, B_RIGHT
B_NOT, B_XOR, B_OR, B_AND
- (arithmetic negation)
NOT,
MOD
/, *
-, +
>=, >, <=, <, <>, =
OR, AND

EXPRESSIONS

Complex mathematical and logical expressions may be evaluated, using both variables and
constant values. Standard algebraic operator precedence is observed. Brackets are used to
force ordering of operations; they may be nested to a depth of 10 levels.
Section 5 Annex A
5A-26 6113 EDGE
80-0013

LABELS

Labels may be defined at the start of lines using the following syntax:

Label: <line of code>

Variable names are not case-sensitive and may contain up to 32 characters. The format is:

alpha_char {alpha_char | digit | _ }
alpha_char Any alphabetic character whose ASCII value is less than
128. This excludes accented characters.
digit Any digit between 0 and 9

COMMENTS

Comment lines are preceded by a '!' character. All text after this character to the end of the line
is ignored.

Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE 5A-27
80-0013

ERROR HANDLING

Each line is checked for correct syntax before execution. If a syntax error is encountered, an
error message is displayed on the screen giving the error message and the offending line of
code. The sequence then terminates.

The list of error messages and their meanings is given below.

"Both values must be numeric for comparison"
An attempt has been made in a comparison expression to compare a value with the result of
another comparison.
Example: IF a > (b < c)

"Both values must be numeric for operation"
An attempt has been made in an expression to combine a value with the result of another
comparison.
Example: a = (b < c) + d

"Float value too big for integer"
A floating-point value has been used in a TEST or CONFIG command for an integer parameter,
and the value is too great to be represented as an integer.
Example: TEST SYNC "0012234456", 2e22

"Illegal character"
An illegal character has been encountered. This may either be a punctuation character (unused
in RIBASIC) or when any character other than 'H' follows '#' in a parameter value string.

"Illegal close-bracket"
A close-bracket character has been encountered in an expression where a value was expected.
Example: a = (b + )c) + d

"Illegal keyword in SET AUTOEOT"
An illegal keyword has been found in a SET AUTOEOT command.
Example: SET AUTOEOT PRINT

"Illegal keyword in SET EOTACTION"
An illegal keyword has been found in a SET EOTACTION command.
Example: SET EOTACTION PRINT, CONTINUE, ON, EXIT, NO

"Illegal keyword in SET"
An illegal keyword has been found in a SET command
Example: SET PRINT

"Illegal nested IF statement"
A second IF command has been found in a single-line IF statement.
Example: IF a=b THEN IF c=d THEN GOTO Error
Section 5 Annex A
5A-28 6113 EDGE
80-0013

"Illegal open-bracket"
An open-bracket character has been encountered in an expression where an operator was
expected.
Example: a = (b (+ c) + d

"Illegal position for operator"
An operator has been encountered in an expression where a value was expected.
Example: a = (b + * c) + d

"Illegal position for value"
A value has been encountered in an expression where an operator was expected.
Example: a = (b c) + d

"Label already exists"
An attempt has been made to define a label used earlier in the sequence.
Example: start: a = 1
.
.
start: a = 2

"Logical operator used on non-logical expression"
A logical operator has been applied to an expression that does not evaluate to a logical value.
Example: a = (b < c) AND (d + 5)

"Maximum depth of GOSUB nesting = 16"
The maximum number of GOSUB commands that may be executed before a RETURN
command is 16.

"Missing '=' in assignment"
The '=' character in a LET command is missing.
Example: LET a (b - c) + d

"Missing \" at end of string"
The final '"' is missing at the end of a string. This may be either in a TEST or CONFIG
parameter or in a PRINT command.
Example: PRINT "a = , a

"Missing comma in parameters"
A comma separator is missing in the list of parameters for a command.
Example: SET EOTACTION ON CONTINUE, ON, EXIT, NO

"Missing keyword in SET AUTOEOT"
The ON or OFF keyword is missing in the SET AUTOEOT command.
Example: SET AUTOEOT
Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE 5A-29
80-0013

"Missing keyword in SET EOTACTION"
A keyword is missing in the SET EOTACTION command.
Example: SET EOTACTION ON CONTINUE, ON, YES

"Missing keyword in SET"
The second keyword is missing in a SET command.
Example: SET

"Missing message for dialogue box"
The message string for the dialogue box in the ASK and MESSAGE commands is missing.
Example: ASK "Operator Query"

"Missing title for dialogue box"
The title string for the dialogue box in the ASK and MESSAGE commands is missing.
Example: MESSAGE

"Missing value for display time"
The display period for the dialogue box in the MESSAGE commands is missing.
Example: MESSAGE "Operator Query", "Test Passed ?"

"RETURN when no GOSUB called"
A RETURN command has been encountered when no GOSUB command has been executed.

"String does not represent a value"
This message is expanded to include the string that is expected to represent a parameter value
in a TEST or CONFIG command but cannot be converted.
Example: TEST TXTST *

"Too many close-brackets"
A close-bracket has been encountered with no corresponding open-bracket.
Example: a = (b + c)) * d

"Too many open-brackets"
A open-bracket has been encountered with no corresponding close-bracket.
Example: a = ((b + c) * d

"Unknown variable"
A variable that has not been previously used or declared has been used in an expression or
command.

"Unrecognised CONFIG command name"
The CONFIG command name is not recognised. The names for the default commands are the
same as the GPIB mnemonics.
Example: CONFIG RACH_CONTROL....
Section 5 Annex A
5A-30 6113 EDGE
80-0013

"Unrecognised label"
A label that has not been previously defined has been used in a GOTO or GOSUB command.

"Unrecognised symbol"
A symbol or string has been found in an expression which is not part of the expression
Example: a = (b < c) + [

"Unrecognised TEST name"
The TEST command name is not recognised. The names for the default commands are the
same as the GPIB mnemonics for the Run Test GPIB commands.
Example: TEST PHASE_ERROR ....

"Variable already exists"
An attempt has been made in a REAL or INTEGER command to declare a variable that already
exists.
Example: INTEGER a = 2, b = 4, a = 5

"Variable used without being initialised"
An attempt has been made in an expression to reference a variable that has not been initialised
with a value.

The following error messages are also used:

"Out of memory"
"Invalid Array Index"
"Internal RIBASIC error"
"DIVIDE-BY-ZERO !"
"Resume when no GOSUB called"
"INTERNAL RIBASIC ERROR - BAD FOR INCREMENT"
"INTERNAL RIBASIC ERROR - BAD FOR CONDITION"
"No Memory Card present"
"TAB value out of range"
"Error in TAB () expression"
"PRINT USING formation error"
"PRINT USING image specifier error"
"PRINTCMD Error: Invalid keyword"
"DUMPPAD Error: Parameter out of range"
"CLEARPAD Error: Unexpected parameter"
"Type conflict error"
"Invalid Function call"
"Invalid Graph Dump command"
"RESUME when no GOSUB called"
Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE 5A-31
80-0013

"Invalid ON ERROR command"
"Invalid ON event"
"Invalid OFF event"
"Badly formed REPEAT"
"UNTIL without REPEAT"
"ENDWHILE without WHILE"
"Badly formed ENDWHILE"
"Badly formed FOR"
"Badly formed NEXT"
"NEXT without FOR"
"Missing Array Index"
"Invalid Array Index"
"Program terminated with errors"
"Line number out of range"
"File too big for Test Set"
Too much Sequence File data"
"Too many lines for line number store"
"Init RIBASIC area failed"
"Pre-Process File failed"
"No Sequence File loaded"

Section 5 Annex A
5A-32 6113 EDGE
80-0013

SEQUENCE FILE LISTINGS

The following listings are examples of RIBASIC programs. Electronic copies of these and other
files are available from Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions.

Note that additional information relating to test commands can be found in Section 6 under the
heading TEST COMMANDS AND PARAMETERS.

Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE
80-0013 5A-33

EXAMPLE1.SEQ

RIBASIC 02/02/94
Example to demonstrate test results handling.
!***********************************************************************
! *
! Racal Instruments Ltd, 1994. *
! *
! 6113 Sequence File: EXAMPLE1.SEQ *
! *
! This sequence is provided as an illustration of the *
! capabilities of the 6113's programming language. *
!***********************************************************************
tchl = -85.0
mpwr = 15
step = 0
finished = 0

PRINT "/****************************************************************"
PRINT "* *"
PRINT "* 6113 Customized Results Printout: POWER_EG.SEQ *"
PRINT "* *"
PRINT "****************************************************************/"
PRINT
PRINT
PRINT " Results for Power Level Test"
PRINT " ----------------------------"

SET AUTOEOT OFF

MESSAGE "Programmable Test Sequences","Press OKAY to continue",0

Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE
80-0013 5A-34

!...............................LOOP............................

loop:
step = step + 1
TEST TXTST 62, tchl, 4, mpwr, 0, 0, 10, 6, 95, 5, 20, 3, 0
! Perform Transmitter Test
GOSUB print_parameters ! Call subroutine to print results
tchl = tchl - 5 ! Adjust TCHL Level
mpwr = mpwr + 2 ! Adjust Mobile Power Level

IF (step < 4) AND (finished = 0) THEN GOTO loop ! Loop back if required

!...............................................................

SUMMARY ! Print results summary to screen

ASK "Print Option","Would you like a summary printout?"
IF REPLY = YES THEN PRINT SUMMARY ! Print results summary to output device

STOP

! ************************* End of main body ********************

print_parameters:

PRINT
PRINT
PRINT "Test Number : ";step
PRINT "^^^^^^^^^^^ "
PRINT "Parameters : TCH level = "; tchl;" Mobile power level = "; mpwr
PRINT " TCH ARFCN = 62 TCH Slot = 4"
PRINT
PRINT "-> ";
Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE
80-0013 5A-35

IF TestResult = Pass THEN PRINT " Test Passed"
IF TestResult = FailCallSetup THEN PRINT " Test Failed : Call Setup Failed"
IF TestResult = FailCallLost THEN PRINT " Test Failed : Call Lost"
IF TestResult = FailProtocolError THEN PRINT " Test Failed : Protocol Error"
IF TestResult = FailOutOfBounds THEN PRINT " Test Failed : Measurement Out Of Bounds"
IF TestResult = FailAborted THEN PRINT " Test Failed : Test Aborted"
IF TestResult = FailNoCall THEN PRINT " Test Failed : No Call Present"

IF STEP < 4 !(I.E. Only do this bit if we have not done the last test)
IF TestResult = FailCallSetup THEN ASK "Call Setup Failed","Continue Testing?"
IF TestResult = FailCallLost THEN ASK "Call Lost","Continue Testing?"
IF TestResult = FailProtocolError THEN ASK "Protocol Error","Continue Testing?"
IF TestResult = FailOutOfBounds THEN ASK "Measurement Out Of Bounds","Continue Testing?"
IF TestResult = FailAborted THEN ASK "Test Aborted","Continue Testing?"
IF TestResult = FailNoCall THEN ASK "No Call Present","Continue Testing?"
IF (TestResult <> Pass) AND (REPLY = 0)
finished = 1
PRINT
PRINT
PRINT " **************** Test Aborted ****************"
ENDIF
ELSE !(I.E. If we have just finished the last test)
IF TestResult = FailCallSetup THEN MESSAGE "Call Setup Failed","",3
IF TestResult = FailCallLost THEN MESSAGE "Call Lost","",3
IF TestResult = FailProtocolError THEN MESSAGE "Protocol Error","",3
IF TestResult = FailOutOfBounds THEN MESSAGE "Measurement Out Of Bounds","",3
IF TestResult = FailAborted THEN MESSAGE "Test Aborted","",3
IF TestResult = FailNoCall THEN MESSAGE "No Call Present","",3
ENDIF

RETURN

END
Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE
80-0013 5A-36

EXAMPLE2.SEQ

RIBASIC 02/02/93
Example: Use of Maths and Branch functions
!***********************************************************************
! *
! *
! *
! *
!***********************************************************************

!
! Program to find the number, "x", such that the reciprocal
! of "x" is "x" minus 1
! -> 1/x = x - 1
! -> x = 1 + 1/x

REAL x = 10, old_no, difference
INTEGER count = 0

PRINT "Example program to show use of mathematical and branch functions."
PRINT "^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^"
PRINT "Solution to: 1/x = x - 1. Solving by iteration..."
PRINT

MESSAGE "Example program showing use of maths and branch functions","1/x = x - 1 ..... Select 'Okay' to start
iterations",0

Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE
80-0013 5A-37

!.........................LOOP..........................

loop:
count = count + 1
PRINT "Iteration ";
IF count < 10 THEN PRINT " "; ! Extra space to format print evenly
PRINT count;". Value is: ";x ! Send value to output

old_no = x ! Save old value
x = 1 + 1 / x ! Get next iteration for x
difference = old_no - x ! Compare old value and x

IF difference < 0 THEN difference = difference * -1 ! Get absolute value

IF difference > 0.000001 THEN GOTO loop ! If difference is not negligible
! then return to beginning of loop

!........................................................

PRINT
PRINT "The solution is ";x;"."

MESSAGE "Solution Obtained","The results have been sent to your selected output",0

END

Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE
80-0013 5A-38

EXAMPLE3.SEQ

RIBASIC 02/02/94
Example: Use of GOSUB and GOTO in sequences
!***********************************************************************
! *
! *
! *
! *
!***********************************************************************

INTEGER count = 0 ! ( Declaration is not compulsory )

GOTO label_end

!************************** label_begin *************************

label_begin:

MESSAGE "GOSUB and GOTO example","We start off in the main body of the program",0
GOSUB label_A
MESSAGE "End of example","Finally, we have RETURNed to the main body",0

STOP

Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE
80-0013 5A-39

!************************** label_A *************************

label_A:

count = count + 1
IF count = 1
MESSAGE "Progress...","We have GOSUBed to A for the first time",0
GOSUB label_B
MESSAGE "Progress...","We have RETURNed to A",0
ELSE
MESSAGE "Progress...","We have GOSUBed to A for the second time",0
ENDIF

RETURN

!************************** label_B *************************

label_B:

MESSAGE "Progress...","We have GOSUBed to B",0
GOSUB label_A
MESSAGE "Progress...","We have RETURNed to B",0

RETURN

!************************** label_end *************************

label_end:

GOTO label_begin

END ! ( END command not compulsory )
Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE
80-0013 5A-40

EXAMPLE4.SEQ

RIBASIC 02/02/94
Example: Loading parameters / Using 'AUTOEOT'
!***********************************************************************
! *
! *
! *
!***********************************************************************

ASK "","Do you want to load the parameter file 'a:\example4.prm'?"
IF REPLY = YES
LOAD "a:\example4.prm" ! Load parameter Files
ELSE
ASK "Alter parameters","Set the DLAID parameters?"
IF REPLY = YES THEN CONFIG DLAID 0,1,1,1 ! Alter DLAID parameters is desired
ENDIF

SET AUTOEOT OFF ! AUTOEOT is off, so sequence program controls
! actions after each test is finished

MESSAGE "Receiver Test","AUTOEOT state is currently off",0
TEST RXTST 62, -100, 4, 7, 0, 0, 0, 2, 6, 0.2, 0.41, 2.44, 6, 2

IF TestResult = PASS
MESSAGE "Test Result","Pass",0
ELSE
MESSAGE "Test Result","Fail",0
ENDIF
Section 5 Annex A
6113 EDGE
80-0013 5A-41

SET AUTOEOT ON ! AUTOEOT is on, which means that various actions
! are taken automatically after each test

! These actions are: pass_print (ON/OFF)
! (see next command) pass_action (CONTINUE/EXIT/HOLD/REPEAT)
! fail_print (ON/OFF)
! fail_action (CONTINUE/EXIT/HOLD/REPEAT)
! testinfo_print (YES/NO)

SET EOTACTION OFF,CONTINUE,OFF,REPEAT,NO

MESSAGE "Receiver Test","AUTOEOT now on: Params.. OFF,CONTINUE,OFF,REPEAT,NO",0

TEST RXTST 62, -100, 4, 7, 0, 0, 0, 2, 6, 0.2, 0.41, 2.44, 6, 2

PRINT HEADER
PRINT
PRINT SUMMARY
PRINT "------------------------------------------------------------------------"
PRINT
PRINT FOOTER
SUMMARY

END

SECTION 5 ANNEX B

AUTOCITA TEST SEQUENCE

CONTENTS

Page / Hyperlink

INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................. 1
AUTOCITA SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS...................................................................... 2
Select a Parameter File ............................................................................................ 2
Select a Results File ................................................................................................. 3
Set the Number of TRXs to Test............................................................................... 3
Set TRX Configuration Parameters .......................................................................... 4
Define the TRX Testing Order .................................................................................. 5
Set the Traffic Format and Call Type Parameters .................................................... 7
Run CiTA Test ........................................................................................................ 10
BTS SPECIFIC SCREENS............................................................................................... 11
RIBASIC ENHANCEMENTS ............................................................................................ 12

ILLUSTRATIONS


5B.1 BTS Parameter File .................................................................................................. 2
5B.2 Results Configuration................................................................................................ 3
5B.3 Number of TRXs....................................................................................................... 3
5B.4 Enter Channel Number ............................................................................................. 4
5B.5 Enter TRX Power Level ............................................................................................ 4
5B.6 Layout of TRXs ......................................................................................................... 5
5B.7 Start TRX.................................................................................................................. 5
5B.8 Enter TRX Number to Test ....................................................................................... 6
5B.9 Enter Start TRX ID.................................................................................................... 6
5B.10 Default Traffic Parameter Settings.......................................................................... 7
5B.11 Traffic Channel (TCH) Format ................................................................................ 8
5B.12 Call Type................................................................................................................. 9
5B.13 Run AutoCiTA....................................................................................................... 10

6113 EDGE 5B-(i)/(ii)
80-0013
SECTION 5 ANNEX B AUTOCITA TEST SEQUENCE

INTRODUCTION

(Refer to Section 4 / NOTES ON CELL INTEGRITY TESTING AND ANALYSIS)

The AutoCiTA facility provided with Option 311 for the Racal 6113 BTS Test Set allows the user
to configure and run a completely automated sequence of CiTA tests, following the normal BTS
commissioning procedure. AutoCiTA makes its possible for users to drive/test all sectors,
antennas, etc, without returning to the cell site between tests.

It is not necessary for the user to write a sequence suitable for each BTS site (varying number of
TRXs, different planned ARFCNs, choice of TX power levels etc). These parameters are
automatically assigned by the sequence program following selective inputs from the user.

The AutoCiTA sequence must be downloaded from the CD containing Option 311 and
transferred to a suitable memory card. The AutoCiTA sequence is then loaded into the 6113
Test Set by placing the memory card in the PCMCIA slot and using the Load Sequence option in
the Test Sequences Menu (see Section 5 / TEST SEQUENCES MENU). When the AutoCiTA
sequence is loaded, the user is automatically presented with a series of input screens that
prompt the user to enter all the information necessary to allow the tests to run automatically and
correctly.

The sequence of operations to be performed is as follows:

(1) Select a Parameter File.

(2) Select a Results File.

(3) Set the number of TRXs to test.

(4) Set TRX Configuration parameters.

(5) Define the TRX testing order.

(6) Set the Traffic Format and Call type parameters.

(7) Run the CiTA test sequence.

(8) Run the Configure BTS Test.

(9) Run the Change TRX Test (not on Ericsson).

(10) Run the Cell Integrity Test (Mobile Originated - unlimited calls possible).

(11) Switch ON the mobile phone.

(12) Switch OFF the mobile phone (this forces the sequence to start the next test).

(13) Run the next set of tests for the next TRX (steps 6 to 10). Test all TRXs.

(14) Sequence completes.

These operations are described in the following paragraphs.

For certain types of BTS, additional screens are provided. These screens are described in the
Section 7 Manufacturer Specific Information provided for those types of BTS. Refer to the
current Software Release Note for details of which BTS types are supported for CiTA / AutoCiTA
testing.

To run the AutoCiTA sequence again from operation (3), using the same parameters and
Results File, press the Repeat (AutoCiTA) button.

To run the AutoCiTA sequence again with different parameters and a new Results file, EXIT to
the Main Menu screen and use the Parameters and Results options as required before selecting
AutoCiTA again using the Test Sequences / Load Sequence options.
6113 EDGE 5B-1
80-0013
Section 5 Annex B
AutoCiTA TEST SEQUENCE

AUTOCITA SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

The following sequence of screens are displayed when preparing and running the AutoCiTA test
sequence. Note that in this example, the sequence of tests cannot be changed, only the
relevant parameters.

Select a Parameter File

Parameters :
Cancel
Files
Directories
File Name:
Directory:
Description:
PRM
Select Parameter File to Read
TEST1
A:\TESTS\BTS
Parameter file for the TEST BTS
Accept
List
List
Memory Card
A:
25 DEC 2000 14:12:44
Offsets: 10 dB Rslts : OFF
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5B.1 BTS Parameter File

This screen only appears if a Parameter File has not been selected prior to sequence
execution.

If a parameter file has not been selected, then the user is asked if they wish to select a BTS
parameter file that contains the required configuration data. On selecting Yes, the above
dialogue is displayed for navigating to, and selecting, a suitable pparameter file. (Refer to
Section 5 / PARAMETERS MENU for information on creating a parameter file).

If the user does not have a suitable parameter file and wishes to exit the sequence and
configure a suitable parameter file then No should be selected at this point and the sequence
will terminate. After selecting a suitable parameter file once, this dialogue will not be displayed
the next time the sequence is run.

6113 EDGE
5B-2 80-0013
Section 5 Annex B

Select a Results File

Results
Print
BTS Serial
Number(s)
Operator
Remarks
Test Results Header
Operator
Remarks
Results
Edit
Filename
Header
Print
Footer
EXIT
25 DEC 2000 14:12:44
FILE
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R

Figure 5B.2 Results Configuration

This screen will only appear if a results file has not been configured prior to sequence
execution.

If a results file has not been selected the user is prompted to select one. The sequence will not
start until a results file to store the results of each CiTA test has been configured and selected.
(Refer to Section 5 / RESULTS MENU for information on creating a results file).

Set the Number of TRXs to Test

S D
F R
Enter Number Of TRXs To Test 25 DEC 2000 12:34:56
RESULT.PRT GPIB:
EXIT
Accept
Edit Mode
Overwrite
Cancel
Reset
Parameter
Input Dialogue Box
Number Of TRXs
2
Clear
Line

Figure 5B.3 Number of TRXs

This screen is used to enter the number of TRXs that are to be tested in the CiTA tests. A value
should be entered using the numeric keypad and then the Accept key must be pressed. The
permitted range of values is 1 to 127.

6113 EDGE
80-0013 5B-3
Section 5 Annex B

Set TRX Configuration Parameters

Enter Channel Number

S D
F R
Configure TRX 1 25 DEC 2000 12:34:56
RESULT.PRT GPIB:
EXIT
Accept
Edit Mode
Overwrite
Cancel
Reset
Parameter
Input Dialogue Box
Enter Channel Number
16
Clear
Line

Figure 5B.4 Enter Channel Number

For each TRX that is to be tested, a channel number (ARFCN) must be selected from the
following table, depending on which radio system the BTS supports. Press Accept to accept
each value then press EXIT to progress to Figure 5B.5 Enter TRX Power Level.

Band ARFCN Range
GSM 900 + GSM-R 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023
E-GSM 900 ( E-GSM and G1 Band ) 0 to 124 and 975 to 1023
GSM 850 128 to 251
DCS 1800 512 to 885
PCS 1900 512 to 810
Multi-band (GSM + DCS) 0 to 124, 512 to 885 and 975 to 1023
Multi-band (GSM + PCS) 0 to 124, 512 to 810 and 975 to 1023
Multi-band (GSM 850 + PCS) 128 to 251 and 512 to 810

Enter the TRX Power Level

S D
F R
Configure TRX 1 25 DEC 2000 12:34:56
RESULT.PRT GPIB:
EXIT
Accept
Edit Mode
Overwrite
Cancel
Reset
Parameter
Input Dialogue Box
Enter TRX Power Level: (Range 1 6)
2
Clear
Line

Figure 5B.5 Enter TRX Power Level

A power level for each TX must be set; this will allow different TRXs to be run at different power
levels if required. Valid values are from 1 (highest) to 6 (lowest). Press Accept to accept each
value, then press EXIT to move to Figure 5B.6 Layout of TRXs.
6113 EDGE
5B-4 80-0013
Section 5 Annex B

Define the TRX Testing Order

TRX LAYOUT
S D
F R
25 DEC 2000 12:34:56
RESULT.PRT GPIB:
No
Yes
Are the TRXs arranged in consecutive order?

Figure 5B.6 Layout of TRXs

The layout of TRXs can vary from BTS to BTS (and it may not always be desirable to test a set
of TRXs in strict sequence). If the TRXs are arranged consecutively in the BTS (i.e. 1,2,3,4..
etc) then Yes can be selected to progress to the Start TRX operation in Figure 5B.7 Start
TRX.

Otherwise No should be selected if the TRXs are not consecutive or only a selection of the
TRXs in the BTS is to be tested. The sequence of TRXs to test is then defined using Figure
5B.8 Enter TRX Number to Test.

START TRX
S D
F R
25 DEC 2000 12:34:56
RESULT.PRT GPIB:
No
Yes
Should the CiTA test start with TRX 1 (press No to select
new start TRX) ?

Figure 5B.7 Start TRX

When the TRXs in the BTS are consecutive, the user is asked if testing is to begin at the first
TRX. Selecting Yes will cause the tests to start from TRX 1. The sequence then moves to
Figure 5B.10 Default Traffic Parameter Settings for the final parameter selection options.

Selecting No presents the user with the dialogue shown in Figure 5B.9 Enter Start TRX ID,
where the start TRX number can be entered.

6113 EDGE
80-0013 5B-5
Section 5 Annex B

S D
F R
TRX ID FOR CiTA Test 1 25 DEC 2000 12:34:56
RESULT.PRT GPIB:
EXIT
Accept
Edit Mode
Overwrite
Cancel
Reset
Parameter
Input Dialogue Box
Enter TRX Number To Test:
2
Clear
Line

Figure 5B.8 Enter TRX Number to Test

When the BTS does not have consecutive TRXs, the user is asked to enter the TRX number
(ID) for each TRX that is to be tested in the sequence. The title at the top of the screen
indicates which TRX in the sequence is being defined. Press Accept to accept each TRX ID,
then press EXIT to progress to Figure 5B.10 Default Traffic Parameter Settings for the final
parameter selection options.

Note: It is not possible to test the same TRX twice.

S D
F R
25 DEC 2000 12:34:56
RESULT.PRT GPIB:
EXIT
Accept
Edit Mode
Overwrite
Cancel
Reset
Parameter
Input Dialogue Box
Please enter start TRX id
2
Clear
Line

Figure 5B.9 Enter Start TRX ID

If the user has chosen not to start from the first TRX, the TRX at which to start should be
entered in this screen. Press Accept to accept the ID and then EXIT. The sequence then
moves to Figure 5B.10 Default Traffic Parameter Settings for the final parameter selection
options.

6113 EDGE
5B-6 80-0013
Section 5 Annex B

Set the Traffic Format and Call Type Parameters

DEFAULT SETTINGS
S D
F R
25 DEC 2000 12:34:56
RESULT.PRT GPIB:
No
Yes
Do you want to keep the default CiTA test settings?

Figure 5B.10 Default Traffic Parameter Settings

The default traffic parameter settings for the CiTA tests are:

Traffic Channel Format: EFR (Enhanced Full-Rate)
Traffic Call Type: Mobile Originated

Select Yes to adopt both of the default values, and the sequence then progresses to Figure
5B.13 Run AutoCiTA to set the last parameters and start the CiTA test sequence.

Select No to change the default traffic parameter settings, using the screens in Figure 5B.11
Traffic Channel (TCH) Format and Figure 5B.12 Call Type.

6113 EDGE
80-0013 5B-7
Section 5 Annex B

TRAFFIC CHANEL (TCH) FORMAT
S D
F R
25 DEC 2000 12:34:56
RESULT.PRT GPIB:
No
Yes
Use Default TCH Format (Default = EFR) ?

S D
F R
25 DEC 2000 12:34:56
RESULT.PRT GPIB:
EXIT
Accept
Edit Mode
Overwrite
Cancel
Reset
Parameter
Input Dialogue Box
Choose TCH Format: (1) Full Rate (2) EFR
1
Clear
Line

Figure 5B.11 Traffic Channel (TCH) Format

Select Yes in the upper screen to adopt the default TCH format (EFR) and progress to Figure
5B.12 Call Type.

Select No in the upper screen to ignore the default format and progress to the lower screen to
select the required TCH format (Full Rate or EFR). Press Accept to accept the format and then
press EXIT to progress the sequence to Figure 5B.12 Call Type.

6113 EDGE
5B-8 80-0013
Section 5 Annex B

TRAFFIC CALL TYPE
S D
F R
25 DEC 2000 12:34:56
RESULT.PRT GPIB:
No
Yes
Use Default TCH Format (Default = Mobile Originated) ?

S D
F R
25 DEC 2000 12:34:56
RESULT.PRT GPIB:
EXIT
Accept
Edit Mode
Overwrite
Cancel
Reset
Parameter
Input Dialogue Box
Choose Call Type: (1) Mobile Terminated (2) Mobile Originated
1
Clear
Line

Figure 5B.12 Call Type

Select Yes in the upper screen to adopt the default call type (Mobile Originated), and then
progress to Figure 5B.13 Run AutoCiTA to set the last parameters and start the CiTA test
sequence.

Select No in the upper screen to move to the lower screen to select the required call type
(Mobile Originated or Mobile Terminated), and then press EXIT to progress to Figure 5B.13
Run AutoCiTA to set the last parameters and start the CiTA test sequence.

6113 EDGE
80-0013 5B-9
Section 5 Annex B

Run CiTA Test

In Progress Test Status
Running : CiTA Test
Results
Stop/
Edit
Abort
25 DEC 2000 12:22:44
ARFCN
TRX ID
90
1
Timeslot
Format
4
---
MS Tx Level
BTS Tx Level
-85.0
Max
dBm
10 MHz GPIB : 20
S
F
D
R
12:22:44 - Establishing Link to FU
12:22:44 - BTS configuration complete
12:22:45 - BTS configuration complete
12:22:46 - FU loading new configuration data (35 secs)
12:22:46 - Establish link to FU
12:22:47 - Starting Test
12:22:58 - OPERATOR Please switch on the Mobile

Figure 5B.13 Run AutoCiTA

Once all required settings have been entered, the Configure BTS test will be executed. Each
of the tests in the AutoCiTA sequence are then executed, using the parameter values previously
entered for each TRX.

Once the mobile has been switched on and has registered, call setup is performed. Then the
CiTA sequence of tests starts automatically.

At the start of each CiTA test, the mobile phone should only be switched on when prompted (as
shown in the diagram above.

To complete each test the mobile must be switched off, which will cause the sequence to move
on to the next test. When running the CiTA test with Mobile Terminated call setup, the test will
end when all 7 timeslots have been tested. To end the CiTA test when using Mobile Originated
call setup, it is necessary to turn the mobile off when all of the required timeslots have been
tested.

If the next test is to be performed on a different TRX, an appropriate configure BTS test will be
performed (according to the type of BTS) to configure the BTS and the 6113 Test Set.

When all the CiTA tests in the sequence have been completed, an operator message indicating
successful completion of the sequence is displayed briefly, followed by the results summary.

6113 EDGE
5B-10 80-0013
Section 5 Annex B

BTS SPECIFIC SCREENS

Certain makes and models of BTS require additional screens to complete the entry of
information. Refer to Section 7 Manufacturer Specific Information for a description of any
additional screens for a particular type of BTS.

6113 EDGE
80-0013 5B-11
Section 5 Annex B
6113 EDGE
5B-12 80-0013

RIBASIC ENHANCEMENTS

During the development of the AutoCiTA sequence, a number of additional facilities have been
added to the RIBASIC sequence language. These facilities are documented in Section 5
Annex A PROGRAMMING TEST SEQUENCES so that they can be used with user defined
sequences. They are:

New system variables:

BTSManufacturer
BTSModel
ResultsFileConfigured (6103 & 6113)

New commands:

SETUPRESULTS
SETTITLE

6113 EDGE 6-(i)
80-0013
SECTION 6

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS - GPIB

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page / Hyperlink

INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................. 1
Reference Documents .............................................................................................. 1
IEEE 488.1 STANDARD FORMAT..................................................................................... 2
Interface Function Subsets ....................................................................................... 2
Interface Messages................................................................................................... 2
Input Buffer ............................................................................................................... 2
Query Responses ..................................................................................................... 2
Primary GPIB Address Setting.................................................................................. 2
Power On Settings .................................................................................................... 3
COMMON DEVICE COMMANDS AND QUERIES ............................................................ 4
Common Device Commands.................................................................................... 5
Common Device Queries.......................................................................................... 6
OVERLAPPED COMMANDS............................................................................................. 8
GPIB STATUS REPORTING............................................................................................ 10
Status Reporting Overview ..................................................................................... 10
DEVICE DEPENDENT COMMANDS............................................................................... 14
Summary of Device Dependent Commands .......................................................... 14
Remote / Local Operation....................................................................................... 17
Radio System Channel Number Ranges................................................................ 17
Cell Table Representation ...................................................................................... 18
DEVICE DEPENDENT QUERIES..................................................................................... 20
Summary of Device Dependent Queries ................................................................ 20
General System Operation Queries........................................................................ 22
GENERAL SYSTEM OPERATION COMMANDS............................................................ 29
GLOBAL PARAMETER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS ............................................. 30
FILE COMMANDS............................................................................................................ 39
BTS SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMANDS ................................................................ 40
TEST COMMANDS AND PARAMETERS........................................................................ 41
TCH Format Parameter .......................................................................................... 44
Functional Tests...................................................................................................... 45
TRANSMITTER TESTS GSM MEASUREMENT MODE ................................................. 49
Transmitter Test GSM Measurement Mode ........................................................... 50
Transmitter BER Test GSM Measurement Mode................................................... 52
Static Power Control (BCCH) Test.......................................................................... 55
Downlink Power Control (TCH) Test GSM Measurement Mode ............................ 57
TRANSMITTER TESTS EDGE MEASUREMENT MODE ............................................... 59
Transmitter Test EDGE Measurement Mode ......................................................... 60
Transmitter BLER Test EDGE Measurement Mode............................................... 63
RECEIVER TESTS GSM MEASUREMENT MODE......................................................... 65
Receiver BER Test GSM Measurement Mode....................................................... 65
Absolute Sensitivity Test GSM Measurement Mode............................................... 67
Access Burst Test GSM Measurement Mode......................................................... 70
RX Level Test GSM Measurement Mode............................................................... 72
RX Quality Test GSM Measurement Mode............................................................. 74
Receiver Signalling BER Test GSM Measurement Mode....................................... 76

Section 6
6-(ii) 6113 EDGE
80-0013
RECEIVER TESTS GPRS MEASUREMENT MODE....................................................... 78
Receiver BLER Test GPRS Measurement Mode ................................................... 78
Absolute Sensitivity Test GPRS Measurement Mode............................................. 80
Access Burst Test GPRS Measurement Mode....................................................... 83
RECEIVER TESTS EDGE MEASUREMENT MODE....................................................... 85
Receiver BLER Test EDGE Measurement Mode ................................................... 85
Absolute Sensitivity Test EDGE Measurement Mode............................................. 87
Access Burst Test EDGE Measurement Mode....................................................... 90
INTERACTIVE TESTS GSM MEASUREMENT MODE ................................................... 92
Multimode GSM Measurement Mode ..................................................................... 92
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS..................................................................................................... 94
Signal Generator Mode ........................................................................................... 94
Power Meter Mode.................................................................................................. 96
Signal Generator and Power Meter Mode............................................................... 98
SELF CHECK TESTS....................................................................................................... 99
Self Check Burst Analysis ....................................................................................... 99
RF Tests Self Check Burst Analysis ..................................................................... 102
EDGE Self Check Burst Analysis.......................................................................... 105
PROGRAMMING THE TEST SET OVER THE GPIB INTERFACE............................... 108
Initialising the Controller GPIB Interface ............................................................... 108
Handling GPIB Timeouts and Interface Errors...................................................... 109
Sending Messages to the Test Set ....................................................................... 110
Receiving Messages from the Test Set ................................................................ 112
Test Set Parameters ............................................................................................. 114
Initialising The Test Set ......................................................................................... 115
Modifying the Test Set Parameters Database ...................................................... 115
Starting a Test ....................................................................................................... 116
Processing Test Results ....................................................................................... 116
Status Reports....................................................................................................... 117
BTS Specific Status Reports................................................................................. 117
Reading Burst Analysis Data from the Test Set .................................................... 119
Downloading BTS Code........................................................................................ 122

TABLES


6.1 Test Procedure Error Codes and Status Codes........................................................ 41
6.2 Status Byte Bits ....................................................................................................... 112

SECTION 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS - GPIB
6113 EDGE 6-1
80-0013

INTRODUCTION

The 6113 Digital Radio Test Set can be remotely controlled via the GPIB interface.

This Section defines the commands that can be sent to the 6113 Test Set over the GPIB
Interface, and the response messages that are returned. The formats for the parameters
required to configure the Test Set and to perform tests on a BTS are defined, together with
suggested typical values for the parameters. The messages comply with IEEE 488.2-1987
Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation, "Standard Codes, Formats,
Protocols, and Common Commands" (see Reference Document 1).

For detailed information on the structure and use of the GPIB Interface, the user is referred to
this standard document. However, some further information and examples to assist
programming are given at the end of this Section.

This Section includes only those test details that are necessary for a comprehensive
appreciation of operating procedures. For full details of each test and all parameters, refer to
Section 4.

For further details see Reference Documents (1) and (2).

Reference Documents

(1) IEEE 488.2-1987 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation,
"Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols, and Common Commands"

(2) IEEE 488.1 1987 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation.

Section 6
6-2 6113 EDGE
80-0013

IEEE 488.1 STANDARD FORMAT

Interface Function Subsets

The GPIB interface conforms to the following IEEE-488.1 defined 'interface function' subsets:

Subset Function Capability
SH1 Source Handshake Complete
AH1 Acceptor Handshake Complete
T5 Talker Complete
L4 Listener Complete
SR1 Service Request Complete
RL1 Remote/Local Complete
PP0 Parallel Poll None
DC1 Device Clear Complete
DT0 Device Trigger None
C0 Controller None
E1 Electrical Interface Three-state bus drivers

The subsets are shown on the rear panel adjacent to the bus connector.

Interface Messages

The interface responds to the following IEEE 488.1 interface messages:

Message Description Action
GTL Go To Local Returns unit to Local State or Local With
Lockout State depending on previous state
SDC Selected Device Clear Reset GPIB interface to idle state
DCL Device Clear Reset GPIB interface to idle state
LLO Local Lock Out Inhibit front panel 'return to local' operation

Input Buffer

The input buffer length is 2700 bytes.

Query Responses

All query responses are generated when the associated query command has been parsed.

Very important note to GPIB developers.
We reserve the right to add elements to the Query Responses of the GPIB commands. This is
to allow for future proofing of the instrument. This imposes a requirement on a GPIB developer
NOT to implement checks on the number of response elements, because they may increase in
later software releases. See Processing Test Results section below for details.

Primary GPIB Address Setting

The primary GPIB address may be set in the range of 0 to 30. Changing the address causes
the IEEE 488.1 Interface to be reset.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-3
80-0013

Power On Settings

At power on, the interface is configured as follows:

(1) The input and output buffers are cleared.

(2) All event registers are cleared (Note).

(3) All event enable registers, except for the standard and SRQ event enable registers, are
cleared. The initialisation values of the standard event and SRQ registers depend upon
the status of the Power on Status Clear flag. If this flag is reset then the contents of these
registers are restored to the values last set using the *SRE and *ESE commands.

(4) The primary GPIB address is restored to the value set before the Test Set was powered
down. If the area of non-volatile memory where this address is stored is found to be
corrupted, then a default address of 20 is used.

Note: When the Test Set is ready to receive Device Dependent Commands an information
message is placed in the INF message queue, which causes the OPR status bit in the
Status Byte register to be set. At the same time, the PON bit in the Standard Event
Status register is also set. Depending on how the interface was configured before
power down, this may cause the ESB bit in the Status Byte register to be set.

Section 6
6-4 6113 EDGE
80-0013

COMMON DEVICE COMMANDS AND QUERIES

The common device commands implemented are shown in the table below. The following
paragraphs give further details of these commands and queries. For a definition of these
commands and queries, refer to the IEEE 488.2 Specification.

Command
Mnemonic
Description Implemented
*ADD Accept Address Command No
*DLF Disable Listener Function Command No
*IDN? Identification Query Yes
*OPT? Option Identification Query No
*PUD Protected user data Command No
*PUD? Protected user data Query No
*RDT Resource Description Transfer Command No
*RDT? Resource Description Transfer Query No
*CAL? Calibration Query No
*LRN? Learn Device setup Query No
*RST Reset Command Yes
*TST? Self Test Query Yes
*OPC Operation Complete Command Yes
*OPC? Operation Complete Query Yes
*WAI Wait To Complete Command Yes
*DMC Define Macro Command No
*EMC Enable Macro Command No
*EMC? Enable Macro Query No
*GMC? Get Macro Contents Query No
*LMC? Learn Macro Query No
*PMC? Purge Macro Command No
*IST? Individual Status Query No
*PRE Parallel Poll Register Enable Command No
*PRE? Parallel Poll Register Enable Query No
*CLS Clear Status Command Yes
*ESE Standard Event Status Enable Command Yes
*ESE? Standard Event Status Enable Query Yes
*ESR? Standard Event Status Register Query Yes
*PSC Power On Status Clear Command Yes
*PSC? Power On Status Clear Query Yes
*SRE Service Request Enable Command Yes
*SRE? Service Request Enable Query Yes
*STB? Read Status Byte Query Yes
*DDT Define Device Trigger Command No
*DDT? Define Device Trigger Query No
*TRG Trigger Command No
*PCB Pass Control Back Command No
*RCL Recall Command No
*SAV Save Command No

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-5
80-0013

Note: (1) No commands from the Auto Configure Group, Macro Group, Trigger Group or
Stored Settings Group are supported.

(2) The 6113 Test Set implements the I/O buffer system described by IEEE-488.2 for
a buffer length of 2700 bytes.

Common Device Commands

The IEEE 488.2 defined common device commands that can be sent to the 6113 Test Set are
described in the following paragraphs.

*SRE n sets the Status Register Enable register to n
where:
n = new mask value (byte), range: 0 to 255

Each bit set to 1 enables the corresponding bit in the Status Byte. Bit 6,
however, cannot be masked. Power-on default depends on the power on
Status Clear flag (see *PSC? and *PSC).

*ESE n sets the standard Event Status Enable register to n
where:
n = new mask value (byte), range: 0 to 255

Each bit set to 1 enables the corresponding bit in the Standard Event
register.

Power-on default depends on the Power on Status Clear flag (see *PSC?
and *PSC).

*CLS CLears the Test Set Status. This command clears:
- all status reporting registers
- all queues except the output queue
- the Operation Complete bit

Note: The Operation Complete bit will not be set by the completion of any
commands that were being processed when the *CLS command was
sent.

*PSC Sets the power-on status clear flag to true or false.

When this flag is set true the Standard Event Status Enable and the SRQ
Event Enable registers are cleared on power-up, otherwise the registers are
restored to their previous values.

*RST ReSeT to power-on state.

This command resets the Test Set settings to their power-on values.

*OPC causes the Test Set to generate the OPeration Complete message in the
Standard Event Status register when all pending operations have finished.

*WAI WAIt to continue.

This command prevents the Test Set from executing any further commands
until any pending operations have been completed.

Section 6
6-6 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Common Device Queries

*IDN? returns the IDeNtification string:
RACAL INSTRUMENTS LTD.,6113,SSSS,RR.VV
(Manufacturer, Model No., Serial No., Firmware Issue)

*PSC? Returns the current status of the Power on Status Clear flag.

*STB? returns the STatus Byte, range 0 to 255.

Bit 6 will be set if any other unmasked bit in the register becomes set. This
byte is the same as that returned by a Serial Poll.

The significance of the bits in the Status Byte is as follows:

Bit Function
0 (LSB) ERR Error Message available
1 EOT End of Test Report available
2 OPR Information Message available
3 SAV Status Message available
4 MAV Message available (set when the output queue
is not empty)
5 ESB Event Status bit (set when any unmasked bit in
the Event Status register is set
6 SRQ Instrument requests service (SRQ to
Controller, cleared if polled, but not if read with
*STB?)
7 (MSB) GAV Graph data available (set when any unmasked
bit in the Graph Data Event register is set)

*ESR? returns the Standard Event Status register, range 0 to 255. The significance
of the bits in this byte is as follows:

Bit Function
0 (LSB) Operation Complete
1 Request Control - always 0
2 Query Error
3 Device Dependent Error
4 Execution Error
5 Command Error
6 User Request - always 0
7 (MSB) Power On

*SRE? returns the Status Register Enable register. Reads back the value set with
*SRE.

*ESE? returns the Standard Event Status Enable register. Reads back the value set
with *ESE.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-7
80-0013

*TST? This command initiates the Self-Check Burst Analysis (SCBA) test with the
following parameters:

Parameter Test Value
Self-Check Frequency Lowest Frequency of the
selected Radio System Band
Self-Check Slot 4
Test Pattern 1
Number of Bursts 10
Sample Time 10 s
Burst Number 0
FER Limit 0.000 %
Class Ib Limit 0.000 %
Class II Limit 0.000 %
Peak Phase Error Limit 20.00 deg
RMS Phase Error Limit 5.00 deg
Frequency Error Limit (+/-) 95.0 Hz
Power level Error Limit (+/-) 3.0 dB

An ASCII encoded number in the range of 0 to 31 is returned. The value of
zero indicates the test PASSed, for any other value refer to the following bit
field:

bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
0 0 0 PWR MOD PULSE PHFQ BER

Where:
PWR Power Level Measurement
MOD Modulation Spectrum Measurement.
PULSE Power Profile Measurement.
PHFQ Phase Frequency Measurement.
BER Bit Error Rate Measurement.

When a bit is set to '1', the associated measurement failed, when a bit is set
to '0' the associated measurement passed.

Note: This command should not be used while the Operation Complete
flag is not set.

*OPC? returns an ASCII 1 when all pending OPerations have Completed.

Section 6
6-8 6113 EDGE
80-0013

OVERLAPPED COMMANDS

Commands that have a duration of greater than approximately 3 seconds are classified as
Overlapped Commands rather than Sequential Commands. The Overlapped or Sequential
classification of a GPIB command is specified under the description of such commands later in
this document.

While an Overlapped Command is in progress, there are some restrictions on the use of other
GPIB commands. This mainly occurs while an in-built test function is running, since tests cannot
be run in parallel. The following table lists the GPIB commands that may be used safely while
an Overlapped Command is in progress.

Command
Mnemonic
Description
*IDN? Identification Query
*RST Reset Command
*OPC Operation Complete Command
*OPC? Operation Complete Query
*WAI Wait To Complete Command
*CLS Clear Status Command
*ESE Standard Event Status Enable Command
*ESE? Standard Event Status Enable Query
*ESR? Standard Event Status Register Query
*PSC Power On Status Clear Command
*PSC? Power On Status Clear Query
*SRE Service Request Enable Command
*SRE? Service Request Enable Query
*STB? Read Status Byte Query
PTMG? Phase Trajectory Query
PPMG? Power Profile Data Query
MSMG? Modulation Spectrum Data Query
EVMG? Error Vector Query
IQMG? IQ Data Query
MBURST? Recalls the Burst measurement results
MBER? Recall the BER results
SCBURST? Recalls the Self-Check Burst results
SCBER? Recalls the Self-Check BER results
ESCBURST? Recalls the EDGE Self-Check Burst results
ESCBLER? Recalls the EDGE Self-Check BLER results
Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-9
80-0013

NTXLVL Set the BTS Tx Power Level (Multimode Only)
NTPAT Set the Test Pattern (Multimode Only)
NFOFF Set the Frequency Offset (Multimode & Signal Generator mode)
NTADV Set the Timing Advance (Multimode Only)
NTVAVG Set the number of Video Averages (Multimode Only)
NTVAVG Set the number of Video Averages (Multimode Only)
NSIGLVL Set the RF Signal Output Power Level (Signal Generator mode
Only)
NARFCN Set the Channel Number (Signal Generator mode Only)
NTRSEQ Set the Training Sequence (Signal Generator mode Only)
NSIGFMT Set the Signal Format (Signal Generator mode Only)
NPULS Set the Pulsing (Signal Generator mode Only)
NSCANTYPE Set the Scan Type (Power meter mode Only)
NRESCAN Restart the Scan (Power meter mode Only)
GSE Graph available Event Enable Register Setting
GSE? Graph available Event Event Register Query
TSGRH? Graph available Event Register Query
TSSTA? Status message Query
TSEOT? End of Test message Query
TSINF? Information message Query
TSERR? Error message Query
ABORT Stops the test in progress
FCODE BTS File Code Transfer
FEND BTS File Transfer End

Section 6
6-10 6113 EDGE
80-0013

GPIB STATUS REPORTING

When the system GPIB Controller conducts a Serial Poll, the Test Set responds with the Status
Byte as defined above. Bits in this register can be masked and unmasked with the Service
Request Enable register. The current value of this register in turn can be queried with *SRE?.
Bit 6 cannot be masked. If any of the enabled status bits are set, an SRQ will be generated.

Status Reporting Overview

The status byte, as returned by conducting a GPIB serial poll or by the '*STB?' query command,
gives a summary of the status of all the event queues and registers contained within the relevant
interface (i.e. GPIB or RS232). The operation of this status reporting structure follows that
described in the IEEE 488.2 Specification (Reference Document (1)). For a description of the
relevant message query commands and the returned message formats, see the heading
COMMON DEVICE COMMANDS AND QUERIES / Common Device Queries.

Overall Status Reporting Structure

Graph Data
Status Structure
Standard Event
Status Structure
Output Queue
Status Structure
Status Message
Status Structure
Information
Status Structure
End of Test
Status Structure
Error Message
Status Structure
Bit 7
GAV
Bit 6
MSS
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
ESB MAV SAV OPR EOT ERR
Status Register
Register or
Queue Summary
Message Message

Graph Data Status Structure Summary Bit GAV

This structure is based on the 488.2 register model and reports the availability of graph or
measurement data. A bit set in the Graph Event register indicates that measurement data of the
type associated with the set bit, is available and ready for reading. Reading the graph data with
the relevant graph data query command will reset this bit in the register. If the data is left
unread, the arrival of new measurement data of the same type overwrites the existing data,
hence the graph data read is always the most recently generated data.

One bit of this structure is asserted by the Test Set when it has completed processing an
FCODE message and is ready to receive the next segment of the BTS file transfer.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-11
80-0013

GAV Summary Status Bit Generation

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
SWT PWR MOD
PH
SWT PWR MOD PH
&
&
&
&
L
O
G
I
C
A
L
O
R
Bit 7 of the Status register
Graph Data
Graph Data
Event Enable
Register
Event Register
&
NCS
NCS
EVM
IQ
IQ EVM

Where: SWT represents the settling time measurement data (Racal Instruments Wireless
Solutions use only)
PWR represents the Power Profile measurement data
MOD represents the Modulation Spectrum measurement data
PH represents the Phase Error measurement data
NCS represents the Next Code Segment signal
EVM represents the EVM measurement data
IQ represents the IQ vector data

Master Summary Bit MSS

This bit represents the logical OR of all the remaining bits in the Status Register when read by
the '*STB?' command and is hence a Master Summary Bit of the status byte.

Note: When the Status register is read via a serial poll, the GPIB RQS message is returned in
this bit position. See Reference Document (1).

Standard Event Status Structure

This represents the Standard Event Status register model as defined by the IEEE 488.2
specification. See Reference Document (1).

Output Queue Status Structure Summary Bit MAV

This represents the 488.2 defined output queue status. This bit is set when the output queue is
not empty. See Reference Document (1).

Section 6
6-12 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Status Message Status Structure SAV

This structure is based upon the 488.2 defined queue model, representing a queue of ASCII
encoded messages. These messages fall into two types:

Call Manager Status messages
Interim Test Results messages.

The queue has been implemented as FIFO (first in / first out) queue, in which all incoming
messages overflowing the queue are lost.

SAV Summary Bit Generation

ASCII Message 10
ASCII Message 2
ASCII Message 1
Bit 3 of the Status Register
Queue
not empty
message queue
10 by 256 character
First in First out

Information Message Status Structure OPR

This is a structure based upon the 488.2 defined queue model, representing a queue of ASCII
encoded operator information messages. The queue has been implemented as a FIFO queue,
in which all incoming messages overflowing the queue are lost.

OPR Summary Bit Generation

ASCII Message 10
ASCII Message 2
ASCII Message 1
Queue
not empty
message queue
10 by 256 character
First in First out

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-13
80-0013

End of Test Message Status Structure EOT

encoded operator information messages. The queue has been implemented as FIFO queue, in
which all incoming messages overflowing the queue are lost.

EOT Summary Bit Generation

ASCII Message 10
ASCII Message 2
ASCII Message 1
Queue
not empty
message queue
10 by 256 character
First in First out

Error Message Status Structure ERR

encoded operator information messages. The queue has been implemented as FIFO queue, in
which all incoming messages overflowing the queue are lost.

ERR Summary Bit Generation

ASCII Message 10
ASCII Message 2
ASCII Message 1
Queue
not empty
message queue
10 by 256 character
First in First out

Section 6
6-14 6113 EDGE
80-0013

DEVICE DEPENDENT COMMANDS

Test procedures and system functions are initiated by sending the commands defined below. A
set of commands for setting Test Set related parameters and general GSM parameters are also
defined. At the completion of each test, a message which indicates the result of the test is
available (signalled by the EOT bit in the Status Byte). This message always starts with the
same mnemonic as the test command. All commands implemented by the Test Set are
sequential in operation.

Summary of Device Dependent Commands

The following table lists the commands and queries that are available. Detailed descriptions of
the parameters for each command are provided in subsequent paragraphs.

General System Operation Commands

ABORT Abort Test
TIMOP Timing Output control
GSE Graph Available Event Enable Register Set Command
REFSTD Reference Frequency Standard Source Select.
TIME Set real time clock

Global Parameter Configuration Commands

DBSIC Set the Base Station Control Channel Identification parameters

GSM850CECD Set GSM 850 Cell Channel Description parameters
GSMCECD Set E-GSM 900 Cell Channel Description parameters
GSMRCECD Set E-GSM 900 + R Cell Channel Description parameters
PCSCECD Set PCS 1900 Cell Channel Description parameters
DCSCECD Set DCS 1800 Cell Channel Description parameters

DCOPT Send the Cell Options to the Test Set

GSM850NCED Set GSM 850 Neighbour Cell Description parameters
GSMNCED Set E-GSM 900 Neighbour Cell Description parameters
GSMRNCED Set E-GSM 900 + R Neighbour Cell Description parameters
PCSNCED Set PCS 1900 Neighbour Cell Description parameters
DCSNCED Set DCS 1800 Neighbour Cell Description parameters

GSM850HTD Set GSM 850 Hopping Table parameters
GSMHTD Set E-GSM 900 Hopping Table parameters
GSMRHTD Set E-GSM 900 + R Hopping Table parameters

PCSHTD Set PCS 1900 Hopping Table parameters
DCSHTD Set DCS 1800 Hopping Table parameters

DTA Send the Timing Advance parameters to the Test Set
Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-15
80-0013

ABISIMP Set the Abis I/O Impedance
BTSCODE Define the pathname for the BTS download code.
BTSTYPE Define the BTS Manufacturer, Model and Software
GPIBSET Displays the GPIB messages on the Test Set
CLRMAP Clear the Transceiver Mapping Table
DCOCD Set Control Channel Description parameters
DCSPS Set Cell Selection parameters
DENCP Set Encryption parameters
DLAID Set Location Area Identification parameters
DRACH Set RACH Control parameters
EMAP Map the Transceiver to TEI and A-bis slots
EMAPBCF Map the BCF to TEI and A-bis slot
FAULTREP Set BTS reports style
LEVOS Set Tx / Rx Level Offsets
PORTYPE Set the BTS / BSC Interface (A-bis or V11)
RADIOSYS Set the Radio System
RFCONN Set the RF connection type (Simplex or Duplex)
TRFCFG Set A-bis Settings

File Commands

FOPEN Opens a DOS formatted disk file for either read only access or
write only access.
FWRITE Writes a block of data to a disk file previously opened for write
access with the command FOPEN.
FCLOSE Closes a disk file previously opened with the command FOPEN.

BTS Software Download Commands

FCODE Transfer software to the BTS
FEND End of file transfer

Section 6
6-16 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Single Test Commands

Functional Tests

RSTBTS Reset BTS (see Section 7 for BTS-specific parameter lists)
CHNGTRX Change TRX (see Section 7 for BTS-specific parameter lists)
CNFGBTS Configure BTS (see Section 7 for BTS-specific parameter lists)
LINKTST A-bis Link Test (see Section 7 for BTS-specific parameter lists).
FULLCALL CiTA

Transmitter Tests

CCCG Cell Control Channel Generation
TXTST Transmitter Test
TXL Transmitter BER/BLER
SPWRL Static Power Control
DPWRL Downlink Power Control

Receiver Tests

RXL Receiver BER/BLER including compliance sensitivity
SENS Absolute Sensitivity
CRACH Access Burst Test
RXLEV Received Signal Level
RXQUAL Received Signal Quality
RXSIG Receiver Signalling BER

Special Tests

MULTMODE Multimode
RFMON Signal Generator mode
POWERM Power Meter mode
SIGPWR Signal Generator and Power Meter Mode

Built-in Self Tests

SCBA Self-Check Burst Analysis - including BER
BSCBA RF Tests Self Check Burst Analysis - including BER
ESCBA EDGE Self-Check Burst Analysis - including BLER

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-17
80-0013

Remote / Local Operation

When the GPIB interface is put into the Remote state (as defined in Reference Document 1), the
6113 Test Set automatically enters the Remote mode of operation and will respond to all
subsequent messages.

When the 6113 Test Set is in the Remote mode, the central area of the LCD display is blank
except for a softkey labelled 'Local'.

If a Local Lockout message has not been sent to the GPIB interface, pressing the 'Local' softkey
will return the Test Set to the Local state and restore the Main Menu display, thus enabling local
operation using the MMI controls.

Radio System Channel Number Ranges

The Channel Number (ARFCN - Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number) is dependent
upon the selected radio system as follows:

Band ARFCN Range Frequency Range
GSM 850 128 to 251 824.0 to 849.0 MHz and
869.0 to 894.0 MHz
GSM 900 + GSM-R 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023 890.0 to 914.8 MHz and
876.2 to 889.8 MHz
E-GSM 900
( E-GSM and G1 Band )
0 to 124 and 975 to 1023 890.0 to 914.8 MHz and
880.2 to 889.8 MHz
DCS 1800 512 to 885 1710.2 to 1784.8 MHz
PCS 1900 512 to 810 1850.2 to 1909.8 MHz
Multi-band (GSM+DCS) 0 to 124, 512 to 885 and
975 to 1023
890.0 to 914.8 MHz,
880.2 to 889.8 MHz and
1710.2 to 1784.8 MHz
Multi-band (GSM+PCS) 0 to 124, 512 to 810 and
975 to 1023
890.0 to 914.8 MHz,
880.2 to 889.8 MHz and
1850.2 to 1909.8 MHz
Multi-band (GSM 850+PCS) 128 to 251 and 512 to 810 824.0 to 849.0 MHz and
869.0 to 894.0 MHz and
1850.2 to 1909.8 MHz

The GSM Phase 1 Band is a subset of the E-GSM range, so it is not necessary to implement a
separate Radio System option for the Phase 1 range.

If the Multi-band variant of a band has been selected the ARFCN/Frequency range will be the
same as the single band equivalent except for the EMAP command which will allow use of the
full Multi-band range depending on whether DCS 1800 or PCS 1900 is optioned in the Test Set.

Section 6
6-18 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Cell Table Representation

Some of the following GPIB commands require a cell description table as one or more of the
command parameters. These tables are input as a binary bit stream expressed in Hex, using
the 488.2 non-decimal numeric program data format. The Cell Table parameter is specified in
Hex ASCII format and must be in multiples of 8 digits (32 bits).

For the GSM 850 Band, the Cell Table is encoded as 32 hex ASCII digits such that the LSB is
bit 0. Thus:

Bit 0 represents Channel Number 128

All bit positions more significant than 123 are ignored.

Lowest Range Value Highest Range Value
#H0000000000000000000000000000000 #HFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

For the GSM 900 Band, the Cell Table is encoded as 32 hex ASCII digits such that the LSB is
bit 0. Thus:

Bit 123 represents Channel Number 124.


#H0000000000000000000000000000000 #HFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

For the E-GSM 900 Band, the Cell Table is encoded as 256 hex ASCII digits such that the LSB
is bit 0. Thus:


All bit positions outside these ranges are ignored.

#H0000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000
#HFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-19
80-0013

For the E-GSM 900 + R Band, the Cell Table is encoded as 256 hex ASCII digits such that the
LSB is bit 0. Thus:


All bit positions outside these ranges are ignored.

#H0000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

For the DCS 1800 Band, the Cell Table is encoded as 96 hex ASCII digits such that the LSB is
bit 0. Thus:



#H0000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

For the PCS 1900 Band, the Cell Table is encoded as 80 hex ASCII digits such that the LSB is
bit 0. Thus:

Bit 298 represents Channel Number 810.


#H00000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000
#HFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFF

Section 6
6-20 6113 EDGE
80-0013

DEVICE DEPENDENT QUERIES

This section defines the syntax of the Device Dependent Queries that the 6113 Test Set
supports. The default parameter values defined are the power-on values for those parameters.

Summary of Device Dependent Queries

During the execution of a test, the Test Set will at times generate one or more of four message
types and one or more of four sets of graph data. Both the messages and graph data may be
read over the GPIB, the availability of each being indicated by summary bits in the Status Byte
Register. The summary bit for the graph data covers four basic graph types (see the heading
Status Reporting Overview) and hence the Graph Data Event register should first be read to
check that the expected graph data is ready. When the graph data is indicated ready, the data
can be read by using one of four query commands. The queries for the four message types are:

Query Response 488.2 Status Structure Available
TSERR? Error Message Queue Model When ERR bit set
TSEOT? End of Test Report Queue Model When EOT bit set
TSINF? Information Message Queue Model When OPR bit set
TSSTA? Status Message (Note) Queue Model When SAV bit set

The queries for the graph data event register and data are:

Query Response Available
GSE? Graph Status Event Enable
Register contents
At any time.
TSGRH? Graph Available Event Register At any time.
PPMG? Power Profile measurement data When PWR bit set in the Graph Event
register.
PTMG? Phase Trajectory measurement
data
When PH bit set in the Graph Event
register.
MSMG? Modulation Spectrum
measurement data
When MOD bit set in the Graph Event
register.
EVMG? Error Vector measurement data When EVM bit set in the Graph Event
register.
IQMG? IQ Vector measurement data When IQ bit set in the Graph Event
register.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-21
80-0013

The queries for obtaining file information are:

FREAD? Recalls data stored in files When file is opened by FOPEN
FSIZE? Recalls file size Anytime

Other general queries are:

SCBURST? Returns the burst measurement
results
Anytime (Note)
SCBER? Returns the BER results Anytime (Note)
ESCBURST
?
Returns the burst measurement
results
Anytime (Note)
ESCBLER? Returns the BLER results Anytime (Note)
TIME? Recall real time clock setting Anytime

Note: SCBURST? and SCBER? queries are supported only by the SCBA and BSCBA
commands. ESCBURST? and ESCBLER? are supported only by the ESCBA
command
Section 6
6-22 6113 EDGE
80-0013

General System Operation Queries

This section defines the response to the following query messages that is returned by the Test
Set (to the GPIB Controller) :

Query Response

TSERR? TSERR severity, error_code, processor'
Recalls Test Set ERRor messages
(available when Bit 0 of the Status Byte is set)

where:

Severity Meaning
0 NONE
1 WARNING
2 SEVERE ERROR
3 SYSTEM FAILURE

Error Code Meaning

0 No error
1 BIST command not acknowledged by BBP (Racal
Instruments Wireless Solutions only)
2 Test already in progress (Racal Instruments
Wireless Solutions only)
3 Serial EEPROM verify error (Racal Instruments
4 Hardware cannot support option
5 Tx phase code not saved. (Racal Instruments
6 Synthesiser Calibration factors not saved (Racal
Instruments Wireless Solutions only)
7 IQ calibration factors not saved (Racal Instruments
8 Invalid directory path
9 No memory card present
10 Disk file not open
11 Disk write error
12 File handle already in use
13 Card is write protected.
14 File not present

Processor Meaning
1 MAIN
2 BBP
3 A-bis

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-23
80-0013

Query Response

TSEOT? TSEOT result_code [, test-specific measurements]'

This query is used to obtain the result of the test, including the results
from the built in self tests. The response for each of the tests is
detailed after the test command itself. End Of Test messages are
available when Bit 1 of the Status Byte is set.

Error Code Meaning
0 Pass
Non-zero See Table 6.1

TSINF? TSINF inf_type, inf_code, "information string"'
Recalls Test Set INFormation messages (available when Bit 2 of the
Status Byte is set)

where:

inf_type : 1 - Power-up message

Inf. Code Information String
1 Power-up Message Power-up Complete

inf_type : 2 - Operator Message

TBD TBD

inf_type : 3 - BTS Software Download required

0 BTS code file Name of BTS code file

inf_type : 4 - BTS Code versions

Inf. Code
(See Section 7)

inf_type : 5 - BTS Specific Reports

Inf. Code
(See Section 7)

TSSTA? <response header> parameter[, parameter2[,.....]]'

Recalls Test Set STAtus messages (available when Bit 3 of the Status
Byte is set). Tests that return interim result messages will generate
TSxxx:aaaaa results messages, where the mnemonic 'aaaaa' uniquely
identifies the type of status or interim result message being returned
by the Test Set.
Section 6
6-24 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Query Response

GSE? GRapH event Enable register contents in the range of 0 to 31

Bit Mnemonic Function
0 LSB PH Phase Error measurement data
available
1 MOD Modulation Spectrum Measurement
data available
2 PWR Power Profile Measurement data
available
3 SWT Switching Speed or settine time
measurement data available
4 NCS Next Code Segment required
5 EVM Error Vector measurement data
available
6 IQ IQ Vector measurement data available
7 - Always zero

TSGRH? Returns the contents of Graph Data Available Status Register in the
range 0 to 31. The bits in this byte represent:

Bit Mnemonic Function

0 (LSB) PH Phase Error measurement data
available
1 MOD Modulation Spectrum measurement
data available
2 PWR Power Profile measurement data
available
3 SWT Switching Speed or settling time
measurement data available
4 NCS Next Code Segment required
5 EVM Error Vector measurement data
available
6 IQ IQ Vector measurement data available
7 -- Always zero

TIME? Returns : "ddd-DD-MMM-YYYY:HH:MM:SS"

Recalls the time setting of the Test Set internal real-time clock. See
the TIME command for details of the time/date format.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-25
80-0013

Query Response

PPMG? #0<1020 * power_sample><END>

Recalls the Power Profile Measurement Graph data (available after the
Power Profile and Self-Check Burst Analysis tests). This data allows
the Controller to plot a graph of the profile of the received burst. The
response is sent in the indefinite form of the arbitrary block program
data format, which thus requires the <END> terminator.

Where:

power_sample Measured relative power * 256/dB (signed 2 byte
integer).

Power is measured relative to the mean power in the useful part of the
burst, i.e over the 147 bits of the measurement slot.

<END> The IEEE 488.2 defined terminator (LF & EOI).

There are 1020 samples taken when analysing each burst, i.e. 170 bits
with 6 samples per bit. (11 bits before the burst, 147 bits during the
useful part of the burst, and 12 bits after the burst). To convert the
sample data to units of dB, simply divide the data by 256.

PTMG? #0<294 *phase_error_sample><END>

Recalls the Phase Trajectory Measurement Graph data. The
response is sent in the indefinite form of the arbitrary block program
data format, which thus requires the <END> terminator.

Where:

phase_error_sample Measured phase error * 182 / deg (signed 2
byte integer)

<END> The IEEE 488.2 defined terminator (LF &
EOI).

Each of these data items is scaled by a factor of 182 to avoid non-
integer results. Two samples per bit are taken for the useful part of
the burst (of 147 bits), hence there are 294 samples returned.

Section 6
6-26 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Query Response

MSMG? #0<201 *power_sample><END>

Recalls the Modulation Spectrum Measurement Graph data obtained
in the MODSP test. The response is sent in the indefinite form of the
arbitrary block program data format, which thus requires the <END>
terminator.

Where:

power_sample
Measured power * 256/dBm (signed 2 byte integer)

There are 201 frequency samples taken, i.e. 100 equidistant frequency
samples either side of a centre frequency that corresponds to the data
point or sample number 101. Each sample represents a power level in
dBm scaled by 256 to avoid non-integer results. On the frequency
axis, each sample is separated by 1.3/256 MHz. This gives an
approximate frequency span from the centre frequency of 507 kHz.

EVMG? #0<142 * EVM_sample><END>

Recalls the Error Vector Measurement Graph data. The response is
sent in the indefinite form of the arbitrary block program data format,
which thus requires the <END> terminator.

Where:

EVM_Sample
Error Vector Magnitude * 256/% (signed 2 byte
integer)

IQMG? #0<142 * IQ_sample_pair><END>

Recalls the IQ Measurement Graph data. The response is sent in the
indefinite form of the arbitrary block program data format, which thus
requires the <END> terminator.

Where:

IQ_sample_pair
I and Q value * 256 as a pair of 2 byte integers (first is
I, second is Q)

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-27
80-0013

Query Response

FREAD? Returns : <zero to 2048 bytes>

This command reads a block of data from a disk file that has been
previously opened for read access by the command FOPEN. The
returned data block is formatted using the 488.2 defined 'definite
length arbitrary block program data format' and will contain up to 2048
file data bytes. Any number of these commands may be used
sequentially to transfer the contents of a file, with the last available
data block containing 0 to 2047 bytes. The response to any further
FREAD? query requests will be a zero length data block, i.e. #10.
When the file transfer is complete the FCLOSE command must be
sent to release the internal file handle.

Example:

For a file named 'EXAMPLE.TXT', containing the characters 'FILE
DATA':

(command) FOPEN "R", "A:\EXAMPLE.TXT"
(query) FREAD?
(response) #19FILE DATA
(query) FREAD?
(response) #10
(command) FCLOSE

FSIZE? "file spec" Returns the length in bytes of the specified disk file. If the file does not
exist a value of minus one (-1) is returned.

File specification file spec N/A A complete drive, directory
path and file name
description in a DOS
format. If the drive ID is
omitted, the drive will
default to the first valid
drive found starting from
drive A.

Section 6
6-28 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Query Response

SCBURST? <frequency>,
<min freq error>, min rms phase error>, <min peak phase error>,
<max freq error>, max rms phase error>, <max peak phase error>,
<mean freq error>, mean rms phase error>,
<mean peak phase error>, <power level> <END>

Used during the Self Check BURST Analysis Test, this query returns
the results of the most recent burst measurement.

Where:

Frequency is the TX_LO frequency at the time of the measurement.
Frequency error results are in Hz.
Power level is in dB.
Peak and rms phase error results are in degrees.

SCBER? <frequency>,
<fer samples>, <fer events>, <class Ib samples>, <class Ib events>,
<class II samples>, <class II events> <END>

Used during the Self Check Burst Analysis Test, this query returns the
results of the most recent BER test.

Where:
Samples and events are numbers in the range 0 to 20,000,000.

ESCBURST? <frequency>,
<min freq error>, min rms evm>, <min peak evm>, <min 95pc evm>,
<max freq error>, max rms evm>, <max peak evm>,
<max 95pc evm>,
<mean freq error>, mean rms evm>, <mean 95pc evm>,
<origin offset>, <power level> <END>

Used during the EDGE Self Check BURST Analysis Test, this query
returns the results of the most recent burst measurement.

Where:

Frequency error results are in Hz.
Power level and origin offset are in dB.
EVM results are in percent.

ESCBLER? <frequency>,
<bler samples>, <bler events>, <bit error samples>, <bit error events>,
<END>

Used during the EDGE Self Check Burst Analysis Test, this query
returns the results of the most recent BLER test.

Where:
Samples and events are numbers in the range 0 to 20,000,000.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-29
80-0013

GENERAL SYSTEM OPERATION COMMANDS

ABORT ABORTs the current test procedure. Termination of the test is
confirmed when the Operation Complete flag is set true.
The test PASS/FAIL code will indicate test aborted and any results
returned will be undefined.

GSE n Sets the Graph Event enable register to n

n New Mask Value (byte) 0 0 to 31

Each bit set to 1 enables the corresponding bit in the Graph Available Event register.
See heading - General System Operation Queries for the companion command GSE?
and the bit definitions.

Note: This register is cleared on power-up.

REFSTD frs Select the REference Frequency STandarD source.

frs Frequency Reference
Standard
0 0 = 10 MHz
1 = 13 MHz

TIMOP op, st_slot, st_bit, st_fract_bit, sp_slot, sp_bit, sp_fract_bit
Select the TIMing OutPut control.

op Timing Output 0 0 = Off (Low)
1 = Off (High)
2 = Programmable
3 = 13 MHz
st_slot Start Slot 0 0 to 7
st_bit Bit in start slot 0 0 to 156
st_fract_bit 1/16 of a bit in start slot 0 0 to 15
sp_slot Stop Slot 0 0 to 7
sp_bit Bit in stop slot 0 0 to 156
sp_fract_bit 1/16 of a bit in stop slot 0 0 to 15

TIME "tstr" Set the real-time clock on the Test Set. Where tstr is the new time
string in the following format:

ddd-DD-MMM-YYYY:HH:MM:SS
e.g., TUE-27-APR-1999:11:55:25

Section 6
6-30 6113 EDGE
80-0013

GLOBAL PARAMETER CONFIGURATION COMMANDS

The following commands are used to establish the system configuration:

BTSTYPE "mnf", "mdl", "sw"
Sends the BTS TYPE information to the Test Set.

The parameters are strings and must be enclosed in double quotes. All three parameters
must be sent by the GPIB command, regardless of the fact that they may not all be
supported. Set the unsupported types as "Not Set".

Note: The parameter strings are not case sensitive.

mnf BTS Manufacturer "Not Set" See Section 7
mdl BTS Model "Not Set" See Section 7
sw BTS Software "Not Set" See Section 7

(See parameter ranges listed in Section 7 BTS-Specific Information).

BTSCODE <full pathname>
Sets the full pathname (drive:\directory) for downloading BTS binary
code files from the PC card to the BTS. The full pathname (limited to
80 characters) must end with a backslash (\), e.g. B:\BTSCODE\.
This command must be issued after the BTSTYPE command.

If the pathname is set to "GPIB:" then remote code download will be
performed.

DBSIC ncc, bscc
SenDs the Base Station Identity Code Parameters to the Test Set.

ncc Network Colour Code 0 0 to 7
bscc Base Station Colour Code 0 0 to 7

DCOCD att, bsag, conf, mfrms, t3212
SenDs the COntrol Channel Description Parameters to the Test Set.

Parameter Typical
Value
Range
att IMSI Attach-Detach Allowed 1 0, 1
bsag Blocks Reserved for Access Grant 0 0 to 7
conf CCCH Configuration (04.08 defined
bits)
1 0, 1, 2, 4, 6
mfrms Multiframes Between Paging Requests 2 2 to 9
t3212 T3212 Timeout Value 0 0 to 255

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-31
80-0013

GPIBSET addr, disp_state
Displays the GPIB messages on the Test Set


Test Set GPIB Address addr 20 0 to 30
Display state disp_state 0 0 = OFF
1 = ON

GSM850CECD ocn, cat
(GSM 850 Radio System Only)
Sends the GSM 850 CEll Channel Description Parameters to the Test
Set.

ocn Origin Channel Number 128 128 to 251
cat Cell Allocation Table Active Cells:
134, 144, 154, 164,
174, 184, 194, 204,
214, 224, 234, 244
Cells: 128 to 251
(See heading:
Cell Table
Representation)

GSMCECD ocn, cat
(E-GSM 900 Radio System Only)
Sends the E-GSM 900 CEll Channel Description Parameters to the
Test Set.

and 975 to 1023
6, 16, 26, 36, 46, 56,
66, 76, 86, 96, 106, 116
Cells: 0 to 124
and 975 to 1023
(See heading:
Cell Table
Representation)

GSMRCECD ocn, cat
(E-GSM 900 + R Radio System Only)
Sends the E-GSM 900 + R CEll Channel Description Parameters to
the Test Set.

and 955 to 1023
6, 16, 26, 36, 46, 56,
66, 76, 86, 96, 106, 116
Cells: 0 to 124
and 955 to 1023
(See heading:
Cell Table
Representation)

Section 6
6-32 6113 EDGE
80-0013

DCSCECD ocn, cat
(DCS 1800 Radio System Only)
Sends the DCS 1800 CEll Channel Description Parameters to the Test
Set.

Parameter (DCS 1800) Default Value Range
516, 526, 536, 546,
556, 566, 576, 586,
596, 606, 612, 622,
632
Cells = 512 to 885
(See heading:
Cell Table
Representation)

PCSCECD ocn, cat
(PCS 1900 Radio System Only)
Sends the PCS 1900 CEll Channel Description Parameters to the Test
Set.

Parameter (PCS 1900) Default Value Range
516, 526, 536, 546,
556, 566, 576, 586,
596, 606, 612, 622,
632
Cells: 512 to 810
(See heading:
Cell Table
Representation)

DCOPT pwrc, dtx, rtmo
SenDs the Cell OPTions to the Test set.

pwrc Power Control Indicator 0 0, 1
dtx DTX Indicator 2 0 to 2
rtmo Radio Link Timeout T100
(SACCH Blocks)
8 4 to 64 in steps of 4

GSM850NCED ocn, extocn, eocn, nct
(GSM 850 Radio System only)
Sends the GSM 850 Neighbour CEll Description parameters to the
Test Set.

Parameter (GSM 850) Default Value Range
extocn Extend Origin Channel Number 0 0 = No, 1 = Yes
eocn Extended Origin Channel Number 128 128 to 251
nct Neighbour Cell Table Active Cells:
147, 153, 213,
233, 247
Cells: 128 to 251
(See heading:
Cell Table
Representation)

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-33
80-0013

GSMNCED ocn, extocn, eocn, nct
(E-GSM 900 Radio System only)
Sends the E-GSM 900 Neighbour CEll Description parameters to the
Test Set.

and 975 to 1023
and 975 to 1023
10, 20, 80, 100,
110, 120
Cells: 0 to 124
and 975 to 1023
(See heading:
Cell Table
Representation)

GSMRNCED ocn, extocn, eocn, nct
(E-GSM 900 + R Radio System only)
Sends the E-GSM 900 + R Neighbour CEll Description parameters to
the Test Set.

and 955 to 1023
and 955 to 1023
10, 20, 80, 100,
110, 120
Cells: 0 to 124
and 955 to 1023
(See heading:
Cell Table
Representation)

DCSNCED ocn, extocn, eocn, nct
Sends the DCS 1800 Neighbour CEll Description parameters to the
Test Set.

512
Cells: 512 to 885
(See heading:
Cell Table
Representation)

Section 6
6-34 6113 EDGE
80-0013

PCSNCED ocn, extocn, eocn, nct
Sends the PCS 1900 Neighbour CEll Description parameters to the
Test Set.

512
Cells: 512 to 810
(See heading:
Cell Table
Representation)

DRACH mr, txs, cb, re, plmnp, accn
SenDs the RACH Control parameters to the Test Set.

mr Maximum Retransmissions 2 1, 2, 4, 7
txs Tx Spread Integer 5 3 to 12, 14, 16, 20,
25, 32, 50
cb Cell Barred 0 0, 1
re Call Re-Establish 1 0, 1
plmnp PLMN Permitted 255 0 to 255
accn Access Control Class 32767 0 to 65535

DLAID ci, mcc, mnc, lac
SenDs the Location Area IDentification parameters to the Test Set.

ci Cell Identity Value 1 0 to 65535
mcc Mobile Country Code 1 0 to 999
mnc Mobile Network Code 1 0 to 99
lac Location Area Code 1 0 to 65535

DCSPS crh, mpcch, mpacc
SenDs the Cell Selection ParameterS to the Test Set.

crh Cell Reselect Hysterisis 12 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14
mpcch Max Mobile Tx Power Level 15 0 to 31
mpacc Min Mobile Rx Signal Level 0 0 to 63

DENCP kc
SenDs the ENCryption Parameters to the Test Set.

kc Encryption Kc #HFFFFFFFF
FFFFFC00
Any 16 digit Hex Number.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-35
80-0013

RADIOSYS radsys
Select the RADIO SYStem.

radsys Radio System 0 0 = E-GSM 900
2 = DCS 1800
3 = PCS 1900
4 = E-GSM 900 + R
5 = Multiband (E-GSM 900)
6 = Multiband (DCS 1800)
7 = Multiband (PCS 1900)
8 = Multiband (GSM 850)
9 = GSM 850

TRFCFG crc4, ebit, slot0, t1ff, asmux
Sends the TRaFfic ConFiGuration parameters for the Abis Link.

crc4 CRC 4 Bit 0 0 : Off
1 : On
ebit CRC 4 E-bit 0 0 = Off
1 = On
slot0 Slot 0 Bits 3 to 8 31 0 to 63
t1ff T1 Frame Format 0 If T1 Option is fitted:
0 = ESF
1 = D3/D4
asmux A-bis Sub-Multiplexing Rate 0 0 = 16 kbit/s
1 = 8 kbit/s

Note: t1ff parameter is not used if E1 Option is fitted, but must
be supplied as part of the command.

EMAPBCF bcf_tei, bcf_slot, sub_slot
Sends thE MAPping parameters for the BCF to the Test Set.
See also CLRMAP command.

bcf_tei BCF TEI BTS specific (Note) 0 to 127
bcf_slot BCF Sig Slot BTS specific (Note) 0 to 31
sub_slot BCF Sub Slot BTS specific (Note) 16 kbit/s Signalling : 0 to 3

Note: See Section 7 Manufacturer-Specific Information.

Section 6
6-36 6113 EDGE
80-0013

EMAP trx, cell, tei, sig_slot, sub_slot, tch_slot1, tch_slot2, arfcn, rackadd
Sends thE transceiver MAPping parameters to the Test Set.
See also CLRMAP command

Transceiver Identifier trx BTS specific (Note) 0 to 127
Cell Number cell BTS specific (Note) 0 to 127
TEI tei BTS specific (Note) 0 to 127
Signal Slot sig_slot BTS specific (Note) 0 to 31
Sub Slot sub_slot BTS specific (Note) 16 kbit/s Signalling : 0 to 3
Traffic Channel Slot 1 tch_slot1 BTS specific (Note) 0 to 31
Traffic Channel Slot 2 tch_slot2 BTS specific (Note) 0 to 31
Channel Number arfcn BTS specific (Note) (See heading Radio
Ranges)
Rack Address rackadd BTS Specific (Note) BTS Specific (Note)

Note: See Section 7 Manufacturer-Specific Information.

CLRMAP (no parameters)
CLeaRs the whole MAPping table.

This command must always be sent before the start of any mapping
information, i.e. before EMAP or EMAPBCF commands.

PORTYPE port
Select the A-bis Interface PORT TYPE.

port Port Type 1 0 = V11
1 = A-bis

ABISIMP ohm
Select the Abis Input / Output IMPedance.

ohm I/O Impedance 0 0 = Unbalanced (Note 1, 2, 3)
1 = Balanced (Note 1, 2, 3)

Note: (1) Unbalanced selects the BNC co-ax connectors on the front panel.
Balanced selects the 3-pin in-line connectors on the front panel.

(2) If the E1 board is fitted in the Test Set then:
unbalanced is 75 Ohm and Balanced is 120 Ohm.

(3) If the T1 board is fitted in the Test Set then:
both Unbalanced and Balanced are 100 Ohm.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-37
80-0013

LEVOS offsets, txoff, rxsimpoff, rxdupoff
Select the BTS Rx / Tx OffSet option and LEVels.

offsets Level Offsets 0 0 = Off
1 = On
txoff BTS Transmit Offset 0.00 -99.99 to +99.99 dB
rxsimpoff BTS Receive Simplex Offset 0.00 -99.99 to +99.99 dB
rxdupoff BTS Receive Duplex Offset 0.00 -99.99 to +99.99 dB

RFCONN conn
Select the RF CONNection type.

conn RF Connection Type 3 2 = Duplex
3 = Simplex
5 = BOSS Duplex
6 = BOSS Simplex

GSM850HTD ocn, htd
(GSM 850 Radio System Only)
Sends the GSM 850 Hopping Table Parameters to the Test Set.

htd Hopping Table Active Cells:
129, 133, 179, 183,
187, 191, 248, 251
Cells: 128 to 251
(See heading:
Cell Table
Representation)

GSMHTD ocn, htd
(E-GSM 900 Radio System Only)
Sends the E-GSM 900 Hopping Table Parameters to the Test Set.

ocn Origin Channel Number 0 0 to 124 and 975 to 1023
1, 5, 51, 55, 59, 63,
120, 124
Cells: 0 to 124 and 975 to 1023
(See heading:
Cell Table Representation)

GSMRHTD ocn, htd
(E-GSM 900 + R Radio System Only)
Sends the E-GSM 900 + R Hopping Table Parameters to the Test Set.

ocn Origin Channel Number 0 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023
1, 5, 51, 55, 59, 63,
120, 124
Cells: 0 to 124 and 955 to 1023
(See heading:
Section 6
6-38 6113 EDGE
80-0013

DCSHTD ocn, htd
Sends the DCS 1800 Hopping Table Parameters to the Test Set.

513, 514, 574, 575,
633, 634, 635, 636
Cells = 512 to 885
(See heading:

PCSHTD ocn, htd
Sends the PCS 1900 Hopping Table Parameters to the Test Set.

513, 514, 574, 575,
633, 634, 635, 636
Cells: 512 to 810
(See heading:

DTA ita, fta
SenDs the Timing Advance parameters to the Test Set.

ita Initial Timing Advance 0 0 to 63
fta Follow Timing Advance 0 0 to 1

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-39
80-0013

FILE COMMANDS

The following commands are used to open DOS formatted disk files and either write data to
them or read data from them.

FOPEN "mode", "file spec"

Parameter Typical
Value
Range
Read or write access mode mode N/A R : Read only access
W : Write only access
File specification file spec N/A A complete drive, directory path
and file name description in a
DOS format. If the drive ID is
omitted, the drive will default to
the first valid drive found
starting from drive A.

The FOPEN command opens a DOS formatted disk file for either read only access or
write only access. The command will always position an internal file pointer to point to
the start of the given file; therefore, when specifying a write only file, any existing file
having the same file specification will be overwritten. Once successfully opened this file
may be written to using successive FWRITE commands, or read from using successive
FREAD? queries. On completion of the file transfer the disk file should be closed using
the FCLOSE command.

Note: Only one file may be open at any given time, irrespective of the access mode. A
file can only be opened once at a time (i.e. no second copy made).

FWRITE #<arbitrary block program data>

Parameter Typical
Value
Range
File data arbitrary block
program data
N/A 1 to 2048 bytes, formatted using the
definite or indefinite form of the 488.2
defined arbitrary block program block
format. E.g. to send "FILE DATA" in
definite form use:
FWRITE #19FILE DATA

This command writes a block of data to a disk file previously opened for write access with
the command FOPEN. The block of data is contained within a single parameter, encoded
using the 488.2 defined arbitrary block program data format. The maximum number of
bytes that may be transferred using a single FWRITE command message is 2048 bytes; if
the length of the file to be transferred is greater than this then successive FWRITE
commands must be used, ensuring that the data blocks are sent sequentially.

All data transferred to a disk file is buffered in an internal 20 kbyte buffer. At the
completion of the file transfer it is important to ensure that the contents of this buffer are
flushed using the FCLOSE command before removing the disk from the card slot.

FCLOSE

This command closes a disk file previously opened with the GPIB command FOPEN. If
the file was opened for write access, the contents of all internal buffers will be flushed to
the disk file.

Section 6
6-40 6113 EDGE
80-0013

BTS SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMANDS

The following codes are used to download code to the BTS via the Test Set.

FCODE #<n><aaaa><data bytes>

This command sends the File CODE to the Test Set which, in turn, transfers it to the BTS.
The data is sent in the definite length form of the arbitrary block program data format.
The Test Set reasserts the NCS bit in the graph event register when it has completed the
transfer of the data bytes to the BTS, thus indicating that it is ready for more data.

where:

n Indicates that the next n bytes are used to define the length of the file
header (ASCII coded decimal byte, range 1 4).

aaaa Defines the length of the following data section (range 0 2048).

data bytes The contents of the downloadable file (up to 2048 bytes, each of range
0 FFhex).

FEND

This command indicates to the Test Set that File transfer has ENDed.

Note: If FCODE or FEND are sent to the Test Set when the NCS bit is not asserted they will
be ignored.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-41
80-0013

TEST COMMANDS AND PARAMETERS

This section defines the format of the GPIB commands used to initiate each of the tests
provided by the 6113 Test Set, and also the format of the GPIB messages available during, and
returned at the end of, each test process.

Note that when a test command is used, all associated parameters must be entered with the
command. Consequently no Default values are provided in the test programs, but Typical
Values are given in the following test command descriptions and these may be used as required.

Each test described uses a common set of Error Codes and Status Codes. These Error Codes
and Status Codes are given in the following table.

Table 6.1 Test Procedure Error Codes and Status Codes

Common TSCPS Status Codes
1 Locking to Cell Control Channel
2 Activating Traffic Channel
3 Starting Test
4 Synchronised to Cell Control Channel
5 Checking System Information Messages
6 System Information Messages Correct
7 Establishing RF Link
8 RF Link Established
9 Releasing RF Link
10 RF Link Released
11 Sending A-bis Cypher Mode Command
12 RF Cypher Mode Command Received
13 Sending RF Cypher Mode Complete
14 A-bis Cypher Mode Complete Received
15 BTS ready to be tested
16 Test complete
17 Error reported during BTS configuration
18 Searching for power
19 Sending access request on RACH
20 Waiting for channel required from BTS
21 Time advance indicates moving away from BTS
22 Time advance indicates moving towards from BTS
23 Waiting for new time advance command from BTS
24 Waiting for spurious RACHs
25 Press 'Abort' to continue
26 Establishing link
27 Link established
28 Disconnecting link
29 Link disconnected
30 WARNING: BTS is transmitting a Cell Control Channel
31 Activating SDCCH Channel
32 Deactivating Traffic Channel
33 Deactivating SDCCH Channel
34 Ask operator to switch on mobile

Section 6
6-42 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Common EOT Error Codes
1 FAIL - Cannot map TCH TRX
2 FAIL - Cannot map CCH TRX
3 FAIL - System information frames not received
4 FAIL - System information frames not correct
5 FAIL - BER test limits exceeded
6 FAIL - Power profile limits exceeded
7 FAIL - RF in wrong state to send measurement report
8 FAIL - RF in wrong state to establish link
9 FAIL - RF in wrong state to release link
10 FAIL - Failed to establish RF link
11 FAIL - Failed to release RF link
12 FAIL - Receiver BER test failed
13 FAIL - Failed to establish A-bis link
14 FAIL - Failed to release A-bis link
15 FAIL - BTS failed to activate traffic channel
16 FAIL - Test aborted
17 FAIL - Incorrect BSIC received in SCH burst
18 FAIL - Timeout waiting for SCH burst
19 FAIL - No link established on TEI
20 FAIL - No CES is available to establish
21 FAIL - Phase trajectory limits exceeded
22 FAIL - Modulation spectrum limits exceeded
23 FAIL - Power level steps limits exceeded
24 FAIL - Static power control limits exceeded
25 FAIL - Downlink power control limits exceeded
26 Test Complete
27 FAIL - A-bis link to BCF failed
28 FAIL - A-bis link to TCH TRX failed
29 FAIL - A-bis link to CCH TRX failed
30 FAIL - BTS type not authorised
31 FAIL - Sensitivity limit exceeded
32 FAIL - Link already established
33 FAIL - Link already disconnected
34 FAIL - BTS type not set
35 FAIL - RF cypher mode command not received
36 FAIL - A-bis cypher mode command not received
37 FAIL - V11 loopback test failed
38 FAIL - No channels to monitor
39 FAIL - Rx level limits exceeded
40 FAIL - Channel required message not received
41 FAIL - Access request from BTS not correct
42 FAIL - BTS calculated wrong timing advance
43 FAIL - Timing advanced by incorrect ammount
44 FAIL - Timing advance command not received
45 FAIL - Transmitter measurements limits exceeded
46 FAIL - Tx frame retried
47 FAIL - Rx Qual test failed
48 FAIL - Requested file not found
49 Measurement reports stopped
50 RF loss error exceeded
51 Abnormal call termination
52 Immediate assignment timed out

54 FAIL Immediate assignment timed out
55 FAIL GPRS synchronisation procedure failed
56 Test yet to be started.
57 CCH configuration message not received
58 BBP Disable CCH not received
59 EVM limits exceeded
60 BBP Locked to CCH not received
Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-43
80-0013

A-bis Related EOT Error Codes
301 FAIL - A-bis unable to synchronise to traffic frame
302 FAIL - A-bis lost synchronisation with traffic frames
303 FAIL - No valid A-bis traffic frames received
304 FAIL - Too many A-bis frames discarded
305 FAIL - A-bis idle frame type received
306 FAIL - A-bis frame type not recognised
307 FAIL - Receiver BER test timed out
308 FAIL - BOSS Traffic channel not found
309 FAIL - BOSS Call dropped during test
310 FAIL - BOSS No call present

BBP Related EOT Messages
200 FAIL - Unknown error (BBP)
201 FAIL - Parameter error (BBP)
202 FAIL - Timeout - no reason given (BBP)
203 FAIL - No power detected
204 FAIL - No power detected in FCCH
205 FAIL - Excessive phase error in FCCH burst
206 FAIL - No power detected in SCH burst
207 FAIL - Excessive phase error in SCH burst
208 FAIL - No FCCH burst found
209 FAIL - No SCH burst found
210 FAIL - General error during demodulation
211 FAIL - Failed to locate training sequence
212 FAIL - No signal detected during demodulation
213 FAIL - BBP interim results timeout

Section 6
6-44 6113 EDGE
80-0013

TCH Format Parameter

For a detailed explanation of available data rates under various combinations of measurement
mode, BTS type and fitted options please refer to TCH Format Parameter in Section 4.
The following is a list of possible data rates together with their values, when used via GPIB.

GSM measurement mode

Data rate Value
Full Rate 0
EFR 1
Half Rate 0 2
Half Rate 1 3
Data F2.4 4
Data F4.8 5
Data F9.6 6
Data F14.4 7

GPRS measurement mode

Data rate Value
GPRS CS1 8
GPRS CS2 9

EDGE measurement mode

Data rate Value
EGPRS MCS-1 12
EGPRS MCS-2 13
EGPRS MCS-3 14
EGPRS MCS-4 15
EGPRS MCS-5 16
EGPRS MCS-6 17
EGPRS MCS-7 18
EGPRS MCS-8 19
EGPRS MCS-9 20

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-45
80-0013

Functional Tests

Reset BTS Test

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Reset BTS Test)

GPIB Command:

RSTBTS (no parameters) Starts the test procedure

GPIB Response:

RSTBTS n Test result in response to the TSEOT? query.

Parameter:

n = 0 Test Passed
= non-zero Test Failed
(See 6.1 Test Procedure Error Codes and Status Codes.)

Section 6
6-46 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Link Test

This A-bis Link Test exercises the physical BTS/BSC terrestrial connection.

Note: This test is only available for certain selections of BTS type as documented in the
relevant section 7.

GPIB Command:

LINKTST abis_slot, sub_slot, tei, sapi, likat
Starts the test procedure

abis_slot A-bis Signalling Timeslot
Number
16 1 to 31
sub_slot A-bis Signalling Subslot
Number
4 16 kbit/s Signalling: 0 to 3
32 kbit/s Signalling: 6 or 7
64 kbit/s Signalling: 4
tei Terminal Endpoint Identifier 1 0 to 127
sapi SAPI 0 0, 62
likat Link Attempts 60 1 to 300

GPIB Response:

LINKTST n Test result in response to the TSEOT? query.

Parameter:

n = 0 Test Passed

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-47
80-0013

CiTA Test

The Cell Integrity Testing and Analysis (CiTA) option (Option 311), can be used to fully test a
complete cell site including all antennas, couplers, low noise amplifiers and other ancillary RF
equipment. The 6113 is used as a network emulator to control the entire cell site during calls
made to or from a standard mobile terminal fitted with a Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions
Test SIM. The use of this special test SIM from Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions ensures
that the live cell site under test is not accessible to any other mobiles in the vicinity.

Note: This test is only available for certain selections of BTS type as documented in the
relevant section 7.

GPIB Command:

FULLCALL tcn, tslt, txlvl, sampt, lpbck, tpat, tfmt, callset, pwrc, mbtxlev, reg, imsi, imei
pwrlev, error, loopdel, flag, port, dfile

tcn Channel Number GSM 850 = 190
E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
Band dependant
e.g.
DCS1800 = 512-885
tslt Timeslot 4 -1 = ALL timeslots
1 to 7 = tslot 1 to 7
txlvl BTS Tx Level 0 0 = Full power
1..6 = power levels
sampt Sample Time 10 1 to 300000 seconds
lpbck Audio Loopback 1 0 = none
1 = BER
2 = Voice
3 = BER & Voice
tpat Test Pattern 1 0 to 9
tfmt TCH Format 0 0 = Full Rate
1 = EFR
callset Call Set-up 0 0 = Mobile Terminated
1 = Mobile Originated
Pwrc Uplink Power Control 0 0 = OFF
1 = UL QUAL:1
2 = UL LEV:20
mbtxlev Mobile TX Level 10 0..30
reg Registration Criteria 1 1 = IMSI
2 = IMEI
3 = IMSI & IMEI
imsi IMSI Value "001010123456789" See: Note 1
imei IMEI Value "<IMEI number>"
See: Note 2
See: Note 2
pwrlev Display Power Levels 1 0 = RxLevel
1 = RF Loss (dB)
error Rx/TX Air Loss Error 10 0..30 dB

loopdel Loopback delay 0..10 seconds
Section 6
6-48 6113 EDGE
80-0013
flag VQA Flag 0 0 = OFF See: Note 3
1 = ON
port VQA Port 0 0 = COM1 See: Note 3
1 = COM2
dfile Datafile 2 0 = A:/
1 = B:/
2 = OFF

Note (1) IMSI

The IMSI of the Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions Test SIM must be entered
here. The default value is correct for the Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions
Test SIM (001010123456789).

(2) IMEI

The IMEI of the mobile terminal MUST be entered here. Although the mobile can
be dismantled to gain this information, it is easier to enter the key sequence * # 0
6 # on the mobile to display its IMEI.

(3) VQA

These parameters are specific to the VQA test-set option. These parameters are
only usable if the VQA function (Option 314) is fitted.

GPIB Response:

FULLCALL n Test result in response to the TSEOT? query.

Parameter:

n = 0 Test Passed

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-49
80-0013

TRANSMITTER TESTS GSM MEASUREMENT MODE


(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Cell Control Channel Generation Test GSM)



GPIB Command:

CCCG ccn, tlvel, ncc, bscc, mcch Starts the test procedure

ccn Control Channel Number GSM 850 = 190
E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges
tlvl BTS Tx Level 0 0 = Max
1 to 6
mcch Maintain BCCH 0 0 = Off, 1 = On

GPIB Response:

CCCG n Test result in response to the TSEOT? query.

Parameter:

n = 0 Test Passed

(See 6.1 Test Procedure Error Codes and Status Codes)

Section 6
6-50 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Transmitter Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Transmitter Test GSM)

GPIB Command:

TXTST tcn, tslt, tlvl, rlvl, nbrst, trxcfg, tpat, bnum, hop, enc, flmt, rph, pph, explvl, plmt,
nlmt, ppmsk, tpl, modmsk, mmo, revm, pevm, nevm, ooff.

E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges
tslt Timeslot 4 0 to 7
tlvl BTS Tx Level 0 0 = Max,
1 to 6
rlvl BTS Rx Signal Level -85.0 -120.0 to
-40.0 dBm
nbrst Number of Bursts 10 1 to 999
trxcfg TRX Configuration 1 0 = BCCH, 1 = TCH
bnum Burst Number 0 0 = Any,
1 to 4
hop Hopping 0 0 = Off
1 = On
enc Encryption 0 0 = Off
1 = A5/1
2 = A5/2
flmt Frequency Error Limit
(+/-)
48.0 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz
rph RMS Phase Error Limit 5.00 0.00 to 10.00 deg
pph Peak Phase Error Limit 20.00 0.00 to 30.00 deg
explvl Expected Power Level (Note 1) 0.0 to +100.0 dBm
plmt Power level Limit (+) 3.0 0.0 to 3.0 dB
nlmt Power level Limit (-) 0.0 0.0 to 3.0 dB
ppmsk Power Profile Mask
Checking
1 0 = Off,
1 = On
tpl TCH Power Level 0 0 = Max,
1 to 15
modm
sk
Modulation Spectrum Mask
Checking
1 0 = Off,
1 = On
mmo Measurement Mode
Override
0 (Note 2) Fixed
revm RMS EVM Limit 8.0 (Note 3) 0.0 to 100.0 %
pevm Peak EVM Limit 22.0 (Note 3) 0.0 to 100.0 %
nevm 95% tile EVM Limit 11.0 (Note 3) 0.0 to 100.0 %
ooff Origin Offset Limit -35.0 (Note 3) -80.0 to 0.0 dB

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-51
80-0013

GPIB Response:

TXTST n, min_freq_err, min_rms_perr, min_peak_perr, max_freq_err, max_rms_perr,
max_peak_perr, ave_freq_err, ave_rms_perr, ave_peak_perr, bts_pwr, req_pwr,
meas_pwr, pwr_err, pwr_profile, mod_spec

Test result in response to the TSEOT? query.

Response
Element
Description Range Units
n Test Pass / Fail code 0 = Passed
Non-zero = Failed
(Note 4)

min_freq_err Minimum Frequency Error Hz
min_rms_perr Minimum RMS Phase Error deg
min_peak_perr Minimum Peak Phase Error deg
max_freq_err Maximum Frequency Error Hz
max_rms_perr Maximum RMS Phase Error deg
max_peak_perr Maximum Peak Phase Error deg
ave_freq_err Average Frequency Error Hz
ave_rms_perr Average RMS Phase Error deg
ave_peak_perr Average Peak Phase Error deg
bts_pwr BTS Power Test Pass / Fail code 0 = Passed
1 = Failed
56 = Not yet
started

req_pwr Requested Power dBm
meas_pwr Measured Power dBm
pwr_err Power Error dB
pwr_profile Power Profile Test Pass / Fail code 0 = Passed
6 = Failed
56 = Not yet
started

mod_spec Modulation Spectrum Test Pass / Fail
code
0 = Passed
1 = Failed
56 = Not yet
started

Note: (1) The default Expected Power Level value is BTS specific; it is the same
value as entered for Maximum BTS Output Power in the Configure BTS
test.


(2) In GSM Measurement Mode a side effect is to pick GMSK test using
TCH/FS.

(3) These parameters do not apply to GSM Measurement Mode.

(4) See 6.1 Test Procedure Error Codes and Status Codes.
Section 6
6-52 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Transmitter BER Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Transmitter BER Test GSM)

GPIB Command:

TXL tcn, tslt, tfmt, enc, tlvl, rlvl, tpat, sampt, ferl, c1bl, c2l, hop, mmo.

E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges
tfmt TCH Format 0 (Note 1)
1 = A5/1
2 = A5/2
1 to 6
-40.0 dBm
sampt Sample Time 10 1 to 300000s
ferl FER Limit 0.000 0.000 to 100.000 %
c1bl Class Ib Limit 0.000 0.000 to 100.000 %
c2l Class II Limit 0.000 0.000 to 100.000 %
1 = On
Override
0 Fixed

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-53
80-0013

GPIB Response:

This Test generates two types of messages: an interim response message and a final test
message.

While the test is running, numerical results are generated and made available via the
GPIB status queue. The results sent to the status queue are interim results generated
during each individual measurement phase. They give the current number of samples
taken and the number of events so far detected.

The format of the numerical interim results is as follows:

Interim BER Measurement Results:

TSINT:I_BER <fers>, <fere>, <c1bs>, <c1be>, <c2s>, <c2e>

Where: (1) fers = Frame erasure samples
(2) fere = Frame erasure events
(3) c1bs = Class lb samples
(4) c1be = Class lb events
(5) c2s = Class ll samples
(6) c2e = Class ll events

See note 3 below for response element applicability.

End of Test Message:

On completion of the Transmitter BER test, the following GPIB EOT message is
generated:

TXL n, fer_s, fer_e, c1b_s, c1b_e, c2_s, c2_e

Response
Element
Description Range
n Test Pass / Fail code 0 = Passed (Note 2)
Non-zero = Failed
(1) fer_s Number of FER samples in BER measurement
(2) fer_e Number of FER events in BER measurement
(3) c1b_s Number of Class Ib samples in BER measurement
(4) c1b_e Number of Class Ib events in BER measurement
(5) c2_s Number of Class II samples in BER measurement
(6) c2_e Number of Class II events in BER measurement

Section 6
6-54 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Note: (1) Range available depends upon the type of BTS. Refer to Section 4 / A-bis
CONTROLLED TESTING / TCH Format Parameter.


(3) Depending on the TCH Format selected, different response elements will
hold the interim or final results of the test respectively. Other response
elements will return placeholder values.

For circuit switched speech channel rates items 1 to 6 above apply.
For circuit switched data channel rates items 3 to 4 only apply.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-55
80-0013

Static Power Control (BCCH) Test

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Static Power Control Test)

GPIB Command:

SPWRL tcn, tslt, rlvl, nstep, ave, fslvl, plmt, nlmt, staclmt, cerr

E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM 900+ R = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges
rlvl BTS Rx Signal Level -85.0 -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
nstep Number of Steps 6 0 to 15
(Max is BTS-specific)
ave Number of Averages 10 1 to 10000
fslvl First Step Expected Level (Note 1) -100.0 to +100.0 dBm
(BTS-specific)
plmt Power Level Limit (+) 3.0 [2.0] (Note 2) 0.0 to 3.0 dB
nlmt Power Level Limit (-) 0.0 [2.0] (Note 2) 0.0 to 3.0 dB
staclmt Step Accuracy Limit (+/-) 0.5 [1.0] (Note 2) 0.0 to 3.0 dB
cerr Cumulative Error (+/-) 3.0 [3.0] (Note 2) 0.0 to 6.0 dB

Note: (1) The default Expected Power Level value is BTS specific; it is the same
test.


(2) Values in [ ] brackets are Phase 2 values.

Section 6
6-56 6113 EDGE
80-0013

GPIB Response:

This Test generates two types of messages: interim responses and a final test message.

The interim responses are TSPLT status messages. They are generated by sending the
TSSTA? query to the Test Set while the test is running. These report the measured data
after each step, in the form of the following GPIB report:

TSPLT step_num, status, target_lvl, meas_lvl, step_err, cum_err
Interim response message.

Response Element Description Range Units
step_num Step Number of the Intermediate
Test
0 to 15
status Status of Intermediate Test 0 = Pass
1 = Power High
2 = Power Low
4 = Cumulative High
8 = Cumulative Low
16 = Accuracy High
32 = Accuracy Low
255 = No Power

target_lvl Target Power Level dBm
meas_lvl Measured Power Level dBm
step_err Step Error dB
cum_err Cumulative Error dB

If the Test Set is unable to perform a measurement at a particular power level, the value
999 will be returned instead of the corresponding Response Element.

The final Test Result is generated in response to the TSEOT? query :

SPWRL n Test result in response to the TSEOT? query.

Response Element Description Range
Non-zero = Failed (Note)

Note: See 6.1 Test Procedure Error Codes and Status Codes.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-57
80-0013

Downlink Power Control (TCH) Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Downlink Power Control Test GSM)

GPIB Command:

DPWRL tcn, tslt, rlvl, tlvl, nstep, ave, staclmt, cerr, hop, mmo.

E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges
-40.0 dBm
1 to 6
nstep Number of Steps 15 1 to 15, TB, TMB
(Max is BTS-specific)
ave Number of Averages 10 1 to 10000
staclmt Step Accuracy Limit 0.5 [1.0] (Note 3) 0.0 to 3.0 dB
cerr Cumulative Error 3.0 [3.0] (Note 3) 0.0 to 6.0 dB
1 = On
Override
0 (Note 2) Fixed

Section 6
6-58 6113 EDGE
80-0013

GPIB Response:

This Test generates two types of messages: interim responses and a final test message.

The interim responses are TSPLT status messages. They are generated by sending the
TSSTA? query to the Test Set while the test is running. These report the measured data
after each step, in the form of the following GPIB report:

TSPLT step_num, status, target_lvl, meas_lvl, ssize, step_err, cum_err

Response Element Description Range Units
step_num Step Number of the Intermediate
Test
0 to 15
status Status of Intermediate Test 0 = Pass
1 = Power High
2 = Power Low
4 = Cumulative High
8 = Cumulative Low
16 = Accuracy High
32 = Accuracy Low
255 = No Power

target_lvl Target Power Level dBm
meas_lvl Measured Power Level dBm
ssize Step Size dB
step_err Step Error dB
cum_err Cumulative Error dB

If the Test Set is unable to perform a measurement at a particular power level, the value
999 will be returned instead of the corresponding Response Element.

The final Test Result is generated in response to the TSEOT? query :

DPWRL n Test result in response to the TSEOT? query.

Non-zero = Failed (Note 1)

Note: (1) See 6.1 Test Procedure Error Codes and Status Codes.

(2) In GSM Measurement Mode a side effect is to pick GMSK test using TCH/FS.

(3) Values in [ ] brackets are Phase 2 values.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-59
80-0013

TRANSMITTER TESTS EDGE MEASUREMENT MODE


(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Cell Control Channel Generation Test EDGE)



GPIB Command:

CCCG ccn, tlvel, ncc, bscc, mcch Starts the test procedure

ccn Control Channel Number GSM 850 = 190
E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges
tlvl BTS Tx Level 0 0 = Max
1 to 6
mcch Maintain BCCH 0 0 = Off, 1 = On

GPIB Response:

CCCG n Test result in response to the TSEOT? query.

Parameter:

n = 0 Test Passed
(See 6.1 Test Procedure Error Codes and Status Codes)

Section 6
6-60 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Transmitter Test EDGE Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Transmitter Test EDGE)

GPIB Command:

TXTST tcn, tslt, tlvl, rlvl, nbrst, trxcfg, tpat, bnum, hop, enc, flmt, rph, pph, explvl, plmt,
nlmt, ppmsk, tpl, modmsk, mmo, revm, pevm, nevm, ooff.

E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges
1 to 6
-40.0 dBm
nbrst Number of Bursts 10 1 to 999
trxcfg TRX Configuration 1 0 = BCCH, 1 = TCH
bnum Burst Number 0 0 = Any,
1 to 4
hop Hopping 0 (Note 1) 0 = Off
1 = On
enc Encryption 0 (Note 1) 0 = Off
1 = A5/1
2 = A5/2
flmt Frequency Error Limit
(+/-)
48.0 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz
rph RMS Phase Error Limit 5.00 (Note 1) 0.00 to 10.00 deg
pph Peak Phase Error Limit 20.00 (Note 1) 0.00 to 30.00 deg
explvl Expected Power Level (Note 2) 0.0 to +100.0 dBm
plmt Power level Limit (+) 3.0 0.0 to 3.0 dB
nlmt Power level Limit (-) 0.0 0.0 to 3.0 dB
ppmsk Power Profile Mask
Checking
1 0 = Off,
1 = On
tpl TCH Power Level 0 0 = Max,
1 to 15
modm
sk
Modulation Spectrum Mask
Checking
1 0 = Off,
1 = On
Override
2 (Note 3) Fixed
revm RMS EVM Limit 8.0 0.0 to 100.0 %
pevm Peak EVM Limit 22.0 0.0 to 100.0 %
nevm 95% tile EVM Limit 11.0 0.0 to 100.0 %
ooff Origin Offset Limit -35.0 -80.0 to 0.0 dB

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-61
80-0013

GPIB Response:

TXTST_EDGE n, min_freq_err, min_rms_evm, min_peak_evm, min_95pc_evm,
max_freq_err, max_rms_evm, max_peak_evm, max_95pc_evm,
ave_freq_err, ave_rms_evm, ave_peak_evm, ave_95pc_evm, origin_offset,
bts_pwr, req_pwr, meas_pwr, pwr_err, pwr_profile, mod_spec


Response
Element
Non-zero = Failed
(Note 4)

min_freq_err Minimum Frequency Error Hz
min_rms_evm Minimum RMS EVM %
min_peak_evm Minimum Peak EVM %
min_95pc_evm Minimum 95% tile EVM %
max_freq_err Maximum Frequency Error Hz
max_rms_evm Maximum RMS EVM %
max_peak_evm Maximum Peak EVM %
max_95pc_evm Maximum 95% tile EVM %
ave_freq_err Average Frequency Error Hz
ave_rms_evm Average RMS EVM %
ave_peak_evm Average Peak EVM %
ave_95pc_evm Average 95% tile EVM %
origin_offset Origin Offset dB
bts_pwr BTS Power Test Pass / Fail code 0 = Passed
1 = Failed
56 = Not yet
started

req_pwr Requested Power dBm
meas_pwr Measured Power dBm
pwr_err Power Error dB
pwr_profile Power Profile Test Pass / Fail code 0 = Passed
6 = Failed
56 = Not yet
started

mod_spec Modulation Spectrum Test Pass / Fail
code
0 = Passed
1 = Failed
56 = Not yet
started

Section 6
6-62 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Note: (1) These parameters do not apply to EDGE Measurement Mode.

(2) The default Expected Power Level value is BTS specific; it is the same
test.


(3) In EDGE Measurement Mode a side effect is to pick 8PSK test using a
nominated MCS.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-63
80-0013

Transmitter BLER Test EDGE Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Transmitter BLER Test EDGE)

GPIB Command:

TXL tcn, tslt, tfmt, enc, tlvl, rlvl, tpat, sampt, ferl, c1bl, c2l, hop, mmo.

E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges
1 = A5/1
2 = A5/2
1 to 6
-40.0 dBm
sampt Sample Time 10 1 to 300000s
ferl BLER Limit 0.000 0.000 to 100.000 %
c1bl Class Ib Limit 0.000 (Note 3) 0.000 to 100.000 %
c2l Class II Limit 0.000 (Note 3) 0.000 to 100.000 %
1 = On
Override
2 Fixed

Section 6
6-64 6113 EDGE
80-0013

GPIB Response:

message.



Interim BLER Measurement Results:

TSINT:I_BLER <blers>, <blere>, <bits>, <bite>

Where: blers = Block Error samples
blere = Block Error events
bits = Bit Error samples
bite = Bit Error events


On completion of the Transmitter BLER test, the following GPIB EOT message is
generated:

TXL_EDGE n, bler_s, bler_e, bit_s, bit_e

Response
Element
Description Range
Non-zero = Failed
bler_s Number of Block error samples in BLER
measurement

bler_e Number of Block error events in BLER
measurement

bit_s Number of Bit error samples in BLER measurement
bit_e Number of Bit error events in BLER measurement




Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-65
80-0013

RECEIVER TESTS GSM MEASUREMENT MODE

Receiver BER Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Receiver BER Test GSM )

GPIB Command:

RXL tcn, tslt, tfmt, enc, tlvl, rlvl, tpat, sampt, ferl, c1bl, c2l, hop, mmo.

E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges

1 = A5/1
2 = A5/2
1 to 6
-40.0 dBm
sampt Sample Time 10 1 to 300000 s
ferl FER Limit (Note 3) 0.000 to 100.000 %
c1bl Class Ib Limit (Note 3) 0.000 to 100.000 %
c2l Class II Limit (Note 3) 0.000 to 100.000 %
1 = On
Override
0 Fixed

Section 6
6-66 6113 EDGE
80-0013

GPIB Response:

message.








On completion of the Receiver BER test, the following GPIB EOT message is generated:

RXL n, fer_s, fer_e, c1b_s, c1b_e, c2_s, c2_e

Response
Element
Description Range
Non-zero = Failed
(1) fer_s Number of FER samples in BER measurement
(2) fer_e Number of FER events in BER measurement
(3) c1b_s Number of Class Ib samples in BER measurement
(4) c1b_e Number of Class Ib events in BER measurement
(5) c2_s Number of Class II samples in BER measurement
(6) c2_e Number of Class II events in BER measurement




to the BTS and the selected TCH Format. Refer to Section 4 / A-bis



Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-67
80-0013

Absolute Sensitivity Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Absolute Sensitivity Test GSM)

GPIB Command:

SENS tcn, tslt, enc, ilvl, fstp, tlim, tlvl, tpat, sampt, ferl, c1bl, c2l, hop, tfmt, mmo.

E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges
1 = A5/1
2 = A5/2
ilvl Initial Level -104.0 -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
fstp Final Step Size 0.5 0.1 to 2.0 dB
tlim Pass / Fail Threshold -104.0 -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
1 to 6
ferl FER Limit (Note 3) 0.000 to 100.000 %
c1bl Class Ib Limit (Note 3) 0.000 to 100.000 %
c2l Class II Limit (Note 3) 0.000 to 100.000 %
1 = On
Override
0 Fixed

Section 6
6-68 6113 EDGE
80-0013

GPIB Response:

This Test generates three types of messages: two interim response messages and a final
test message.





See Note 4 below for response element applicability.

Interim SENS Measurements:

The interim responses are TSSEN status messages. They are generated by sending the
TSSTA? query to the Test Set while the test is running. These report the current signal
level at each step, in the form of the following GPIB report.

TSSEN sens_lvl, ber Interim response message

Response Element Description Units
sens_lvl Current Sensitivity level dBm
Ber (Note 5) Class II Bit Error Rate at this
level
%


On completion of the Absolute Sensitivity test, the following GPIB EOT message is
generated:

SENS n, level Test result in response to the TSEOT? query :

Response
Element
Non-zero = Failed
(Note 2)

level The lowest BTS Output Power Level
at which the specified BER can be
maintained.
dBm

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-69
80-0013






(5) Values returned in the ber response element of TSSEN are only applicable
when a circuit switched speech channel rate has been selected.

Section 6
6-70 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Access Burst Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Access Burst Test GSM)

GPIB Command:

CRACH tcn, tlvl, rlvl, nrach, rdstt, terr, ltest, rdstp, ferl, rchtyp, mmo.

E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges
1 to 6
nrach Number of RACHs 200 0 to 10000000 (Note
1)
rdstt RACH Delay Start 0 0 to 130 bits
terr Timing Error (+/-) 3 1 to 130 bits
ltest Spurious RACH test length 3 1 to 1440 minutes
rdstp RACH Delay Stop 63 0 to 130 bits
ferl FER Limit 0.5 0.000 to 100.000 %
rchtyp
e
RACH Type
0 (Note 4) 0 = Circuit Switched
1 = Packet Switched
Override
0 (Note 3) Fixed

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-71
80-0013

GPIB Response:

This Test generates two types of messages: an interim response and a final test
message.

The interim responses are TSRACH status messages. They are generated by sending
the TSSTA? query to the Test Set while the test is running. These report the current
intermediate measurement data, in the form of the following GPIB report.

TSRACH sam, fail, rat, inv, nf, ta, spu, ta1, ev1, ta2, ev2, ta3, ev3, ta4, ev4, ta5, ev5,
ta6, ev6

Response Element Description
sam Samples count
fail Failures count
rat Failure ratio
inv Invalid Access Request count
nf Not found
ta Bad Timing Advance
spu Spurious count
ta? Timing Advance *6 (starting with highest
events)
ev? Events corresponding to the above Timing
Advance *6

CRACH n Test result in response to the TSEOT? query :


Note: (1) '0' initiates search for spurious RACHs for the specified test length.


(3) A side effect is to pick circuit switched RACH test.

(4) This parameter does not apply in GSM Measurement Mode.

Section 6
6-72 6113 EDGE
80-0013

RX Level Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / RX Level Test GSM)

GPIB Command:

RXLEV tcn, tslt, tlvl, tpat, ilvl, ssize, nsam, rxerr, nstep, hop, tfmt, enc, mmo.

E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges
1 to 6
ilvl Initial Level -91.5 -120.0 to
-40.0 dBm
ssize Step Size 2 1 to 32 dB
nsam Number of Samples 4 1 to 10
rxerr RX Level Error (+/-) 4 1 to 10
nstep Number of Steps 10 0 to 100
1 = On
1 = A5/1
2 = A5/2
Override
0 Fixed

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-73
80-0013

GPIB Response:

message.

The interim responses are TSRXLEV status messages. They are generated by sending
intermediate measurement data, in the following form:

TSRXLEV lvl, lnom, lmin, lmax, lmean, q0, q1, q2, q3, q4, q5, q6, q7
Interim response message

lvl Requested Signal Level of current step
lnom Nominal Rx Level value of current step
lmin Minimum Rx Level value reported
lmax Maximum Rx Level value reported
lmean Mean Rx Level value reported
q0 Number of samples of Rx Quality Level 0

RXLEV n Test result in response to the TSEOT? query.




Section 6
6-74 6113 EDGE
80-0013

RX Quality Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / RX Quality Test GSM)

GPIB Command:

RXQUAL tcn, tslt, tlvl, tpat, ilvl, ssize, nsam, nstep, hop, tfmt, rqtl, enc, mmo.

tcn Channel
Number
GSM 850 = 190
E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading
Radio System
Channel Number
Ranges
1 to 6
ilvl Initial Level -102.0 -120.0 to
-40.0 dBm
ssize Step Size 1.0 0.1 to 10.0 dB
nsam Number of
Samples
5 1 to 10000
nstep Number of
Steps
10 0 to 100
1 = On
rqtl Rx Qual Test
Limit
80.000 0.000 to 100.00
%
1 = A5/1
2 = A5/2
mmo Measurement
Mode
Override
0 Fixed

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-75
80-0013

GPIB Response:

test message.




Where: fers = Frame erasure samples
fere = Frame erasure events
c1bs = Class lb samples
c1be = Class lb events
c2s = Class ll samples
c2e = Class ll events

Interim Quality Measurements:

The interim responses are TSRXQUAL status messages. They are generated by sending

TSRXQUAL lvl, samples, c2_ber, q0, q1, q2, q3, q4, q5, q6, q7, status
Interim response message

lvl Requested Signal Level of current step
samples number of samples
c2_ber Result of Class II BER test
status status of the intermediate test, 0 = Test passed


On completion of the Receive Quality test, the following GPIB EOT message is
generated:

RXQUAL n Test result in response to the TSEOT? query

n Test Complete / Fail code 0 = Passed


Section 6
6-76 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Receiver Signalling BER Test GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Receiver Signalling BER Test GSM)

GPIB Command:

RXSIG tcn, tslt, chft, sslt, enc, tlvl, rlvl, nsam, ferl, mmo.

E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges
chft Channel Format 0 (Note 1)

sslt Sub-slot 2 0 to 7
1 = A5/1
2 = A5/2
1 to 6
rlvl BTS Rx Signal Level -104.0 -120.0 to 40.0 dBm
nsam Number of Samples 1000 1 to 10000000
ferl FER Limit 0.100 0.000 to 100.000 %
Override
0 Fixed

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-77
80-0013

GPIB Response:

This test generates two types of messages: an interim response message and a final test
message.

The interim responses are TSRXSIG status messages. They are generated by sending
the TSSTA? query to the Test Set while the test is running. These report the measured
data after each step, in the form of the following GPIB report:

TSRXSIG fer_s, fer_e Interim response message.

Response
Element
Description Range
fer_s Number of FER samples in BER measurement
fer_e Number of FER events in BER measurement

RXSIG n, fer_s, fer_e Test result in response to the TSEOT? query

Response
Element
Description Range
n Test Complete / Fail code 0 = Passed
Non-zero = Failed
(Note 2)
fer_s Number of FER samples in BER measurement
fer_e Number of FER events in BER measurement

Note: (1) Channel formats in GSM Measurement Mode are as follows:

Channel Format Value Timeslot Sub-slot
SDCCH/4 0 inactive 0 to 3
SACCH/C4 2 inactive 0 to 3
FACCH/F 6 0 to 7 inactive
SACCH/TF 4 0 to 7 inactive
SDCCH/8 1 0 to 7 0 to 7
SACCH/C8 3 0 to 7 0 to 7
FACCH/H 9 0 to 7 0 to 1
SACCH/TH 8 0 to 7 0 to 1

Availability of SDCCH/8, SACCH/C8, FACCH/H, SACCH/TH is dependent on
BTS type selection.


Section 6
6-78 6113 EDGE
80-0013

RECEIVER TESTS GPRS MEASUREMENT MODE

Receiver BLER Test GPRS Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Receiver BLER Test GPRS )

GPIB Command:


E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges

1 = A5/1
2 = A5/2
1 to 6
rlvl BTS Rx Signal Level -104.0 (Note 4) -120.0 to
-40.0 dBm
ferl BLER Limit (Note 3) 0.000 to 100.000 %
c1bl Class Ib Limit 0 (Note 5) 0.000 to 100.000 %
c2l Class II Limit 0 (Note 5) 0.000 to 100.000 %
1 = On
Override
1 Fixed

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-79
80-0013

GPIB Response:

message.







On completion of the Receiver BLER test, the following GPIB EOT message is generated:

RXL_GPRS n, bler_s, bler_e, bit_s, bit_e

Response
Element
Description Range
Non-zero = Failed
measurement

measurement






CS1 to CS3 = -104.0, CS4 = -101.0


Section 6
6-80 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Absolute Sensitivity Test GPRS Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Absolute Sensitivity Test GPRS)

GPIB Command:


E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges
1 = A5/1
2 = A5/2
ilvl Initial Level -104.0 (Note 4) -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
tlim Pass / Fail Threshold -104.0 (Note 4) -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
1 to 6
1 = On
Override
1 Fixed

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-81
80-0013

GPIB Response:

test message.






The interim responses are TSSEN_BLER status messages. They are generated by
sending the TSSTA? query to the Test Set while the test is running. These report the
current signal level at each step, in the form of the following GPIB report.

TSSEN_BLER sens_lvl, bler Interim response message

bler Block Error Rate at this level %


generated:


Response
Element
Non-zero = Failed
(Note 2)

at which the specified BLER can be
maintained.
dBm

Section 6
6-82 6113 EDGE
80-0013





CS1 to CS3 = -104.0, CS4 = -101.0


Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-83
80-0013

Access Burst Test GPRS Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Access Burst Test GPRS)

GPIB Command:


E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges
1 to 6
1)
ferl FER Limit 0.5 0.000 to 100.000 %
rchtyp
e
RACH Type
0 0 = Circuit Switched
1 = Packet Switched
Override
1 Fixed

Section 6
6-84 6113 EDGE
80-0013

GPIB Response:

message.


ta6, ev6

sam Samples count
fail Failures count
rat Failure ratio
nf Not found
spu Spurious count
events)
Advance *6





Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-85
80-0013

RECEIVER TESTS EDGE MEASUREMENT MODE

Receiver BLER Test EDGE Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Receiver BLER Test EDGE)

GPIB Command:


E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges

1 = A5/1
2 = A5/2
1 to 6
rlvl BTS Rx Signal Level -104.0 (Note 4) -120.0 to
-40.0 dBm
1 = On
Override
2 Fixed

Section 6
6-86 6113 EDGE
80-0013

GPIB Response:

message.







On completion of the Receiver BER test, the following GPIB EOT message is generated:

RXL_EDGE n, bler_s, bler_e, bit_s, bit_e

Response
Element
Description Range
Non-zero = Failed
measurement

measurement






MCS1 to MCS3 = -104.0, MCS4 = -101.5
MCS5 = -101.0, MCS6 = -99.5, MCS7 = -96.0, MCS8 = -93.0,
MCS9 = -91.5


Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-87
80-0013

Absolute Sensitivity Test EDGE Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Absolute Sensitivity Test EDGE)

GPIB Command:


E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges
1 = A5/1
2 = A5/2
ilvl Initial Level -104.0 (Note 4) -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
tlim Pass / Fail Threshold -104.0 (Note 4) -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
1 to 6
1 = On
Override
2 Fixed

Section 6
6-88 6113 EDGE
80-0013

GPIB Response:

test message.






The interim responses are TSSEN_BLER status messages. They are generated by
sending the TSSTA? query to the Test Set while the test is running. These report the
current signal level at each step, in the form of the following GPIB report.

TSSEN_BLER sens_lvl, bler Interim response message

bler Block Error Rate at this level %


generated:


Response
Element
Non-zero = Failed
(Note 2)

at which the specified BLER can be
maintained.
dBm

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-89
80-0013





MCS1 to MCS3 = -104.0, MCS4 = -101.5
MCS5 = -101.0, MCS6 = -99.5, MCS7 = -96.0, MCS8 = -93.0,
MCS9 = -91.5


Section 6
6-90 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Access Burst Test EDGE Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Access Burst Test EDGE)

GPIB Command:


E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges
1 to 6
1)
ferl FER Limit 0.5 0.000 to 100.000 %
rchtyp
e
RACH Type
0 0 = Circuit Switched
1 = Packet Switched
Override
2 Fixed

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-91
80-0013

GPIB Response:

message.


ta6, ev6

sam Samples count
fail Failures count
rat Failure ratio
nf Not found
spu Spurious count
events)
Advance *6





Section 6
6-92 6113 EDGE
80-0013

INTERACTIVE TESTS GSM MEASUREMENT MODE

Multimode GSM Measurement Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Multimode GSM)



GPIB command:

MULTMODE tcn, tslt, enc, tlvl, rlvl, tpat, bnum, hop, ave, foff, epwl, ta, tfmt, mmo.

E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
System Channel
Number Ranges
enc Encryption 0 0 = Off,
1 = A5/1,
2 = A5/2
tlvl BTS Tx Level 0 0 = Max, 1 to 6
bnum Burst Number 0 0 = Any, 1 to 4
hop Hopping 0 0 = Off, 1 = On
ave Video Averages 50 1 to 999
foff Frequency Offset 0 -500 to +500 Hz
epwl Expected Power Level (Note 2) 0 to 100 dBm
ta Timing Advance 0 0 to 63 bits
Override
0 Fixed

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-93
80-0013


(2) The default Expected Power Level value is BTS specific; it is the same
test.


During the execution of this test, RXLEV and RXQUAL report messages are placed on
the status queue.

Phase error, power profile and modulation spectrum graph data is also generated and
made available during this test.

During the execution of Multimode, the following commands may be used to change the
associated parameters:

NTXLVL To re-program the BTS Output Power Level
NTPAT To re-program the Test Pattern
NFOFF To re-program the Frequency Offset
NTADV To re-program the Timing Advance
NTVAVG To re-program the number of Video Averages

NTXLVL tlvl Change the BTS Output Power Level during the Multimode test.

Parameter Range
tlvl BTS Output Power Level 0 = Max, 1 to 6

NTPAT tpat Change the Test Pattern during the Multimode test.

Parameter Range
tpat Test Pattern 0 to 9

NFOFF foff Change the Frequency Offset during the Multimode test.

Parameter Range
foff Frequency Offset -500 to +500 Hz

NTADV ta Change the Timing Advance during the Multimode test.

Parameter Range
ta Timing Advance 0 to 63

NTVAVG ave Change the number of Video Averages during the Multimode test.

Parameter Range
ave Video Averages 1 to 999

Multimode will run continuously until the ABORT command is sent, after which the
following message may be queried by the TSEOT? query.

MULTMODE <error_code>

The <error_code> value returned for Test Aborted is shown in 6.1 Test Procedure Error
Codes and Status Codes.
Section 6
6-94 6113 EDGE
80-0013

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS


(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Signal Generator Mode)

GPIB command:

RFMON tcn, foff, tlvl, sigfmt, puls, mid

E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
Ranges
tlvl Output Level -40.0 -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
sigfmt Signal Format 7 2 = Unmodulated
3 = 0000. . . .
4 = 1111. . . .
5 = 0101. . . .
6 = Training Sequence
7 = Off
8 = Unused
9 = 0000 8PSK
10 = 1111 8PSK
11 = 0000 8PSK No Rot
12 = 1111 8PSK No Rot
13 = 0101 8PSK (Bit)
14 = Inc Sym (8PSK)
15 = Random 8PSK
puls Pulsing 0 0 = Off, 1 = On
mid Training Sequence 0 0 to 7

Note: Available signal formats are described in Section 4 / SPECIAL FUNCTIONS /
Signal Generator Mode.

During the execution of the Signal Generator mode, the following commands can be used
to change the associated parameters:

NSIGLVL To re-program the RF Signal Output Power Level
NFOFF To re-program the Frequency Offset
NARFCN To re-program the Channel Number
NTRSEQ To re-program the Training Sequence
NSIGFMT To re-program the Signal Format
NPULS To re-program the Pulsing

NSIGVL tlvl Change the Output Power Level during the Signal Generator mode.

Parameter Range
tlvl Output Power Level -120.0 to -40.0 dBm

NFOFF foff Change the Frequency Offset during the Signal Generator mode.

Parameter Range
foff Frequency Offset -500 to +500 Hz

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-95
80-0013

NARFCN tcn Change the Channel Number during the Signal Generator mode.

Parameter Range
tcn Channel Number See heading Radio
Ranges

NTRSEQ tsq Change the Training Sequence during the Signal Generator mode.

Parameter Range
tsq Training Sequence 0 to 7

NSIGFMT sigfmt Change the Signal Format during the Signal Generator mode.

Parameter Range
sigfmt Signal Format 2 = Unmodulated
3 = 0000. . . .
4 = 1111. . . .
5 = 0101. . . .
7 = Off
8 = Unused
9 = 0000 8PSK
10 = 1111 8PSK
11 = 0000 8PSK No Rot
12 = 1111 8PSK No Rot
13 = 0101 8PSK (Bit)
14 = Inc Sym (8PSK)
15 = Random 8PSK

NPULS puls Change the Pulsing during the Signal Generator mode.

Parameter Range
puls Pulsing 0 = Off, 1 = On

Signal Generator mode will run continuously until the ABORT command is sent, after
which the following message may be queried by the TSEOT? query.

RFMON <error_code>

The <error_code> value returned for Test Aborted is shown in 6.1 Test Procedure Error
Codes and Status Codes.

Section 6
6-96 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Power Meter Mode

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Power Meter Mode)

WARNING: USE OF THIS MODE REQUIRES THE BTS UNDER TEST TO TRANSMIT


GPIB command:

POWERM tcn, stype Starts the Power Meter mode

E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
Ranges
stype Search Type 1 0 = Measures the power
level at the specified
channel number.
1 = Measures the
maximum power across
the band.

GPIB Response:

This test generates four types of messages: three interim response messages and a final
test message.

The interim responses depend on the state of the test, the search type, and whether the
Test Set is detecting a signal. They are generated by sending the TSSTA? query to the
Test Set while the test is running. These report the measured data after each step, in the
form of the following GPIB report:

POWERM:RPT status, freq, mod, puls, power Interim response message.

Response
Element
Description Range
status Current Power Meter search status 0 = No Signal
1 = Signal Overload
2 = Signal Changing
3 = Signal Found
4 = Tracking Signal
5 = Searching
freq Measured absolute frequency Hz
mod Modulation detected 0 = No, 1 = Yes
puls Pulsing detected 0 = No, 1 = Yes
power Coarse power measurement dBm

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-97
80-0013

POWERM:MEAS arfcn, power Interim response message.

Response
Element
Description Range
arfcn Nearest ARFCN
power Measured power level dBm

POWERM:PROG prog Interim response message.

Response
Element
Description Range
prog Test Progress 0 = reconfigured

During Power Meter mode, the following commands can be used to change the
associated parameters:

NSCANTYPE To re-program the search type
NRESCAN To restart the scan

NSCANTYPE stype Change the search type during Power Meter mode.

Parameter Range
stype Search Type 0 = Measures the power level at
the specified channel number.
1 = Measures the maximum power
across the band.

NRESCAN Restart the scan

Power Meter mode will run continuously until the ABORT command is sent, after which
the following message can be queried by the TSEOT? query.

POWERM <error_code>

The <error_code> value returned for Abort is shown in 6.1 Test Procedure Error Codes
and Status Codes.

Section 6
6-98 6113 EDGE
80-0013


(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Signal Generator and Power Meter Mode)

WARNING: USE OF THIS MODE MAY REQUIRE THE BTS UNDER TEST TO TRANSMIT


GPIB command:

SIGPWR tcn, foff, tlvl, sigfmt, puls, mid, stype
Starts the Power Meter mode

E-GSM 900 = 90
E-GSM + R 900 = 90
DCS 1800 = 512
PCS 1900 = 512
See heading Radio
Ranges
tlvl Output Level -40.0 -120.0 to -40.0 dBm
sigfmt Signal Format 7 2 = Unmodulated
3 = 0000. . . .
4 = 1111. . . .
5 = 0101. . . .
7 = Off
puls Pulsing 0 0 = Off, 1 = On
mid Training Sequence 0 0 to 7
stype Search Type 1 0 = Measures the power
level at the specified
channel number.
1 = Measures the
maximum power across
the band.

Refer to the descriptions of Signal Generator Mode and Power Meter Mode for a description of
the GPIB response and commands that can be used to change associated parameters.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-99
80-0013

SELF CHECK TESTS

Self Check Burst Analysis

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / Self Check Burst Analysis)

GPIB command:

SCBA sfq, attn, sslt, pat, stm, burst, bursts, enc, ferl, Ibl, IIl, pkerr, rmserr, freqerr, pwrl,
tmscb, fss

sfq Self Check Frequency GSM850 = 836.500
E-GSM 900 = 897.500
E-GSM + R 900 = 895.000
DCS 1800 = 1747.500
PCS 1900 = 1880.000
824.000 to 849.000 MHz
880.000 to 915.000 MHz
876.200 to 915.000 MHz
1710.000 to 1785.000 MHz
1850.000 to 1910.000 MHz
(Note 1)
attn Tx Signal Attenuation 0.0 0.0 dB Fixed
sslt Self Check slot 4 0 to 7
pat Test Pattern 6 0 to 9
stm Sample Time 10 1 to 300000 s
burst Burst Number 0 0 (= ANY), 1, 2, 3, 4
bursts Number of Bursts 10 1 to 999
enc Encryption 0 0 = Off, 1 = A5/1, 2 = A5/2
(Note 5)
ferl FER Limit 0.000 0.000 to 100.000 %
Ibl Class Ib Limit 0.000 0.000 to 100.000 %
IIl Class II Limit 0.000 0.000 to 100.000 %
pkerr Peak Phase Error Limit 20.00 0.00 to 30.00 deg
rmserr RMS Phase Error Limit 5.00 0.00 to 10.00 deg
freqerr Frequency Error Limit 43.0 GSM 850
48.0 E-GSM 900
48.0 E-GSM+R 900
95.0 DCS 1800
95.0 PCS 1900
0.0 to 5000.0 Hz
pwrl Power Level Error Limit 3.0 0.0 to 10.0 dB (Note 2)
tmscb Mode of Operation SINGLE SINGLE (Note 3)
CONT, STPERR
fss Frequency Step Size 20 0 to 10000 Mhz (Note 4)

Note: (1) The frequency range accepted by this command depends on the type of
radio system supported by the Rx/Tx module of the 6113 Test Set.

(2) Power Level is given in dB relative to a nominal value.

(3) The 'mode' parameter must be one of the following mnemonics:

SINGLE = One shot measurement.
CONT = Continuous measurements until stopped by the ABORT
command.
STPERR = Stop on the first detected error.
Section 6
6-100 6113 EDGE
80-0013

(4) The frequency step size parameter fss is optional; if it is omitted or set to
0.0, then the frequency given in parameter sfq will be used when the test
repeats or loops.

(5) An execution error will occur if encryption is requested and the Encryption
Option 10 is not fitted.

(6) To stop the test before the cycle completes, use the GPIB command
ABORT.

GPIB response :

message.

during each individual measurement phase; in the case of phase trajectory and power
level results, these are a running average of the results thus accumulated. In the case of
the BER results, they give the current number of samples taken and the number of events
so far detected. For phase error, modulation spectrum and power profile measurements,
graphical data is provided on request.

The format of the numerical interim results are as follows:

Interim Power Level Results:

TSINT:I_PWR <power levelDB>, <measurement frequencyMHZ>

Interim Phase Trajectory (Phase Frequency) results:

TSINT:I_PHFQ <measurement frequency in MHZ>, <freq error>, <rms phase error>,
<peak phase error>


TSINT:I_BER <measurement frequency in MHz>, <fers>, <fere>, <c1bs>, <c1be>,
<c2s>, <c2e>


Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-101
80-0013


On completion of the Self Check Burst Analysis test, the following GPIB EOT message is
generated:

SCBA n

Where 'n' is a bit field as follows:

- - - PWR MOD PULSE PHFQ BER

Where: PWR Power Level Measurement
MOD Modulation Spectrum Measurement
PULSE Power Profile Measurement
PHFQ Phase Frequency Measurement
BER Bit Error Rate Measurement

When a bit is set to '1' the associated test FAILed.
When a bit is set to '0' the associated test PASSed.

Note: The measurement results can also be obtained by using the queries SCBURST?
and SCBER? See DEVICE DEPENDENT QUERIES for a description of these
queries.

Section 6
6-102 6113 EDGE
80-0013

RF Tests Self Check Burst Analysis

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / RF Tests Self Check Burst Analysis)

GPIB command:

BSCBA sfq, attn, sslt, pat, stm, burst, bursts, enc, ferl, Ibl, IIl, pkerr, rmserr, freqerr, pwrl,
tmscb, ifom, fss

sfq Self Check Frequency GSM 850 = 836.500
E-GSM 900 = 897.500
E-GSM + R 900 = 895.000
DCS 1800 = 1747.500
PCS 1900 = 1880.000
824.000 to 849.000 MHz
880.000 to 915.000 MHz
876.200 to 915.000 MHz
1710.000 to 1850.000 MHz
1850.000 to 1910.000 MHz
(Note 1)
attn Tx Signal Attenuation 0.0 Fixed at 0.0
enc Encryption 0 0 = Off, 1 = A5/1, 2 = A5/2
(Note 5)
ferl FER Limit 0.000 0.000 to 100.000 %
Ibl Class Ib Limit 0.000 0.000 to 100.000 %
IIl Class II Limit 0.000 0.000 to 100.000 %
pkerr Peak Phase Error Limit 20.00 0.00 to 30.00 deg
rmserr RMS Phase Error Limit 5.00 0.00 to 10.00 deg
48.0 E-GSM 900
48.0 E-GSM+R 900
95.0 DCS 1800
95.0 PCS 1900
0.0 to 5000.0 Hz
CONT
STPERR
ifom IF Operating Mode WIDE WIDE
NARROW




command.
Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-103
80-0013

(4) The frequency step size parameter fs is optional; if it is omitted or set to
repeats or loops.

(5) An execution error will occur if encryption is requested and the Encryption
Option 10 is not fitted.

ABORT.

GPIB response :

message.

during each individual measurement phase; in the case of phase trajectory and power
level results, these are a running average of the results thus accumulated. In the case of
the BER results, they give the current number of samples taken and the number of events
so far detected. For phase error, modulation spectrum and power profile measurements,




Interim Phase Trajectory (Phase Frequency) results:

TSINT:I_PHFQ <measurement frequency in MHZ>, <freq error>, <rms phase error>,
<peak phase error>


TSINT:I_BER <measurement frequency in MHz>, <fers>, <fere>, <c1bs>, <c1be>,
<c2s>, <c2e>


Section 6
6-104 6113 EDGE
80-0013


On completion of the Self Check Burst Analysis test, the following GPIB EOT message is
generated:

BSCBA n


- - - PWR MOD PULSE PHFQ BER

Where: PWR Power Level Measurement
PHFQ Phase Frequency Measurement
BER Bit Error Rate Measurement


Note: The measurement results can also be obtained by using the queries SCBURST?
and SCBER? See DEVICE DEPENDENT QUERIES for a description of these
queries.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-105
80-0013

EDGE Self Check Burst Analysis

(Hyperlink to Section 4 / EDGE Self Check Burst Analysis)

GPIB command:

ESCBA sfq, attn, sslt, pat, stm, burst, bursts, blerl, pkevm, rmsevm, pc95evm, orgoff,
freqerr, pwrl, tmscb, fss

sfq Self Check Frequency GSM850 = 836.500
E-GSM 900 = 897.500
E-GSM + R 900 = 895.000
DCS 1800 = 1747.500
PCS 1900 = 1880.000
824.000 to 849.000 MHz
880.000 to 915.000 MHz
876.200 to 915.000 MHz
1710.000 to 1785.000 MHz
1850.000 to 1910.000 MHz
(Note 1)
attn Tx Signal Attenuation 0.0 0.0 dB Fixed
blerl BLER Limit 0.000 0.000 to 100.000 %
pkevm Peak EVM Limit 22.0 0.000 to 100.000 %
rmsevm RMS EVM Limit 8.0 0.000 to 100.000 %
pc95evm 95%tile EVM Limit 11.0 0.000 to 100.000 %
orgoff Origin Offset Limit -35.0 -80.0 to 0.0 dB
48.0 E-GSM 900
48.0 E-GSM+R 900
95.0 DCS 1800
95.0 PCS 1900
0.0 to 5000.0 Hz
CONT, STPERR




command.

(4) The frequency step size parameter fss is optional; if it is omitted or set to
repeats or loops.

ABORT.

Section 6
6-106 6113 EDGE
80-0013

GPIB response :

message.

during each individual measurement phase; in the case of EVM and power level results,
these are a running average of the results thus accumulated. In the case of the BLER
results, they give the current number of samples taken and the number of events so far
detected. For EVM, IQ vector, modulation spectrum and power profile measurements,




Interim EVM results:

TSINT:I_EVMFQ <measurement frequency in MHZ>, <freq error>, <rms evm>, <peak
evm>, <95%tile evm error>, <origin offset>


TSINT:I_BLER <measurement frequency in MHz>, <blers>, <blere>, <bits>, <bite>

Where: blers = Block error samples
blere = Block error events
bits = Bit error samples
bite = Bit error events

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-107
80-0013


On completion of the EDGE Self Check Burst Analysis test, the following GPIB EOT
message is generated:

ESCBA n


- IQ EVM PWR MOD PULSE - BLER

Where: IQ IQ Vector Measurement
EVM EVM Measurement
PWR Power Level Measurement
BLER Block Error Rate Measurement


Note: The measurement results can also be obtained by using the queries
ESCBURST? and ESCBLER? See DEVICE DEPENDENT QUERIES for a
description of these queries.

Section 6
6-108 6113 EDGE
80-0013

PROGRAMMING THE TEST SET OVER THE GPIB INTERFACE

This Section describes the control of the 6113 Digital Radio Test Set over the GPIB interface,
with examples using C with a National Instruments GPIB interface card, and HP Basic on an HP
series 9000 workstation. The topics covered include setting up the interface from a program,
setting up the Test Set over the interface, running tests, and receiving the test results.
Examples are given for programming the Test Set.

Note: In this document, uppercase text enclosed in angle brackets '<>' refers to items defined
in IEEE 488.2, the "IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols and Common
Commands". This document assumes basic knowledge of GPIB programming, and the
IEEE 488.2 specification.

Initialising the Controller GPIB Interface

The GPIB interface first needs to be initialised so that communication between the Controller
and Test Set can take place. The following examples show the GPIB interface being initialised .

Example: C with National Instruments GPIB

#define T3s 12 /* Define a timeout code value */

int g_ts6113;

/* Set up unique identifier for Test Set. */
g_ts6113 = ibfind ("TS6113")

ibtmo(g_ts6113,T3s); /* Set timeout value for GPIB calls to 3 sec.*/
ibclr (g_ts6113); /* Clear specified device. */

/* Wait for Test Set to clear itself */
[ wait 1 s ];

/* Set up data transfer modes : */
ibeos (g_ts6113, (REOS | 0x0A)); /* Terminate on line-feed EOS */
ibeot (g_ts6113, 1); /* Set EOI with last byte of write */

Note: No error checking is shown here, but it is recommended that the GPIB interface status
variable 'ibsta' be checked after each GPIB function call to trap any errors. This will
prevent errors not being detected until after the error condition has disappeared.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-109
80-0013

Example: HP Basic

100 Ts_addr=720 ! Set Test Set GPIB address = 20 (Note).
110 CLEAR Ts_addr ! Clear Test Set interface.
120 WAIT 1 ! Wait for Test Set to clear itself.

Note: Must match the setting of the GPIB address parameter in the System Menu.

Handling GPIB Timeouts and Interface Errors

This section describes how to protect against unforeseen GPIB interface problems. The sort of
difficulties which occur are usually due to the GPIB interface being incorrectly initialised, and can
result in a message apparently being sent by the Controller but not received by the Test Set.
There are two classes of problems - timeouts, where there is no response to an interface
instruction, and errors where the function call returns an error.

The two examples shown use different ways of handling timeouts.


The GPIB interface sets a bit in its System Status variable 'ibsta' to indicate a timeout has
occurred on the most recent GPIB function call. This should be checked after each function call.

/* g_ts6113 previously initialised */
ibwrt (g_ts6113, "RESET", 5); /* Send a string to the Test Set */

if (ibsta & TIMO) /* Check for timeout */
{
/* Timeout-handling code */
}

if (ibsta & ERR) /* Check for GPIB errors */
{
/* Error-handling code */
}

Example: HP Basic

100 gpib_wait = 3 ! Set 3 second timeout for GPIB
110 ON TIMEOUT 7, gpib_wait GOSUB Gpib_timeout
.
.
200 Gpib_timeout : ! Timeout-handling code
210

Section 6
6-110 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Sending Messages to the Test Set

Messages are sent to the Test Set using standard function calls to send command strings,
which consist of the command mnemonic followed by parameters as appropriate. The GPIB
Commands and Parameters that the Test Set recognises are defined in Section 6 (this Section)
and in Section 7.

There are various rules controlling the format of the command strings which are sent to the Test
Set.

Note: Uppercase text enclosed in angle brackets '<>' refers to items defined in IEEE 488.2,
"IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols and Common Commands".

The following is a summary of the format rules :

(1) The first element of the string must be the command mnemonic.

(2) The first parameter must be separated from the command mnemonic by at least one
space.

(3) Parameters must be separated from each other by a comma, with optional spaces
allowed either side of the comma.

(4) String parameters must be sent as a <STRING PROGRAM DATA> element. This means
they have to be enclosed between either single quotes or double quotes, for example :

BTSTYPE "BANJO", "B320", "B1"

(5) Integer parameters greater than 2
32
(FFFFFFFF hex) must be sent in <NON-DECIMAL
NUMERIC PROGRAM DATA> format. For example :

DENCP #HFFFFFFFFFFFFFC00

This format is indicated by the characters '#H', which are followed by a sequence of
hexadecimal characters terminated with a comma or command string terminator. No
distinction is made between upper and lowercase characters.

(6) All other parameters are sent in either <DECIMAL NUMERIC PROGRAM DATA> format
or <NON-DECIMAL NUMERIC PROGRAM DATA> format. These formats include
decimal integer representation and floating point with or without exponent, and binary,
octal and hexadecimal integer representation. The following are all valid representations
of the same number:

5100
+5100
5100.0
5.1E3
+5.1 e +3.0
#H13EC (Hexadecimal)
#Q11754 (Octal)
#B1001111101100 (Binary)

Note: (1) If a floating point number is sent when the Test Set uses an integer value
internally, the floating point value will be rounded to the nearest integer.

(2) The Test Set does not recognise <SUFFIX PROGRAM DATA>. These will
cause the Test Set to generate an error message.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-111
80-0013

(7) Commands may be concatenated using the <PROGRAM MESSAGE UNIT
SEPARATOR> which is a semi-colon character ';'. The following would be a valid
message string which sends two successive commands :

DLAID 0,234,1,1;DCSPS 12,15,0

(8) The Test Set requires a terminator on the end of each message string. This terminator
can be either the EOI signal line being asserted, or the ASCII carriage-return character
(0A hex), or both.

The National Instruments software, configured as above, automatically asserts EOI at the
end of the string, but does not append a carriage-return character.

HP Basic automatically appends the carriage-return character to the end of the string
being sent and also asserts EOI.

(9) The Test Set input buffer length is 2700 characters. The maximum number of characters
allowed for any message string sent to the Test Set is 256 characters.

Section 6
6-112 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Receiving Messages from the Test Set

The Test Set does not spontaneously send messages over the interface. When a message is
ready to be sent, a bit in the Test Set Status Byte is set indicating the type of message to be
sent. The Controller should be programmed to detect the bit being set, either by performing
repeated serial polls on the Test Set or by enabling the SRQ bit in the Status Byte and setting up
an interrupt handler to process Service Request interrupts.

The significance of the bits in the Status Byte is shown in the following table.

Table 6.2 Status Byte Bits

Bit Mnemonic Meaning
0 ERR Error Message ready
1 EOT End of Test report ready
2 OPR Information Message ready
3 SAV Status Message ready
4 MAV Message Available
5 ESB Event Status Bit
6 SRQ Service Request
7 GAV Graph data available

Note: More than one bit may be set at any time.

To read a message that the Test Set has indicated as being ready, the Controller has first to
send the appropriate query message, and then wait for the Message Available bit to be set. For
example, the complete sequence of events that occurs to transfer an Error Message is :

(1) Initially the Controller polls the Test Set Status Byte, checking for messages.

(2) The Test Set sets ERR in its Status Byte.

(3) The Controller detects the ERR bit in the Test Set Status Byte and sends the query :

TSERR?

The Controller then repeatedly polls the Test Set Status Byte, checking for the MAV bit
(see Note below).

(4) The Test Set sets MAV in its Status Byte.

(5) The Controller detects the MAV bit and performs a read operation on the Test Set to
complete the transfer.

Note: Problems may occur with fast controllers performing tight loops including repeated serial
polls. This may cause the Test Set to process only the serial poll and not make the
message available; it is therefore advisable to insert waits in the loop. The HP Basic
example is taken from an interpreted program, which does not run fast enough to cause
problems; for compiled programs, a delay of 1 ms or greater is recommended.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-113
80-0013

The following examples show the Controller waiting for and reading an OPR (information)
message.


#define OPR (1 << 2)
#define MAV (1 << 4)
#define INPUT_BUFFER_LEN 2700 /* Same length as Test Set buffer */

int g_ts6113, serial_poll = 0;
char input_buffer [INPUT_BUFFER_LEN);
...
...
g_ts6113 = ibfind ("TS6113");
...
...
while (! (serial_poll & OPR)) /* Wait for OPR message ready. */
{
ibrsp (g_ts6113, &serial_poll);
[ wait 55 ms ];
};

ibwrt (g_ts6113, "TSINF?", 6); /* Send query */

while (! (serial_poll & MAV)) /* Wait for message available. */
{
[ wait 55 ms ];
};

ibrd (g_ts6113, input_buffer, INPUT_BUFFER_LEN); /* Read response */

Note: No error checking is shown here, but it is recommended that the GPIB interface
status variable 'ibsta' be checked after each GPIB function call in order to trap any
errors that occur. This will ensure that GPIB interface errors are detected before
the error condition has disappeared.

Example: HP Basic

100 INTEGER Ser_poll, Ts_addr, Opr_bit, Mav_bit
110 DIM Message$ [2700]
120 Ts_addr = 720
130 Opr_bit = 4
140 Mav_bit = 16

920 REPEAT ! Wait for OPR message ready.
930 Ser_poll=SPOLL(Ts_addr)
940 UNTIL BINAND(Ser_poll,Opr_bit)
950 OUTPUT Ts_addr;"TSINF?" ! Send query.
960 REPEAT ! Wait for message available.
980 UNTIL BINAND(Ser_poll,Mav_bit )
990 ENTER Ts_addr;Message$ ! Read information message.

Section 6
6-114 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Test Set Parameters

The Test Set maintains an internal database of the various parameters used for running tests
and controlling the link with the equipment under test. There are two types of parameter :

Global Parameters These control the GSM Control Channel and
various Test Set options.

Test Parameters These specify the GSM Traffic Channel and test
conditions for each test.

Global Parameters

These parameters are modified using the set of Parameter Configuration commands. The
values set are applied for the complete session and are lost when the Test Set is either switched
off or reset. When the Test Set is started up or reset, the parameter values are automatically
set to the default values specified in Section 4, Section 6 (this Section) and Section 7.

Note: Parameter Configuration commands should not be sent during a test because the Test
Set will ignore the commands.

Test Parameters

Each test has its own exclusive block of test parameters, which specify the GSM 850 /
E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Traffic Channel and test conditions for each test. Some
tests have parameters that are duplicated in the Global Parameters; in such cases, the Test
Parameters override the Global Parameters.

Each test has a command which modifies the associated set of Test Parameters and initiates
the test.

Note: All associated Test Parameters in the test command must be entered, and so there are
no default values as such for these parameters when tests are run via the GPIB
interface.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-115
80-0013

Initialising The Test Set

The Test Set should always be initialised to a known state when first switched on.

To initialise the Test Set the following steps should be carried out :

(1) Reset the Test Set by sending the command :

RESET

This process will take about 30 seconds as the Test Set performs its power-up process
and self-checks.

Note: Performing a serial poll during the reset process could cause problems because
the Test Set is unable to respond to the GPIB interface. It is advisable to wait
without any action during this time.

(2) When the Test Set has performed its power up sequence it will make available a number
of Information Messages giving the Test Set internal code versions and dates. These
should be read to clear the Test Set message queues. Any errors occurring during the
self test sequence will be reported as Error Messages.

The final message in the Information Message sequence will be:

TSINF 0,6,"Power-up of processors complete - OK".

(3) The Test Set global parameters database should then be set up by sending the
Parameter Configuration commands to the Test Set, in order to establish the desired
operating configuration. If this is not done, the default values as defined in Section 4,
Section 6 (this Section) and Section 7 will apply.

Modifying the Test Set Parameters Database

When the Test Set database has been set up as described above. the parameters may be
modified at any time except during a test by sending the appropriate Parameter Configuration
command.

Section 6
6-116 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Starting a Test

To start a test running, send the associated test command.

Example - To run the Absolute Sensitivity test, the following command should be sent:

SENS 90, 4, 0, -104, 0.5, -104, 0, 1, 10, 0.5, 0.4, 2, 0, 0

Processing Test Results

Very Important Note for GPIB Developers

We reserve the right to increase the number of Response elements in future software
releases. This allows for future enhancements to tests that may require new elements to
be returned to the Controller. Existing responses will always be left as they are to aid in
backwards compatability. Any new elements will be added to the end of the response.
GPIB developers should NOT therefore incorporate checks on the number of response
elements as these checks may fail in later software releases.

Most tests are 'single-shot' tests that run once when the test command is sent, return a result,
and then stop. However, note that the Multimode Test and Power Meter mode run continuously
until halted by the Controller.

When a test procedure has been completed, the Test Set makes available an End of Test
Report message for the Controller. This message has the following structure:

[Header]<space>[Result Number],[Test Result 1],[Test Result 2],[...],[Test Result N]

Where :

Header = The Start Test command mnemonic (optionally
followed by the suffix _GPRS or _EDGE).
Result Number (Note 1) = Code number indicating the test result.
Test Result (Note 2) = Either a measured test result or zero.

Note: (1)

The list of Result Numbers for each test are given in the GPIB Response
description for each test.

(2) Some tests do not return any Test Results at all.

Data Precision and Units

The following Test Results require single precision floating point handling :

Measured Phase/Frequency Error results.
Measured Power Levels/Steps results.
Measured Sensitivity (Absolute) result.

The following Test Result requires string handling :

'PDAT?' response (147 characters, plus double quote at start and end).
TSINF? response.
*IDN? response.

All others are integer values.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-117
80-0013

Status Reports

These reports are made available by the Test Set while it is running a test; they indicate the
status of the current test. The Test Set sends the messages as Status Messages using the SAV
bit to signal their availability, the Controller sends TSSTA? query to command the Test Set to
send them.

There are six classes of message generated :

TSPWR [Measured BTS Power Level],[Preamble Offset] (Note 1);
TSBER [Six BER results] (Note 1);
TSCPS [Configuration Progress Status] (Note 2);
TSSEN [Current Sensitivity Test Level] (Note 3).
TSPLT [Current Power Level Result] (Note 4)
TSRACH [Current RACH Result] (Note 5)
TSRXQUAL [Current Receive Qualty Result] (Note 6)
TSRXSIG [Currnt Receive Signal Result] (Note 7)

Note: (1) Only generated during Self Check Bit Error Rate and Air Interface Layer 1
Bit Error Rate.

(2) Generated by any test when the Test Set is preparing a BTS for the test.

(3) Only generated during Sensitivity (Absolute) test.

(4) Only generated during Power Level Steps test.

(5) Only generated during RACH Sensitivity test.

(6) Only generated during Rx Quality test.

(7) Only generated during Receiver Signalling BER test.

BTS Specific Status Reports

In addition to the status reports issued by the Test Set while running a test, there are also status
messages generated from information provided by the BTS under test at any time after it has
been configured. The format and content of each status message is BTS specific but a
consistent naming convention has been used. The classes of messages generated are:

BTSFAULT [Fault Report] (Note 1)
BTSNACK [Negative Acknowledge] (Note 2)
BTSFAIL [Failure Report] (Note 3 )
BTSCODE [Version Report] (Note 4)
BTSREJ [Reject Report (Note 5)
BTSTEST [Test Report] (Note 6)
BTSALARM [Alarm Report] (Note 7)
BTSINFO [Information Report] (Note 8)

Note: (1) Indicates an error condition that is generally not fatal and does not prevent
continued operation of the unit.

(2) Indicates that the previous message sent was not acceptable for some
reason.

(3) Indicates an error condition that is fatal and prevents continued operation of
the unit.

Section 6
6-118 6113 EDGE
80-0013

(4) Indicates the status (Names, versions etc) of the various executable files in
the unit.

(5) Similar to a BTSNACK message; only used when there is also a BTSNACK
from the same make of base station.

(6) Indicates the results of automatic internal tests.

(7) Similar to a Fault Report; only used when there is also a fault report from
the same make of base station.

(8) Gives an information message, such as the safe state of the transmitters.

For further information on these BTS specific status messages refer to the appropriate parts of
Section 7.

Data Precision and Units

The following message values require single precision floating point handling :

Measured BTS Power Level;
Current Sensitivity Test Level;

All others are integer values.

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-119
80-0013

Reading Burst Analysis Data from the Test Set

When the Test Set has run one of the tests listed below, it is possible to obtain from the Test Set
the processed measurement samples for the last measured burst. These can then be displayed
in graphical form by the Controller if so desired.

There are three types of data available :

Phase Error Bits 0 to 147, 2 samples per bit;
Power Profile Bits -1 to 157, 6 samples per bit;
Modulation Spectrum 201 samples at approximately 5 kHz spacing

They can be obtained from the Test Set after the following End Of Test Report messages :

TXTST 0 or TXTST 39; [Transmitter Test]
SCBA 0. [Self Check Burst Analysis Test]

Phase Error

This data type gives the instantaneous phase error measured at each sample point. The
measurement is performed on all bits in the burst, there are two samples per bit. The data is
sent in response to the command :

PTMG?

The reply is a block of binary data in the <INDEFINITE LENGTH ARBITRARY BLOCK
RESPONSE DATA> format.

The format for this message is :

#0<samp
1
><samp
2
><...><samp
294
><terminator>

where :

samp
N
(Note) 2 bytes scaled phase error.

terminator newline character (0A hex) with EOI asserted.

Note: To maximise the speed of measurement in the Test Set, a small amount of post-
processing is required in the Controller as follows:

Phase Error =
samp
182
N
degrees

Section 6
6-120 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Power Profile

This data type gives the instantaneous power measured at each sample point. The
measurement is performed on all bits in the burst, plus the preceding 11 bits and the succeeding
12 bits; there are two samples per bit. The data is sent in response to the command:

PPMG?



#0<samp1><samp2><...><samp1020><terminator>

Where :

samp
N
(Note) : 1020 relative power samples in 1/256 dB multiples.
Each sample is 2 bytes.

terminator : newline character (0A hex) with EOI asserted.

Note: To maximise the speed of measurement in the Test Set, a small amount of post-
processing is required in the Controller as follows:

The sample data sent by the Test Set are integers in the range -32767 to +32767
decimal. They are proportional to the received power level. The power at any sample
point relative to the mean power level during the burst plateau is given by:

[ ]

=

relative power
N
sample
N
dB
256

This data is available following the successful completion of the Power Profile test.
The response is in the indefinite form of the arbitrary block program data format (IEEE
488.2)

Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-121
80-0013

Modulation Spectrum

This data type gives the modulation spectrum measurement graph data obtained in the MODSP
test. The response is sent in the indefinite form of the arbitrary block program data format,
which thus requires the <END> terminator. The data is sent in response to the command:

MSMG?



#0<samp1><samp2>...<samp201><END>

Where:

samp
N
(Note) : 201 relative power samples in 1/256 dB multiples.
Each sample is 2 bytes.

terminator : newline character (0A hex) with EOI asserted.

Note: There are 201 frequency samples taken, i.e. 100 equidistant frequency samples either
side of a centre frequency that corresponds to the data point or sample number 101.
Each sample represents a power level in dBm scaled by 256 to avoid non-integer
results. On the frequency axis, each sample is separated by 1.3/256 MHz. This gives
an approximate frequency span from the centre frequency of 507 kHz.

Section 6
6-122 6113 EDGE
80-0013

Downloading BTS Code

The Test Set can download BTS binary code to the BTS via the GPIB interface. The following
paragraphs describe the sequence of operations.

Firstly the BTS code source must be set to GPIB not PC card, using the command:

BTSCODE GPIB:

The Controller must initialise the Test Set Graph Status Enable Register with the command

GSE n

where the value n represents an 8-bit mask with at least bit 4 (the NCS bit) set. To set all valid
bits in the Graph Status Enable Register, the value n is set to 31 (1F hex). Setting the NCS bit
here commands the Test Set to set its GAV bit in the Status Byte whenever NCS is set in the
Graph Status Register

The Test Set initiates the sequence by sending the message :

TSINF 3, 0, "<filename>"

where:

filename = Name of file to be downloaded by the controller.

The Test set also asserts the NCS bit to request a code segment.

The Controller then responds with the first of a series of messages :

FCODE #n<n digits><data bytes>

where :

n = Number of digits in following number.

n digits = ASCII number specifying the number of following data bytes, range is
0 to 2048 decimal.

data bytes = Sequence of bytes comprising the header file.

For example, to send a block consisting of 2048 bytes, the command is:

FCODE #42048<2048 data bytes>

The Controller waits for the Test Set to set its NCS bit in its Graph Status Register by performing
repeated Serial Polls on the Test Set. When this occurs, the GAV bit in the Test Set Status Byte
Register will be set and this can be picked up by the Controller performing a Serial Poll on the
Test Set. The Controller then sends the following query to read the contents of the Test Set
Graph Status Register:

TSGRH?

If the NCS bit is found to be set, the Test Set is ready for the next command; if the GAV bit has
ben set by a different bit in the Graph Status Register becoming set, the Controller must
continue waiting as before.
Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-123
80-0013

If there is more code to send to the Test Set, a further FCODE command is prepared. If all the
code has been sent, the Controller signals the end of the transfer by sending the File END
command which terminates the transfer process.

FEND

If it is necessary for the Controller to abort the transfer before it is complete, the message

ABORT

is sent. This will halt the transfer.

Note: The Abort option must be exercised with extreme caution, since the premature
termination of the transfer may leave the BTS in a 'blocked' state where the
Test Set may not be able to communicate with it.

Example : C with National Instruments GPIB

#define TRUE 1
#define FALSE 0
#define MAV (1 << 4) /* Bit 4 of Status Byte */
#define GAV (1<< 7) /* Bit 7 of Status Byte */
#define NCS (1<< 4) /* Bit 4 of Graph Status Register */

void wait_for_ncs (void);
int build_fcode_command (void);

/* Set up Graph Status Enable Register */
ibwrt (g_ts6113, "GSE 31", 6);

...

int length, done = FALSE;
char g_tx_buff [2700];

do
{
/* Build a command string in transmit buffer, function returns number of
bytes in command, 0 if at end of file */
length = build_fcode_command ();

/* Send command string */
if (length != 0)
{
ibwrt (g_ts6113, g_tx_buff, length);
wait_for_ncs ();
}
else
done = TRUE;

} while (done = FALSE);

/******************************/

Section 6
6-124 6113 EDGE
80-0013

int build_fcode_command (void)
{
int bytes_to_send;

/* Build command in g_tx_buff, for example :

'FCODE #3512<512 data bytes>' */

if (<no more code to send>)
bytes_to_send = 0;
else
bytes_to_send = <number of bytes in complete command string>;

return bytes_to_send;
}

/******************************/

void wait_for_ncs (void)
{
int serial_poll, gsr_value, ncs_found = FALSE;
char ts_reply[10];

/* Loop until NCS bit in Graph Status Register is detected */
do
{
while (! (serial_poll & GAV)) /* Wait for GAV message ready. */
{
[ wait 55 ms ];
};

ibwrt (g_ts6113, "TSGRH?", 6); /* Send query */

while (! (serial_poll & MAV)) /* Wait for MAV - message ready. */
{
[ wait 55 ms ];
};

ibrd (g_ts6113, ts_reply, 10); /* Read response */

/* Convert string response to a number */
sscanf (ts_reply, "%d", &gsr_value);

/* Test for NCS bit */
if (gsr_value & NCS)
ncs_found = TRUE;

} while (ncs_found == FALSE);
}

Note: No error checking is shown here, but it is recommended that the GPIB interface status
variable 'ibsta' be checked after each GPIB function call to trap errors if any occur. This
will prevent GPIB interface errors not being detected until after the error condition has
disappeared.
Section 6
6113 EDGE 6-125
80-0013

Example : HP Basic

100 INTEGER Ser_poll, Ts_addr, Gav_bit, Mav_bit, Ncs_bit, Bytes_to_send
110 INTEGER Gsr_reply
110 DIM Message$ [2700]
120 Ts_addr = 720
130 Gav_bit = 128
140 Mav_bit = 16
150 Ncs_bit = 16

...
...

500 ! Start of FCODE loop
510 LOOP
520 GOSUB Build_fcode_com
530 IF Bytes_to_send = 0 THEN EXIT LOOP
540 OUTPUT Ts_addr , Message$
550 GOSUB Wait_for_Ncs
560 END LOOP

...
...

1000 Build_fcode_com : ! Routine to build command in message buffer
1010 ! Example : 'FCODE #3512<512 data bytes>'
1020 IF <no more code to send> THEN
1030 Bytes_to_send = 0
1040 ELSE
1050 Bytes_to_send = <number of bytes in complete command string>
1060 END IF
1070 RETURN

...
...

2000 Wait_for_Ncs : ! Routine to wait for NCS bit in graph status
! register
2010 REPEAT ! Wait for NCS message ready.
2020 REPEAT ! Wait first for GAV message ready
2040 UNTIL BINAND(Ser_poll,Gav_bit )
2050 !
2060 OUTPUT Ts_addr;"TSGRH?" ! Send query.
2070 REPEAT ! Wait for message available.
2090 UNTIL BINAND(Ser_poll,Mav_bit )
2100 !
2090 ENTER Ts_addr; Gsr_reply ! Read message.
2100 UNTIL BINAND(Gsr_reply, Ncs_bit)
2110 RETURN

SECTION 7 MANUFACTURER-SPECIFIC INFORMATION
6113 EDGE 7-1/2
80-0013

INTRODUCTION

This Section contains information that is specific to the A-bis hardware and software options
supplied with the 6113 and 6113E Test Sets used for testing GSM 850, E-GSM 900,
E-GSM 900 + R, DCS 1800 and PCS 1900 Base Transceiver Stations.

Only information on the actual options supplied is provided, and therefore the contents of this
Section will vary from user to user.

The information in this Section is published separately from this manual.

INDEX
6113 EDGE Page 1
80-0013
A-bis INTERFACE......................................... 4-4
A-bis Controlled Testing ............................. 4-4
Channel Modes ........................................ 4-4
A-bis Controlled Tests ................................ 4-2
Menu....................................................... 5-88
Tests Available....................................... 5-91
Impedance Control...................................... 4-1
Mapping Table .......................................... 4-16
Performance ............................................... 1-2
Settings ..................................................... 4-16
ACCESSORIES............................................. 3-1
AIR INTERFACE........................................... 4-6
BER / FER Measurements.......................... 4-17
BLER Measurements (GPRS)..................... 4-18
BLER Measurements (EGPRS) .................. 4-19
BTS
Information Menu...................................... 5-36
Mapping Table Screen.............................. 5-38
Power Control ............................................. 4-6
CELL TESTS
Cell Integrity Test ...................................... 4-37
Notes......................................................... 4-32
Refer to Section 4 Annex A
CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions and Environmental .................. 1-4
General ....................................................... 1-4
Power Supplies........................................... 1-4
COMPATIBILITY SUBSET
Interface...................................................... 1-4
CONNECTIONS
Front Panel ................................................. 3-2
Rear Panel .................................................. 3-5
DATE AND TIME.................................... 4-3, 5-1
DESIGN
Description........................................... 2-1, 4-1
Features...................................................... 2-2
DIMENSIONS................................................ 1-4
FAULT REPORTING................................... 3-19
FILE MANAGER
Copy File Screen ...................................... 5-25
Generic Text Editor ................................... 5-28
Using the Text Editor.............................. 5-30
Menu......................................................... 5-23
View File Screen....................................... 5-31
FREQUENCY STANDARD
Performance ............................................... 1-3
Selection ................................................... 3-10
GENERIC TEXT EDITOR........................... 5-28
Using the Text Editor ................................ 5-30
GPIB
BTS Software Download Commands ....... 6-40
Common Device Commands...................... 6-5
Common Device Commands/Queries ........ 6-4
Common Device Queries............................ 6-6

Device Dependent Commands ................ 6-14
BTS Software Download Commands ............
.................................................... 6-15, 6-40
File Commands............................. 6-15, 6-39
General System Operation Commands. 6-14
Global Parameter Commands ............... 6-14
Single Test Commands.......................... 6-16
Summary................................................ 6-14
Device Dependent Queries ...................... 6-20
General System Queries........................ 6-22
Summary................................................ 6-20
File Commands ........................................ 6-39
Functional Tests ....................................... 6-45
Link Test................................................. 6-46
Reset BTS.............................................. 6-44
TCH Format ........................................... 6-44
General System Operation Commands ... 6-29
General System Operation Queries ......... 6-22
Global Parameter Commands.................. 6-30
IEEE 488.1 Standard Format ..................... 6-2
Input Buffer ................................................. 6-2
Interactive Tests ....................................... 6-92
Multimode............................................... 6-92
Interface...................................................... 1-4
Interface Function Subsets......................... 6-2
Interface Messages .................................... 6-2
Introduction................................................. 6-1
Overlapped Commands.............................. 6-8
Power-On Settings ..................................... 6-3
Primary GPIB Address Setting................... 6-2
Programming the Test Set...................... 6-108
BTS Specific Status Reports................ 6-117
Downloading BTS Code....................... 6-122
Initialising the Controller....................... 6-108
Initialising the Test Set ......................... 6-115
Modifying the Parameters Database ... 6-115
Processing Test Results ...................... 6-116
Reading Burst Analysis Data ............... 6-119
Receiving Messages from Test Set ..... 6-112
Sending Messages to Test Set ............ 6-110
Starting a Test...................................... 6-116
Status Reports ..................................... 6-117
Test Set Parameters............................ 6-114
Timeouts and Interface Errors ............. 6-108
Radio System
Cell Table Representation ..................... 6-18
Channel Number Ranges ...................... 6-17
Receiver Tests GSM ................................ 6-65
Absolute Sensitivity Test GSM............... 6-67
Access Burst Test GSM......................... 6-70
Receiver BER Test GSM....................... 6-65
Receiver Signalling BER Test GSM ...... 6-76
Rx Level Test GSM................................ 6-72
Rx Quality Test GSM............................. 6-76
Receiver Tests GPRS .............................. 6-78
Absolute Sensitivity Test GPRS............. 6-80
Access Burst Test GPRS....................... 6-83
Receiver BLER Test GPRS................... 6-78

INDEX
Page 2 6113 EDGE
80-0013
GPIB (Continued)
Receiver Tests EDGE............................... 6-85
Absolute Sensitivity Test EDGE............. 6-87
Access Burst Test EDGE ....................... 6-90
Receiver BLER Test EDGE.................... 6-85
Reference Documents ................................ 6-1
Remote / Local Operation ......................... 6-17
Remote Operation....................................... 2-5
Self Check Tests....................................... 6-99
Burst Analysis Test ................................. 6-99
RF Tests Burst Analysis Test ............... 6-102
EDGE Burst Analysis Test.................... 6-105
Special Functions
Signal Generator Mode .......................... 6-94
Power Meter Mode ................................. 6-96
Status Reporting ....................................... 6-10
Test Commands and Parameters............. 6-41
Transmitter Tests GSM............................. 6-49
Cell Control Channel Generation............ 6-49
Downlink Power Control GSM................ 6-57
Static Power Control ............................... 6-55
Transmitter BER Test GSM.................... 6-52
Transmitter Test GSM............................ 6-50
Transmitter Tests EDGE........................... 6-59
Cell Control Channel Generation............ 6-59
Transmitter BLER Test EDGE................ 6-63
Transmitter Test EDGE .......................... 6-60
INSTALLATION............................................. 3-1
INTERFACES
A-bis ............................................. 1-2, 3-3, 4-4
A-bis Controlled Testing ........................... 4-4
Impedance Control ................................... 4-1
Mapping Table........................................ 4-16
Settings................................................... 4-16
B.O.S.S. RF..........................................1-5, 3-9
Compatibility Subset ................................... 1-4
Frequency Standard..................... 1-3, 3-8, 3-9
GPIB.....................................................1-4, 3-8
Memory Card .......................................1-4, 3-4
Parallel Printer......................................1-4, 3-7
RF................................................. 1-1, 3-3, 4-6
RS232 ..................................................1-4, 3-6
Signal Source.............................................. 1-1
Synchronisation Output ........................1-4, 3-6
V11.............................................................. 3-8
LIVE TESTS .................................................. 4-3
A-bis Protocol Analysis ............................. 4-96
A-bis Protocol Analysis Menu ................... 5-68
BTS Rx Sensitivity..................................... 4-95
Menu ......................................................... 5-39
Notes on Live Testing ............................... 4-25
RF Tests (B.O.S.S.) .................................. 4-27
RF Tests (B.O.S.S.) Menu ........................ 5-40
RF Tests Mode.......................................... 4-90
MAINTENANCE........................................... 3-14
Calibration Requirements.......................... 3-14
Fault Reporting.......................................... 3-19
Initial Failure Diagnosis............................. 3-18
Repair Procedures .................................... 3-15
Routine...................................................... 3-14
MEASUREMENTS
BER / FER ................................................ 4-17
BLER (GPRS) ........................................... 4-18
BLER(EGPRS).......................................... 4-19
Performance ............................................... 1-2
MEASURING RECEIVER
Performance ............................................... 1-1
MEMORY CARD
File Manager Menu................................... 5-23
Interface............................................... 1-4, 3-4
MENU
A-bis Controlled Tests .............................. 5-88
Multimode............................................. 5-114
Results Graph Screens ........................ 5-106
Select Test Screen................................. 5-89
Single Test Execution Screens .............. 5-98
Test Parameter Select Screen............... 5-93
Test Results Screens ........................... 5-100
Tests Available....................................... 5-91
BTS Information........................................ 5-36
File Manager ............................................. 5-23
Copy File Screen.................................... 5-25
Generic Text Editor ................................ 5-28
View File Screen .................................... 5-31
Information Screen.................................. 5-146
Live Tests.................................................. 5-39
A-bis Protocol Analysis........................... 5-68
RF Tests (B.O.S.S.) Menu ..................... 5-40
Main ............................................................ 5-4
Multimode ............................................... 5-114
Offsets....................................................... 5-18
Parameters ................................................. 5-6
Bitmap Edit Screen................................. 5-17
Configuration Parameter Edit ................. 5-12
File Read Screen...................................... 5-9
File Write Screen.................................... 5-10
GSM Parameter Selection ..................... 5-11
Parameter Control Screen ....................... 5-6
Results ...................................................... 5-20
Saving to File.......................................... 5-22
Self Tests / System................................... 5-33
Test Set Options..................................... 5-34
Test Set Settings.................................... 5-35
Special Functions...................................... 5-81
Power Meter ........................................... 5-84
Signal Generator .................................... 5-82
Structure ..................................................... 5-3
Test Sequences...................................... 5-133
Defining and Loading Sequences ........ 5-134
Running Sequences............................. 5-142
Under Remote Control ............................ 5-147
MMI
Date and Time ............................................ 5-1
Introduction ................................................. 5-1
Main Menu .................................................. 5-4
Menu Structure ........................................... 5-3
Status Bar ................................................... 5-2
OFFSETS
Menu......................................................... 5-18

INDEX
6113 EDGE Page 3
80-0013
OPTION 54 - B.O.S.S. RF MODULE
Performance ............................................... 1-5
PACKAGING................................................. 3-1
PARALLEL PRINTER
Interface...................................................... 1-4
PARAMETERS
A-bis Interface Settings............................. 4-16
General ..................................................... 4-24
General Test Parameters ........................... 4-8
Menu........................................................... 5-6
Bitmap Edit Screen................................. 5-17
Configuration Parameter Edit ................. 5-12
File Read Screen...................................... 5-9
File Write Screen.................................... 5-10
GSM Parameter Selection ..................... 5-11
Parameter Control Screen ....................... 5-6
TCH Format .............................................. 4-20
PERFORMANCE
A-bis Interface............................................. 1-2
B.O.S.S. RF Module ................................... 1-5
Frequency Standard ................................... 1-3
Interfaces .................................................... 1-4
Measurements ............................................ 1-2
Measurements - Option 54 ......................... 1-6
Measuring Receiver .................................... 1-1
Measuring Receiver - Option 54................. 1-5
Signal Source.............................................. 1-1
Signal Source - Option 54........................... 1-5
POWER METER MODE ........................... 4-104
POWER SUPPLY
Characteristics ............................................ 1-4
Power Fuse............................................... 3-11
Power Lead............................................... 3-11
Voltage Setting.......................................... 3-11
PROGRAMMABLE TEST SEQUENCES
REMOTE OPERATION................................. 2-5
RESULTS
Menu......................................................... 5-20
Saving to File ............................................ 5-22
RIBASIC SEQUENCE LANGUAGE
RS232
Interface...................................................... 1-4
SELF CHECK TESTS ............................... 4-107
Burst Analysis ......................................... 4-107
EDGE Burst Analysis.............................. 4-111
Power On.................................................. 3-12
RF Tests Burst Analysis ......................... 4-109
Self Tests / System Menu......................... 5-33
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE................. 3-14
Calibration Requirements ......................... 3-14
Fault Reporting ......................................... 3-19
Initial Failure Diagnosis............................. 3-18
Repair Procedures.................................... 3-15
Routine Maintenance................................ 3-14
SIGNAL GENERATOR MODE.................. 4-102
SIGNAL SOURCE
Performance ............................................... 1-1

SOFTWARE UPDATES.............................. 3-13
Using a PC ............................................... 3-13
Using a PC Card....................................... 3-13
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS............................. 4-102
Menu......................................................... 5-81
Power Meter Menu ................................... 5-84
Power Meter Mode ........................ 4-104, 6-96
Signal Generator Menu ............................ 5-82
Signal Generator Mode ................. 4-102, 6-94
STATUS BAR................................................ 5-2
SYNCHRONISATION
Output Interface.......................................... 1-4
To the BTS ................................................. 4-7
TCH FORMAT
Parameter ................................................. 4-20
TEST SET
Introduction................................................. 4-1
Options Menu ........................................... 5-34
Settings Menu........................................... 5-35
TESTS
A-bis Controlled.......................................... 4-2
Absolute Sensitivity GSM.............. 4-63, 6-67
Absolute Sensitivity GPRS............ 4-76, 6-80
Absolute Sensitivity EDGE............ 4-83, 6-87
Access Burst GSM........................ 4-65, 6-70
Access Burst GPRS...................... 4-78, 6-83
Access Burst EDGE...................... 4-85, 6-90
BTS Power Control .................................. 4-6
Cell Control Channel Generation.. 4-38, 6-49
Cell Integrity Test ................................... 4-37
Cell Integrity Testing .............................. 4-32
Channel Modes........................................ 4-4
Configure BTS ....................................... 4-36
Downlink Power Control................ 4-49, 6-57
General Test Parameters......................... 4-8
Link......................................................... 6-46
Menu ...................................................... 5-88
Multimode GSM............................ 4-87, 6-92
Receiver BER GSM...................... 4-60, 6-65
Receiver BLER GPRS .................. 4-73, 6-78
Receiver BLER EDGE .................. 4-80, 6-85
Receiver Signalling BER GSM...... 4-71, 6-76
Reset BTS..................................... 4-36, 6-45
Rx Level GSM............................... 4-67, 6-72
Rx Quality GSM............................ 4-69, 6-74
Standard Conditions ................................ 4-7
Static Power Control ..................... 4-47, 6-55
Synchronisation to BTS ........................... 4-7
Transmitter BER GSM.................. 4-45, 6-52
Transmitter BLER EDGE.............. 4-58, 6-58
Transmitter Test GSM................... 4-40, 6-50
Transmitter Test EDGE................. 4-53, 6-60
A-bis Interface ............................................ 4-4
A-bis Protocol Analysis Menu................... 5-68
Air Interface ................................................ 4-6
Auto Cita Test Sequence
Refer to Section 5 Annex B

INDEX
Page 4 6113 EDGE
80-0013
TESTS (Continued)
BER / FER Measurements........................ 4-17
BLER Measurements GPRS..................... 4-18
BLER Measurements EGPRS .................. 4-19
Cell Integrity Testing
Cell Integrity Test.................................... 4-37
Notes ...................................................... 4-32
Functional.........................................4-36, 6-45
Information .................................................. 2-3
Interactive Tests...............................4-87, 6-92
List of ..................................................2-6, 4-33
Live Tests...........................................4-3, 4-25
A-bis Protocol Analysis........................... 4-96
BTS Rx Sensitivity .................................. 4-95
Menu....................................................... 5-39
RF Tests (B.O.S.S.)................................ 4-27
RF Tests Mode....................................... 4-90
Modes.......................................................... 2-3
Multimode
Menu..................................................... 5-114
Test................................................4-87, 6-92
Power Meter
Mode..................................................... 4-104
Test......................................................... 6-96
Receiver Tests GSM........................4-60, 6-65
Receiver Tests GPRS......................4-73, 6-78
Receiver Tests EDGE......................4-80, 6-85
RF Tests (B.O.S.S.) Menu ........................ 5-40
Self Check......................................4-107, 6-99
Burst Analysis..............................4-107, 6-99
EDGE Burst Analysis.................4-111, 6-105
Power On................................................ 3-12
RF Tests - Burst Analysis ..........4-109, 6-102
Self Check Tests
Self Tests / System Menu....................... 5-33
Test......................................................... 6-94
Signal Generator Mode........................... 4-102
Special Functions
Signal Generator Mode .......................... 6-94
Special Functions
Menu....................................................... 5-81
Power Meter Menu ................................. 5-84
Power Meter Mode ......................4-104, 6-96
Signal Generator Menu .......................... 5-82
Signal Generator Mode ...............4-102, 6-94
Test Patterns............................................. 4-23
Test Sequences
Defining and Loading Sequences ........ 5-134
Menu..................................................... 5-133
Running Sequences ............................. 5-142
Transmitter Tests .............................4-38, 6-49
USING THE MANUAL ................................... 2-2

F A C S I MI L E T R A N S MI S S I O N
Sheet ......................of .............................
TO: Racal Instruments Wireless Solutions
Help Desk
FAX No : +44 (0) 1628 - 662017
Telephone: +44 (0) 1753 - 741010
480 Bath Road, Slough, Berkshire Date: ........................................................
SL1 6BE, United Kingdom Racal Office Use
P R O B L E M R E P O R T S H E E T Log No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(To Be Copied) Date Received . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USER DETAILS: PRODUCT DETAILS:
Company: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product: 6113 EDGE
Contact Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial No: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Versions: UNIT: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAIN: . . . . . . . . . . . BBP: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSP: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firmware Versions:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardboot: . . . . . . . . . . Softboot: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC OR GPIB CONTROLLER (if used):
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturer: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOS Version: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows
TM
Version: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM OR QUESTION: (Please include any supporting documentation)

What error messages were displayed ?

PROBLEM RATING: (please circle one)
A: Major Fault B: Minor Fault C: Documentation Error D: Suggested Enhancement

Racal

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Racal

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

PUBLICATION NUMBER: 80-0013 Issue: 1.

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen